You are on page 1of 382

SOUL GROUP

OF THE MAGI
SERIES TWO

BY
REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY

THIS BOOK IS A COMPILATION OF lWENTY-SEVEN LESSONS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 1 of 382
(

SERIES

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 2 of 382
(

I'lBt>.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 3 of 382
INTRODUCTION TO THE SECOND SERIES
SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI LESSONS

GREETINGS) DEAR FRIENDS) AND WELCOME TO OUR SECOND SERIES


OF SOUL GROUP LESSONS WRITTEN AND ILLUSTRATED BY OUR MESHA
ROSE. THE MASTERS HAVE ASKED THAT I GIVE YOU SOME INSTRUC-
TIONS PREPARATORY TO STUDYING THE SECOND SERIES. SO LET ME
TELL YOU HOW ROSE AND I) VIOLET AND CYRUS HANDLE OUR SESSIONS.

WE HAVE FOUND THAT THE SOUL GROUP WORKS BEST THROUGH US WHEN
WE HAVE ESTABLISHED OUR OWN LITTLE PRIVATE MEDITATION SPOT.
ROSE HAS A PARTICULAR CHAIR WITH OTTOMAN WHERE SHE DOES ALL
HER WORK) AND NO ONE ELSE SITS IN THAT CHAIR •. I HAVE THE
SAME ARRANGEMENT IN MY HOME. CYRUS HAS A CHAIR IN THE BED-
ROOM NEXT TO HIS TABLE ALTAR. VIOLET HAS THE SAME TYPE OF
~ETUP IN HER APARTMENT.

WE ALL HAVE A PICTURE OF CHRIST ON OUR ALTARS AS WELL AS A


CANDLE) INCENSE) A COLORED LIGHT BULB AND A READING LAMP
TOGETHER WITH A GLASS OF WATER. CYRUS ALSO HAS A LOVELY
FIGURE OF ST. FRANCIS OF ASSISI. IN AGES PAST) CYRUS WAS
ONE OF HIS MEMBERS) AND ST. FRANCIS IS STILL CLOSE TO HIM
AND OVERSHADOWS HIM. IF YOU ARE ATTACHED TO ANY HOLY PERSON
IN THE HISTORY OF THE WORLD) YOU MAY DESIRE TO USE THEIR
IMAGE ON YOUR ALTAR.

IN THE UPPER RIGHT HAND CORNER OF PAGE 1 OF EACH LESSON)


YOU WILL SEE THE PARTICULAR COLOR LISTED WHICH YOU SHOULD
USE WHEN STUDYING THE LESSON. THEREFORE) YOU WILL NEED
SOME SORT OF LAMP FOR YOUR COLOR AS WELL AS A READING LAMP.
WE USE A GLOBE TYPE LAMP THAT MEASURES ONLY ABOUT 10" FROM
THE BASE. THIS IS IDEAL FOR YOU CAN INTERCHANGE THE BULBS
VERY EASILY. GLOBE LAMPS CAN BE PURCHASED AT A FURNITURE
STORE OR PERHAPS VARIETY STORES CARRY THEM.

You CAN OBTAIN ROSE) BLUE) GREEN AND YELLOW LIGHT BULBS
FROM YOUR HARDWARE STORE IN EITHER 25 OR 40 WATT WHICH IS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 4 of 382
INTRODUCTION - PAGE 2

ADEQUATE FOR THIS USE. THE ONLY COLOR NOT AVAILABLE J TO OUR
KNOWLEDGE J IS THE LAVENDER SHADES. WE HAVE SOLVED THE PROB-
LEM BY PAINTING CLEAR LIGHT BULBS WITH GRUMBACHER PURPLE H094
ACRYLIC WATER PAINT WHICH IS AVAILABLE IN MOST ARTIST SUPPLY
STORES.

WHEN YOU ARE SITTING RELAXED AND IN A MEDITATIVE STATE AND


ABSORBING YOUR LESSONS J THE COLORS SHINING UPON YOU GIVE
THEIR ASTRAL FORCES TO AID YOU IN CLARIFYING YOUR SELF-KNOWING
AND ASSIST YOU IN THE TASKS OF CHANGING YOUR LIFE FOR THE
BETTER. THE LESSONS TELL US COLOR ESTABLISHES HARMONIOUS
RELATIONSHIPS AND AWAKENS ONE'S FACILITIES TO GREATER SPIRITUAL
REALITY. THUS J AS WE SIT IN OUR SPIRITUAL WORK J THESE COLORS
POURING UPON US INTEGRATE THE WHOLE MAN IN A BALANCED GROWTH J
ESPECIALLY DOES THIS OCCUR AT THE MOMENTS OF OUR PRAYERS AND
DEEP MEDITATIONS. COLOR IS THE CONNECTOR BETWEEN THE VISIBLE
WORLD OF MATTER AND THE INVISIBLE WORLD OF ASTRAL. WE ARE
NOW IN OUR STUDIES ENDEAVORING TO GAIN A CONSCIOUS RHYTHM
WITH ALL THE COSMIC LAWS AND A STRONG TIE WITH THOSE OF OUR
HIGHER BROTHERHOOD.

NOW J WHY DO WE ASK THAT YOU INCLUDE A GLASS OF WATER? WELLJ


THE COLOR RAYS PENETRATE INTO THE WATER WHILE YOU ARE STUDY-
ING YOUR LESSON (15 MIN. TO 1/2 HR.) AND AFTER YOU HAVE READ
YOUR LESSON J IT WILL BE MOST BENEFICIAL FOR YOU TO DRINK THE
WATER WHICH HAS BEEN SATURATED WITH THE COLOR RAYS FROM YOUR
LAMP. IT WILL GIVE YOU A SPIRITUAL UPLIFT AND WILL ACCELER-
ATE HEALING. IT ACTS ON THE ORDER OF THE LIQUIDS ROSE AND I
WERE GIVEN WHILE IN THE ASTRAL ON THOSE OCCASIONS IN THE
LESSONS. REMEMBERJ COLOR IS THE LIFE FORCE OF THE ASTRAL
FORMS AND REGIONS.

WE ALL REALIZE BY NOW IN OUR STUDIES THAT THERE IS FAR MORE TO


EXISTING THAN OUR FIVE SENSES MAKE US AWARE. As OUR MINDS
EXPAND THROUGH THE ANCIENT WISDOM LESSONS AND RECENT REVELA-
TIONS J WE BECOME UNIVERSALLY AWARE. TRULY J WE ARE CHILDREN
OF GOD! BLESS YOU.
LILY

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 5 of 382
LISTED BELOW ARE TITLES COVERING THE ENTIRE SECOND SERIES
OF TWENTY-SEVEN LESSONS:
I. "GOD IS ALL"
2. "THE TRIANGLE OF GOD AND THE DIVINE BREATH"
3. "THE SEVEN REGIONS OF UNIVERSE"
4. "THE HIGH TOWER ROOM"
5. "MONAD CHAKRAS AND GOD JEWELS"
6. "THE FRAGRANCE OF KUNDALINI"
7. "PLANETS AND CHAKRAS"
8. "COLOR RAYS; PATHWAYS OF THE SOUL"
9. "THE BIRTHDAY PARTY"
10. "INCARNATIONS"
11. "THE COSMIC BUILDING OF SPIRIT} SOUL AND BODY"
12. "GOD AND THE ANGELS OF SLEEP"
13. "THE PATHWAY TO HEAVEN"
14.. "SLEEP TRIPS AND THE SECOND HIGHER SELF"
IS. "WONDERFUL MANKIND"
16. "THE FORCED NIGHT PERIOD"
17. "THE MUSIC ROOM'
18. "THE ASTRAL LEVELS OF REGION"
19. "THE INNER ROOM OF SOUL"
20. "OUT OF THE PAST"
21. "SUN BEINGS ARE OF THE MANSTREAM"
22. "THE SECRET TEMPLE"
23. "THE STARS CAN SHOW US THE WAY"
24. "THE SEVEN MYSTIC RAYS"
25. "RELATIONS OF THE STAR SIGNS TO MAN"
26. "THE FUTURE"
27. "THE PATH UPWARD"

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 6 of 382
THE SOULGROUpb~THt MAGl

SERIES TWO LESSONS

COPYRIGHT BY AUTHOR J REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY. ALL RIGHTS


RESERVED.

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CATALOG NUMBER: TX 578-161


1980.

COPYRIGHT_RECORDATION TO THE MAGI CENTER J INC. ALL RIGHTS


RESERVED.

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS NUMBER: VOL. 2494 J PAGES 527J 528


1989.

No PART OF THIS SERIES OF LESSONS MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY


FORM OR BY ANY MEANS J MECHANICAL OR ELECTRONIC J PHOTOCOPYING J
RECORDING OR ANY INFORMATION STORAGE OR RETRIEVAL SYSTEM
WITHOUT PERMISSION IN WRITING FROM THE PUBLISHER J THE MAGI
CENTER J INC' J P.O. Box 1166 J PARADISEJ CA. 95967.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 7 of 382
DOVES.

SERIES Two
© REV. DR. DOROTHEA 1-1. RAMSEY 1980
MAGI CENTER PUBLICATION

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 8 of 382
(

S ;nGfl 'd~.
.

TALLAHOS. PLUMP NEWTON.

l{Os. e. ~80.
ROBIN.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 9 of 382
INTRODUCTION TO THE SECOND SERIES
SOUL GROUP OF THE f1AG I LESSONS

GREETINGS} DEAR FRIENDS} AND WELCOME TO OUR SECOND SERIES


OF SOUL GROUP LESSONS WRITTEN AND ILLUSTRATED BY OUR MESHA
ROSE. THE MASTERS HAVE ASKED THAT I GIVE YOU SOME INSTRUC-
TIONS PREPARATORY TO STUDYING THE SECOND SERIES. SO LET ME
TELL YOU HOW ROSE AND I} VIOLET AND CYRUS HANDLE OUR SESSIONS.

WE HAVE FOUND THAT THE SOUL GROUP WORKS BEST THROUGH US WHEN
WE HAVE ESTABLISHED OUR OWN LITTLE PRIVATE MEDITATION SPOT.
ROSE HAS A PARTICULAR CHAIR WITH OTTOMAN WHERE SHE DOES ALL
HER WORK} AND NO ONE ELSE SITS IN THAT CHAIR •. I HAVE THE
SAME ARRANGEMENT IN MY HOME. CYRUS HAS A CHAIR IN THE BED-
ROOM NEXT TO HIS TABLE ALTAR. VIOLET HAS THE SAME TYPE OF
~ETUP IN HER APARTMENT.

WE ALL HAVE A PICTURE OF CHRIST ON OUR ALTARS AS WELL AS A


CANDLE} INCENSE . . A COLORED LIGHT BULB AND A READING LAMP
TOGETHER WITH A GLASS OF WATER. CYRUS ALSO HAS A LOVELY
FIGURE OF ST. FRANCIS OF ASSISI. IN AGES PAST . . CYRUS WAS
ONE OF HIS MEMBERS . . AND ST. FRANCIS IS STILL CLOSE TO HIM
AND OVERSHADOWS HIM. IF YOU ARE ATTACHED TO ANY HOLY PERSON
IN THE HISTORY OF THE WORLD} YOU MAY DESIRE TO USE THEIR
IMAGE ON YOUR ALTAR.

IN THE UPPER RIGHT HAND CORNER OF PAGE 1 OF EACH LESSON}


YOU WILL SEE THE PARTICULAR COLOR LISTED WHICH YOU SHOULD
USE WHEN STUDYING THE LESSON. THEREFORE} YOU WILL NEED
SOME SORT OF LAMP FOR YOUR COLOR AS WELL AS A READING LAMP.
WE USE A GLOBE TYPE LAMP THAT MEASURES ONLY ABOUT 10" FROM
THE BASE. THIS IS IDEAL FOR YOU CAN INTERCHANGE THE BULBS
VERY EASILY. GLOBE LAMPS CAN BE PURCHASED AT A FURNITURE
STORE OR PERHAPS VARIETY STORES CARRY THEM.

You CAN OBTAIN ROSE . . BLUE} GREEN AND YELLOW LIGHT BULBS
FROM YOUR HARDWARE STORE IN EITHER 25 OR 40 WATT WHICH IS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 10 of 382
INTRODUCTION - PAGE 2

ADEQUATE FOR THIS USE. THE ONLY COLOR NOT AVAILABLE~ TO OUR
KNOWLEDGE~ IS THE LAVENDER SHADES. WE HAVE SOLVED THE PROB-
LEM BY PAINTING CLEAR LIGHT BULBS WITH GRUMBACHER PURPLE H094
ACRYLIC WATER PAINT WHICH IS AVAILABLE IN MOST ARTIST SUPPLY
STORES.

WHEN YOU ARE SITTING RELAXED AND IN A MEDITATIVE STATE AND


ABSORBING YOUR LESSONS~ THE COLORS SHINING UPON YOU GIVE
THEIR ASTRAL FORCES TO AID YOU IN CLARIFYING YOUR SELF-KNOWING
AND ASSIST YOU IN THE TASKS OF CHANGING YOUR LIFE FOR THE
BETTER. THE LESSONS TELL US COLOR ESTABLISHES HARMONIOUS
RELATIONSHIPS AND AWAKENS ONE'S FACILITIES TO GREATER SPIRITUAL
REALITY. THUS~ AS WE SIT IN OUR SPIRITUAL WORK~ THESE COLORS
POURING UPON US INTEGRATE THE WHOLE MAN IN A BALANCED GROWTH~
ESPECIALLY DOES THIS OCCUR AT THE MOMENTS OF OUR PRAYERS AND
DEEP MEDITATIONS. COLOR IS THE CONNECTOR BETWEEN THE VISIBLE
WORLD OF-MATTER AND THE INVISIBLE WORLD OF ASTRAL. WE ARE
NOW IN OUR STUDIES ENDEAVORING TO GAIN A CONSCIOUS RHYTHM
WITH ALL THE COSMIC LAWS AND A STRONG TIE WITH THOSE OF OUR
HIGHER BROTHERHOOD.

Now~ WHY DO WE ASK THAT YOU INCLUDE A GLASS OF WATER? WELL~


THE COLOR RAYS PENETRATE INTO THE WATER WHILE YOU ARE STUDY-
ING YOUR LESSON (15 MIN. TO 1/2 HR.) AND AFTER YOU HAVE READ
YOUR LESSON~ IT WILL BE MOST BENEFICIAL FOR YOU TO DRINK THE
WATER WHICH HAS BEEN SATURATED WITH THE COLOR RAYS FROM YOUR
LAMP. IT WILL GIVE YOU A SPIRITUAL UPLIFT AND WILL ACCELER-
ATE HEALING. IT ACTS ON THE ORDER OF THE LIQUIDS ROSE AND I
WERE GIVEN WHILE IN THE ASTRAL ON THOSE OCCASIONS IN THE
LESSONS. REMEMBER~ COLOR IS THE LIFE FORCE OF THE ASTRAL
FORMS AND REGIONS.

WE ALL REALIZE BY NOW IN OUR STUDIES THAT THERE IS FAR MORE TO


EXISTING THAN OUR FIVE SENSES MAKE US AWARE. As OUR MINDS
EXPAND THROUGH THE ANCIENT WISDOM LESSONS AND RECENT REVELA-
TIONS~ WE BECOME UNIVERSALLY AWARE. TRULY~ WE ARE CHILDREN
OF GOD! BLESS YOU.
LILY

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 11 of 382
SERIES Two ROSE LIGHTS
LESSON ONE
THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI
ROSE LESSON ONE

"GOD IS ALL"

"IF ANY OF YOU LACK WISDOM LET HIM ASK OF GODJ THAT GIVETH
TO ALL MEN LIBERALLY AND UPBRAIDETH NOT J AND IT SHALL BE
GIVEN HIM."
JAMES 1:15

OUR SOUL GROUP HAD REQUESTED LILY TO OPEN OUR NEW SERIES
WITH A FEW WORDS OF INTRODUCTION FROM OUR GROUP MASTER.
THEY WERE AS FOLLOWS:

-"GOOD EVENING FRIENDS: BEFORE WE GET INTO THIS VERY IMPORT-


ANT SECOND SERIES J LeT ME POINT OUT ITS INFORMATIONS WILL BE
DEALING WITH AN ACQUAINTANCE WITH THE BASIC FOUNDATIONS BE-
HIND GOD'S PLAN. FOR EVERYTHING WITHIN UNIVERSE IS EXPERI-
ENCING IN THIS PLAN. THEREFOREJ WE SHALL NEED TO GAIN SOME
UNDERSTANDING OF OUR VERY BEGINNINGS INTO UNIVERSE AND GAIN
A VIEW OF WHERE WE HAVE TRAVELED SO FAR.

OUR PAST ROOTS HOLD THE KEY TO OUR PRESENT AND FUTURE. As
WE VIEW THE PAST STEPS TAKEN TO REACH OUR PRESENT EQUILI-
BRIUM OF BODY J MIND AND SOUL; WE SEE BEHIND ALL IS GOD AND
HIS PLAN. As WE ACQUAINT AGAIN WITH THE HIGHER HIERARCHIES
OF BEINGS AND ANGELS AND RENEW COMPANIONSHIP WITH THESE
HEAVENLY TEACHERS J WE ONCE AGAIN RECOGNIZE THAT GOD IS
FIRST CAUSE. WE CANNOT GO DEEPER THAN GOD THE ABSOLUTE.

As WE AGAIN TRAVEL ONWARD TOGETHER IN THIS SERIES J KEEP IN


MIND THE PURPOSE BEHIND OUR TEACHINGS. BLESS YOU!

MORI HANDUS

«J REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 12 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 2

AFTER OUR MAGI GROUP FINISHED THEIR PROSPERITY DEVOTION AND


ALL WERE SITTING QUIETLY UNDER ROSE COLORED LIGHTS) EVERYONE
SLOWLY RELAXED AS THE STEREO PLAYED SOFTLY. PRESENTLY THE
HUSHED SOUND OF MANY WINGS WAS HEARD. THE SCENT OF ROSES
FILLED THE AIR AS WE DRIFTED INTO CONTACT WITH A SWEET VOICE.
IT WAS WHISPERING GENTLY) "WE ASK THE BLESSINGS OF THE LORD
JESUS CHRIST TO BE UPON YOU. MAY GOD'S ANGELS ALWAYS SURROUND
YOU."

WE SEEMED TO BE FLOATING IN A PEARLY MIST. WE COULD HEAR


THE FLUTTER OF MANY WINGS. THEN THE NOSTALGIC SCENT OF NEW
MOWN HAY GREETED US) ITS FRAGRANCE HEADY AS CHAMPAGNE. As
OUR ASTRAL EYES CLEARED) WE DISCOVERED WE WERE COMFORTABLY
RESTING BENEATH A PROTECTIVE TREE. ABOVE ITS CANOPY OF LEA-
VES WERE SHOWING HERE AND THERE) THE SOFT COLOR BLUE OF SKY.
CLEAR AS DAWN LIGHT WAS THE WATERS OF A BROOK AT OUR FEET.
ITS BANKS ALL JEWEL STREWN WITH STARLIKE WILD FLOWERS) AND
BANKED BY GRACEFUL CLUSTERS OF GREEN FERN. ACROSS THE BROOK
LAY A MEADOW OF NEW MOWN HAY) ITS GOLDEN BEAUTY DANCING IN
SUNBEAMS.

ONCE AGAIN WE HEARD THE FLUTTER OF MANY WINGS AS TINY BIRDS


FLEW TO CIRCLE OVER THE DEAR LITTLE MASTER SINGH TAO. HE
SAT BENEATH A NEARBY TREE AWAITING US. HIS FRISKY WHITE
POODLE RAN TO JOYOUSLY CIRCLE OU.R FEET) SHIVERING IN DELIGHT.

"WELCOME) DEAR CHILDREN. COME SIT WITH ME FOR WE MUST TALK


OF GOD." THE MASTER SAID.

THE HAPPY JOYOUS ATMOSPHERE ENFOLDED US AS WE COMPLIED.


LITTLE YELLOW BUTTERFLIES CAPERED HAPPILY ABOUT) DARTING
FROM FLOWER TO FLOWER. THANKFULLY) SINGH TAO AWAITED OUR
ABSORBTION OF THIS WONDERFUL ASTRAL GENTLE PEACE.

"CAN YOU TELL ME) WHAT IS GOD?" HIS EYES WERE SOFT WITH
LOVING PATIENCE) BUT WE COULD NOT ANSWER FOR WE DID NOT KNOW.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 13 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 3
HE DID NOT APPEAR TO BE SURPRISED AND CONTINUED. "XENOPHANES J
A MAN ONCE OF EARTHJ CAME VERY CLOSE TO THE ANSWER. FOR HE
SAID AND I QUOTE J ("As A WHOLE GOD DOES NOT MOVE: BUT HIS
PARTS D.Q. M.QYE..") "As OUR MINDS COME AWAKE FROM EVER NEW
LEARNINGS WE FIND THAT GOD IS THE UNIFYING PRINCIPLE OF OUR
WONDERFUL UNIVERSE. WE COME TO REALIZE ALL FORM IS REALIZED
WITHIN GOD. WEJ HIS CHILDREN J CANNOT KNOW GODJ BUT WE CAN
EXPERIENCE HIM. AND ALSO CONTACT HIM THROUGH OUR PRAYERS
AND MEDITATIONS AND MYSTIC CONTEMPLATIONS." WE COULD FEEL
HIS LOVE POURING [NTO OUR SOULS WITH HEALING POWER.

"IT WILL BE IN THESE THREE MENTAL STATES; PRAYERJMEDITATION


AND MYSTIC CONTEMPLATION THAT WE WILL FIND THE AVENUE FOR
SWEET RETURN UNTO GOD." WE SILENTLY PONDERED HIS WORDS J THE
SOFT AIR CARESSING US. THEN INTO OUR MIDST STROLLED THREE
OF MORI HANDUS' MONKS. WITHOUT A WORD J THEY JOINED OUR CIR-
CLE AND SINGH TAO CONTINUED:

"ALL LIFE EXISTING WITHIN UNIVERSE STRIVES TOWARD GOD FOR IT


HAS BEEN CREATED BY HIM AND EACH SPARK OF LIFE IS EVER PRE-
PARING FOR A RETURN UNTO THE FATHER. As WE STRIVE AND LEARN;
GOD'S VERY NATURE REVEALS. You AND I CAN KNOW GOD AS PURE
ENERGY MOVING AS PURE FORM. WE ALREADY EXPERIENCE GOD AS
'FIRST CAUSE.' FOR THIS CAUSE IS OUR CONSCIOUSNESS OF SELF.
ITS PURPOSE IS TO CREATE J AND ALL LIFE UQf£ CREATE J EVEN THE
VERY LEAST AND INANIMATE LIFE. WEJ AS HUMANS J ARE IN THE PRO-
CESS OF CREATING IN OURSELVES GREATER POTENTIALITIES EVEN AS
WE CREATE BODY FORMS FOR OTHER SOULS TO INHABIT."

A PICTURE WAS SLOWLY EMERGING IN OUR MINDS AS THE TALL MONK J


AMOS J LOOKED OUR WAY AND SPOKE.

"You KNOW GOD CREATED YOU FOR A PURPOSE. REALIZE THAT EVEN
BEHIND GOD HIMSELF LIES A PURPOSE OF POWER AND ENERGY. IT
ALSO PREDICATES ON UNIVERSAL LAW. WE ARE TOLD THESE LAWS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 14 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 4
EXISTED EVEN BEFORE GOD WAS. WHEN WE PONDER ON THIS J WE
SEE ALL OF UNIVERSE; VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE IS GOD'S ENERGY
OBEYING INFINITE LAW." THESE WORDS GAVE AWESOME PICTURES.

"GOD CREATED THIS UNIVERSE AND ALL WITHIN IT. THEREFORE J


WE ALL EXIST BECAUSE OF GOD'S WILL. GODJ IN TURN J IS ALL
THINGS OF OUR UNIVERSE."

As THE ECHO OF THESE WORDS FADEDJ THE WARM BREEZE BLEW SINGH
TAO'S ROBES AS HE RESTRAINED MISS PRIM'S INTENTION OF ENTER-
ING THE BROOK'S SHALLOWS. THE STOUT MONK J NEWTON J MOVED TO
AN EASIER POSITION AND SMILED AT US AS HE SPOKE.

"EACH OF US IS A SPECIAL BEING AND CREATED BY OUR FATHER GOD


AS SPIRIT. WE FOLLOW OUR OWN UNIQUE AND INDIVIDUAL LAW
PATTERN -KNOWN ONLY TO HIM. As WE STAND NOW J WE ARE EACH
ONLY A HALF OF A WHOLE LIFE UNIT J BUT WE POSSESS SPIRITJ
SOUL AND AT INTERVALS ETHERIC AND PHYSICAL BODY FORMS. WE
ARE SPARKS FROM GOD'S MIND AND CONSCIOUSNESS. TRULY J ~ ARE
ONE WITH GOD AND ONE WITH ONE ANOTHER."

LITTLE MISS PRIM WAS CURLED UP IN LILY'S LAP NOW AS THE VERY
SILENT AND SHY MONK NAMED ROBIN SMILED INTO MY EYES AND VEN-
TURED TO TALK.

"OUR MANKIND STREAM OF LIFE ALL HAVE AN INNER INTUITION OF


GODJ EITHER AWAKE OR ASLEEP J IN OUR PERSONAL PATTERNS."
THE OTHER MONKS LOOKED STARTLED AS HE SPOKE J BUT ALLOWED
ROBIN TO CONTINUE. "BECAUSE WE DO HOLD THIS DEEP INTUITION J
SURELY IT MUST HAVE BEEN PLACED IN US BY GOD?" WE NODDED
QUICK ENCOURAGEMENT AND HE TOOK ON MORE ASSURANCE. "WE LEARN
GOD ~ MlNu AS WELL AS SUBSTANCE AND ENERGY MOTION. So GOD
BECOMES THE CAUSE BEHIND EVERYTHING IN UNIVERSE. GOD CONSTI-
TUTES ALL IDEA WITHIN THOUGHT. IT IS GOD WHO INFLUENCES BOTH
THE AREA OF THINGS AND OF THOUGHT. HE IS BOTH AND THUS AT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 15 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 5

THE SAME TIME~ HIMSELF. GoP IS THE CREATOR Of ALL HE CREATES."


ROBIN'S LAST WORDS CAME OUT LOUD AND CLEAR AS HE NOTED THE
FLABERGASTED EXPRESSIONS ON HIS COMPANION'S FACES. WE FOUR
APPLAUDED HIM BRISKLY.

SINGH TAO BECAME BUSY ADJUSTING HIS ROBE~ HIDING A PLEASED


SMILE. THE OTHER MONKS REMAINED IN SILENT SPEECHLESSNESS
SO SINGH TAO GATHERED UP THE STRANDS OF THE LESSON.

"ALWAYS HAS GOD THE ABSOLUTE ESTABLISHED UNDER THE EXISTING


LAws OF INFINITUDE. WE HUMANS~ AS WE AWAKE AND LEARN~ ALSO
START FOLLOWING THE LAW'S RULE. ALL LIFE LEARNS THROUGH
TRIAL AND ERROR AT FIRSTi THEREFORE~ YOU HAVE PAIN AND SUFFER-
ING IN MATTER EXPERIENCES AND WILL CONTINUE SUCH UNTIL YOU
GROW OUT OF OLD OUTMODED WAYS OF OPERATING.

"WHEN WE OF HUMANITY AWAKEN TO APPLY THE ~~ WHERE~ ~


AND ~ TO LAW AND OUR ACTIONS FOR BECOMING HARMONIOUS WITH
LAw~ FRUSTRATION~ PAIN AND FAILURE EXPERIENCES WILL DISAPPEAR."

SINGH TAO NOW LOOKED AT ROBIN AND ASKED~ "WOULD YOU ADD TO
WHAT I'VE SAID?" ROBIN BLUSHED BUT GAMELY SPOKE UP.

"EVERYTHING VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE THAT EXISTS IN UNIVERSE


HAS A 'CAUSE'. IN FINDING THE CAUSE~ WE SOLVE THE LAW OF
ITS BEING. IN OBEYING THE LAW~ WE HARMONIZE WITH IT AND
HARNESS ITS POWER FOR OUR GOOD."

THE OTHER MONKS WERE NOW GAZING AT ROBIN IN APPROVAL AS


'PLUMP NEWTON ADDEDi "THERE ARE MANY STATIC LAWS IN UNIVERSE
BUT EVERY LIFE-FORM INCLUDING OUR HUMAN ONE~ ACTIVATES THESE
FROM FREE CHOICE. How WE GEAR OUR DECISION ACTIONS~ DETER-
MINES WHAT WE WILL EXPERIENCE."

"VERY RIGHT" WAS THE POSITIVE RESPONSE FROM AMOS~ THE TALL
MONK. "ALL PEOPLE AS THEY GROW AND CYCLE WILL KNOW CERTAIN

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 16 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 6
NEGATIVE IDEAS AND UNEASINESS OF FEELINGS AND MIND BECAUSE
OF FACING INNER UNKNOWNS AND THE ABSENCE OF EXTERNAL RIGHT-
NESS AND GOOD."

THEY ALL NODDED ASSENT TO THIS.

"THESE FEELINGS AND DESIRES EACH PERSON HOLDS WILL ALWAYS


LEAN IN THE DIRECTION WHICH THEIR ~ AND MOTIVES ARE
DIRECTING." AMOS CONTINUED J "OUR INNER MOTIVES WILL RESPOND
TO OUR PRESSING DESIRES AND BRING THEM FORTH REGARDLESS OF
THEIR RESULTS TO THE SELF."

SINGH TAO NODDED HERE AND ADDED. "EVERYONE FEELS IT IS


IMPORTANT TO SEEK FOR SELF CONTENTMENT AND ACT TO FULFILL
THE INNER DESIRES. BE CAREFUL TO LEARN WHAT YOU ARE REALLY
DESIRING FOR YOURSELF."

WE KNEW HOW TRUE HE SPOKE.

LOOKING VERY STERN J THE TALL AMOS POINTED A FINGER AT US.


"How YOU GO ABOUT ACQUIRING YOUR DESIRES AND WHAT kIND OF
ACTIONS YOU USE ALWAYS RESULTS FROM YOUR PRESENT LEVEL OF
PERSONAL EVOLUTION AND YOUR DEVELOPED CHARACTER."

WE WERE THINKING THIS OVER WHEN VIOLET ASKED. "THEN A MORE


DEVELOPED CHARACTER WILL HAVE A VERY DIFFERENT ACTION AND
REACTION OF MANIFESTATION THAN ONE OF A LOWER STATE OF
EVOLUTION?"

"You ARE CORRECT J VIOLETJ THE LOWER STAGE OF A CHARACTER


DEVELOPMENT WILL BE POORLY INTEGRATED AND WEAK IN CONSTRUCT-
IVE ASPECTS AND QUALITIES."

"NOT TO WORRY" BEAMED SINGH TAO. "WE ARE HERE TO TEACH FOR
BETTER INTEGRATIONS OF MINDj TO SHOW THE CONNECTIONS BE-
TWEEN CAUSE AND EFFECT AND HOW THEY SERVE IN TWO AREAS OF

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 17 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 7
GOD'S WORK. ON EARTH YOU WORK WITH 'EFFECT' AND GOVERN
THROUGH YOUR REASONING CONSCIOUS MIND POINT. You COLLECT
FACTS AND GATHER MANY PIECES OF INFORMATION VIA YOUR PHYSI-
CAL SENSES AND THEIR ORGANS. WHEN A LIFE APPEARS MEANING-
LESS OR CHAOTIC J IT'S BECAUSE REASONING HAS BEEN FAULTY.
FAULTY REASONING WILL DEPRIVE YOU FROM RECEIVING THE GOD
GOOD ALREADY THERE FOR YOU. ALL GOD'S CHILDREN ARE EQUIPPED
TO THINK. SOME ARE BETTER EQUIPPED THROUGH CONSTRUCTIVE
KARMIC LAWS THAN OTHERS. To SOME EXTENT J ALL CAN THINKJ
PLAN AND CREATE AND CARRY OUT DECISIONS. EVERYONE HAS
SOME ABILITY TO THINK THEMSELVES INTO BETTER. NOT ALL USE
MIND TO ACHIEVE SELF SUCCESS."

ATALLJ HANDSOME MAN JOINED US AS SINGH TAO CLOSED HIS


LESSON. HE WAS INTRODUCED TO US AS MARK KENSINGTON AND A
SOUL MATE OF ONE OF OUR MEMBERS. THERE WAS GENERAL TALK
FOR A MOMENT AND AFTER SINGH TAO J MISS PRIM AND THE MONKS
DEPARTED J THERE WERE QUESTIONS TO US FROM MARK AND A PERSONAL
MESSAGE WE WOULD TAKE TO HIS SOUL MATE WHEN WE RETURNED.

MARK THEN WENT ON TO EXPLAIN THAT OUR· MASTERS BELIEVED WE


FOUR J CYRUSJ ROSE J LILY AND VIOLETJ WOULD HAVE A BETTER
MIND RAPPORT AND EXCHANGE OF IDEAS WITH HIM BECAUSE OUR
MINDS WERE ALL AT A NEAR LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT. HENCEJ MARK
WAS SENT TO MEET WITH US NOW. THENJ RELAXING AT EASE AND
LEANING UP AGAINST THE OVERSHADOWING TREEJ MARK BEGAN IN A
CONVERSATIONAL MANNER. HE SMILED A LOT AND BEHIND HIS FULL
AND PLEASANT VOICE TONES LURKED LAUGHTER AND JOY.

"WE KNOW OUR MANSTREAM OF LIFE HAS BEEN ADAPTING TO NEW


CONDITIONS BIOLOGICALLY AND PSYCHOLOGICALLY IN ORDER TO
SURVIVE ON PLANET EARTH FOR COUNTLESS AGES. WHAT WILL BE
NEW TO YOU PERHAPS IS THAT WEJAS LIFE PARTICLESJHAVE BEEN
ALSO ADAPTING TO MANY OTHER LEVELS OF EXISTENCE IN UNIVERSE.
IT WOULD BE VERY LIMITING TO OUR EXPERIENCES AND MUTATION
GROWTHS TO HOLD THEM TO ONLY ONE SHORT SPAN OF EARTH TIME.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 18 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 8

THERE CANNOT BE A SATURATION POINT PUT ON OUR QUALITIES OR


CAPACITIES OR ADAPTATION ABILITIES J FOR WE WERE CREATED BY
GOD TO BECOME LIKE UNTO HIM. AND GOD IS NQI LIMITED TO ONE
TINY SPECK FLOATING IN HIS HUGE UNIVERSE." THIS WAS A NEW
VIEWPOINT TO US.

"NEITHER ARE WEJ HIS CHILDREN J LIMITED TO THIS PRESENT SPECK


OF TIME. ACTUALLY J WE ARE ABOUT MID-POINT IN OUR JOURNEY
BACK TO GOD FROM WHENCE WE CAME. IT IS ONLY NOW AT THIS
POINT IN OUR JOURNEY J WE ARE AWAKENING TO WONDER ABOUT OUR-
SELVES AND OUR PURPOSE FOR BEING." HE PAUSED TO BRUSH A
LOCK OF HAIR BACK FROM HIS FOREHEAD.

flPREPARE NOW TO ALLOW YOUR THINKING HORIZONS AN EXPANSION."


WE NODDED. "EVERYTHING IN UNIVERSE IS GROWING AND EXPERIENC-
ING AND ADVANCING. EVERYTHING VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE HAS BEEN
SET UP TO INTERACT WITH EVERYTHING ELSE.

"THE PLANET EARTH IS TRAVELING GOD'S PATHWAY AS ARE ALL


HEAVENLY BODIES. ALL IN UNIVERSE IS THERE FOR THE U£E OF
GOD'S CREATED LIFE-FORM CHILDREN. OUR MANSTREAM IS BUT A
VERY SMALL PORTION OF GOD'S CHILDREN. HE CREATED MANY OTHER
AND DIFFERENT DEGREES OF CONSCIOUS ENTITIES. JUST ON EARTHJ
THERE ARE MANY LEVELS OF LIFEJ TO SAY NOTHING OF THE ACTIVE
HIGHER REALMS OF ETHERIC J ASTRAL AND SPIRIT.

"WITHIN EACH OF THESE LIFE SPARKS LIES A GOD CENTER. THIS


CENTER WORKS MUCH AS DOES A GRAVITY CENTER AND HOLDS THE
LIFE-SELF STEADY AND TOGETHER J WHEREVER THE ENTITY FINDS
ITSELF MANIFESTING IN UNIVERSE.

"WE HAVE TAUGHT YOU THAT EACH PERSON IS A SPECIAL GOD CHILD
AND MANIFESTING ON PLANET EARTH NOW IN A PHYSICAL FORM.
EARTH ALSO IS AN OUTER MATTER FORM FOR A MUCH OLDER CHILD
OF GOD FROM A PREVIOUS LIFE-STREAM. THIS GOD CHILD HOLDS
AN INTELLIGENCE OF SELF AND IS ALSO EXPERIENCING IN A 'TIME
AGE' AS ARE ALL THE HEAVENLY BODIES.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 19 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 9

"TIME IS RELATIVE TO ITS PARTICULAR LEVELS AND POSITIONS


IN UNIVERSE. TIME LIES IN CHRONOLOGICAL FIXED PERIODS AND
ORDERS OF SPECIAL OCCURRENCES. TIME IS AN EXPERIENCE GOD
PROVIDED SO HIS CREATIONS COULD MEASURE AND SCHEDULE LOCAL
AND COSMIC EVENTS. THESE 'TIME PERIODS' ARE NOT ETERNAL
BUT HAVE BEGINNING AND ENDING POINTS. OUR MINDS NEED THESE
POINTS FOR PICTURING OUR PROGRESS. JUST AS WE NEED WORD
SYMBOLS TO BUILD MEANING FOR OUR THOUGHTS. WE IN THE ASTRAL
USE LIMITED WORDS AND PICTURE SYMBOLS GAINED IN MATTER WHEN
WE ATTEMPT TO SHOW YOU THE COSMOS AND THESE HIGHER REALMS
AND HOPE YOU ARE SUCCEEDING IN GOING BEYOND THEM IN NEW
UNDERSTANDINGS." WE WERE EAGERLY LISTENING ,AND OPEN WIDE
FOR MENTAL ACCEPTANCE.

"THE PLANET EARTH IS ALSO INCARNATING IN MATTER JUST AS WE


HUMANS J BUT HER TIME SPANS LIE IN HIGHER LEVELS OF COSMIC
TIME FOR SHE IS A COSMIC BEING. SHE HAS BEEN BORN INTO
MATTER AND KNOWS AWAKENED DAY PERIODS WHEN LIFE-FORMS LIVE
UPON HER OUTER CRUSTS. SHE KNOWS PERIODS OF SLEEP WHEN ICY
COLD AND DESOLATIONS COVER HER OUTER FORM AND NO LIFE LIKE
UNTO PLANT J ANIMAL OR MAN EXISTS. YET LIFE IS THERE WITHIN
HERJ ASLEEP. SHE WILL KNOW FINAL DEATH EVEN AS YOUR SCIENT-
ISTS WITNESS THE DEATH OF SOME STARS. EARTHJLIKE MANJIS
BORN WITH A KARMIC DESTINY PATTERN. HOWEVER J LIKE GOD AND
MANJ EARTH IS ALSO AN ETERNAL BEING.

"EARTH IS NOW IN HER FOURTH MATTER INCARNATION. SHE HAS HAD


THREE BEFORE THIS ONE. SHE WILL KNOW THREE MORE FOR A TOTAL
OF SEVEN MATTER INCARNATIONS. HER DAY AND NIGHT PERIODS
MARK NINE DIFFERENT STATES. ONLY IN SEVEN DOES OUR LIFE
STREAM ENTER TO INHABIT EARTH. THE OTHER TWO ARE PERIODS
OF EARTH'S ARRIVAL AND GROWTH TIME AND DEPARTURE DISINTEGRA-
TION.

"ROSE SHALL MAKE AN ILLUSTRATION AS I SHALL DIRECT HER.


STUDY IT. TODAY EARTH IS IN THE FULCRUM OF HER CHAIN OF

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 20 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 10
APPEARANCES IN UNIVERSE J AND AT HER LOWEST MANIFESTATION
OF MATTER. SHE HAS COME DOWN THE LADDER LEVELS AND STOP-
PED IN EACH ONE J EVEN AS WE DO UPON OUR INCARNATING CYCLES
AS WE SWING AROUND THE WHEEL OF LIFE.

(SEE ILLUSTRATION #1)

"HERE AND NO~ IN EARTH'S FOURTH ROUND J IS WHERE OUR LIFE-


STREAM WILL BE REACHING FOR A BALANCED POLARITY OF SELF.
THESE ARE OUR TIMES FOR MAKING THE AGE'S FINAL ADJUSTMENTS
SO THAT WE MAY BE IN A PREPARED STATE TO COME FORTH WITH
EARTH IN HER NEXT AND HIGHER LEVEL CHAIN LINK WHEN SHE WILL
THEN BE IN THE UNIVERSE ASTRAL PLANES."

LILY SIGHED; "SO THESE FOURTH EARTH INCARNATIONS ARE OUR


FINAL TiME AND PLACE FOR BALANCE OF OUR INNER MIND CONTENTS.
DOESN'T THIS RATHER LIMIT US FOR TIME? WE DON'T KNOW HOW
LONG WE HAVE TO RETURN IN FURTHER INCARNATIONS FOR MORE WORK."

RAISING AN EYEBROW J HE GRINNED. "I SHOULDN'T TELL YOU THIS J


BUT THERE WILL BE MANY DIPS INTO MATTER BY OUR MANSTREAM
BEFORE THIS FOURTH INCARNATION OF EARTH IS OVER. BUT HOW
MANY YOU CAN COUNT UPON TO CATCH AND REACH A NECESSARY BAL-
ANCE OF SELF FOR CONTINUING ON WITH EARTH IN HER NEXT ROUND
WILL DEPEND ON WHERE YOUR ASTRAL NUMBER LIES NOW."

"WHAT ARE THESE NUMBERS?" I DEMANDED.

"ROSEJ MANKIND HAS SEVEN EARTH STAGES WITHIN WHICH HE INCAR-


NATES UPON EARTH. IN THESE HE COPES AND LEARNS AND BECOMES
PROFICIENT IN HANDLING LIFE AND SELF. As HE SUCCEEDS J HE
GRADUATES INTO A NEW STAGE AND INCARNATES IN IT UNTIL HE
ACCOMPLISHES. EVERYONE IS NOW IN ONE OF THESE STAGES AND
WORKING THROUGH ITS EVENTS. SOME ARE IN A LOWER NUMBER IN
THIS FIFTH STAGE THAN #5. SOME ARE IN A HIGHER NUMBER THAN
#5. You HAVE SEVERAL NUMBERS WHICH IDENTIFY YOU TO THE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 21 of 382
BE A Pr'~ 0 N S TtL LA T ION J EWE k'"\I-i OME PLE I ADE'~S
DOORWAY
REGION CON S T~ LL/-\ T ION
INTO SOLAR • • o.

Uf\JKNOWN REGION. YETTO COME INTO CREATION. The Seven Day and Nigh
periods of Earth in
each Region and the
four levels.

Between each a long rest


. In each day will be seVE
Tr-IE J NCARNf\T/ONS OF EARTH periods of night times.
Our Earth axis tips ther

IN.UNiVERSE.

ILLUSTRATION 1, LESSON 1

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 22 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 11

GREAT ONES AND MOST PERSON'S NUMBERS ARE MIXED J BEING OF


BOTH HIGH AND LOW NUMBERS. EVENTUALLY J THESE WILL BE
BROUGHT FORTH BY THE MASTERS AND EXPLAINED TO ALL. DON'T
TRY SPECULATING HERE ABOUT THESE NUMBERS NOW AS IT WILL
ONLY MISLEAD."

"TELL US MORE ABOUT EARTH'S INCARNATING. ARE EARTH'S SUB-


LIFE FORMS AFFECTED LIKE OUR OWN?" WE KNEW VIOLET WAS THINK-
ING OF HER LOVELY CATS.

"ALL LIFE BELOW THE MAN STREAM ARE STILL IN THE COMPLETE AND
TOTAL CARE OF HIGHER ONES. THEY ALSO J LIKE WE HUMANS J UN-
FOLD THROUGH DIRECTED LEARNING AND PHYSICAL MUTATIONS. BUT
THEY ARE DEPENDENT FOR PROGRESS UPON THOSE OVER THEMJ SUCH
AS ANGELS. WHERE WE OF OUR LIFE STREAM ARE NOW DEPENDENT
UPON OUR OWN PARTICULAR EGO CONSTRUCTIONS. ALL SUB-LIFE
TRANSFERS IN AN AUTOMATIC FASHION. MAN NOW EARNS HIS OWN
TRANSFORMATIONS BY HIS OWN ACTIONS AND MIND DECISIONS."

LILY WAS EAGER NOW WITH A QUESTION. "WE HAVE HEARD SOME
ON THE, SUBJECT OF ANGELS AND HIGHER ONES OVERSHADOWING
OUR LIVES IN THE FIRST THREE INCARNATED WORLDS BEFORE WE
BECAME EGO BEINGS J AND WE ALSO ACCEPT OUR PRESENT CONSCIOUS
AWAKENING AS AN EARNED EVENT. BUT WE HAVE FOUND A FEW IN
OUR GROUP ARE HAVING DIFFICULTY IN GRASPING NEW REVELATIONS.
IF THEY ARE AWAKENED J WHY THIS DIFFICULTY?"

MARK STRETCHED AND LEANED BACK ON HIS ELBOWS IN EVIDENT


DEEP THOUGHT. NEARBY J TINY COLORFUL BIRDS DIPPED BEAKS IN
THE BROOK. THE BREEZE MOVED AROUND US IN QUIETNESS. ~~RK
SIGHED.

"LILY GIRLJ YOU PUT ME ON A SPOT." HE GAVE A MOCK FROWN J


BUT HIS EYES SMILED. "SEEKERS WHO HAVE IN THEIR PAST IN-
CARNATIONS BEEN INITIATES IN THE ANCIENT MAGI AND OTHER

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 23 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 12
,
WISDOMS J WILL HAVE A PECULIAR INNER RECOGNITION WHEN ONCE {

AGAIN BROUGHT INTO CONTACT WITH OUR TEACHINGS, HOWEVER J


SOME SOULS WILL HAVE BEEN UNFOLDING IN MUNDANE AND OTHER
AREAS AND ONLY ~ WILL HAVE COME TO EARTH TO EXPLORE THE
SPIRITUAL TRUTHS AND UNIVERSE MYSTERIES, THESE SOULS WILL
NOT HAVE AN INSTINCTUAL MEMORY RECALL TO HELP THEM BECOME
ACCUSTOMED TO THESE DEEPER AND BROADER REVELATIONS. RIGHT
NOW IT MAY BE THEIR FIRST ENCOUNTER IN THIS FIELD OF REALITY,
TRUE J YOUR BIBLE DOES TELL OF ANGELS AND THE MIRACLES OF
CHRISTJ BUT TO MANY THESE DO NOT APPLY TO THE PRESENT TIME.

"THINGS DO NOT CHANGE WITH TIME AGES, GOD'S PLAN FOLLOWS


ITS LAID DOWN PATTERN TODAY AS IT DID YESTERDAY AND AS IT
WILL BE IN THE FUTURE,"

"UPON ~OUR MATTER PLANE AND ALL THE HIGHER PLANES J GREAT
BEINGS AND ANGELS EVER FOLLOW THE PROGRESS OF GOD'S EARTH
CHILDREN, THE ANGEL RAZIEL IS THE DIRECTOR OVER THE ANGELOI
WORKING AS OVERSEER OF OUR HUMANITY. THESE ANGELS AND HIGHER
ONES CAN BE CONTACTED BY MEN WHO CAN TUNE-IN TO THEIR MINDS
AND BE COMFORTED AND HELPED, THE MAGI ALSO TOUCHES READY
SOULS OF EARTH AND DRAWS THEM TO THEIR SOUL GROUP AND TO
FELLOW EARTH FRIENDS FOR JOINT COMMUNION. THIS HAS EVER
BEEN SO. IT IS NOW EVEN MORE ACTIVE BETWEEN MAN AND HIS
HIGHER FRIENDS J BECAUSE OF AN EVENT WHICH OCCURRED IN THE
EARLY YEARS OF THE NINETEEN HUNDREDS, *

"THIS EVENT WAS COSMIC AND FOLLOWED THE LAWS OF UNIVERSE.


OUR SOLAR SYSTEM WITH EARTH MOVED INTO NEW UNIVERSE SPACE.
EARTH SINCE THEN HAS FOUND HERSELF SO SITUATED THAT HER
POSITION IN THE CONSTELLATION VIRGO FELL ON THE FIRST POINT
OF ARIES IN THE ZODIAC. THESE TWO DIFFERENT EVENTS OF MOVE-
MENTJ ONE INTO NEW UNIVERSE SPACE AND THE AUTUMNAL EQUINOX
COMING INTO THE FIRST POINT OF ARIES) GENERATED A THIRD
RHYTHM OF ENERGY FLOWING AROUND EARTH. THIS NEW THIRD

* NOT TO BE CONFUSED WITH NEW SPACE ENERGIES OF 1948.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 24 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 13
RHYTHM HAS AFFECTED ALL MINDS DWELLING UPON EARTHJ EVEN
SUB-LIFE MINDS J AND HAS ACTIVATED ALL THESE MINDS FOR AN
EASIER ABILITY FOR COMPREHENSION; ESPECIALLY IN COMPREHEN-
SIONS OF THE REALITIES WHICH LIE BEHIND AND BEYOND MATTER.
THE EVENT OPENED A DOOR INTO MIND. THIS DOOR HAS BEEN
SWINGING EVER WIDER FOR ABOUT SEVENTY-NINE YEARS AND WILL
BE AT ITS WIDEST IN THE 600TH YEAR. AFTER THATJ IT WILL
COMMENCE TO CLOSE AGAIN. WITHIN THESE TWELVE-HUNDRED YEARS
OF ITS BEING OPEN J ALL SOULS ON EARTH AND SUB-LIFE.CAN PAR-
TAKE OF THIS MENTAL ENERGY AID AND ACCELERATE~ THEIR GROWTH
AND PROGRESS."

"How WONDERFUL TO BE INCARNATING NOW"J I CRIED.

"INDEED YOU ARE FORTUNATE"J THEN MARK SHRUGGED "FOR HAD IT


-BEEN LIBRAJ THAT THE FIRST POINT OF ARIES FELL UPON J ALL
LIFE ON EARTH WOULD HAVE BEEN MENTALLY SHUT OFF FROM DESIRE
FOR SPIRITUAL TRUTH AND EXPANSIONS FOR 1200 YEARS."

"THIS IS INDEED A WONDERFUL AGE TO BE ON EARTH" BREATHED


VIOLET HAPPILY. "OHJ DO TELL US MORE"J BEGGED LILY.

You COULD TELL MARK WAS ENJOYING HIS JOB OF REVELATOR.

"OLD SOLJ EARTH'S SUN J IS ONLY NOW IN COSMIC TIME COMPLETING


HIS TWENTIETH PORTION OF HIS CIRCLE OF UNIVERSE J FROM ITS
STARTING POINT IN THIS FOURTH ROUND OF EARTH. THE SUN HAS
80 0 OF HIS UN1VERSAL CIRCLE YET TO TRAVEL BEFORE OUR SOLAR
SYSTEM BREAKS UP IN DEATH."

"Is THERE ANY WAY WE CAN JUDGE THESE COSMIC TIMES?" I


INQUIRED.

"YES. SEE A CLOCK DIAL AND PUT SUN AT TEN PAST THE HOUR
OF TWELVE NOON FOR ITS PRESENT TIME. USE TWELVE O'CLOCK

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 25 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ONE PAGE 14

AS THE STARTING POINT. THEN USING 6:00 P.M. AS A STARTING


POINT FOR EARTH) MOVE HER TO 1:10 P.M. ON THE DIAL. THAT
IS HER AGE NOW IN HER FOURTH INCARNATION. EARTH WILL BE
GONE FROM UNIVERSE BEFORE SUN."

WE MUST HAVE STILL LOOKED PERPLEXED FOR MARK PICKED UP A


TWIG AND BEGAN DRAWING IN THE DIRT.

"THE UNIVERSE BEING ROUND) ALL GALAXIES WILL BE SPINNING


DISKS IN STAR SYSTEMS. THE GALAXIES WILL BE REVOLVING AROUND
WITH THEIR STARS AND THEIR WHOLE NEBULA SYSTEMS AND REVOLVING
COUNTERCLOCKWISE AROUND UNIVERSE. UNIVERSE ITSELF IS SLOWLY
TURNING CLOCKWISE SO THESE TURN lNIQ ~ OTHER. YET ALL ARE
MOVING AT THEIR OWN PECULIAR RATES OF MOVEMENT. ALL THIS
MOVEMENT IS MUCH LIKE THE INNER MOVEMENTS OF A WATCH OR
CLOCK; THE STARS~ PLANETS~ ASTEROIDS~ COMETS) GASES AND
NEBULA DUST PARTICLES HAVE EACH A SEPARATE MATHEMATICAL NUM-
BER RHYTHM. THE TOTAL PEAK OF THESE RHYTHMS HAS BEEN REACH-
ING ITS HIGH ARCH OR NUMBER TOTAL AND WILL SOON IN COSMIC
TIME BE STARTING TO DECELERATE. SO WHEN ITS DECELERATIONS
HAVE REACHED THE LEVEL WHERE ALL MOVEMENT CEASES) UNIVERSE
AND ALL IN IT WILL HAVE BEEN DRAWN BACK INTO GOD."

WE MUSED ON THIS STRANGE VAST PICTURE.

MARK AROSE AND HELPED US UP J EXPLAINING: "You STILL HAVE


PLENTY OF TIME TO GET USED TO THINGS BEFORE THAT MOMENT."
WALKING WITH US OVER THE SWEET GRASS MEADOW J HE ASKED US TO
SEND A MESSAGE TO HIS SOUL MATE.

As WE REACHED THE PINE TREES WHICH EDGED THE FIELDS~ WE


RELUCTANTLY PARTED. THE LOVELY COLORED MISTS NOW HID HIM
FROM OUR VIEW. SOFT MUSIC CARRIED US EARTHWARD TO OUR
WAITING GROUP.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 26 of 382
,';,-'. ~

,;. .

I AM GRATEFUL FOR MY KNOWLEDGE THAT I AM A SPECIAL


GOD CHILD NOW MANIFESTING ON THE PLANET EARTH.
THANK YOU) GOD) FOR THIS AWARENESS AND FOR MY
BELIEF IN THEE.

I HAVE ABSOLUTE FAITH IN THE POWER OF GOD) FIRST .,J

CAUSE) WHOSE ACTION IS THE LAW OF ABSOLUTE GOOD.


I USE THIS LAw AS THE LAW OF MY LIFE NOW. t
t:j
.'
I DECLARE MY FAITH LEADS ME INTO RIGHT ACTION AS
DIVINE WISDOM GUIDES) INSPIRES AND PROTECTS ME IN
ALL I SAY) THINK AND DO.
THANK YOU) FATHER!

'~======================F~~-r~--======~~========~==.-=="--~-

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 27 of 382
(

BABY OWL.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 28 of 382
(

STAN

1-1 EN R Y.
F RE DO Y.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 29 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON Two ORANGE LIGHTS
THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI
ROSE LESSON TWO

"THE TRIANGLE OF GOD AND THE DIVINE BREATH"

"MAKE ME TO UNDERSTAND THE WAY OF THY PRECEPTS. SO SHALL


I TALK OF THIS WONDEROUS WORKS."
PSALM 119:27

EAGERLY WE STEPPED THROUGH THE COLOR VEIL ONTO A SOFT CARPET


OF PINE NEEDLES. AROUND US LINGERED THE GREEN FRAGRANCE OF
FIR TREES. SPARKLES OF SUNLIGHT FILTERED DOWN THROUGH EMER-
ALD BRANCHES J FLOATING LIKE FILMY LACE. WE WERE IN ANOTHER
WORLD J ANOTHER TIME. WE STOOD STILL WITHIN THE HEARTBEATS
OF SILENT MOTION. MUSICAL TONES MURMERED AND SIGHED IN GEN-
TLE WINDS. HERE BESIDE THE WATERS EDGE J THE TREES COULD
-
CATCH ITS REFLECTIONS AS THE ASTRAL SUN SENT ITS RAYS OVER
US.

THE WAIT WAS NOT LONG FOR SOON FOUR YOUNG MALE FIGURES SUR-
ROUNDED US AND LED US DOWN UPON THE SANDY SHORE. ONCE SETT-
LEDJ HOWARD MATHEWSON ASKED: "ROSEJ DO YOU HAVE ANY MEMORY
OF THIS PLACE?" I SHOOK MY HEAD. "You HAVE ALL BEEN HERE
BEFORE J " SAID FREDERICK. "WE'VE WALKED THESE SANDS TOGETHER J
VIOLET J " SAID STANLEY TO HIS SOULMATE. HENRY REASSURED US
WITHJ "OHi SOON YOUR SOUL MEMORIES WILL STIR AND RECALL MANY
SCENES J AND ALSO A RECALL WILL STIR IN YOUR FELLOW MEMBERS
MINDS AS ROSE DESCRIBES THESE HAPPENINGS AND RELATES MEETINGS
WITH OUR ASTRAL FAMILY."

FREDDY BROKE INJ "MASTER TAUGHT US THAT THE INTUITIVE MIND


WOULD OFTEN AWAKE IN THOSE WHO PARTAKE OF SUCH WORDS AS ROSE
SENDS BACK FOR HEARING OR READING. THEIR VIBRATIONS IMPINGE
UPON OPEN AND RECORDING MINDS."

"RIGHTJ FREDDY/' SAID HENRY J "BUT REMEMBER MASTER ALSO SAID


THOSE MINDS MUST BE RELAXED AND IN HARMONY. THE ORANGE LIGHT

Q) REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 30 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 2

HELPS HERE TO AWAKE THE LOVELY COMFORT OF RECALL."

"How ABOUT ITJ LILY J DO YOU NOW FEEL TINGLINGS WITHIN YOUR
ASTRAL FORM?" ASKED HOWIE.

"YES" SMILED LILY. "IT IS TINGLINGS OF PUREST GOLD."

FREDERICK CLASPED LILY'S HAND AND BID US FORM A CLOSED CIR-


CLE. "WE NOW INVOKE GOD'S ANGELS TO SURROUND EACH MEMBER
FOR AWAKENING OF WISDOMS AND RECALL J THAT THESE DEEPLY BUR-
IED SOUL MEMORIES MAY AWAKE IN OUR TWO WORLDS." A LOVELY
WHITE DOVE FLEW DOWN INTO THE CENTER OF OUR CIRCLE. "WE
THANK THEEJ FATHER GOD AND LORD CHRIST J FOR THIS ANSWER AND
KNOW OUR MINDS AND HEARTS SHALL WAKEN TO THY TRUTHS.",
AFTER FREDERICK'S PRAYER J WE SAT AGAIN IN A CIRCLE.

A NEW ELECTRIC ATMOSPHERE SURROUNDED US AS WE AWAITED


HOWARD'S OPENING WORDS OF THE SOUL GROUP LESSON.

"GOD IS THE ARCHITECT WHO CREATED UNIVERSE. THROUGH MINDJ


GOD ALSO LIVES AND PERVADES UNIVERSE. THE VERY ANCIENT RE-
CORDS OF MAN CONTAINED A VERY DESCRIPTIVE PICTURE OF UNIVERSE'
BIRTH AND WE WILL ADOPT ITS MANNER OF PICTURING THIS UNSEEN
EVENT. WE HUMANS HAVE DIFFICULTY IN IMAGING IDEAS OR THINGS
UNSEEN AND INCORPOREAL. EVEN ANCIENT ENCHANTING RECORDS
HAVE SHROUDED THE UNIVERSE' BIRTH IN MYSTERY. SO OUR STREAM
OF LIFE INCARNATING TODAY ON EARTH WILL NEED TO GAIN A CLEAR
MIND PICTURE OF THIS STUPENDOUS CREATION." HE SMILED ON OUR
RAPT FACES. "ON EARTH TODAY MANY METAPHYSICAL CONCEPTIONS
ARE LEAKING OUT OF THEIR HIDDEN PLACES AND UNKNOWN TRUTHS
ARE BREAKING INTO THE LIGHT. ONE OF THE DEEPEST HIDDEN AND
LEAST UNDERSTOOD IS THAT OF THE SEVEN INCARNATIONS OF EARTH
WITH HER SEVEN-FOLD NATURES OF MANKIND."

WE THRILLED AT HEARING THESE WORDS. "THE SEVEN LIVES OF


PLANET EARTH AND THE SEVEN-FOLD NATURE OF OUR MAN STREAM HOOK

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 31 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 3

TOGETHER IN A TREMENDOUS NUMERICAL POWER WHICH LIES AT THE


HEART OF THE NUMBER SEVEN. THIS POWER HAS BEEN KNOWN SINCE
MAN'S BEGINNINGS) YET SELDOM REVEALED TO ANY BUT THE WORLD'S
ADEPTS. THE GREAT CORRELATIONS THAT TAKE PLACE WITHIN THE
NUMBER SEVEN POWERS ARE OLDER THAN EARTH HERSELF. THUS) OUR
MYSTIC TEACHERS HELD THE TRANSMITTING OF ITS POWERS TO ONLY
TRUSTED FOLLOWERS. THEY VEILED ITS INNER MEANINGS IN SPEC-
IAL SYMBOLISMS. NONE OF THE WORLD'S GREAT AVATARS OR EVEN
LORD CHRIST WAS THE ORIGINATOR OF THESE ANCIENT TRUTHS) FOR
ALL ORIGINATED WITHIN GOD THE ABSOLUTE. THEREFORE) EACH
GREAT SCHOLASTIC TEACHER IN THEIR OWN AGE OF TIME) LENT TO
ITS WONDROUS TRUTHS CERTAIN CONCEPTUAL LEGACIES. YET) ALWAYS
BENEATH) RUNS THE STRAIN OF PURE GOD TRUTH." HOWIE NOW LOOKED
TOWARD FREDERICK WHO PICKED UP THE NARRATIVE.

YGOD IS THE DIVINE CIRCLE OF UNITY FROM WHICH ALL PROCEEDS


AND UPON WHICH ALL RETURNS." HE PAUSED SIGNIFICANTLY. "GOD
IS DIVINE THOUGHT. HE IS THE PLAN IN WHICH WE LIVE. GOD IS
AN ABSOLUTE WISDOM WHICH TRANSCENDS MANKIND'S IDEA OF TIME
AND SPACE. GOD IS LIFE ETERNAL." THE PICTURE WAS UNFOLDING
BEFORE US.

"GOD REMAINS ABOVE AND BEYOND OUR SMALL) CONSCIOUS SIGHT


RANGE; YET HE IS OMNIPRESENT AND WITHOUT BEGINNING OR END."
HE LOOKED·AT us POINTEDLY. "GOD) FROM HIMSELF) AT A PERIODI-
CAL AND REGULAR MANIFESTATION PROJECTS A CEASELESS BREATH
MOTION. ANCIENT ONES NAMED THIS 'THE GREAT BREATH OF GOD.'
As GOD EXHALES) HIS BREATH FORMS UNIVERSE) AND MOTION AND
SUBSTANCE MOVES. ATOMS ACTUATE AND THEIR MUTUAL COLLISIONS
PRODUCE LATERAL MOTION THROUGH AFFINITY. W·ITHIN GOD'S BREATH
SUBSTANCE AND ITS MOTION LIES THE FORCE) DIVINE FIRE. ITS
PRESENCE THERE NOW CAUSES A TRINITY OF LIGHT) HEAT AND MOIS-
TURE. THIS BREATH OF GOD PRODUCED THE BIRTH OF OUR UNIVERSE."

STANLEY SMILED AT VIOLET AND CONTINUED THE TREND OF INFORMA-


TIONS. "IN ANCIENT TEXTS ON EARTH AND ALSO THOSE LOST WHICH

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 32 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 4
ARE NOW IN OUR MASTER'S POSSESSIONi GOD TRUTH APPEARS MOSTLY
IN SYMBOLS OF GEOMETRICAL SIGNS OF NUMBERS AND GLIPHS. FOR
THOUSANDS OF UNINTERRUPTED GENERATIONS} THESE TRUTHS WERE
PASSED DOWN TO EARTH AND ON EARTH THEY WERE ORALLY PASSED
FROM PRIEST TO PRIEST IN THE MAGIAN ORDER. THESE WISE MEN
AND WOMEN WERE EARTH'S 'KEEPERS OF THE SACRED VISIONS.' As
SUCH} THEY DEVELOPED THEMSELVES NOT ONLY IN THEIR MENTAL AND
PSYCHIC ORGANIZATIONS} BUT ALSO PHYSICALLY TO PRESERVE THEIR
FORMS AND LONGEVITY. THEIR MEMBERS LOOKED TO 'FIRST CAUSE'
FOR ALL PRINCIPLES AND ASA RESULT ARRIVED AT THE PRIMORDIAL
SUBSTANCE OF 'DIVINE THOUGHT'."

AT THIS POINT} WE WERE THANKFUL THESE WORDS WERE BEING RECOR-


DED ON TAPE. THEIR DEEP MEANINGS WOULD NEED INTENT EXAMINA-
TION TO BECOME A REALITY FOR OUR SOULS.

"GOD THE ABSOLUTE IS THE ONE REALITY HIDDEN BEHIND UNIVERSE."


STANLEY SAID. "UNIVERSE IS HIS CREATION AND WITHIN UNIVERSE
A GOD CONSCIOUSNESS FUNCTIONS. THIS UNIVERSAL CONSCIOUSNESS
GUIDES AND CONTROLS TRUTH AND IT IS ANIMATED BY AN ENDLESS
CHAIN OF GOD CHILDREN} BORN INTO ITS BOUNDERIES BY GOD'S
BREATH. THESE ~REATER HIERARCHIES ARE HUMANITIES OLDER BRO-
THERS AND SISTERS OF GOD} AND THEY HAVE AN AFFINITY OF PER-
SONALITY WITH US AS WE ALL CAME FROM THE ONE PARENT GOD.

"THEIR INTELLECTUAL CAPACITIES OUTRANK OURS AS THEY ARE OLDER


CREATIONS OF GOD AND AHEAD OF US IN TIME EXPERIENCE} JUST AS
WE HUMANS ARE NOW AHEAD OF EARTH'S SUB-LIFE FORMS. THESE SUB-
FORMS WERE CREATED AFTER OUR BEGINNINGS ON THE PATH."

I VENTURED TO INTERRUPT. "COULD WE PICTURE THE LEVELS OF


LIFE-STREAMS AS A STRAND OF PEARLS} EACH ONE ABOVE THE OTHER
AND EACH POSSESSING INDIVIDUALITY AND PERSONALITY OF ITS
STREAM?"

"YES} BUT PERHAPS WE SHOULD ELABORATE MORE. To us WHO ARE


BELOW THEM} THESE HIGHER ONES APPEAR AS INFINITE BECAUSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 33 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 5

THEIR REALMS LIE OUTSIDE AND BEYOND OUR VISIBILITY AND PRE-
SENT MIND KNOWINGNESS. YET) THEY TOO ARE FINITE WHILE SO-
JOURNING IN UNIVERSE. THEY ALSO ARE IMMORTAL SPARKS OF THE
GOD MIND AND REFLECTING THE DIVINE FLAME. THEY) TOO) SPRANG
INTO BEING UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF GOD'S BREATH AS DID WE.
SO ALL REFLECT THE LIGHT) LIFE AND LOVE OF GOD'S INNER PRIN-
CIPLE. THE DIFFERENCE LIES IN THE. ULTIMATE ESSENCE WITHIN
THEM) CULTIVATED OVER THE EONS OF COSMIC TIME. THESE LOGOI
HIGH SPIRIT ONES DWELL AT THE TOP OF UNIVERSE UNFOLDMENTS AND
MIND REFLECTIONS. MAN DWELLS AT ITS BOTTOM REACHES. WE CAN
LEARN FROM OUR BRETHREN DWELLING OVER US. THEY STAND EVER
READY TO GUIDE US IN OUR ENDLESS FEATS TOWARD ADAPTATION."

IT WAS HENRY'S TURN NOW. THE SURF SOUNDS HAD RECEEDED FOR
THE TIDE WAS NOW OUT AND MANY SEA BIRDS SQUABBLED OVER THE
FLOTSAM LEFT BEHIND. IT WAS A LOVELY PLACE FOR OUR LESSON
AND HENRY WAS EAGER.

"EVERYTHING WITHIN THE BREATH OF GOD IS THE "PRODUCT OF THE


ONE GOD EFFORT. THE ONLY THING ETERNAL IS GOD AND HIS CHILD-
REN) BUT MATTER AND THE OTHER LEVELS OF UNIVERSE HOLD AN ETERN-
ALITY FOR ALL SOULS EVOLVING. THE MATERIALS OF MATTER) LIKE
THE MATERIALS OF ASTRAL AND SPIRIT) SEEM ETERNAL TO US BECAUSE
EVERYTHING WE KNOW IS FROM AN ETERNAL GOD CONCEPT AND IS NOW
SUBSISTING AS THOUGHT IN THE ONE GOD MIND. 'YET ALL CONTAINS
ITS OWN ESSENCE.

"ANCIENT TEXTS OF EARTH AND ASTRAL NAME PLANET EARTH A MICRO-


COSM OF THE MACROCOSM) AND OUR MANSTREAM IS AN OUTCOME OF
THESE TWO. ALL PRODUCTION IN UNIVERSE OCCURRED AS EITHER A
CONSEQUENCE OF SEPARATION OR OF CONNECTION. ATTRACTION AND
REPULSION) AND ALL EXTERNAL FORMATIONS) MANIFEST IN A LIKE-
NESS OF THEIR ~ ELEMENTS. GOD PUT INTO MOTION THE SPIRIT
OF ALL LIFE) THEN SENT ITS SEEDS INTO UNIVERSE.

"IN THE HIGHEST SEVENTH REGION THE LOGOI BEINGS PUT IN MOTION

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 34 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 6

PLANET EARTH'S SOUL J AND CAUSED IT TO PROCEED TOWARD UNITY.


THEY SERVED LIKEWISE WHEN OUR MANSTREAM CAME ALONG." HENRY
SHIFTED POSITION AND SAID. "LET ME GO BACK NOW. GOD IS
THE CAUSE BEHIND HIS MIND. GOD IS THE CAUSE OF HIS SPIRIT
-- NOT THE LIGHT J BUT THE CAUSE THAT CREATES THE LIGHT.
THEREFORE J GOD IS 'FIRST CAUSE' FROM WHICH LIFEJ LIGHT J LOVE
AND INTELLIGENCE SPRINGS. THEREFORE J THE UNIVERSE (GOD'S.
BREATH) AND ALL WITHIN IT IS TRANSIENT. WE ARE ALL HERE BY
HIS GRACE AND FOR A PURPOSE WHICH IS HIS." WE INDICATED WE
WERE FOLLOWING.

"ALL THAT ENTERS UNIVERSE UPON THE BREATH OF GOD WILL MANIFEST
AND GROW WITHIN SEVEN STATES. THESE SEVEN PLANES OF BEING
AND EXPERIENCING TIE INTO EARTH'S NATURE AS WELL AS MANS.
MATTER IS THE LOWEST PLANE AND NUMBER ONE AT THIS COSMIC
MOMENT~ THE SIX HIGHER STATES AND THEIR POWERS ARE THE MAT-
RIX OF ALL EXISTING LIVING FORCES IN UNIVERSE. THE HIGHER
HIERARCHIESJ ALSO IN THEIR PLANES J GO THROUGH SEVEN STAGES
OF DEVELOPMENT. THEY TEACH US FROM THEIR EXPERIENCES J AND
THUS WE CAN LEARN AND PROFIT WHEN WE WILL ALLOW OURSELVES
THE FREEDOM TO DO SO.

"THE ORIGINAL MAGIANS WISDOMS J RECEIVED BY EARLY MAN FROM


THE WHITE GIANTS J WAS A FREEDOM OF THOUGHT SELDOM SEEN IN
EARTH'S PRESENT DAY J OR EVEN SEEN IN THE PAST 2600 YEARS OF
EARTH. THIS SAME FREEDOM OF THOUGHT WILL BE DETECTED BY
THE ALERT SEEKER IN ALL WORKS FROM GENUINE SAGES WHO LIVED
AND LEFT RECORDS DOWN THE AGES. THEY ALL HELD A COMMON
TRUTH; THAT ALL MANKIND HAVE THE RIGHT TO EXPLORE AND KNOW
ALL THINGS. THOSE ON EARTH TODAY WHO WOULD DENY THIS RIGHT
HAVE NEVER PENETRATED THE KERNAL OF GOD'S TRUTH. WHENEVER
AN INITIATE ENCOUNTERS THE INNER SOUL TRUTHS J THESE WILL
HAVE A SIMILARITY OF FACTS. CHRISTJ HIMSELF J TAUGHT AND
ACCEPTED THESE FACTS.

"TODAY THE WORLD IS FILLED WITH IDIOMATIC IDEOLOGIES J GLORI-


FYING SMALL MAN AND HIS IGNORANCE OVER THE REALITY OF GOD AND
CHRIST.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 35 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 7
"THE MAGI PRIESTHOOD PRESERVED AND RESCUED ALL THE ORIGINAL
RECORDS THEY COULD BEFORE THE CATACLYSMS OF ATLANTIS AND
THE ANCIENT SHIFTINGS OF THE WORLD'S CONTINENTS. THESE HAD
BEEN TESTED AND RECHECKED AND VERIFIED IN ALL THEIR DEPART-
MENTS BEFORE ACCEPTANCE) AND THEIR VISIONS CONFIRMED BY MANY
PROPHETS AND SEERS.

"THESE RECORDS SHOW REALITY IS GOD. THE UNIVERSE) BEING A


CREATION OF GOD) IS WORKED fRQM WITHIN GOD OUTWARDS. AND
EVERY PLANE OF UNIVERSE IS GUIDED FROM ITS HIGHER ONE. OUR
UNIVERSE IS A LIVING WITNESS OF GOD'S EXISTENCE.

"WE CAN PROVE THIS FOR OURSELVES WITH LITTLE EFFORT. WE


KNOW THAT-WEi OURSELVES) CAN NOT HAVE OR PERFORM AN OUTWARD
MOTION OR ACTION UNLESS WE PROCEED IT BY A MIND VOLITION OF
THOUGHT. WE FIRST MUST INVOKE AN INNER IMPULSE OF MIND BE-
FORE WE MOVE AN EXTERNAL PART OF OUR BODY. GOD ALSO USES
HIS MIND TO ANIMATE IN UNIVERSE. IT IS A LAW. As ABOVE)
SO BELOW. WE) AS MICROCOSMS) ARE MINIATURE COPIES OF OUR
GREAT MACROCOSM FATHER GOD. THE UNIVERSAL LAW IS: EVERY
EXTERNAL MOTION IS PRODUCED FROM A MIND ACTION. ALL CHANGE
STEMS FROM A MIND ACTION." THIS WAS FAMILIAR BUT FROM ANOTHER
VIEWPOINT FOR OUR EDIFICATION.

"THE WHOLE COSMOS OF UNIVERSE IS RIGHT NOW BEING GUIDED AND


CONTROLLED AND ANIMATED BY GOD. GOD IS ALSO BEING HELPED IN
THIS TASK BY THE VAST HIERARCHIES OF HIS ELDER CHILDREN. As
EACH LIFE STREAM) ON ITS UNIVERSE LEVEL) GROWS AND PERFORMS
ITS INDIVIDUAL MISSIONS) IT ALSO GUIDES THOSE BELOW FROM THE
WISDOMS OF ITS OWN REGIME. SEE IT AS A VAST CHAIN AND NET-
WORK) AN UMBRELLA OF INTELLIGENCE WHICH COVERS ALL UNIVERSE
AND CONTAINS ALL MANNER OF TEACHERS AND MESSENGERS AND GUID-
ING COUNSELORS AND KARMIC AGENTS UP TO THE COSMIC LAw KEEPERS)
THE SPIRITUAL LOGOI.

"OUR MANSTREAM MEMBERS ARE THE BABIES OF UNIVERSE. THE SUB-


FORMS BELOW US HAVE NOT YET INHERITED A NATIVE PLANE OF THEIR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 36 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 8

OWN IN UNIVERSE. THEY MUST WAIT UNTIL THE NEXT UNIVERSE IS


CREATED FOR COMING INTO THEIR OWN. THEY REST NOW IN THE
CARE OF THE ANGELOI.

"ALL GOD'S PRESENT CHILDREN POSSESS THE INNER WISDOM OF;


'I AM MYSELF AND NO ONE ELSE.' WE KNOW WE ARE AND KNOW WE
POSSESS ABSOLUTE LIFE. THE SUB-LIFE STREAMS ON EARTH DO
NOT YET RECOGNIZE THIS. THEY FOLLOW THEIR ANGEL NURSES
BLINDLY AND HAPPILY." WE HAD NO COMMENT ON THIS. HENRY
CONTINUED.

"THE ELUCIDATION OF MIND IS WHY WE ARE IN UNIVERSE. ON ALL


LEVELS OF THE SEVEN STATES OF DEVELOPMENT FROM THE HIGHEST
LOGO DOWN TO MAN) ALL ARE ENDOWING THEMSELVES WITH CONSCIOUS
INTELLIGENCE."

"SHOULD I GO DEEPER INTO THIS NOW?" HENRY ASKED THE BOYS.


THEY NODDED.

"IT APPEARS TO HUMAN EYES THAT UNIVERSE IS MADE UP OF SCAT-


TERED STARS) PLANETS) DEBRIS AND EMPTY SPACE. ACTUALLY)
UNIVERSE HAS NOT EVEN ROOM IN ITS SPACE FOR A SMALL STRAIGHT
PIN TO LODGE BETWEEN ITS TIGHTLY COMPACTED CONTENTS. THE
SPACE ILLUSION COMES BECAUSE EARTH EYES CAN SEE ONLY MATTER
FORMS. IN TRUTH) ALL UNIVERSE LIES CLOSE TOGETHER) SUCH AS
ONION LAYERS AND IT EVEN OVERLAPS AT PLACES. IN REALITY)
THERE IS NO SPACE." THIS WAS NEW TO US AND A SURPRISE.

"THE THREE DISTINCT LEVELS ABOVE OUR MATTER ONE)" SAID HENRY)
"ARE ANGELOI) SUN BEINGS AND LOGOI. AND ON ALL THESE LEVELS)
AS ON MATTER) ITS NATIVE GOD CHILDREN WILL COVER SEVEN LEVELS
OF LEARNINGS DURING AN INCARNATION PERIOD OF EXISTENCE. THE
SEVENTH AND LAST WILL BE WHEN EACH INDIVIDUAL AWAKENS TO DE-
SIRE TO ABSORB THE HIDDEN REALITIES BEHIND ALL THINGS. AWAK-
ING SEEKERS ARE TACKLING THEIR LAST AND HIGHEST STUDY COURSE
ON EARTH AND WILL BE ACTIVATING THEIR INTUITIVE DEVELOPMENTS
OF SELF. AWAKENING TO DESIRE THE HIDDEN WISDOMS WILL NOT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 37 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 9
MEAN THE PERSON IS ABOUT TO COMPLETE THEIR EARTH REQUIREMENTS
AND EXPERIENCES FOR THIS WOULD BE UNTRUE AND MISLEADING. IT
SIMPLY MEANS THE INDIVIDUAL IS NOW ACTIVE AND MOVING WITHIN
ALL THE SEVEN STAGES OF £ELE AND WILL BE USING THE INTUITIVE
SECTIONS OF MIND MORE FULLY THAN THOSE NOT YET AWAKE."

I SPOKE: "I'M GLAD YOU CLARIFIED THAT AS IT COULD HAVE BEEN


MISUNDERSTOOD; I AM STILL PUZZLED AS TO WHY SOME UNAWAKENED
PERSONS SEEM SO ADAMANT IN THEIR ENDEAVORS TO DISCREDIT THOSE
WHO ARE SEEKERS. WHY CANNOT THEY ALLOW OTHERS TO PURSUE THEIR
DESIRES AS WE ALLOW THEM THEIR BELIEFS?"

HENRY SIGHED) "FEARJ COUPLED WITH A BLIND ACCEPTANCE OF OLD


SUPERSTITIONS) HAVE CAUSED MUCH OF THE EVIL ON·EARTH TODAY.
IN THE SEVENTH REALM WISDOMS) SCOFFING IS RECOGNIZED AS AN
UNAWAKENED INTUITIVE AREA. HAVING NO TRUE INTUITIVE IDEAS
FILED IN THEIR SPIRITUAL AREAS OF MIND) THESE SOULS ARE EASILY
SOLD DOGMATIC IDEAS. INTUITION IS MUCH DIFFERENT FROM THE
SENSE IDEAS. THESE LATTER SOULS PARTAKE FROM THEIR PHYSICAL
BRAIN SENDINGS TO MIND) THE LOWEST MEMORY IN THEIR STOREHOUSE
OF ETHERIC MIND. THERE IS A GREAT DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE
LOWER SENSE IDEAS AND SOUL TRUTHS AND HIGHER MIND INTUITIONS."

"COULD YOU TELL US MORE ABOUT THE HIGHER BEINGS) HENRY?" THIS
FROM VIOLET. "IN WHAT AREA WOULD YOU LIKE MORE ON THEM?" HE
ASKED. "OH) MIND FOR IT'S THERE THAT THEY HELP US." SHE
ANSWERED.

"WELL) THE SPIRITUAL LOGOI PERSONS ARE EVEN MORE ADVANCED IN


THEIR MENTAL DEVELOPMENTS THAN ARE THOSE OF'THE SUN REALMS
OF WHICH WE NAME 'MASTERS'. THE LOGOI ARE IN THEMSELVES
'CREATORS' AFTER THE PATTERN OF GOD AND AID HIM IN HOLDING
UNIVERSE IN FOCUS. THEY WORK ALMOST EXCLUSIVELY IN THE AREA
OF MIND IDEATION AND THROUGH THEIR MIND CREATIVE LABORS)
THEY USE THEIR POWERS AND FORCES UPON THE LAWS FOR THE PERPET-
UATION OF UNIVERSE. THEY CREATE A HUGE MENTAL UMBRELLA OF

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 38 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 10

DIVINE IDEAS OF A SPIRITUAL NATURE ALL OVER UNIVERSE. IDEAS


FROM THIS SOURCE CAN BE PICKED UP BY THE CONSCIOUSNESS POR-
TIONS OF ALL LIFE-STREAMS' MIND POINTS AS THEY DWELL IN
UNIVERSE WHEN THEY SUCCEED IN CLEARING OUT MIND BLOCKS AND
RAISING THEIR VIBRATIONS HIGH ENOUGH TO TUNE INTO ITS HIGH
FREQUENCIES. ALL LIFE IN UNIVERSE IS IN THE ACT OF BECOMING.
ALL POSSESS A MIND-SPARK FROM THE ONE GOD FATHER. MIND IS
OUR PERSONAL INNER CONNECTION TO GOD AND IT ALSO CAN CONNECT
US TO OUR ELDER BROTHERS AND SISTERS OF THE HIGHER REALMS.
THROUGH MIND) ALL IS CONNECTED IN UNIVERSE. EVERYTHING
AND EVERY BEING IS THE PRODUCT OF THE ONE UNIVERSAL CREA-
TIVE FORCE) GOD."

"WELL)" SAID HOWIE) uTHAT'S IT FOR TODAY. ANY QUESTIONS?"

WE LAUGHED AT HIM. WE WERE LOADED WITH QUESTIONS. I STARTED


OUT WITHj "THERE SEEMS TO BE CERTAIN TYPES OF PHYSICAL FORMS
ALL PEOPLE INHERIT AS THEY INCARNATE. ASIDE FROM THEIR
BEING KARMIC) IS THERE ANY REASON BEHIND THESE TYPES?"

"By REASON) DO YOU MEAN WHY THEIR PARTICULAR TYPES?" HOWIE


ASKED. "YES) IT'S THE TYPES OF FORMS I'M CURIOUS ABOUTj
THEIR SHAPES) COLOR) SIZE AND SO FORTH." I GRINNED AT HIM.
"WOULDN'T YOU KNOW!" HE ROLLED HIS EYES AT THE BOYS) "SHE'D
ASK A QUESTION LIKE THAT."

"WELL) AS A MATTER OF FACT)" VIOLET OFFERED. "I'D LIKE TO


KNOW THE ANSWER TO THAT ALSO." "OKAY) STAN) YOU ANSWER IT."

"WELL! THANKS A LOT)" THEN STAN LOOKED REAL SMUG.

"THE BASIC MOLDS SET UP FOR THE HUMAN MANSTREAM OF LIFE ON


PLANET EARTH WERE ORIGINATED ON THE SEVENTH LEVEL BY THE
LOGOI. ASIDE FROM THE FACT THAT THEY HAD TO BY NATURE AND
FORM BE THE IDEAL FIGURE FOR EARTH'S ATMOSPHERE) THEY HAD

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 39 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 11
TO BE ABLE TO HANDLE THE NATURAL TERRESTRIAL FORCES OF
MATTER. THE FORMS ALSO HAD TO BE SUCH AS WOULD FIT INTO
ALL KARMIC EXPERIENCES THAT EACH HUMAN WOULD HAVE TO EXPER-
IENCE FOR EVOLVEMENT. EACH OF US HAVE TO GO THROUGH MANY
CHANGES AND LIVE THEIR EMOTIONS AND EVENTS AND MENTAL
REACTIONS."

"OH!" EXCLAIMED VIOLET.

"THAT'S NOT ALL. THESE BODY FORMS ALSO HAVE TO BE SUCH


THE ORIGINAL JEWEL SEED CAN HANDLE. SO THE LOGOI HAD TO
FASHION A FORM OUT OF THE EARTH ELEMENTS AND THE FORM HAD
TO CONTAIN SEVEN FORCES TO FIT THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES OF YOUR
GOD JEWEL AND THE UNIVERSE. THE FOUR HIGHEST PRINCIPLES
CONTAIN SEED PODS THAT DEVELOP THE ENTITY INTO AN EVENTUAL
GOD BEING. THE THREE LOWER SEED PODS HOLD INDICATIONS OF
THE ENTITY'S DESTINY WHILE IN UNIVERSE."

FREDDY NOW SAID , "IT'S DETAILED AND WILL ALL UNFOLD AS YOU
ADVANCE ALONG THE PATHWAY OF KNOWLEDGE AND YOUR INTUITIVE
MIND PORTIONS EXPAND."

"I'VE READ SCIENTIFIC SQUIBS ABOUT THE DIFFERENT NEBULA


SYSTEMS TRAVELING RAPIDLY AWAY FROM ONE ANOTHER AND CAN TIE
THIS IN WITH THE EXHALATIONS OF GOD'S BREATH. EDDINGTON
HAS A TREATISE ON THE EXPANDING UNIVERSE. WHEN YOU CONNECT
THE IDEA BREATH HERE, DOES THAT MEAN AN EVENTUAL 'INHALATION'
WILL OCCUR ALSO , AND WHAT WOULD BE ITS CONSEQUENCES?" I
INQUIRED.

"WHOA!" HOWIE YELLED "NOT so FAST! THE EXISTENCE OF UNIVERSE


WILL OPERATE WITHIN THE COSMIC TIME LIMITS OF GOD'S EXHALA-
TIONS OF ELEMENTS AND SUBSTANCE AND THE INHALATION AND DRAW-
ING BACK OF THESE INTO HIMSELF. ITS CONSEQUENCES WILL NOT
BE FELT BY LIFE-FORMS."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 40 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWO PAGE 12
"SOl WE ARE STILL EXISTING IN THE TIME AGES OF 'EXHALATION'I"
VENTURED VIOLET. "AND SHALL WE ALSO EXIST UNAFFECTED IN THE
AGES WHEN GOD'S BREATH SHALL BE INHALED?"

"THAT'S CORRECT I " HENRY VOICED. "AND WITHIN THAT PERIOD OF


COSMIC TIME; EARTH SHALL INCARNATE INTO THE SEVEN LEVELS OF
UNIVERSE SEVEN TIMES AND WITH OUR LIFE-STREAM EXPERIENCING
UPON HER WHILE IN THESE SEVEN STAGES OF UNIVERSE ATMOSPHERE."

"I CAN SEE ITS PICTURE PATTERN NOW I " LILY SAID.

STANLEY ROSE AND WE KNEW OUR TIME WAS UP.

TURNING~ WE LOOKED ABOVE THE CLIFF AND AROUND THE CURVE OF


THE BEACH. WE SAW THE CASTLE GLOWING IN THE ORANGE TONES
OF THE SUNSET.

STROLLING SLOWLY I WE RETRACED OUR STEPS INTO THE PINES.


THE YOUNG MEN TOLD US OUR NEXT TRIP WOULD SHOW US THE BEAUTY
OF ASTRAL NIGHT TIME.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 41 of 382
(

ALL THE POTENTIALS AND BLESSINGS THAT I DESIRE TO


i
MANIFEST IN MY LIFE ARE RIGHT WITHIN ME STRIVING
FOR EXPRESSION. I
~ .

( I DECLARE NOW THAT IT IS NATURAL FOR ME TO TRANSPLANT


""---- ,
MY INNER LIGHT AND LOVE TO OTHERS. As GOD'S PRESENCE
FILLS MY LIFE WITH JOY AND HAPPINESS) I RADIATE HIS
LIGHT INTO ALL THE UNIVERSE.

I AM BORN AGAIN AS GOD'S SPIRIT FILLS MY SPIRIT.


HIS MIND ILLUMINATES MY MIND AND HIS LOVE ANIMATES
MY SOUL.
THANK You FATHER!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 42 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 43 of 382

(
\
ain

-GERMAIN .
/ .

- ,

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 44 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE GREEN LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON THREE

"THE SEVEN REGIONS OF UNIVERSE"

"WISDOM HATH BUILDED HER HOUSE~ SHE HAS HEWN OUT HER SEVEN
PILLARS."
PROVERBS 9:1

As THE SILVER AND SEA GREEN MISTS DISBURSED FROM AROUND US~
WE STOOD IN BRILLIANT MOONLIGHT~ HIGH ABOVE A STRETCHING
VALLEY. SILENT PINES BELOW HELD ARMS UPRAISED IN AROMATIC
GREETINGS. FAR BELOW LAY FAINT GLISTENS OF SHINING WATER.
UNDER OUR FEET~ SOLID ROCK WAS OUR PLATFORM~ AND ACROSS THE
DARK VALLEY PURPLE MOUNTAINS SLEPT PEACEFULLY. CLOUD SHADOWS
~HASED THE SOFT NIGHT BREEZE AS A MOCKINGBIRD BEGAN HIS SONG.

ENCHANTMENT REIGNED EVERYWHERE AS THE ASTRAL MOON POURED


MOLTEN SILVER IN OUR EYES. THE STARS OVERHEAD WERE IN COM-
PETITION~ CASTING COLORED JEWEL LIGHTS INTO THE SPELL OF THE
NIGHT'S STILLNESS. SOUNDLESS WORDS OF LOVE WHISPERED DEEP
IN OUR SOULS. "OH~ GOD~ HOW LOVELY ARE THY REGIONS~" I
THOUGHT. AND FROM AFAR THE SEA SURFS ECHO RETURNED AN AGREE-
MENT.

IN THESE MOMENTS OF HUSHED BEAUTY~ A GLOW APPEARED AND FROM


BEHIND OUR ROCKY BACKGROUND~ TIMOTHEOUS APPROACHED. THE
MOON'S SILVER LIGHT ILLUMINATED HIS TALL FIGURE AND HELD US
SPELLBOUND. WE FELT THE FRAGRANCE AND TOUCH OF HIS AURA
WHICH EMBRACED OUR OWN.

"I BEHOLD THE LOVE IN YOUR HEARTS~ DEAR ONES~ I REJOICE TO


THE AWAKENING OF YOUR INNER AWARENESS. LET INFINITE INTELLI-
GENCE REVEAL ITS ALL-KNOWING POWER WITHIN YOUR MINDS."

WE THRILLED TO HIS WORDS AS WE NOW SETTLED BEFORE HIS SEATED


FIGURE. IN THE BACKGROUND~ THE MOCKINGBIRD SANG ON.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 45 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 2

"TONIGHT I BRING YOU NEWS OF THE SEVEN REFLECTED PLANES WITH-


IN GOD'S UNIVERSE." HE PAUSED. "THERE ARE IN UNIVERSE SEVEN
ATMOSPHERIC REGIONS AND EACH HOLDS DIMENSION PLANES OF TIME}
SUBSTANCE AND ENERGY. EACH PLANE WITHIN ONE OF THESE ATMOS-
PHERES IS A NATURAL PLACE FOR THE DIFFERENT GOD LIFE-STREAMS
TO DWELL. EACH OF THESE SEVEN REGIONS IS NOW AND WILL BE IN
THE FUTURE} ITS INDIVIDUAL LIFE-FORM'S NATIVE' REALM OR PERMAN-
ENT UNIVERSE HOME. THE HIGHER BEINGS ALL LIVE AND REMAIN UPON
THEIR HOME REALMS} BUT TINY MAN TRAVELS THE UNIVERSE AT THIS
COSMIC TIME AND LEARNS AND GROWS.

MANKIND IS NOT ALONE ON THIS VAST JOURNEY. OUR PLANET EARTH


ALSO TRAVELS WITH US ON THESE UNIVERSAL LANEWAYS. WE ARE GOD'S
YOUNGEST CHILDREN TO BECOME OF AGE AT THIS UNIVERSE MANIFESTA-
TION. THEREFORE}
.
WE MUST ADVENTURE THROUGHOUT ALL ITS REALMS
TO GATHER KNOWLEDGE AND EVER RETURN TO OUR NATIVE MATTER WORLD
AT TIMES AND START ANEW ON ANOTHER SPIRAL. THIS IS CALLED
REINCARNATION.

"OUR FIRST ADVENTURES IN UNIVERSE WERE IN THE COMPANY OF OUR


ELDER GOD BROTHERS AND SISTERS AND WITHIN THEIR NATIVE REALMS.
UNITED WITH THEM} THEY PLACED OUR FEET ON TRUE PATHWAYS AND
HELPED US GATHER IN GREAT FORCES OF SUN} MOON AND THE MILKY
WAY. AND STILL IN UNION} THEY WOVE OUR GOLDEN THREADS AND
WE GREW INTO ONE. ONE SPIRIT} ONE MIND IN GOD."

THERE WAS DELIGHT IN HIS WORDS. THE LIGHT FROM HIS FORM
ENCIRCLED US ALL TOGETHER} MUCH AS I SUSPECT WE WERE ENCIR-
CLED WITH THE HIGHER BEINGS IN OUR BEGINNINGS.

"TINY MANSTREAM WAS DEPENDENT UPON THESE HIGHER ONES AT OUR


BEGINNINGS IN UNIVERSE TRAVEL. WE RECEIVED AND GATHERED
OUR EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL WISDOMS FROM OUTSIDE OURSELVES.
WE DEPENDED UPON AND LOOKED TO OUR BROTHERS AND SISTERS TO
SHOW US WHAT WE NEEDED TO KNOW. LET US GO BACK NOW AND SEE
HOW ALL THIS TOOK PLACE." WE EAGERLY WAITED.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 46 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 3

"GOD DREW BREATH FROM WITHIN HIMSELF AND EXHALED AND ITS SUB-
STANCE AND PRINCIPLES NOW FORMED AN ORDERLY SYSTEM OF CONSTANT
COSMIC EXPANSION. THIS EXPANSION IS EVEN NOW TAKING PLACE AS
WE SIT HERE TOGETHER. SO WHEN JESUS SAID~ "My FATHER'S HOUSE
HAS MANY MANSIONS~ IF IT WERE NOT SO I WOULD HAVE TOLD YOU.
I GO TO PREPARE A PLACE FOR YOU." (ST. JOHN 14:2)~ H~ WAS SPEAK-
ING OF THESE MANY UNIVERSE REGIONS WITH THEIR TWELVE DIMENSIONS
AND ENERGY PLANES OF LIFE."

VIOLET VENTURED TIMIDLY; "WHAT IS THE EXACT EPIGENESIS PATTERN


OF UNIVERSE?" HE TOOK HER HAND IN HIS.

"LET US LOOK AT THE HEAVENS ABOVE US. THOSE GREAT COLORED


ORBS IN THIS ASTRAL SKY ARE EVERYONE SAILING IN THEIR OWN
~ECULIAR ATMOSPHERIC DIMENSION~ YET APPEAR TO US TO BE IN A
MUTUAL COSMIC SPACE AND TIME. THE PEOPLES IN THE MATTER DIM-
ENSIONS OBSERVE ONLY THEIR REFLECTIONS OF LIGHT AND THEIR
LOWER ETHERIC AND MATTER REALITIES. You SEE~ VIOLET~ ALL
THESE HEAVENLY GLOBES SERVE A VERY UNIQUE POSITION IN GOD'S
PLAN."

THEY HUNG THERE OVER OUR HEADS IN RICH COLOR HUES. No DIA-
MOND SPARKLES SUCH AS SEEN FROM EARTH; MORE LIKE MIXED UNCUT
GEMS AND SOMEHOW THIS SEEMED NATURAL THAT EACH SHOULD SHOW IN
INDIVIDUAL COLOR GLOW. THE WORDS OF TIMOTHEOUS FLOWED ON.

"REALIZE NOW THAT THESE ORBS ARE NOT ON ONE COMMON DIMENSION
LEVEL OF UNIVERSE BUT ARE SAILING WITHIN SIX DIFFERENT LEVELS
OF ATMOSPHERE AS WE VIEW THEM. THEY ONLY APPEAR TO BE WITHIN
A MUTUAL SEA OF VIBRATIONS. EACH IS IN THEIR OWN ENVIRONMENT
AND CORRESPONDING PLACE OF UNFOLDMENT. THEY ARE BEING SEEN
THROUGH EACH DIMENSION'S 'LIFE-FORMS' ACCORDING TO THEIR
NATIVE FORM SENSES. RIGHT NOW~ WE ARE USING OUR ASTRAL SIGHT
SENSES. THEREFORE~ WE SEE THEM AS HEAVENLY COLOR FORMS. WERE
I BACK IN THE SUN REALMS OF UNIVERSE~ I'D BE VIEWING THEM
THROUGH MY SPIRITUAL FORM SIGHT."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 47 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 4
"ARE THEY EVEN MORE BEAUTIFUL IN SPIRIT?" I ASKED. HE
NODDED} HIS GAZE STILL UPWARD. "IT SEEMS IMPOSSIBLE THEY
COULD BE MORE BEAUTIFUL}" BREATHED LILY. HE BROUGHT HIS
GAZE DOWN TO LILY AND LOOKED ON HER FONDLY.

"THOSE STARS} MY DEAR} ARE DIVINE JEWEL BODIES IN WHICH


GOD'S ~LDEST LOGOI CHILDREN DWELL. THEIR NATIVE REALM OF
EXISTENCE IS THE MOST SPIRITUAL OF THAT WITHIN UNIVERSE AND
CONTAINS SEVEN LEVELS WITHIN ITS BORDERS AS DO ALL THE DIM-
ENSIONS} EVEN MATTER. THE PLANETS OF UNIVERSE ARE MATTER
FORMS FOR NEW YOUNG BORN LOGOI BEINGS. LIKE OUR HUMANITY}
THEY} TOO} ARE NOW IN THIS PRESENT UNIVERSE CREATION COMING
INTO THEIR OWN STATE FOR SELF-RESPONSIBILITY. ON THE SPIRAL
OF BECOMING} BOTH TODAY'S PLANETS AND MANKIND'S STREAMS OF
LIFE} ARE TRAVELING A LIKE COURSE FOR THE PURPOSE OF REACH-
ING A MUTUAL FUTURE STATE WITHIN THIS UNIVERSE' TIME SPAN
OF EXISTENCE."

IT WAS STRANGE TO THINK OF SUNS AND STARS AS BODY FORMS FOR


LIFE BEINGS. STILL} OUR OWN EARTH HELD MANY WEIRD SUB-LIFE
FORMS SO WHY NOT ABOVE AS HERE BELOW. HE CALLED US BACK
FROM OUR STAR GAZING.

"WATCH ME NOW AS I FASHION YOU AN IMAGE." HE FORMED A BRILL-


IANT TRIANGLE WITH HIS HANDS; THEN BELOW IT AN INVERTED TRIA-
GLE AND AROUND THIS SEVEN LITTLE GLOBES. HE NUMBERED THE
GLOBES FROM ONE TO SEVEN.

"I AM MAKING YOU AN ANCIENT MAGIAN SYMBOL GIVEN MANKIND IN


ITS EARLIEST DAYS. IT DEPICTS THE EVOLUTION OF EARTH AND
MANKIND UPON THEIR JOURNEY IN THIS UNIVERSE TIME. THE TWO
TRIANGLES JOINED INDICATE THE PATH TAKEN THROUGH UNIVERSE
FROM GOD AND BACK TO REJOIN HIM AND SIGNIFIES THE UNION OF
ABOVE TO ALL BELOW."

I GAZED AT THIS SYMBOL CLOSELY FOR I WOULD BE REPRODUCING


ITS IMAGE. SEE ILLUSTRATION #1} LESSON 3.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 48 of 382
ANC lENT

~1AGIAN SYMBOL.

(0
8
o

YlHEEL OF KARMA.

ILLUSTRATION 1J LESSON 3

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 49 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 5

"LISTEN CAREFULLY. THE FIRST UNIVERSE FORM OF EARTH WAS A


SPIRITUAL ONE OF FIRE MIST AND CREATED BY THE LOGOI SERAPHIM J
WHO ALSO MADE TINY OVAL FIRE MIST SACKS FOR OUR JEWEL SEED
HALVES AS WE ENTERED THE FIRST INCARNATING ROUND OF EARTH'S
ATMOSPHERES IN SPIRIT. THE SERAPHIM WERE ASSISTED BY ARCH-
ANGELS OF THE BRIAH GROUP J WHO ARE GOD'S CHILDREN JUST ABOVE
US J IN THE SEVEN REGIONS OF UNIVERSE."

"IN THIS VERY FIRST VENTURE INTO UNIVERSE J NEW BORN EARTH AND
TINY MAN WERE BEING CARED FOR J NOURISHED J TAUGHT AND SHAPED
IN THE FORM OF OUR SPIRITUAL BODY AND ITS MIND PORTION BY THE
SERAPHIM AND BRIAH ANGELS. OUR SPIRIT" FORMS AND MINn FORMS
WERE THE FIRST TO BE ACTIVATED AND THE SERAPHIM AND BRIAHS
FOLLOWED THE PATTERNS WHEN MAKING THEM FROM OUR JEWEL SEED
GERMINAL PATTERN POSSIBILITIES. HERE IT WAS THAT OUR PERSONAL
ELEMENTS AND ORIGINAL SCOPE DESIGN OF CREATIVE DEGREE BEGAN.
THESE TEAMS OF SERAPHIM AND BRIAHS CARRIED US THROUGH OUR
SPIRIT BEGINNINGS J EVEN AS THEY WERE ALSO GUIDING PLANET
EARTH."

"THOSE GREAT ORBS OR SUNS J ARE THEY IN THE HIGHEST LEVELS OF


UNIVERSE?" LILY POINTED TOA PARTICULARLY BRILLIANT LAVENDER
STAR CLUSTER OVERHEAD.

"THOSE J YES J THEY ARE ~p~~~ SPIRIT DWELLERS AND ARE THE CLOS-
EST TO CORRESPOND WITH THE ATMOSPHERE OF GOD THE ABSOLUTE.
THESE LOGOI WHO DWELL IN THIS HIGHEST REGION ARE OF THREE
CLASSES. THEY ARE ALL OF IMMEASURABLE SPLENDOR IN SPIRITUAL
POWERS AND INTELLIGENCE; YET ARE DIVIDED INTO TWELVE DEGREES
OF FINAL ATTAINMENT. ALL LIFE-BEINGS IN UNIVERSE ARE IN THE
PARTICULAR LEVELS AND REALMS BECAUSE OF THAT WHICH NOW LIES
BEHIND THEIR PERSONAL ENERGY DOORS.

"EVERYTHING IN UNIVERSE HAS A PERSONAL SIGNATURE. IF WE


ACCEPT EARTH'S SCIENTIFIC PREMISE THAT EACH HEAVENLY BODY
EXERTS ITS OWN UNIQUE MAGNETIC FORCE AND THAT STARS DIFFER

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 50 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 6

IN THEIR RAY FORCES J WE ARE AGREEING TO GOD'S WISDOMS. THE


SCIENCE PEOPLE OF EARTH ARE NOW RELYING UPON NON-MATTER THE-
ORIES IN MANY OF THEIR NEW FINDS AND DISCOVERING THEY MUST
RE-THINK IN MANY OF THEIR PRESENT DEDUCTIONS BECAUSE OF NEW
DATA NOW STREAMING IN FROM THE SPACE PROBE UNITS. THESE NEW
FINDINGS ARE PUTTING MANKIND A STEP FORWARD BY CORRECTING
OLD ERROR THEORIES TO A CLOSER NEARNESS WITH COSMIC REALITY.
IT'S CREATING A NEW BRIDGE BETWEEN MATTER AND OTHER REALMS
OF BEING.

"WHILE EARTH AND THE MANSTREAM WERE BOTH IN THEIR FIRST FORMS J
THESE ENTITIES WERE OF MISTY NEBULA ELEMENTS J MUCH LIKE SMALL
GAUZY WHIRLPOOLS AND ALL ROTATING WITHIN A MUCH LARGER AREA
OF CIRCLING ELEMENTS J WHICH NOW IS OUR SOLAR SYSTEM. THE
OTHER TWO) OF THE THREE LOGOI DIMENSIONS J WERE FUNCTIONING
IN THE SOlAR BUILDING PROGRAMS AND GALAXY CREATIONS AND WERE
SUPERVISING ALL ACTIVITIES THEN TAKING PLACE UPON THE BASIC
SEVEN VIBRATORY STREAMS OF SPIRIT. THESE WAVE-LENGTH STREAMS
FORM A PATHWAY BETWEEN THE SEVEN PRINCIPLE BEINGS ON THIS
HIGHEST REALM OF UNIVERSE. (ON PURE SPIRIT REALM)

"THESE LORDS ARE THE SEVEN SONS OF FOHAT AND OFTEN REFERRED
TO AS THE SEVEN LAMPS OF GOD. THEIR PARENT J FOHAT J WAS THE
FIRST GOD JEWEL TO ENTER UNIVERSE AT ~ COSMIC IlME AS HE
WAS THE MOST HIGHLY EVOLVED OF ALL GOD'S OLDER CHILDREN.
FOHAT HAD ATTAINED A STATE OF QUALIFIED GODHOOD OVER ALL OTHER
LIFE. WE USE THIS NAMEJ FOHATJ GIVEN TO MAN AT HIS BEGINNINGS
AND RECALL THAT FOHAT WAS ANDROGENOUS AND PRODUCED SEVEN SONS
TO RULE UNDER HIM AND THESE BEGAT TWELVE MORE TO GOVERN UNDER
THEM AND THUS THE PROGRAM WIDENED AND EXPANDED AND PEOPLED
THE SEVENTH REALM AND ALL WERE OF MANY DEGREES OF INTELLIGENCE
AND MIND PATTERNS.

"THERE ARE TWO DISTINCT TYPES OF LOGOI BESIDE THE SERAPHIM.


THERE ARE CHERUBIM WHO ARE THE LORDS OF LIFE AND WISDOM;
THRONES WHO ARE THE LORDS OF FIRE AND KARMA. ALSOJ THESE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 51 of 382
FIR S T
BORN.

0000000
~
SECOND BO~N.

FR.OM THESE. CAME THE

THREE LOGOI BEJ NGS.

S E R.A PHI M. THRONES. CHER.UBIM.

1\ose.79.

TI-ll RD B0 RN I

ILLUSTRATION 2J LESSON 3

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 52 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 7

THREE TYPES OF LOGOI IN THIS FIRST INCARNATION ROUNDJ WERE


ASSISTED BY THE BRIAH ANGELOI.IN CARRYING OUT THEIR. WORK.
You WILL HEAR MORE ABOUT THESE AND THEIR DUTIES IN ROUNDS
Two AND THREE." WE WATCHED AS HE FORMED ANOTHER IMAGE.
SEE ILLUSTRATION #2J LESSON 3.

"ALL ACTION FOLLOWS THE LAw OF THE TRIANGLE IN UNIVERSE.


ALL STARTS FROM ITS TOP POINT AND SPREADS GRADUALLY OUTWARD
TO REACH THE TWO POINTS OF ITS BASE. THUS J FOHAT BECAME THE
UPPER POINT OF THE SEVENTH REALM TRIANGLE AND FROM HIM AND
HIS SEVEN SONS SPREAD THE HIERARCHY OF GOD BEINGS. THUS J IN
EVERY CONSTELLATION SEEN IN OUR HEAVENS WILL BE STAR POINTS
AND PLANETARY SATELLITE POINTS REVOLVING AROUND THEM AND
CERTAIN OF THESE PLANETS WILL BE THE HOMES OF THE BRIAH
ARCHANGELS. IN OUR PARTICULAR SOLAR SYSTEM J SATURN AND HER
~ONSTELLATION IS THE BRIAH ANGEL'S BASE. OTHER SOLAR SYSTEMS
IN OTHER GALAXIES WILL SUPPORT MEMBERS OF THEIR GROUP ALSO
AND CONNECT WITH A PLANET."

"CAN WE TAKE IT THAT ALL OTHER PLANETS WILL BE OPERATING AND


ATTAINING AS EARTH AND OURSELVES ARE DOING?" THIS FROM LILY.

"EXACTLY. ALWAYS THE LAw IS: "As ABOVE SO BELOW." SO AS TO


FURTHER CLARIFY THE LOGOI HIERARCHY J LET ME SAY THIS. THE
TRIANGLE THREE WHICH IS NAMED THE SEPHIROTHAL TRIADJ ALTHOUGH
EACH OCCUPIES A THIRD OF THE SEVENTH REALMJ EACH POINT ON
THIS TRIANGLE WILL BE ON A LEVEL OF SAMENESS. AND EACH WILL
BE DIVIDED INTO THREE SECTIONS AND THE SECTIONS POSSESS TWELVE
DIMENSIONS FROM TOP TO BOTTOM. SOON ST. GERMAIN WILL JOIN US
AND GIVE YOU MORE ON THIS SUBJECT.

"O URGOD JEWELS CAME DOWN INTO UNIVERSE ON GOD'S BREATH AND
RESTED IN THE VERY HIGHEST SEVENTH LEVEL OF THE PURE SPIRIT
REGION AND HERE OUR JEWEL HAS REMAINED AND AWAITS OUR RETURN."
HE SAW OUR QUESTIONING EXPRESSIONS AND ANTICIPATED US.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 53 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 8

"You CAME DOWN AND OUT OF YOUR JEWEL IN THE FORM OF A SEED
POD. THIS POD HELD WITHIN ITS CASE ANOTHER POD TO THE COUNT
OF SEVEN TINY PODS J ONE WITHIN ANOTHER LIKE CHINESE PUZZLE
BOXES. OUTER POD CASES WERE REMOVED AS LOGOIJ AND ANGELS
CARRIED YOU THROUGH THE MANY DIMENSIONS OF THE SPIRITUAL
REALMS OF ROUND ONE INCARNATIONS. WHEN ALL SEVEN PODS WERE
USED J YOU WERE FINISHED IN THAT REALM AND READY TO BEGIN
WITH EARTH ON HER SECOND INCARNATION. AND SO ON IT GOES
AS YOU INVOLUTE DOWN UNTIL YOU REACH EARTH INCARNATION FOUR."

Up THE MOUNTAIN SIDE A LIGHT SEEMED TO BE APPROACHING. "THAT


WILL BE ST. GERMAIN" SAID TIMOTHEOUS. "I SENT OUT A MESSAGE
WE WERE HERE." IN NO TIMEJ HIS YOUTHFUL ENERGETIC FIGURE
JOINED US. I REJOICED TO SEE HIM AGAIN AND INTRODUCED THE
GIRLS. HE RADIATED ENERGY AND OUR ATMOSPHERE SEEMED TO
CRACKLE WITH ELECTRICAL FORCES.

"JUST LOOK AT THOSE HEAVENS J " HE CRIED. "DID YOU KNOW THAT
WHEN SEEING COLORS THROUGH YOUR ASTRAL INNER EYESJ THESE
ARE AS A COVENANT BETWEEN GOD AND YOU J TO REFRESH YOUR MEM-
ORY RECALL CENTERS?" "TRULY!" FROM VIOLET.

"TRULY J AND HERE'S ANOTHER SECRET KEY." WE WERE ALL EARS.


"WHENEVER YOUR PHYSICAL OR ASTRAL EMOTIONAL SENSES THRILL
TO A PARTICULAR MUSICAL CHORD J ITS NOTES RESPOND TO HIGHER
DIMENSIONAL NUMBERS OF YOUR SOUL AND VIBRATE IT TO STIR DEEP
MEMORIES AND HIGHER INTUITIVE TRUTHS FOR AWAKENING. THAT'S
WHY OUR MASTERS HAVE YOU PLAY MUSIC BEFORE YOUR LECTURES AND
LESSON PERIODS AND WHY THEY SOMETIMES SPECIFY EXACTLY WHAT
THESE SHALL BE."

HE REACHED OUT HIS HANDS TO US.

"FIRST J LET US ALL JOIN HANDS." WE DID SO. "I SHALL QUOTE
REVELATION 4:5-6 WHICH IS THE THEME OF MY TALK TONIGHT. ITS
TITLE IS; 'LOGOI AND THEIR WORLDS.'

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 54 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSONJHREE PAGE 9

"AND OUT OF THE THRONE PROCEEDED LIGHTENINGS AND THUNDERINGS


AND VOICES. AND THERE WERE SEVEN LAMPS BURNING BEFORE THE
THRONE J WHICH ARE THE SEVEN SPIRITS OF GOD. AND BEFORE THE
THRONE WAS A SEA·OF GLASS UNTO CRYSTAL." WE DROPPED HANDS
AND ST. GERMAIN BEGAN:

"I'M WEAVING YOU A PICTURE STORY TONIGHT OF HOW THE'SUPREME


BEING CLOTHED OUR SEEDS AND SHAPED THE OUTLINES FOR OUR
SPIRITUAL BODY FRAMES AND FORMATED OUR MIND-POINTS THROUGHOUT
OUR INCARNATIONS INTO THE SPIRIT EARTH'S ATMOSPHERES OF EARTH
GLOBE ONE.

"THE FIRST BORN FROM OUT OF GOD THE ABSOLUTE WAS FOHAT WE ARE
TOLD AND FROM OUT OF HIS LUMINOUS LIGHT THERE FLASHED SEVEN
RAYS OF COLOR WHICH TOUCH THE SOLUBLE BREATH OF GOD TO STIR
AND SWELL INTO DIVINE BUDS WHICH CAME FROM WITHINJ OUTWARD.
THESE SWELLED FOR THE ROOT OF LIFE WAS IN THEIR HEART. BE-
HOLD SEVEN SHINING ONES CAME FORTH AND FROM THEM AROSE NEW
HOSTS AND MULTITUDES. THESE THEN WOVE A WEB OF MIND AND
CREATIVE FORM. OTHERS SPUN THE LIGHTENING FIRES AND SET THE
THREADS OF DESTINY FOR READY SPINNING.

"THOSE LOGOI WHO WERE LEFT NOW GATHERED IN THE WISDOMS OF GOD
AND STRUNG THE BEADS OF LIFE INTO ITS STRANDS. THEN THE
SEPHIROTHAL TRIAD MOVED OUTWARD WITH THEIR TINY JEWEL CHARGES
AND EMBRACED THE INFINITE UNTIL THEIR WORK WAS DONE. NEXT J
THE SELF EXISTENT LORDS OF FLAMEJ THOSE CALLED THE SONS OF
FIRE. THESE FIERY LIONS NOW BECAME THE BUILDERS OF UNIVERSE
AND THEY CALLED FORTH THE SPHERES AND LED THE SPARKS OF LIFE
UPON THEIR SURFACE INTO CREATED NUMBERS OF FORMED TRIANGLES J
CUBES AND SQUARES. AND OUR TINY SEEDS BECAME SONS OF THE
FATHER OF LIGHTJ FOHAT J AND WE ARE COUNTLESS IN UNIVERSE.
THEN THE THRONESJ THE LORDS OF FIREJ TOOK CERTAIN MIND THOUGHTS
FROM THE PARENTS WITHIN THE SEVEN SONS OF FOHAT AND FORMED A
LOWER KINGDOM IN THE SIX DIRECTIONS OF SPACE AND FORMED
ANOTHER MOTHERLAND OF MERCY AND KNOWLEDGE AND CLOTHED ITS
REALM IN FORCES LIKE THE SUN. THIS BECAME THE SUN REALMS J
THE SIXTH REALM. (DIVINE SPIRIT)

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 55 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 10

"AT THE FINISH OF THEIR WORK J THE LOGO LORDS OF LIFE CAME
FORTH AND CRADLED TINY MAN WITHIN THEIR LOVE AND NOURISHED
THEM WITH WISDOM AND CLOTHED THEM IN THE RAYS FROM THE SEVEN
SONS OF FOHAT AND SET DOWN MANKIND'S PATTERN IN SEVEN REVOLV-
ING WHEELS WHICH NOW GAVE BIRTH IN THE PIERY DUST OF GOD'S
BREATH AND THE TINY MAN RAYS CAME FORTH AND THEIR IMAGES NOW
SPILLED INTO THE FIFTH REALM OF SPACE FROM OUT OF THE SIXTH.
THIS FIFTH REALM WAS THE ASTRAL J AND ALL THIS TIME THE ANGELOI
BRIAHS WERE THERE TO HELP THESE STATES OF MANKIND FOR AWAKENING.

"THUS J IT WAS THAT FROM OUT OF GOD THE ABSOLUTEJ EFFLUXED THE
MANSTREAM JEWELS AND THEIR FOHAT DEITY WHICH FATHERED THE
MANJ CHRIST. AND NOW THE GREAT WHEEL OF GOD BEGAN ITS CYCLIC
DIFFERENTIATIONS OF INVOLUTIONARY ACTION. THIS PERIODICAL
TRAVEL COMMENCED WHEN THE HIERARCHY OF THE BRIAH ANGELS JOINED
THE SERAPHIM AND CONTINUED AS THE LOGOI THRONES AND ARCHIA
PERFORMED AND COMPLETED THE REALMS. THEN THE CHERUBIM AND
ANGEL WORK WAS STARTED AND AFTER ALL WAS DONE IN THE FIRST
EARTH ROUND J COSMIC TIME SLEPT AS IT SLEEPS BETWEEN EVERY
INCARNATION ROUND OF EARTH.

"IN THE FIRST THREE ROUNDS OF EARTH'S INCARNATIONS IN UNIVERSE J


IT IS THE FEMALE MOTHER ASPECTS OF GOD WHICH PREDOMINATES AND
COVERS ALL OF UNIVERSE. BUT IN ROUND FOUR J THIS CHANGES AND
GOD'S MASCULINE ASPECTS POUR FORTH. THE FOURTH ROUND J OF
WHICH WE ARE EXPERIENCING NOW J IS A CRUCIAL ONE FOR ALL JEWEL
SEEDS AND ALL WOULD DO WELL TO REALIZE THIS FACT.

"UNTIL THIS FOURTH ROUND J WE WERE BEING CARRIED AND BOLSTERED


BY OUR LOGOI AND ANGEL ONES AND FROM THESE PREVIOUS CONSTANT
CONCATENATIONS OF CAUSES AND EFFECTS IN OUR FIRST EXCHANGES;
BOTH OUR LIFE-STREAMS WERE LINKING TOGETHER FROM THE RESULTS
OF THE HIGHER ONES' TEACHINGS AND LEARNINGS. THESE HIGHER
ONES ALSO EXPERIENCE JUST AS WE DO IN SEVEN STAGES OF EVOLUTION-
AL UNFOLDMENT. IN LEADING US INTO OUR NEEDED SEVEN MERITS OF
CONSCIOUSNESS J THEY J TOO J EXPAND THEIR OWN MERITS."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 56 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 11

WE WERE DRINKING IN HIS WORDS IN MENTAL WONDER.

"EVEN AS THE LAST SEED FROM OUR MAN STREAM JEWELS WAS COMPLET-
ING IN EARTH ROUND ONE~ THE CHRIST WAS AWAITING ENTRY INTO
EARTH ROUND Two. IT IS ALWAYS GOD'S BRIGHTEST JEWELS WHO
ENTER FIRST~ BEFORE THEIR LIFE-STREAMS. BEHIND THESE BRIGHT
SPARKS WE FOLLOW IN PARADE ACCORDING TO OUR EFFORTS. EVERY
LIFE-STREAM WILL HAVE A GOD FIGURE LIKE FOHAT. CHRIST IS
OURS~ AND HE ALSO HAS SEVEN SONS OF GOD BELOW HIM. AFTER
THESE COMES TWELVE HOLY ONES. THESE ARE OUR GREAT SAINTS~
SAGES AND HOLY MEN. IN THIS TOP REALM WILL BE FOUND THOSE
OF MENTAL GENIUS WHO SERVED EARTH AND HER PEOPLES UNSELFISHLY
AND CONSTRUCTIVELY.

"CLASS Two WILL CONSIST OF PERSONS~ WHO THROUGH TRIAL AND


ERROR~ HAVE CULTIVATED THEIR STAR POWERS AND JEWEL FIRES TO
BETTER THEMSELVES AND OTHERS. THESE ARE THEY WHO ARE WILLING
TO AWAKEN AND LEARN MORE THAN JUST MATTER'S WISDOMS. THESE
ARE THE INITIATES WHO KEEP THE FAITH AND EXPLORE THE DrMENSION-
LESS TRUTHS WHICH LIE BEHIND THE VEILS OF PRESENT IGNORANCE."

THESE WORDS THRILLED OUR SOULS.

"THE THIRD CLASS OF OUR MAN STREAM ARE THOSE WHO STILL LAG IN
EFFORTj THE NAIVE SOULS WHO PREFER ACCEPTANCE OF CUT AND
DRIED DOGMA AND STEEP THEMSELVES WITHIN THE PLEASURES OF
MATERIAL THINGS TO THE EXCLUSION OF EXPLORING LIFE IN ITS
FULLNESS."

LILY WAS EXAMINING THE SEVEN ROUNDS AND THE DIAMOND SYMBOL
STILL SHINING IN OUR MIDST. "I CAN SEE WHY YOU SAY THIS FOURTH
ROUND IS CRUCIAL TO OUR FUTURE. FROM THIS ROUND WE AGAIN
ASCEND UPWARD AND NOW BEING EGOS~ WE WILL BE ON OUR OWN IN
THOSE REALMS."

TIMOTHEOUS SPOKE. "THAT'S TRUE~ AS EGOS YOU EACH NOW DECIDE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 57 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THREE PAGE 12

FOR YOURSELVES} RATHER THAN BEING LED INTO THE LANES OF


EXPERIENCE WHICH CAN BENEFIT. HOWEVER} DO REALIZE YOUR
CHOICE CAN SERVE YOU AS WELL AS HARM YOU. FOR THOSE WHO
CHOOSE WISELY WILL HAVE CHOSEN TO CONTINUE STUDY UNDER HIGHER
BEINGS' LEADERSHIP} WHICH WHILE NOT A COMPULSORY OVERSHADOW-
ING AS IT WAS ON YOUR DOWNWARD INVOLUTIONARY TRIP} CAN STILL
BE A CHOSEN LEADERSHIP ON YOUR UPWARD EVOLUTIONAL PATH.
THE DOOR IS ALWAYS OPEN ON OUR SIDE. YOUR CHOICE DECIDES THE
ISSUE NOW."

"IT WOULD SEEM OUR FIRST THREE ROUNDS WERE PRETTY WELL TAKEN
CARE OF BY THE HIGHER ONES. YET THERE WAS NO MENTION OF
THE FLAME BEINGS' PART IN OUR INVOLUTION PERIOD. COULD YOU
TELL US WHY?" VIOLET ASKED.

ST. GERMAiN ANSWERED. "MAINLY BECAUSE THE FLAME BEINGS IN-


VOLUTION WORK WAS MORE OF A MECHANICAL ADJUSTING OF THE MAN-
STREAM'S ENERGY RATES TO SUIT EACH PERSON'S INDIVIDUAL PATT-
ERNS AS THESE WERE UNFOLDED. THEIR GREATEST WORK WAS IN THE
ASTRAL REALMS IN THE THIRD ROUND AND WITHIN THE EMOTIONAL
AREAS AND NERVE DIAGRAMS OF THE VARIED BODY FORMS. HOWEVER}
THEY WILL FIGURE IN A VERY LARGE WAY IN THE FIFTH AND NEXT
INCARNATION OF EARTH AND MAN BECAUSE IT WILL TAKE PLACE AS
DID THE TH1RD ROUND IN THE ASTRAL AND INTELLECTUAL SOUL
REGIONS. MAN WILL NOT AGAIN COME DOWN AS LOW AS EARTH IS
NOW IN MATTER ON THE FUTURE CYCLES OF HIS INCARNATIONS. IN
FACT} AFTER THIS FOURTH ROUND IS FINISHED} OUR LIFE-STREAM
WILL NOT RETURN AGAIN INTO THE MATTER REALMS UNTIL NEXI
UNIVERSE COMES FORTH. THEN MATTER WILL BE OUR PERMANENT
REALM WHEREIN WE WILL REMAIN AND ONLY COMMUNICATE WITH OTHER
REALMS OUTSIDE OUR OWN} VIA MIND-CONTACTS."

"DID I UNDERSTAND ALL REALMS ARE ALIKE IN HAVING THREE DIV-


ISIONS MADE UP OF TWELVE DIMENSIONS WHICH CARRY UP FROM ONE
TO SEVEN DEGREES OF CONSCIOUSNESS?" I ASKED.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 58 of 382
SERIES TWO PAGE 13
LESSON THREE

"RIGHT) ROSE) AND AFTER DEATH YOU TRAVEL UP THESE THREE DIV-
ISIONS AND INTO THE DIMENSIONS YOUR MENTAL PATTERNS CAN MAG-
NETIZE INTO) BUT NO PERSON AUTOMATICALLY VISITS ANY DIMENSION
THEIR SOUL MIND CANNOT ENCOMPASS. THERE ARE SIX LEARNING
PRINCIPLES WHICH A MIND MUST COVER TO INSURE THEIR UNION WITH
ALL SEVEN DEGREES. THESE SIX ARE LOWER AND HIGHER ASTRAL PRIN-
CIPLES) LOWER AND HIGHER SUN REALMS) AND LOWER AND HIGHER SPIRIT
REALM PRINCIPLES. So I'M SURE YOU CAN SEE THAT YOU MUST LEARN
MORE THAN JUST THE WISDOMS AND LAWS OF MATTER. OUR LESSONS
AND SESSIONS WITH YOU AND YOUR SEEKERS ARE FOR THE PURPOSE OF
RECALLING SOUL MEMORIES OF OLD) FOR BALANCING MATTER EXPERIENCES
OF EARTH AND IMPLANTING NEW IDEAS OF WHAT'S TO COME IN THE FUTURE.

"EACH PERSON HAS TWO PURPOSES FOR BEING IN UNIVERSE:

I. To UNCOVER THE REASON GOD CREATED YOU AND TO


DEVELOP AND USE ITS POWERS AND FORCES.

2. To GROW AND EVOLVE THE POTENTIALS WITHIN


YOUR JEWEL PATTERN.

"THE EXPLORING OF THESE WILL LEAD US DIRECTLY INTO THE NEXT


LESSON."

As TIMOTHEUS AND YOUNG ST. GERMAIN HELPED US TO OUR FEET) A


GLOWING STAR IN THE NIGHT SKY ABOVE SEEMED TO SUDDENLY EXPAND
IN A GLITTERING OF VIOLET COLOR WHICH SPIRALED DOWN FROM THE
SKY AND ENFOLDED US WITHIN ITS HARMONIOUS EMBRACE. ITS SUFFI-
CIENT ENERGIES CARRIED US SWIFTLY OUTWARD AND AWAY THROUGH
ETHERIC'S PLANES AND INTO THE BORDER VEILS WHERE LOVING ARMS
RECEIVED US.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 59 of 382
,
",

As I LOOK TO GOD AS THE SOURCE OF MY LIFEJ I AM


RENEWED AND ENRICHED IN WISDOM J SANCTIFIED IN
LOVE AND SET FREE.

KNOWLEDGE IS INDIVIDUALIZED IN ME WHEN THE TRUTH


REVEALS AND LIVES ITS SPIRITUAL MEANING IN THE 1
l

REALM OF REASON AND LOGIC. t

r
THIS KNOWLEDGE OF THE PAST ENRICHES MY MEMORY AND
IT INCREASES MY UNDERSTANDING OF THE UNIVERSE AND
MY FELLOW MAN.

AND So IT Is!

,============:::FI:=:~"",,-= .. --------==--=-"'"',....,--:--:-:====:::;:==.;:;;:::""-~,::::::-::,

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 60 of 382
(

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 61 of 382
(

~.'.' .....

~
...... .

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 62 of 382
SERIES TWO
·LESSON FOUR VIOLET LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON FOUR

"THE HIGH TOWER ROOM"

"FOR THOU BRINGEST CERTAIN STRANGE THINGS TO OUR EARS:


WE WOULD KNOW THEREFORE" WHAT THESE THINGS MEAN."
ACTS 17:20

WE WERE STANDING AT A DOOR" DEEP SET IN A SIDE WALL OF THE


CASTLE. FLAGSTONES" VELVETY WITH LICHEN MARKED A PATH BE-
HIND US" THEIR INTERSTICES TRAILED BETWEEN SHAGGY SHRUBS
OF RODODENDRON. ON THE OLD WALLS" GREEN IVY CLUNG. LIGHT
STREAMED OUT OF THE STAINED GLASS WINDOWS ON EACH SIDE OF
THE DOOR AS WE LINGERED IN THIS POINTED ARCH RECESS.

THE DOOR OPENED AND A QUIET WHITE ROBED NUN PASSED US IN-
SIDE WHERE WE WERE GREETED UNDER A SOARING VAULTED CEILING
BY MARGUERITE. BEHIND AND ABOVE HER HEAD HUNG A BALUSTRADE
OF CIRCLING GALLERY LOOKING LIKE A STIFF FLUTED COLLAR.
THERE WAS A SENSE OF UNUTTERABLE AGE EVERYWHERE" YET THIS
TWILIGHT CORRIDOR WAS RICH IN COLOR.

WE FOLLOWED ~~RGUERITE'S QUIET FOOTSTEPS UP THE WINDING


FLIGHT OF STAIRS AND CAME TO THE GALLERY ABOVE. HERE
r1ASTER OMAR AND GURU AWAITED. AFTER GREETINGS" THEY LED
US DOWN A LONG STONE HALL BARE OF ANY ORNAMENT OR CARPET.
AT ITS END"MARGUERITE LEFT US AND WE PROCEEDED UP CIRCLING
STONE STAIRS BEHIND OMAR AND GURU FOR WHAT SEEMED A GREAT
HEIGHT. EVER UPWARD WE TROD" CAREFULLY PLACING OUR FEET
ON ITS WELL WORN STONE. SUNLIGHT LIGHTED THE SPIRALING
WAY HERE AND THERE THROUGH NARROW OBLONG WINDOWS. AT LAST
WE ENTERED A CIRCULAR ROOM" BRIGHT WITH LIGHT AND COLOR
AFTER THE DIMNESS OF THE STAIRS.

(£) REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 63 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 2

THERE WAS AN ENORMOUS EMPTY FIREPLACE ACROSS FROM US. UPON


THE GRANITE WALLS ON EACH SIDE) TWO ANCIENT BANNERS GLOWED.
ONE AN ORIFLAMME OF RICH CRIMSON AND GOLD) THE OTHER ROYAL
BACKGROUND WITH SMALL WHITE DESIGNS AND EDGED IN HUNTERS
GREEN.

A COOLING) TEASING BREEZE DRIFTED IN THE TOWER WINDOWS. As


WE ENTERED INTO THE ROOM) WE NOTICED A HUGE CELTIC CROSS OF
WOOD) CARVED IN MYSTERIOUS LETTERS. OVERHEAD THE CIRCULAR
VAULTED ROOF HELD A CAST OF PR IMROSE LI GHT REFLECTED FROM THE
YELLOW CARPET UNDERFOOT. THE ROOM SMELLED OF INCENSE AND
AGED SUN-KISSED STONE AND NOW AND THEN OF SEA SPRAY. WE COULD
HEAR FAINT STRAINS OF A BRAHMS LOVE SONG FILTERING UP THE
STAIRWAY AND WONDERED IF MARGUERITE WAS PLAYING THE PIANO BELOW.

WHAT A LOVELY ROUND ROOM THIS WAS) SO COMFORTABLY FURNISHED)


YET SO REMOTE AND MEDIEVAL; ITS ATMOSPHERE SO PEACEFUL.

IT WAS THEN THAT ST. GERMAIN JOINED US AGAIN. NOT MUCH HAD
BEEN SAID TO RECORD UP TO NOW. QUIETLY) WE CHOSE OUR PLACES
AMONG THE RICHLY BROCADED DIVANS AND CHAIRS. TINY IVORY
FIGURINES AND GLEAMING JADE SHARED TABLE SPACE WITH FRAGRANT
FLOWERS GRACEFUL IN ANCIENT PAINTED CHINA EWERS AND BOWLS. I
LONGED FOR TIME TO MEDITATE HERE ALONE AND KNEW THE DAY WOULD
COME WHEN I SHOULD BE ALLOWED ITS PRIVILEGE.

INSTANTLY THE ROOM BECAME INFUSED IN BRIGHT WHITE LIGHT AND


AT ITS CENTER TIMOTHEOUS MATERIALIZED. AT FIRST WE SAW ONLY
THE COLOR WHEELS OF HIS SEVEN CHAKRAS. THEIR JEWEL COLORS
SPARKLED AND SPUN) THEN RAINBOW HUES BROKE OFF LIKE MISTY
STREAMS OF GAUZE AND INTERTWINED AND WOVE HIS ASTRAL FORM
BEFORE OUR SPELLBOUND EYES. ALWAYS BEFORE ALL SUN BEINGS
HAD BEEN WHOLLY FORMED WHEN SEEN. THIS ENTRANCE FROM THE
SUN REGIONS TO ASTRAL REALLY IMPRESsED US WITH THE SUBSTANCE
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THESE UNIVERSE REGIONS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 64 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 3.

MASTER OMAR AROSE AND WALKED OVER TO TIMOTHEOUS AND PRONAMED


BEFORE HIM. THEN THIS BEAUTIFUL SUN MAN BEING PLACED HIS
RIGHT HAND IN BLESSING UPON OMAR'S BOWED HEAD. NEXTJ GURU
AND ST. GERMAIN RECEIVED BLESSINGS. WHEN IT WAS OUR TURN
AND HE PLACED HIS RIGHT HAND. OVER MY THOUSAND PETAL LOTUS
CHAKRA J I FELT MYSELF COMING AWAKE AS THOUGH FOR THE FIRST
TIME IN MY WHOLE EXISTENCE. SOMETHING WAS BORN WITHIN MY
CONSCIOUSNESS. LILY AND VIOLET VERIFIED A LIKE SENSATION
LATER WHEN WE WERE BACK IN MATTER AND COULD EXCHANGE OUR
EXPERIENCES.

OMAR NOW OPENED OUR LESSON PERIOD. "As WE UNRAVEL THE MYS-
TERIES OF OUR LIFE-STREAM BEGINNINGS IN THIS UNIVERSE J THREE
FACTS WILL BE IMPORTANT FOR KEEPING IN MIND.

1. THAT THE WHOLE OF UNIVERSE' BASIC SUBSTANCE WHEELS


AROUND IN A COUNTER-CLOCKWISE FASHION FROM RIGHT
TO LEFT DURING ITS EXISTENCE.

2. THAT THE GALAXIES OF UNIVERSE DO VARY IN THEIR SPIN


DIRECTIONS J SOME RIGHT AND SOME LEFT.

3. THE ZODIACAL SIGNS WHICH ARE ALWAYS FOUND IN ANY


SOLAR SYSTEM WILL ALWAYS MOVE IN OPPOSITION TO THE
SOLAR SYSTEM DIRECTION. IN THE CASE OF OUR SOLAR
SYSTEM IN OUR GAlAXY J IT MOVES CLOCKWISE AND OUR
ZODIACAL WHEEL MOVES COUNTER-CLOCKWISE.

"ON EVERY LEVEL REGION OF UNIVERSE J ITS BEINGS HAVE OVER


THEM A BEING SIMILAR TO OUR CHRIST. THIS LORD RULES OVER
ALL IN THEIR REGION. IN THE SEVENTH REGIONJ THIS LORD'S
NAME IS FOHAT AND HE RULES OVER THE THREE SECTIONS WHICH
MAKES UP THE SEVENTH REGION. THE LOGOI ARE KNOWN AS THE
'SHINING ONES.' THE SECTIONS ARE MADE UP OF BEINGS NAMED
THRONESJ SERAPHIM AND CHERUBIM. THEY ARE THE BUILDERS OF
OUR FORMS; BODY J MIND AND SOUL AND THEY SET DOWN THE PATTERNS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 65 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 4
FOR ALL OUR EXTERNAL FORMS WHICH WE ASSUME DURING OUR SEVEN
ROUNDS OF INCARNATING UPON THE PLANET EARTH. THIS LOGOI
SPIRITUAL TRIAD IS OUR PRESENT FOUNDATION OF SELF. THESE
THREE SECTIONS OF MATRIARCHS ABOUND IN THE FEMALE MOTHER
PRINCIPLES AND AS THEY BALANCE AND BRING US INTO FORM~ THEY
ARE ASSISTED BY FLAME LORDS FROM THE LOWER SUN FLAME REGIONS.
THESE BEINGS HOLD MALE PRINCIPLES OF GOD. ANGEL BEINGS FROM
THE ASTRAL REGIONS ALSO WORK WITH THESE TWO HIGHER BEINGS.
THUS~ THREE DIFFERENT ENERGY FORCES~ COMBINE TO BRING FORTH
OUR BEGINNING MANIFESTATIONS IN UNIVERSE."

OMAR SMILED AT OUR ERNEST EXPRESSIONS.

"EACH LOGOI~ FLAME BEING AND ANGELOI PERFORMS THEIR UNIQUE


ACHIEVEMENTS IN FRUCTIFYING OUR NEW SPIRIT SEEDS AS EACH
-
DEPOSITS WITHIN A REGION FOR EXPERENCING. OUR PEDIGREE
DESCENDS FROM ALL THOSE ABOVE US. THE SERAPHIM PROPAGATED
OUR WHOLE SEED POD; ARCHANGELS ENGENDERED' IT INTO A FULL -
SPIRITUAL DEVELOPMENT. THE FLAME LORDS BOUND ITS SEPARATE
INNER SEEDS INTO DIMENSION PATTERNS. WE SHALL CALL THIS
FINISHED WORK OUR BLUEPRINT. IN ILLUSTRATION #2 OF THE
LAST LESSON IS THE DIAGRAM FOR THESE LIFE BEINGS WHO LAID
DOWN OUR GEOMETRICAL ENERGY PATTERNS.

"NEXT~OBSERVE THE THRONES. WHERE FIRST THE SERAPHIMS~


AND BRIAH ARCHANGELS WERE THE BUILDERS OF OUR EXTERNAL FORMS~
THRONES NOW IMPLANTED SPIRITUAL FORCES INTO THE FRAMEWORK OF
OUR GOD MIND POINT. THRONES ARE KNOWN AS 'DIVINE FLAMES OF
GOD.' THEY GAVE OF THEIR OWN INNER HOLY FIRES AND LIGHTENING
LIKE FORCES TO SUPPORT OUR FIRST MIND-SPARKS. WE OWE TO THE
THRONES OUR PRESENT QUALITIES OF MIND. THRONES ALSO LATER
TAKE UP THE DUTIES OF MANAGING OUR KARMIC DESTINIES. BUT THIS
DOES NOT TAKE PLACE UNTIL AFTER WE BECOME 'EGO BEINGS.'

THRONES ALSO ARE THEY WHO HOLD THE RECORDS OF EACH INDIVIDUAL'S
PROGRESS AND DEVELOPMENT. THE FLAME LORDS OF MOVEMENT ASSIST
IN THIS EARTH ROUND ONE BY WEAVING EACH 'SEED' A GEOMETRICAL

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 66 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 5

PATTERN FOR THE PURPOSE OF GUIDING ITS FUTURE POSITIONS WHEN


IT COMES INTO THE NEXT TWO EARTH INCARNATIONS. THIS GEOMET-
RICAL ENERGY PATTERN WILL RESPOND TO THE LAW OF CAUSE AND
EFFECT. WHEN THE FLAME LORDS OF MOVEMENT ARE JOINED BY
ARCHAI TIME ANGELSJ THEIR COMBINED WORK ENSURES THE 'SEED'
MAXIMUM TIME UPON EARTH'S VARIOUS ROUNDS FOR THE ACCOMPLISH-
ING OF EACH INDIVIDUAL'S GROWTH.

"THE LOGOI CHERUBMIM ARE UNIVERSE' HARMONIZERS. THESE LORDS


EXAMINE ALL 'SEED' PATTERNS AND TIE THE CONNECTED PROGRESS-
IONS TOGETHER TO BRING ALL INTO A WHOLENESS OF DESIGN. THEIR
ACTION NOW INSURES THE 'SEED' OF ABILITY FOR PENETRATING DOWN
DEEPER INTO UNIVERSE SUBSTANCE J AND AN ACTION OCCURS FOR THIS
'SEED' AND SETS IT UPON THE ROAD TO 'BECOMING.'

"TOGETHERJ CHERUBIM AND FLAME LORDS OF WISDOM J NOW CREATE THE


FIRST LINK IN THIS SEED'S SILVER CORD CHAIN. OTHER LINKS
WILL BE ADDED IN EARTH'S ROUND TWO AND THREE AND IN THE BE-
GINNING TIME CYCLES OF EARTH'S ROUND NUMBER FOUR J BEFORE THE
'SEED' ATTAINS TO EGOHOOD. THESE LINKS AND CHAINS J AS THEY
GROW AND EXPAND WILL BE WHAT CONNECTS US WITH ALL OF OUR
EVENTUAL SEVENFOLD BODY FORMS OF UNIVERSE. ANGELS HAVE THE
DUTY TO SUPERVISE THE CONDITIONS OF OUR CHAIN LINK OR SILVER
CORD J AND THIS DUTY NEVER CEASES WHILE WE REMAIN IN UNIVERSE.

"THUS J THE PICTURE EMERGES OF LOGOI J THRONESJ SERAPHIM AND


CHERUBIM AND THEIR FLAME LORDS AND ANGELOI HELPERS J SETTING
UP OUR EXTERNAL CREATED FORMS. PLEASE SEE THAT THEY DO THIS
IN OBEDIENCE TO THE GOD DIAGRAM ALREADY CREATED IN OUR 'SEED'
BY GOD THE ABSOLUTE."

WE EXAMINED THIS INFORMATION A MOMENT. THEN DEAR GURU AROSE


AND APPROACHED US. HE PLACED HIS RIGHT FOREFINGER IN THE
CENTER OF OUR THIRD EYE CHAKRA AND A BRILLIANT WHITE ENERGY
FORCE STREAMED ALL THROUGH OUR ASTRAL FORMS. THEN HE TOOK
UP THE LESSON.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 67 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 6

"LET US EXAMINE EARTH'S FIRST INCARNATION ROUND; ITS ATMOS-


PHERE AND TIME CYCLES. THIS FIRST SPIRIT INCARNATION OF
EARTH INTO UNIVERSE WAS VERY REAL) EVEN THOUGH ITS ATMOSPHERE
WAS BUT A REFLECTED WARMTH PROCEDING FROM THE FIRE FORCES
WITHIN THE THRONES. THE TINY 'SEED CHILDREN' COULD NOT SEE
EXTERNALLY FOR THEIR SPIRITUAL BODY FORMS WERE NOT YET CREATED.
THEY EXPERIENCED AN INNER MIND-POINT KNOWING) AS IT WAS INTER-
PRETED TO THEM BY THE PARTICULAR UNIVERSE BEINGS WORKING ON
THEM AT TIMES IN THIS FIRST EARTH STOP IN ITS JOURNEY THROUGH
UNIVERSE DURING ROUND ONE. OUR 'SEEDS' WERE AS YET UNTRAINED
MIND-POINTS AND OF ONLY A VERY DIM CONSCIOUSNESS. THE SEPHARO-
THAL TRIADS AND BRIAH ANGELS COMBINED TO CREATE A PYRAMID
UNISON FORCE AND THIS FORCE NOW STARTED A PROCESS OF ACTIVA-
TIONS IN EACH MIND-SPARK.

"IT TOOK MANY AGES OF COSMIC TIME BEFORE OUR SPARKS QUALIFIED
TO ENTER WITH EARTH IN HER SECOND INCARNATING ROUND.

"OUR LOGOI MOTHERS LEND ED THEIR VIEWPOINTS TO OUR MIND SPARK


PATTERNS TO ACHIEVE THIS QUALIFYING) AND WORKED WITH US AND
WITHDREW WITH US WHEN WE LEFT EARTH FOR OUR REST AND RECAPI-
TULATION TIMES IN PURE SPIRIT. DURING INCARNATION ONE) EARTH
ALSO RE-ENTERED PURE SPIRIT) SEVEN TIMES AND KNEW REST AND
RECAPITULATION PERIODS) BEFORE HER FINAL TIME CAME TO END
THAT INCARNATION. WE CALL THESE PERIODS OF REST) EARTH'S
SLEEP TIMES.

"EARTH CYCLES OF REINCARNATING WERE ON A MUCH SLOWER AND


LONGER COSMIC TIME RANGE THAN OUR 'SEEDS' REINCARNATION
TIME PERIODS. WHILE BOTH EARTH AND THE MANSTREAM SEEDS
WERE EXPERIENCING IN AND OUT OF STATE OF PURE SPIRIT IN THEIR
SLEEP STATE; THEIR TIME ELEMENTS WERE VERY DIFFERENT; JUST
AS THEY ARE NOW DIFFERENT IN EXISTENCE SPANS IN MATTER'S
REGIONS. HOWEVER) THE WORK BEING DONE FOR PLANET AND FOR
THE MAN 'SEEDS' IS PRACTICALLY IDENTICAL. ITS WORK BEING
THE BASIC FORMATIONS OF THEIR SPIRIT) SOUL ASTRAL AND PHYSICAL
BLUEPRINT STRUCTURES."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 68 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 7
THIS SOUNDED VERY INTERESTING TO US.

"You MAY BE INTERESTED TO KNOW OUR FATHER CREATOR DID NOT


LAY DOWN ANY NARROW STRICTURES OR RULES FOR CREATING THESE
BASIC SPIRITUAL "FORMS. HE LEFT IT UP TO THESE ELDER CHILDREN
OF HIS TO GOVERN THEIR CREATIONS FROM OUT OF THEIR ~ LEARNED
WISDOMS. THESE HIGHER ONES HAVE BEEN ACCUMULATING "WITHIN
THEIR MIND PATTERNS AND EXPERIENCES AS THEY TRAVELED AND LIVED
IN PAST UNIVERSE TIMES IN PREVIOUS COSMIC EONS. THIS IS A
GOD BASIC RULE. ALL LIFE LEARNS FROM THOSE WHO HAVE GONE
BEFORE THEM AND IN TURN TEACH THOSE WHO ELECT TO FOLLOW.
THUS J THE LAW OF INDIVIDUAL 'FREE CHOICE' FOLLOWS EVERYWHERE
AND ON ALL REGIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF UNIVERSE. RIGHT NOW J WE
ARE ALL USING MIND QUALITIES LAID INTO OUR PARTICULAR PATTERNS
BY THESE HIGHER ONES."

WE COULDN'T WAIT TO HEAR MORE.

"EVERYONE WHO INCARNATES INTO MATTER AND UPON EARTH TODAY J


ACQUIRED THEIR PARTICULAR MIND ADAPTABILITIES IN EARTH'S
FIRST INCARNATION. THE LOGOI SHINING ONES AND THE FIREY
LIONS AND THE BLESSED HARMONIZERS DID THEIR VERY BEST FOR
EACH ONE OF US. YET EVER REMEMBERJ NO HIGHER BEING OR FELLOW
PERSON CAN DO FOR US WHAT WE REFUSE TO ACCEPT. GOOD CANNOT
BE FORCED UPON ANYONE J NOR CAN EVIL. WEJ OURSELVES J HAVE
THE FINAL SAY HERE. OPPORTUNITY J LIKE OPPOSITION J COMES
FROM WITHIN OURSELVES. BLESS YOU AND MAY THE POWERS OF OUR
LORD CHRIST AND HIS SEVEN LORDS REST IN YOUR HEARTS."

WE NOW TOOK A SHORT BREAK. ST. GERMAIN HAD US ARISE AND TOOK
US TO THE TOWER WINDOWS. WAY BELOW THE CASTLE WALLS AND
CLIFFSIDE LAY THE GOLDEN SANDS AND WET EBON ROCKS. THE SEA
WAS RESTLESS IN A STEADY WEAVING OF BLUE AND TURQUOISE GREENJ
THE SURF WHITE AS RUFFLES OF LACE. WE WENT FROM WEST TO
THE SOUTH WINDOW. HERE BELOW US THE TOY VILLAGE SPREAD J WITH

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 69 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 8

TINY PEOPLE BUSILY ABOUT THEIR AFFAIRS~ BEHIND AND RAISING


GENTLY UPWARD WERE GREEN MEADOWS BACKED BY GENTLE LAVENDER
FOOTHILLS. TOWERING OVER THEIR SMOOTH SURFACES~ MIGHTY
PEAKS OF PURPLE~ SPORTED SNOWY~ SPARKLING CROWNS. THE EAST
TOWER WINDOW OVERLOOKED GREAT GARDEN AREAS SPANGLED WITH
ASSORTED GAZABOS AND GREEK COLUMNED MARBLE RETREATS WHOSE
CONNECTING BROOKS HELD TINY ARCHED BRIDGES. HERE AND THERE
BELOW US A POND PUNCTUATED ITS HIGHLIGHTS LIKE A HIDDEN GEM
FRINGED IN A FUR OF TREES. FROM OUR NORTH VIEW~ THE CASTLE
ROAD WOUND AMONG ROLLING HILLS OF TALL PINES~ ALL MARCHING
DOWN TOWARD THE BEACH EDGE. ST. GERMAIN POINTED OUT ROOF
TOPS~ DENOTING WHERE MANY OF OUR SOUL FAMILY LIVES. THIS
WAS OUR FIRST VIEW OF ALL DIRECTIONS SURROUNDING THE CASTLE.
ITS LANDS EXTENDED AS FAR AS WE COULD SEE.

REFRESHEb~ WE RETURNED TO OUR PLACES. ST. GERMAIN WAS TO


COMPLETE OUR LESSON.

"THE TWELVE GREAT STREA~1S OF LIFE OVER MAN"

"WITHIN THE THREE REGIONS ABOVE OUR MATTER REALMS~ THERE ARE
TWELVE ORDERS OF BEINGS WHO GUIDE AND WORK AND OVERSHADOW OUR
YOUNGEST MANSTREAM OF LIFE. You COULD SAY OUR HUMANITY HAS
TWELVE PARTNERS~ WHICH WE CAN CALL UPON DURING ALL THE SEVEN
ROUNDS OF OUR EXPERIENCING AS WE TRAVEL UNIVERSE. THEN WE
ALSO HAVE OUR 'MANBEING' TEACHERS AND LEADERS NOW AT THIS
FOURTH INCARNATION TIME~ SO NO PERSON IS EVER REALLY ALONE ON
THIS UNIVERSE PATHWAY.

"THOSE OF THESE TWELVE ORDERS OVER OUR MATTER REALM LEND


THEIR INFLUENCES IN THE AREAS OF OUR SELF FORMS AND MIND
FORMS WHEREIN THEY CREATED THEM IN THE FIRST THREE EARTH
ROUNDS. OFTEN EARTH MAN IS UNAWARE THAT IT IS THE HIGHER
ONES' ENERGY WHICH AIDS OUR FLOW AND GIVES ASSISTANCE FOR
NEW MIND GOVERNINGS AND PERSONAL SELF RELIANCES~ YET SO IS
THE CASE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 70 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 9

"WE WILL HAVE NO TROUBLE LOCATING THESE HI~HER BEINGS DWELL-


ING PLACES IN UNIVERSE. THEY LIE WITHIN THE ATMOSPHERES OF
CERTAIN OF THE HEAVENS CONSTELLATIONS. THEIR BODY FORMS ARE
·THE STARS AND PLANETS THAT WE LOOK UPON EACH NIGHT. THE
TWELVE ORDERS WHO DEAL WITH QllR SOLAR MANSTREAM DWELL IN THE
TWELVE CONSTELLATION SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC. THERE ARE OTHER
CONSTELLATIONS INHABITED AND WORKING AT MANY OTHER TASKS
PERTAINING TO THE OPERATING OF UNIVERSE. As TIMOTHEOUS TOLD
YOU J THESE VARIED ATMOSPHERES WITH THEIR PARTICULAR ORB BODY-
FORMS J EACH RESTS WITHIN ITS HARMONIZING DIMENSIONS AND VIBRA-
TORY ENERGIES." WE WERE LISTENING INTENTLY; SOFT GENTLE
STRAINS OF MUSIC WERE MAKING A PLEASANT BACKGROUND DESIGN FOR
ST. GERMAIN'S THEME.

"THERE ARE FOUR BASIC REGIONS ABOVE MATTER AND EACH ONE HAS
THREE MAIN DIVISIONS OR ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY LEVELS. IN THE
MATTER REGION J THE ETHERIC INVISIBLE REALMS ARE THE HIGHEST.
IT IS SELDOM REALLY NOTED UNLESS AN EARTH PERSON HAS OPENED
THEIR PSYCHIC SIGHT SENSES. THE MIDDLE DIVISION YOU ARE NOW
EXPERIENCING IN YOUR DAILY EARTH LIFE. THERE IS A LOWER SUB
STRATA WHERE CERTAIN OF EARTH'S SUB-SPECIES SHARE. DIVISIONS
SUCH AS THESE THREE WILL BE FOUND IN EVERY REGION OF UNIVERSE."

"ARE THESE CONSTELLATIONS SIMILAR TO WHAT WE CALL OUR SOLAR


SYSTEM?" LILY ASKED.

"THEY HAVE A SIMILARITY J LILY J BUT CONSTELLATIONS CONTAIN


MANY MORE STAR SUNS. ACTUALLY J THEY ARE MUCH MORE LIKE A
GALAXY IN SIZE. A CONSTELLATION CONTAINS MANY SUNS AND
STARS AND PLANETS AND OTHER SPACE SUBSTANCES. THEY ARE CON-
TAINED IN HUGE GALAXY AREAS J JUST AS OUR INDIVIDUAL SUN SYS-
TEM IS NOW CONTAINED IN OUR GALAXY."

"DID THE WHITE GIANTS BRING THE ZODIAC WISDOMS TO MAN WHEN
THEY ARRIVED?" ASKED VIOLET.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 71 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 10

"YES J VIOLETJ AMONG THEIR WISDOMS WAS ALL WE ARE TEACHING


AND A GREAT DEAL MORE. MANKIND IS NOT YET READY FOR ALL THAT
WAS KNOWN TO EVOLVED EARLY MAN. ONLY NOW IN MOVING INTO THE
NEW SPACE AREAS OF THIS NEW AQUARIAN AGE J IS HUMANITY LEAV-
ING A LONG PERIOD OF SPIRITUAL DARKNESS OF WHICH THE 'MIDDLE
AGES' OF YOUR PRESENT HISTORY WAS THE EPICENTER."

"SO ALL THIS WHICH WE ARE BEING TAUGHT WAS ALSO KNOWN BY THE
ANCIENT HOLY ONES OF THE MAGI ORDER AND CAME FROM THE WHITE
GIANTS?" I INQUIRED.

"EXACTLY J ROSE J THE TWELVE ORDERS OF THE ZODIAC WERE KNOWN


AS THE HOME AREAS OF THE 'TEACHERS OF HEAVEN' AND THEIR WIS-
DOMS WERE PASSED DOWN THROUGH SAGE TEACHERS J AND WAS IN SOME
CASES J SAFELY CONCEALED IN UNDERGROUND ROOMS AND MUCH IS
STILL SAFELY HIDDEN THERE IN VARIOUS PLACES OF EARTH AWAITING
THE PERMISSION FROM HIGHER POWERS TO BE BROUGHT FORTH INTO
THE LIGHT.

"THE SOULS OF EARTH TODAY WHO WERE IN ANCIENT TIMES AMONG


THE INITIATES OF OLD J WILL BE THEY WHO NOW INTUITIVELY COMP-
REHEND TRUTHS WHENEVER THESE ARE ENCOUNTERED.

"ALL GOD'S TRUTH IS EVER IN HARMONY WITH ITS FACTS NO MATTER


WHERE FOUND OR FROM WHOM IT IS BEING REVEALED. FOR GOD TRUTH
ALWAYS COMES THROUGH PREPARED CHANNELS. IT'S NEVER AN IN-
VOLUNTARY THING OR A SPORADIC THING. CHANNELS ARE NOT MEDIUMS.
THEY ARE PREPARED INSTRUMENTS AND TEACHERS USED BY ADVANCED
MEMBERS OF OUR OWN LIFE-STREAM J WHO ARE NOW IN SUN AND ASTRAL
REALMS AND ANGELS. CHANNELS ARE NOT PROPHETS. A PROPHET
IS A HIGHLY EVOLVED HOMAN WHOM THE LOGOI AND FLAME BEINGS
WARN REGARDING COMING EVENTS. WE HAVE THREE DEGREES OF
PSYCHIC UNFOLDMENT HERE:

1. PROPHET IS THE HIGHEST MAN CAN ATTAIN TO IN EARTH'S


ROUND FOUR.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 72 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 11

2. CHANNELS ARE INTELLECTUAL MIND COMMUNICATORS AND


IT REQUIRES AN ELABORATE SYSTEM OF ENERGY POWERS
AND LIFE-BEINGS FROM ALL THREE HIGHER REGIONS TO
ENSURE THE STEADY LONG DRAWN OUT CONNECTING OPERA-
TIONS FOR CHANNEL CONTACT.

3. A MEDIUMISTIC CONTACT IS OFTEN JUST A TEMPORARY


RAMDOM LINK WITH SOULS OF THE LOWER ASTRAL REALMS
FOR SUSTAINING COMFORT BETWEEN EARTH FAMILY MEMBERS
OR CONTACTS WITH ROVING ASTRAL SOULS IN NEED OF
DIRECTION AND HELP. THE HIGHLY EVOLVED MEDIUM
DOES PLAY AN IMPORTANT ROLE IN MANKIND'S EXPERIENCES
AND MANY DO BRING FORTH IMPORTANT PHENOMENA."

"You FEEL WE SHOULD BE AWARE THERE ARE THREE DIMENSIONS EVEN


HERE IN OUR PSYCHIC RECEPTION J THEN?"

"DEFINITELY J VIOLET J AND THE MORE YOU COME TO UNDERSTAND THE


HISTORY OF COSMOGONY AND HOW ITS DIMENSIONS CONTRIBUTE TO
MANKIND FROM INNER WISDOMS J THE QUICKER YOU'LL UNCOVER YOUR
OWN MISSIONS. You SEE J THESE HIGHER MIND AND INNER WISDOMS
HOLD CONTENTS WHICH COVER MANY THOUSANDS OF BILLIONS OF YEARS.
THESE IDEAS ACCUMULATED FROM THE GENERATIONS OF GOD'S PREVIOUS
CHILDREN. THESE PRECEDED OUR MANSTREAM AND DID SO FROM A FOR-
MER UNIVERSE. ALL OF US LIVING NOW HAVE A SPECIAL MISSION TO
PERFORM FOR THE FATHER. ALL OF US WERE CREATED FOR A SPECIFIC
PURPOSE AND PERFORMANCE IN HIS GREAT PLAN."

ST. GERMAIN LOOKED AT US WITH A TWINKLING EYE AND COMMENTED.

"IT SEEMS RATHER LUDICROUS NOW J DOES IT NOT J TO STILL MAINTAIN


EARTH MAN AND HIS CONSCIOUSNESS AS THE ONLY INTELLIGENCE IN
UNIVERSE?"

WE COULD AGREE SO I ASKED: "IF THE TWELVE SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC


ARE OVER US IN OUR TRAVELS OF INCARNATIONS J WHERE DO THE PLAN-
ETS COME INTO THIS PICTURE?"

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 73 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOUR PAGE 12

"I'M ABOUT TO MAKE YOU A GRAPH OF THEIR ORDER FROM FOHAT


DOWN TO MAN AND EXPLAIN SOME OF THE CONNECTIONS."

WE WATCHED AS HE PRODUCED ILLUSTRATION #1. "AT ITS TOP WE


HAVE FOHAT J AN ANDROGONOUS BEING OF TRIAD TRIANGLE WHOLENESS.
FROM HIMSELF HE BEGAT SEVEN ANDROGONOUS SONS. THESE SEVEN
SONS ARE GODS IN THEIR OWN RIGHT J YET STILL SUBJECT TO THEIR
PARENT J FOHAT. THE SEVEN SONS OF FOHAT BEGAT FROM OUT OF
THEMSELVES COUNTLESS LOGOI BEINGS.

"WHEN FOHAT BEGAT THE SEVEN SONS J HE PLACED THEM INTO UNIVERSE
WITHIN AN AREA OF HIGH ENERGY FOR THE PURPOSE OF THEIR POPULA-
TING THE PURE SPIRIT REALMS. THIS THEY DID AND SENT THEIR
OFFSPRING INTO THREE DISTINCT SECTIONS WITHIN THE PURE SPIRIT
REALMS AND ALL THESE LAY UPON A SIMILAR VIBRATORY LEVEL OF
DIMENSIO~.

"THE SEVEN SONS OF FOHATJ EACH TOOK FOR THEMSELVES AN AREA OF


PURE SPIRIT WHICH WE CALL IN OUR SOL'S SOLAR SYSTEM J THE
GREAT BEAR CONSTELLATION. THE LOGO PROGENY MAGNETIZED DOWN
INTO THEIR THREE RESPECTIVE SECTIONS AND WERE KNOWN AS THRONES J
SERAPHIM AND CHERUBIM. THESE GREAT VARIOUS CONSTELLATIONS
CONTAINS A SPIRAL NEBULA HOLE OR DOORWAY THROUGH WHICH PASS
NOT ONLY THE LOGO CHILDREN OF THE SEVEN SONS J BUT THE FLAME
BEINGS J ANGELOI AND MANKIND ALSO COME DOWN AND PASS THROUGH
ITS PORTALS FROM OUT OF DIVINE SPIRIT. REMEMBERJ WE ARE REF-
ERING NOW TO ONLY THOSE WHOSE ASSIGNMENT IS IN SOL'S SOLAR
SYSTEM. THOSE GOING TO OTHER SOLAR SYSTEMS IN THE GALAXY
WILL PASS THROUGH OTHER CONSTELLATION DOORS.

"IN LESSONS 17 AND 18 OF SERIES ONE J YOU LEARNED THE PLEIADES


CONSTELLATION OF TAURUS HOLDS OUR SOLAR SYSTEM'S DOORWAY OUT
OF UNIVERSE AND BACK TO GOD. NOW J LET'S GO BACK A MOMENT.

"SEE THAT THE SEPHIROTHAL TRIADJ ALL DWELL IN THREE ZODIACAL


SIGNS LEO J VIRGO AND LIBRA FORCES. THE UNIVERSE WHICH PRECEDED

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 74 of 382
GOD REGION. JFWELCASES RFMAJN HERE.
c u S P 8 E T 'd E ENG 00 AND U N I V E RS E-

PUR E SF I R I T' TOP R. EA Ltv!

REALM.

S EVE N SONS
OFF 0 H A i.
o
ALL MANSTREAM SEEDS SEPHEROTHAL TRIAD. THE
GRAVITATE TO ONE OF SECTION WILL BE ALREADY
THE SEVEN SONS.
LATER IT IS SENT
o WITHIN THE SEED'S GEO-
METRICAL IDENTIFICATION
ON INTO ITS PARTICULAR SIGNATURE.

Q
CONSTELLATION GREAT BEAR MID F\ EA L M.
MAN SEEDS PASS INTO ONE OF THEY ARE SENT TO~ ARE
THE BELOW SECTIONS THROUGH ALL MATRIARCHAL AND
THIS CONSTELLATION DOORWAY. REMAIN THE SEED ENTITY'S
THE LOGO BEINGS OF THE SECTION PERMANENT GUIDES THROUGH
ALL SEVEN EARTH INCARNA-
TIONS.
SEPHEROTHAL - LOWE R

THRONES. SERAPHIM. CHt~UBtM.


LE O. V I R. GO. L I BRA.

ALL MAN SEEDS BORN INTO ONE OF THESE SECTIONS WILL IDENTIFY WITH THEIR LOGO
GUIDES. THESE WILL HARMONI E WITH YOUR JEWEL VIBR TIONS.

ALL OF THE MANSTREAM WILL~ OWEVER~ BE BORN INTO E RTH'S FOURTH INCARNATION
JNDER ALL TWELVE SIGNS OF T E ZODIAC FOR EXPERIENCING AND LEARNING.

ILLUSTRATION l~ LESSON 4

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 75 of 382
SERIES TWO PAGE 13
LESSON FOUR

THIS PRESENT ONE HAD A TOP TRIAD WHICH GENERATED TAURUS)


GEMINI AND CANCER, THE TOP TRIAD OF NEXT UNIVERSE WILL
BE SCORPIO) SAGITTARIUS AND CAPRICORN, THE ZODIACAL WHEELS
ARE EVER TURNING INTO UNIVERSE' COSMIC COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
SPIRAL, THERE IS A VERY IMPORTANT REASON BEHIND THE THREE
SIGNS IN WHICH ALL THE HIGHEST BEINGS NOW DWELL WHILE IN-
CARNATING IN UNIVERSE, THE LOWEST LIFE-FORMS TO COME DOWN
IN THE LAST UNIVERSE WERE ANGELOI) AND OVER THAT UNIVERSE
THEN WAS TAURUS) GEMINI AND CANCER, Now MAN IS LOWEST IN
~ UNIVERSE, ALL IS TIED INTO THE TRIADS HIDDEN ESOTERICISMS,
You WILL LEARN MORE ON THIS IN THE NEXT SESSION,"

ELEANOR AND MARGUERITE ENTERED FROM THE STAIRS AND OPENED A


WALL CUPBOARD DOOR INTO A DUMBWAITER AFFAIR, THEY PASSED
AROUND CRYSTAL FRAPPE GLASSES FILLED WITH A DELIGHTFUL FRUIT
NECTAR WHICH WE SIPPED AND LISTENED TO OUR TEACHERS REASSUR-
ANCE THAT ALL WOULD CLEARLY FALL INTO PLACE AS ITS FACTS
CONTINUE TO REVEAL,

MARGUERITE HUGGED ME AND WHISPERED THAT SHE AND SHALEM WERE


TO BE AT OUR NEXT VISIT WITH THE MASTERS, THIS WAS THRILLING
AND WELCOME NEWS FOR MARGUERITE'S SOULMATE HAD BEEN MY FIRST
BELOVED HUSBAND WHO HAD LEFT THIS EARTH SO YOUNG AND SUDDENLY,

GURU SIGNALED THAT IT WAS TIME FOR OUR RETURN AND HAD US JOIN
HANDS WITH HIM AND WITH EACH OTHER, OUR FOURSOME STOOD IN THE
CENTER OF THE TOWER ROOM) OUR FRIENDS WERE NEARBY AS YELLOW
FORCES OF LIGHT FLOWED SOFTLY ABOUT OUR ASTRAL FORMS, As WE
WERE DRAWN ALONG IN ITS PROTECTIVE FOLDS) HEAVENLY VOICES
COULD BE HEARD IN SONG, THIS GRADUALLY FADED AS WE ENTERED
MATTER; YET UPON AWAKENING AMONG OUR EARTH FRIENDS) I COULD
STILL FEEL THE WARMTH OF MASTER'S HAND CLASP UPON MY OWN,

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 76 of 382
.~.

(~

"
j
. :~

"

, ~
,

I KNOW MY DESTINY IS HAPPINESS AND PROGRESS. GOD'S


WILL FOR ME IS TO EXPERIENCE PERFECTION J EXPRESS
FREELY AND ENJOY LIFE AS I STRIVE TO ELEVATE THE
WORLD.

I DRAW ON UNIVERSAL RESOURCES AND I USE THEM IN


THE NAME OF GOODNESS AND THE BROTHERHOOD OF MAN
TO HELP MAKE A BETTER WORLD OF TOLERANCE AND
UNDERSTANDING.

THANK You FATHER!

. '
":'-
.

_. - - - - - - --"-'--::7'1~~~

~···:-._i'··
. .

':" ..-.;,.;'.,,' ,. .'


.~

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 77 of 382
(

WATCHING

A D U C 1'\ •

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 78 of 382
(

::/'.~, -~

.<*:;#>J!;J#i~;;

MESHA EZI.
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 79 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE YELLOW LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON FIVE

MONAD CHAKRAS AND GOD JEWELS

"MEDITATE UPON THESE THINGS; GIVE THYSELF WHOLLY TO THEM;


THAT THY PROFITING MAY APPEAR TO ALL."
1 TIMOTHY 4:15
"WE AWOKE IN THE ASTRAL TO FIND OURSELVES SITTING UPON THE
STONE STEPS OF THE CASTLE. WE WATCHED THE ROSY LIGHT OF
SUNSET GENTLY FADE. A WINDOW OPENED OVERHEAD AND MARGUERITE
LEANED OUT AS A LITTLE BIRD CAME TO FEED FROM HER HAND. SHE
SMILED AND CALLED SOFTLY J "I'LL BE DOWN IN A MOMENT TO GET
- YOU." WE NODDED.

THE SOFT BLUE SHADOWS CAME CREEPING DOWN FROM THE FOOTHILLS
AND SPREAD THEMSELVES AROUND OUR FEET. WE SAT STILL EXIST-
ING IN A MYSTIC WORLD J ALOOF. THE MINUTE PASSED AND THEN
THE CASTLE DOOR OPENED AND SILENTLY WE FOLLOWED OUR SWEET
HOSTESS UP THE GREAT STAIRS. STILLNESS AND PEACE LAY EVERY-
WHERE.

THE UPPER PARLOR WE ENTERED GAVE A CHEERFUL GREETING OF


COLOR WITH A FAINT AROMATIC AURA OF INCENSE. ITS SCENT
CLUNG TO THE HEAVY YELLOW DRAPERIES AND THE YELLOW CANDLE
FLAMES. THE SOFT FRAGRANCE OF FRUIT TREES IN BLOOM BREATHED
A LIGHT FRESHNESS THROUGH THE OPEN WINDOWS. As THE DUSK
DEEPENED J THE CANDLES FLICKERED IN THE MOVING AIR AND RE-
BOUNDED OFF THE HIGHLY POLISHED WOOD AND THE WALL CABINETS.
A GRAND PIANO STOOD AT ONE CORNER OF THE ROOM. WALLS OF DOVE
GREY AND GOLD TRIMMED PANELS WERE HUNG WITH SEVERAL BEAUTI-
FUL PORTRAITS OF HANDSOME LADIES. SCATTERED OVER A HUGE
AUBUSSON CARPET WERE THREE ROSEWOOD SETTEES. EACH COVERED

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 80 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 2

IN GLEAMING WATERED SILK. ONE PALE BLUE J ONE BUTTER YELLOW


AND THE THIRD A CELERY GREEN. OCCASIONAL CHAIRS WITH WHITE
BROCADE SEATS WERE PLACED STRATEGICALLY AROUND THE ROOM.

OVER THE WHITE MARBLE MANTEL OF THE FIREPLACE HUNG A LARGE


GOLD FRAMED MIRROR WHICH REFLECTED BACK THIS LOVELY CHAMBER.
As I STOOD BESIDE A ROSEWOOD CABINET J A BLUE AND WHITE JAR
UPON ITS SURFACE GAVE OUT A SUBTLE FRAGRANCE OF OLD FASHIONED
POTPOURRI. A HAND ON MY SHOULDER TURNED ME AND I RECEIVED A
LOVING KISS FROM SHALEM. SHALEM WAS HE WHO HAD BEEN A DEAR
COSMIC FRIEND AND WHOM I HELD DEARLY IN MY MEMORY FILES.
How HAPPY IT WAS TO KNOW HIM HERE WITH HIS SOULMATE J MARGURITE.

As MASTER OMAR AND DEAR GURU ENTEREDJ THEY WERE FOLLOWED BY


A SERENE FACED MALE WHOM I FELT AS FAMILIAR TO MY MEMORY.
HE SEEMED ALL SILVER AND BLUE IN COLOR WITH SILVER WHITE
HAIR AND GARMENTS. SILVER SHEENED SKIN AND EYES OF PURE
DEEP CRYSTAL BLUE. HIS FEATURES HAD A SERENITY MUCH LIKE
I'D COME TO RECOGNIZE IN ANGEL BEINGS J YET INSTINCT KNEW
HE WAS OF THE HUMANITY'S STREAM OF LIFE. HIS EYES LOCKED
INTO MINE AND SEEMED TO DRAW ME INTO HIS AURA AND SUDDENLY
WE WERE ALONE AND IN A WORLD OF SHINING CRYSTAL.

I SAW HIM NOW IN SPECIAL SILVER GARMENTS LIKE ASTRONAUTS


WEAR AND I WAS BEING BRIEFED ON MY PRESENT MISSION. I
KNEW THIS WAS A 'FAREWELL' MOMENT. As QUICK AS IT CAME J
THE VISION LEFT AND I WAS STILL IMMERSING MYSELF IN HIS
GAZE J BUT NOW WE WERE BACK WITH THE OTHERS IN THE CASTLE'S
UPPER PARLOR. I WAS DRAWN TO WALK OVER AND KNELT BEFORE
HIM AND KISSED HIS HAND. SOFTLY J I HEARD HIS VOICE FOR
MY EARS ONLY. "I'M NEAR AND WATCHING J LITTLE SISTER J I'M
WAITING FOR YOU."

GURU LIFTED ME TO MY FEET AND HUGGED ME CLOSE SAYING J "Now


THAT YOU SENSE WHO YOU ARE AND WHY YOU ARE ON EARTHJ LET
ME REUNITE YOU TO YOUR SPIRITUAL BROTHER AND GUARDIAN J
MESHA EZI. IT IS HE WHO WILL COME FOR YOU WHEN YOUR MISSION

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 81 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 3

IS COMPLETED." YES~ I NOW SAW THAT HIS EYES WERE DIFFER-


ENT FROM EARTH EYES AND HIS SKIN A SLIGHTLY DIFFERENT TONE~
MORE SILVER. As MEMORY AWOKE~ I SAW HIS EYES WERE AS BLUE
AS THE CRYSTAL MOUNTAINS OF OUR ANCIENT PLANET BEFORE THE
STAR MEROG BECAME A NOVA AND DESTROYED OUR HOME AND FORMED
THE BLACK HOLE OF THE PLEIADES. THEREFORE~ MESHA EZI WAS
A TAURIAN WHITE GIANT!

GURU LED ME TO THE MANTLE MIRROR AND WITH HIS HELP~ I TRACED
MY ASTRAL RESEMBLANCE AND SAW THAT IT MATCHED EZI'S AND I
FELT AN AWESOMENESS AND BEWILDERMENT. THIS LEFT SOMEWHAT
AS EZI AND I SAT CLOSE TOGETHER ON THE BLUE SETTEE AND HE
HELD MY HAND AND ALL BECAME LIKE UNTO OLD TIMES AGAIN.

WHEN EVERYONE WAS SEATED~ FOR OTHERS HAD ENTERED TO PARTAKE


- OF THE "LESSON; GURU QUOTED MALACHI 3:17 "AND THEY SHALL BE
MINE SAITH THE LORD OF HOSTS~ IN THAT DAY WHEN I MAKE UP
MY JEWELS; AND I WILL SPARE THEM AS A MAN SPARETH HIS OWN
SON THAT SERVETH HIM."

OMAR AROSE THEN AND OUR LESSON BEGAN: "IT IS TIME FOR US
TO SPEAK OF CHAKRAS AND OF GOD'S JEWELS~ THAT YOU MAY COME
TO UNDERSTAND AND KNOW OF THEM. THE LITERAL TRANSLATION OF
THE WORD 'CHAKRA' IS 'THE TURNING OF THE WHEEL OF LAW.'
THE CHAKRA PATTERN IS IN A SHAPE OF A WHEEL AND ITS ACTIONS
ARE ALL IN A SPIRAL AND WHIRLING MOVEMENT.

"You KNOW NOW~ YOJl HAVE A BASIC JEWEL CHAKRA FORM~ SHARED
BY YOUR SOULMATE AND OTHER SEED HALF. THIS JEWEL CHAKRA
FORM HAS AN INDIVIDUAL LAw OF SELF~ A PERSONAL LAW OF SELF
IN ITS ORIGINAL JEWEL PATTERN. BUT THE MANY TINY CHAKRAS
WITHIN YOUR UNIVERSE FORMS~ AND YOUR ETHERIC BODY FORM
WILL HAVE CERTAIN LAWS GOVERNING THEM.

'~HE BODY CHAKRAS ARE THE CONNECTING POINTS BETWEEN YOUR


DOUBLE BODY FORMS AS YOU ARE INCARNATING THROUGH THE UNI-
VERSE REGIONS ON YOUR TRAVELS AROUND THE WHEEL OF KARMA

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 82 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 4

OR REINCARNATION. EVERY REGION YOU VISIT AND STAY FOR A


PERIOD OF EXPERIENCE~ YOU WILL HAVE A DOUBLE BODY FORM
WITHIN WHICH YOU WILL BE DWELLING.

"IN MATTER YOU ARE EXPERIENCING IN A FLESH AND BLOOD PHY-


SICAL BODY~ BUT YOU ALSO HAVE AN ETHERIC INVISIBLE FORM
WHICH IS MADE UP OF THE HIGHER INVISIBLE ELEMENTS OF MATTER
AND WITHIN IT ARE SEVEN CHAKRA CENTERS. THESE ETHERIC CEN-
TERS CONNECT INTO CERTAIN POINTS OF THE SPINE~ THROAT AND
BROW OF THE PHYSICAL BODY. (SEE ILLUSTRATION #1 &2~
LESSON 5)

"THESE ETHERIC CHAKRA WHEELS ACT MUCH AS ELECTRICAL CONDEN-


SERS AND FILTER THE HIGHER SPIRITUAL~ ASTRAL AND ETHERIC
FORCES DOWN INTO A LOWER RATE OF ENERGY SO THE PHYSICAL
CAN USE ITS FORCES. IT IS THE FLOW FROM THESE CHAKRA
STREAMS OF COSMIC ENERGIES THAT KEEP THE PHYSICAL FORM
ACTIVE AND HEALTHY. THESE SAME ENERGY WAVE-LENGTHS CARRY
AND CONVEY WITHIN THEIR UNDULATIONS~ MIND THOUGHTS AND
IDEAS AND CIRCULATE THEM THROUGHOUT THE BODY FORM AS WELL
AS INTO THE BRAIN SECTION OF THE HUMAN HEAD. THE STREAMS
ENTERING THE HEAD SECTION AND BRAIN COME FROM AN ASTRAL
CHAKRAj HOWEVER~ IT IS NOT ONE OF THE SEVEN ETHERIC G-HAKRAS.
IT'S CALLED THE THOUSAND PETALLED LOTUS CHAKRA AND LIES
IN THE INTELLECTUAL SOUL BODY FORM.

"THIS CROWN CHAKRA CAUSES THE ETHERIC TO BE CONNECTED INTO


THE ASTRAL SOUL FORM. FROM THIS ASTRAL THOUGHT TRANSFER-
ENCE~ HUMANS REFINE THEIR SENSATIONS OF EMOTION AND IDEAS.

FROM THEIR LOWER ETHERIC SUBJECTIVE MIND CONNECTIONS~ THEY


TIE IN ALL THE PHYSICAL BODY INTO THE ETHERIC INVISIBLE
FORM.

"THUS~ MANKIND THINKS WITH ALL HIS BODY AND FEELS WITHIN
ALL HIS PHYSICAL FORM. EVEN GOING SO FAR AS TO EXPERIENCE
FEELING AND PAIN IN LIMBS WHICH HAVE BEEN AMPUTATED •.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 83 of 382
(

THE ROOT CliAKRA - #1 -4 SPOKES

ILLUSTRATION #1
LESSON #S

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 84 of 382
(

THE SPLEEN CHAKRA - #2 - 6 SPOKES OF


f,1ULT I COLORS

ILLUSTRATION if2
LESSON #5

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 85 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 5
"As EARTH 'INCARNATES' YOUR SMALL CONSCIOUS-POINT CANNOT
DO ALL THE NECESSARY WORK OF KEEPING YOUR BODY'S ACTIVATING
ONLY BY ITS BRAIN PORTION. ALL YOUR PHYSICAL SENSES MUST
BE INACTIVATION AND MUST BE OPEN AT THEIR DOOR-POINTS.
You WHO HAVE STUDIED "MAN KNm4 THYSELF" ALREADY ARE ACQUAIN-
TED WITH A PORTION OF iHIS SUBJECT.

"WHEN GOD CREATED US AS JEWEL BEINGS J OUR PATTERN WAS FOR


ALL OF OUR SENSE PERCEPTIONS TO BE ELEVATED AND ALL THEIR
ELECTRICAL CHAKRA STREAMS TO BE FREELY FLOWING FOR A CLEAR
AND ALERT WORKING MIND.

"IN EVERY REALM OF UNIVERSE J MIND WILL BE CONNECTING TO THE


VARIOUS BODY FORMS WE TAKE ON WHILE EXPERIENCING; AND DOING
SO THROUGH THE CHAKRA CHANNELS.

"WE SEE HOW VERY IMPORTANT IT IS THAT WE ACQUAINT WITH THESE


INVISIBLE WHEELS AND KNOW OF THEIR DOORWAYS J TO AID IN KEEP-
ING THEM UNBLOCKED."

LITTLE GURU AROSE AS OMAR FINISHED. As HE FACED OUR GROUP J


AN IMAGE FORMED. IT TOOK AN OUTLINE LIKE A HUMAN SILHOUETTE
OF WHITE SMOKE LINES.

"LET US LEARN NOW ABOUT THE CONSTITUTION AND PARTS ARRANGE-


MENT OF AN ETHERIC BODY FORM. THIS TO YOUR EARTH EYES IS
INVISIBLE. To OUR ASTRAL EYES J IT IS VERY VISIBLE AND HAS
A WHOLE OUTLINE FORM WHICH EXACTLY RESEMBLES THE PHYSICAL
COUNTERPART YOU ARE WEARING EVERY DAY. THE ETHERIC WAS J IN
'FACT J THE PHYSICAL BODY'S BASIC PATTERN. HOWEVER J WHERE
THE PHYSICAL CONTAINS VARIOUS ORGANS J THE ETHERIC POSSESSES
SEVEN CHAKRA CENTERS. AND WHERE PHYSICAL HOUSES A BRAIN
MECHANISM J THE ETHERIC HOLDS AN INTRICATE ARRANGEMENT OF
COSMIC GEOMETRICAL LIGHT PATTERNS INTO WHICH THE ASTRAL
CROWN CHAKRA OF THE MIND FORM MAGNETIZES 'THOUGHT.' "

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 86 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 6

GURU SWUNG HIS RIGHT ARM AND SAID; "NOW WATCH." THEN HE
POINTED TO THE SAUCER LIKE FLOWERS WHICH WERE SPINNING OUT
INTO THE OUTLINE. "THESE CHAKRAS OF YOUR ETHERIC FORM DO
NOT LIE INSIDE) BUT ON THE OUTSIDE OF THAT FORM AND LOOK
MUCH LIKE LOVELY FLOWERS PINNED TO A GOWN. IN AN AWAKENED
SEEKER) THEY APPEAR TO US AS GLOWING IN A BRIGHT HUE. IN
SLEEPING EARTH PERSONS) WE SEE THEM AS QUIESCENT AND DULL
IN COLOR. IN AWAKE AND CLEAR MINDS) THEY RESEMBLE COLORED
PINWHEELS) BLAZING BRIGHTLY AND ARE LARGER IN SIZE THAN ARE
THOSE OF EARTH'S UNDEVELOPED ENTITIES.

THE ETHERIC CHAKRAS ALWAYS PROJECT OUTWARDS AND BEYOND THE


OUTLINES OF THE PHYSICAL FORM. IF SEEN BY MANKIND'S SIXTH
SENSE OR THIRD EYE) THE CHAKRAS APPEAR AS COLORED FLOWERS
WITH A CENTER HEART. THEIR PETALS IN PASTEL SHADES. THE
-
STALK OR STEM OF THE LOWER SIX CHAKRAS LOOK TO BE GROWING
OUT FROM THE DOORWAY POINTS OR DOTS." (SEE ILLUSTRATION #3)

(ROSE NOTE: ACTUALLY) THE DOTS ARE WHERE THE COSMIC ENERGY
STREAMS FROM ETHERIC INTO PHYSICAL AND INTO THE PHYSICAL
NERVOUS SYSTEM AND THROUGH THE ETHERIC SYMPATHETIC NERVOUS
SYSTEM.)

"BECAUSE THE CHAKRAS ARE ALWAYS IN SOME RHYTHM OF MOVING


THE COSMIC GRAVITATIONAL MAGNETIC FORCES THROUGHOUT THE
PHYSICAL) THESE DOORWAYS WILL BE OPEN TO SOME DEGREE. THE
GREATER THE CHAKRA ACTIVITY AND SPIN) THE MORE COSMIC
ENERGY WILL BE ENTERING TO DISTRIBUTE THROUGHOUT THE PHYSI-
CAL FORM. WITHOUT AN INRUSH OF ENERGIES) THE PHYSICAL FORM
PARTICLES WOULD RESORT BACK INTO THEIR ORIGINAL ATOMS AND
ELEMENTS. AT DEATH THE CHAKRAS CEASE TO FEED ENERGY INTO
BODY AND IT DISINTEGRATES.

"THERE IS GOOD REASON WHY THE CORD WHICH CONNECTS THE TINY
BABE FORM AND THE MOTHER HOST IS NEVER SEVERED UNTIL AFTER
THE EJECTED BABY FORM BREATHES AND GASPS AND CRIES. UNTIL

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 87 of 382
AS T F\A L.

T HI P.O EYE
~.I--_~_F IN EA L.
ETHERIC
~TH+h:.r.rt-----'
F f TU r TA F\ y.
SUROUNDS

PH YS IGA L.
T H ROA T.

c-

NAV E L.

S P L EEN.

ROOT,

ILLUSTRATION 3
LESSON #5

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 88 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 7
THAT FIRST BREATH~ THE AWAITING ENTITY HAS NOT MADE ITS
ENTRANCE INTO THE NEW PHYSICAL FORM. NOR IS THE ENTITY'S
CHAKRAS OF THEIR ETHERIC HOOKED INTO THAT NEW BODY FORM.
THIS CONNECTION OCCURS AT THE MOMENT OF FIRST BREATH AND
CRY. THE TINY BABY FORM WHILE BEING FORMED IN THE WOMB
WAS CONNECTED INTO THE MOTHER'S CHAKRAS~ BUT WHEN THE CORD
IS SEVERED SO WILL THE MOTHER HOST CONNECTIONS BE CUT OFF.
UNTIL THIS MOMENT~ THE 'ENTITY' HAS AWAITED IN THEIR ETHERIC
FORM AND ONLY ENTERS THE PHYSICAL AFTER EJECTION. THERE
HAVE BEEN CASES WHEN THROUGH MISJUDGMENT~ ENTITIES HAVE ENTER-
ED DURING THE BIRTH PROCESS. ALSO CASES WHERE ENTITIES
WAITED TOO LONG TO ENTER~ BUT THESE ARE IN THE MINOR.ITY.

"IT IS WELL TO HAVE AN UNDERSTANDING OF THESE LIFE CENTERS


AND HOW TO OPEN AND EXPAND THEIR FORCES AND AID THEIR POWERS
FOR OPERATING. THIS WAS WHY WE HAD ROSE COMPILE THE SERIES
"MAN KNOW THYSELF."

"FOR A LITTLE BREAK~ WE WI LL HAVE MARGUERITE AND SHALEM PLAY


AND SING FOR US AND THEN CONTINUE EXPLORING THE FIRST TWO
CHAKRAS OF ETHERIC."

WE MOVED AROUND SOME AND GREETED FRIENDS. THEN WE WERE


}

ENTERTAINED BY MUSIC AND SINGING. OMAR TOOK UP THE NEXT


PART OF THE LESSON. HE COMMENCED WITH:

"THE VARIOUS COSMIC FORCES ALWAYS FLOW INTO THE LOWER ETHER-
IC CHAKRAS OF THE ETHERIC FORM AT RIGHT ANGLES TO THEMSELVES.
THIS ANGLE ACTION SETS UP A SECONDARY FORCE IN AN UNDULATING
AND SWIRLING MOTION. JUST AS A BAR MAGNET THRUST INTO A
COIL AS IT PRODUCES A CURRENT OF ELECTRICITY. THIS CAUSES
THE FLOW OF ENERGY TO COIL AT RIGHT ANGLES TO ITS AXIS. Now~
AS THESE PRIMARY COSMIC FORCES ENTER THE VORTEX OF THE CHA-
KRA FLOWER CENTER OR BELL~ IT RADIATES FROM ITSELF AGAIN AT
RIGHT ANGLES AND THESE RADIATIONS FORM LINES OF ENERGY OUT-
WARDS LIKE SPOKES ON A WHEEL. SEE ILLUSTRATION 1-2.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 89 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 8
"THE NUMBER OF VIBRATORY SPOKES IN ANY CHAKRA WILL DEPEND
UPON THE NUMBER OF WAVES ITS FLOW FORCE EXHIBITS IN THE
PETAL AREA OF THE PARTICULAR CHAKRA.

"IN TURN~ WE MUST NOTICE THAT EACH SECONDARY FORCE FLOW WHICH
SWEEPS AROUND A CHAKRA WHERE IT IS DEPRESSED WILL HAVE ~
~ CHARACTERISTIC ~ LENGTH. AND THESE WILL NOT BE MOVING
IN A STEADY STRAIGHT LINE~ BUT'RATHER WILL BE UNDULATING IN
VARIOUS WAVES. EACH OF THESE VARIED WAVE LENGTHS WILL ALSO
POSSESS OTHER SMALL WAVES IN THEIR PASSAGE. IT IS THESE
ACTIONS OF UNDULATION THAT CREATE THE SPOKES IN ALL CHAKRA
WHEELS (SEE ILLUSTRATION #1)

"IT IS THE SECONDARY FORCES AS THEY WEAVE IN AND OUT THAT


CREATE TH~ FOUR SPOKES IN THE ROOT CHAKRA. THESE TWO MOTIONS
NOW SET UP A THIRD. IT IS THE THIRD MOTION THAT ENTERS THE
CENTER DOORWAY AND FUNNELS INTO THE DOORWAY (DOTS ON ILLUS-
RATION #3) OF THE PHYSICAL BODY FORM."

WE WERE WATCHING FASCINATED AT THESE WHIRLING SMOKE IMAGES.


OMAR NOW TOUCHED THEM AND THEY BURST INTO COLOR~ SAYING:
"BECAUSE OF THE MOTION AND DIFFERENT CURRENT RATES~ A SET
OF COLOR COMBINATIONS PRODUCE."

REDS~ ORANGE AND YELLOWS WITH A VERY PALE SILVER OF BLUISH


TINGE WHIRLED IN THE ROOT CHAKRA. LILY AND VIOLET GASPED
AND EXCLAIMED AT ITS BEAUTY. (SEE ILLUSTRATION #1)

"To THOSE ON EARTH WHO HAVE DEVELOPED THE SEVENTH SIGHT AND
CAN SEE THESE WHEELS OCCASIONALLY~ THEIR COLORS WILL APPEAR
LUMINOUS~ NEVER OPAQUE. THEIR WAVES OFTEN APPEAR LIKE UNTO
IRRIDESCENT GLASS AND REFLECT A BLUE SILVER SHEEN. WHENEVER
ANY CHAKRA PREDOMINATES WITH SILVERY SHINE~ IT IS WORKING AT
CAPACITY AND RECEIVING ITS REQUIRED AMOUNT OF COSMIC FUEL.
THE HINDUS COMPARE IT TO "THE GLEAM OF MOONLIGHT ON WATER."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 90 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 9

OMAR AND GURU NOW LOOKED AT ONE ANOTHER IN MUTUAL SMILES.


TRULY IT WAS EXACTLY WHAT IT DID LOOK LIKE; 'MOONLIGHT'
REFLECTED ON WATER WITH TINY JEWEL DROPS WITHIN ITS GLEAMING
SILVER SHADES. OMAR REACHED OUT TO THE SMOKE IMAGE AND
TOUCHED CHAKRA #2. (SEE ILLUSTRATION #2)

"THESE TWO LOWER CHAKRAS HAVE ONLY A FEW SPOKES. FOUR IN


CHAKRA #1 AND SIX IN SPLEEN CHAKRA #2."

THE SPLEEN CHAKRA NOW BLAZED FORTH IN EVERY COLOR OF THE


SPECTRUM AND ITS HEART CENTER WAS A RICH FRESH PINK. ITS
INNER BELL MOUTH WAS A DEEPER ROSE UPON ITS BELL-CUP AND
DEEP ROSE IN ITS CENTER AS THE FLOW ENTERED OUT INTO THE
PHYSICAL DOORWAY. EACH OF ITS PETALS HAD A MAIN COLOR OF
THE SPECTRUM SUCH AS REDJ ORANGE J YELLOW J GREENJ BLUE AND
VIOLET. YET THESE WERE BEING WOVEN INTO ONE ANOTHER BY
TINY STRANDS OF ALL THE OTHER SIX COLORS J MUCH LIKE WE WEAVE
THREADS INTO CLOTH. AND WHILE EACH PETAL MAINTAINED ITS OWN
COLOR THEME NOTICEABLY J THE OTHERS WITH THREAD OF SILVER
CAUSED A BEAUTIFUL STAINED GLASS EFFECT TO SHOW. THEY WERE
MAGNIFICENT J AND WE REALIZED WE WERE VIEWING A DEMONSTRATION
OF PERFECT WORKING CHAKRAS. THE MASTERS GAVE US TIME TO
GLORY IN THEIR IMAGES AND THEN OMAR CONTINUED.

"THE TWO LOWEST CHAKRAS #1 AND #2 HAVE THE LEAST SPOKES OR


PETAL FORMATIONS J BUT FEED THE HUMAN FORM ITS MOST IMPORTANT
LIFE FORCE WHICH IS A TWIN OR DOUBLE FORCE ACTING CONCERTED-
LY IN A CIRCLE STREAM FROM ETHERIC INTO ONE OF THE TWO LOWER
CHAKRAS AND ALSO FEEDING IN FROM THE ASTRAL CROWN CHAKRA
INTO ITS TWO STREAM DOORWAYS INTO MIND. As THESE LOWER AND
HIGHER STREAMS TRAVEL THROUGHOUT THE PHYSICAL BYWAYS OF THE
TWO NERVOUS SYSTEMS J THEY MEET AND FORM A COMPLETE AND OPEN
CIRCUIT OF TRAVELING FORCES. THESE SHOULD ALWAYS BE FREE
FLOWING AND OPEN AND CIRCULATING IN FLOW IN AN ACTION OF
CIRCLING THROUGHOUT ETHERIC INTO PHYSICAL AND BACK INTO

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 91 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 10
ETHERIC FOR RECHARGING OF THEIR FORCES. IN OTHER WORDS~
THEY SHOULD ALWAYS BE MAKING A COMPLETED CLOSED CIRCLE
OF CURRENT~ A CONNECTING RING.

"UNFORTUNATELY~ SUCH IS NOT YET THE CASE IN "MOST HUMANS


OF EARTH DUE TO THE FACT OF THEIR POSITION OF EVOLVEMENT
AND MIND CONSCIOUSNESS. THE PEOPLES OF EARTH ARE IN ALL
STAGES OF CHAKRA UNFOLDMENT."

I NOW ASKED: "COULD YOU EXPRESS THE ESSENCE OF THESE TWO


FORCES FOR US?"

"WELL!" OMAR MUSED~ "You WILL BE LEARNING MORE ON THIS SUB-


JECT LATER ON AS YOU PROGRESS BUT FOR NOW~ THESE FORCES ARE:

1. "A COSMIC VITALITY COMING FROM THE BASIC GOD


LIFE FORCE. THIS FORCE KEEPS LIFE ACTIVATING;
IT GIVES GROWTH AND ANIMATION. IT SUSTAINS
OUR INNER SEEDS AND THEIR PATTERNS.

2. "THE SECOND FORCE COMES FROM THE LOGOI REALMS


AND IS ANOTHER FORM OF THE FIRST GOD LIFE FORCE~
BUT A UNIVERSE EXTERNAL GENERATED FORCE. IT
COMES FROM YOUR SOLAR SUN SOL AND ENTERS THE
ROOT CHAKRA~ BUT IS ALSO ESPECIALLY STRONG AND
IMPORTANT IN SPLEEN CHAKRA FOR HEALTH. You
REALIZE SOL IS A LOGO BEING AND A LIFE GIVER FOR
YOUR SOLAR SYSTEM. WITHOUT THE PROPER AMOUNT OF
THESE TWO FORCES~ MANKIND SICKENS AND CAN TRANS-
IGHT EVEN BEFORE THEIR CORRECT TIME."

WE HAD MORE QUESTIONS BUT OMAR SHOOK HIS HEAD.

"ENOUGH NOW~ GURU WANTS TO BRING YOUR ATTENTION TO AN


IMPORTANT ANNOUNCEMENT."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 92 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 11
You COULD FEEL THE FLUTTER OF EXCITEMENT AMONG THE SOUL
MEMBERS NOW AND EZI SQUEEZED MY HAND TIGHT. I NOTED
FREDDY AND STANLEY HAD JOINED LILY AND VIOLET. BUT WHY
WERE ALL OUR SOUL FRIENDS LOOKING AT ME WITH SUCH JOYOUS
ANTICIPATION. THEN SUDDENLY I KNEW J FOR IT WAS LILY WHO
HAD VERIFIED IT AND TOLD ME THE NEWS FROM DR. KEELER.

GURU STOOD OVER EZI AND ME AND SAID J "WELCOME TO OUR PARTY
IN HONOR OF YOUR TEAMWORK FOR THE f1AGI AND SOUL GROUP J AND
TO CELEBRATE YOUR REUNION TOGETHER AFTER A SEPARATION OF
21 YEARS; WHILE ROSE HAS BEEN BUSY ON EARTH AND EZI BUSY
ABOVE AND AROUND THAT PLANET. BEFORE WE HAVE OUR ENTERTAIN-
MENT AND REFRESHMENTS J I KNOW ROSE AND SOME OTHERS OF OUR
SOUL MEMBERS WOULD LIKE TO HEAR ABOUT MISSIONS SUCH AS THESE
'LONELY ONES' OR "WALK-INS" TAKE OVER J BECAUSE MANY DO NOT
YET KNOW OF THESE EVENTS.

"ON APRIL 4J 1957 AT 5:00 A.M. MESHA ROSE J WITH THE FULL
PERMISSION OF ANOTHER J EXCHANGED PLACEMENT OF EXISTENCE.
ROSE ENTERED THE PREPARED PHYSICAL FORM OF THIS OTHER AS
SHE VACATED AND HAPPILY ENTERED INTO HER OWN ETHERIC FORM
AND THEN CONTINUED ON INTO HER OWN ASTRAL FORM IN DUE COURSE.
SHE IS NOW HERE IN OUR SCHOOLS. THE TRANSFERENCE TOOK BUT
ONLY A FEW MINUTES. HOWEVER J FOR A YEAR OF EARTH TIMEJ
THESE TWO SOULS HAD BEEN MEETING IN SLEEP PERIODS AND PRE-
PARING FOR THIS TRANSFER. THOUSANDS OF THESE TRANSFERS
HAVE OCCURRED ALL OVER EARTH TODAY J AND MANY ARE THESE
'LONELY ONES' WHO ARE SERVING GOD IN BORROWED BODY FORMS.

"THESE PERMITTED TRANSFERS CANNOT OCCUR UNLESS BOTH SIDES


CONCUR IN THE EXCHANGE AND BOTH HAVE A MUTUAL DESIRE FOR
IT TO TAKE PLACE. THE EXCHANGE ITSELF IS AN EVENT REQUIR-
ING GREAT PREPARATION AND THE ATTENDANCE OF MASTER BEINGS
AND HUMAN LORDS FOR OVERSEEING ITS SMOOTH TRANSITION.

"WHILE BOTH OF THESE ENTITIES WERE AWARE OF THE FACTS OF A

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 93 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 12

BODY TAKEOVER DURING THE YEAR THEY WERE BOTH PREPARING J ITS
MEMORY WAS REMOVED UPON THE MOMENT OF ENTRANCE OF MESHA
ROSEJ SO THAT THE EARTH ROSE'S MEMORIES OF ORDINARY LIFE
AFFAIRS COULD BE IMPRESSED INTO THIS -LONELY ONES' MIND.
THUSJ UPON HER AWAKENING IN THE LARGE AIRY BEDROOM SHE REMEM-
BERED ONLY THE OTHER ROSE'S EXPERIENCE OF BEING SUDDENLY
TAKEN UP IN THE WHIRLING ROAR OF WINDS AND OF BEING SWEPT
HIGHER AND HIGHER TO BREAK OUT IN A FIREWORKS OF LIGHTS
AND READ ITS BURNING MESSAGE AWAITING THERE. SHE ALSO REMEM-
BERED THE EXCRUCIATING HEADACHE WHICH PRECEEDED THIS EVENT.
ANDJ HOW AFTER REACHING THE HEIGHTS J ALL SUDDENLY CEASED AND
BECAME PEACE J CALM AND UTTER CONTENTMENT. THENJ HER OWN
MEMORY OF SOFTLY FLOATING DOWNWARD LIKE AN AUTUMN LEAF UNTIL
SHE FELT THE SOFT TOUCH OF THE MATTRESS."
-
GURU SMILED LOVINGLY AT ME. "I RODE UP AND OUT WITH MY OTHER
CHELA AND ESCORTED MESHA ROSE AS SHE FLOATED INJ AND WELL 1
REMEMBER HOW WONDERFUL WERE HER FEELINGS OF WELL BEING AS
SHE AWOKE TO TAKE IN THE FAMILIAR SCENE OF THAT MUCH VISITED
ROOM."

I SAT J RELIVING THAT ENTRANCE J AS HE SPOKE AND NOW MANY LAND


MARKS OF MY TWENTY-ONE YEAR MISSION BECAME EVIDENT OF THIS
EXCHANGE. NEVER SINCE 1957 HAD THIS BODY EXPERIENCED CANCER
WHICH IT HAD KNOWN BEFORE AND HAD REQUIRED MANY SURGERIES.
ALSO J SHORTLY AFTER AN UNHAPPY MARRIAGE TERMINATED AND FREED
THE EARTH PARTNER FOR A HAPPIER FUTURE.

WITHIN MONTHS I WAS A MEMBER OF MY GURU'S EARTH COLONY AND


BEING INDOCTRINATED INTO THE EARTH TRUTHS OF THE MATTER
"GREAT LORDS.' AND WITHIN FIVE YEARS J LILY AND I WERE
BROUGHT TOGETHER AND THE MISSION CAME FORTH IN ACTION. YET
1 DID NOT KNOW UNTIL RECENTLY THAT 1 WAS A 'LONELY ONE' SO
1 ASKED GURU "WHY?"

"BECAUSE YOU HAD TO FINISH OFF THE OTHER ROSE'S KARMA FOR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 94 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIVE PAGE 13
HER. IT WAS THE PRICE YOU HAD PROMISED FOR BORROWING HER
BODY."

"DID I DO A GOOD JOB?" I ASKED ANXIOUSLY.

"YES} AND AS LILY TOLD YOU FROM DR. KEELER; YOU ARE NEARLY
FINISHED WITH IT AND CAN GIVE YOUR WHOLE ATTENTION NOW TO
THE MISSION."

I WAS RELIEVED.

"WE WILL TALK MORE ON 'LONELY ONES' OR "WALK-INS"} BUT LET


US START OUR PARTY NOW" -- AND GURU REACHED FOR ME.

IT WAS WONDERFUL} SUCH TALENT AS OUR SOUL MEMBERS POSSESS}


AND OH} HOW FREE I FELT} KNOWING WHO I WAS. My ONLY REGRET
CAME LATER AT LEAVING MY BROTHER} EZI.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 95 of 382
. ~
"
.,;.
;
;.

(
." .-:'-,
. '_r' . i.

.1
.'

;.
;
j
,
. ..~

I LIVE MY LIFE AS ONE WITH GOD. THROUGH THE


POWER OF GOD ANIMATING MY BEING J I BECOME
MIGHTY IN TRUTH J FREE IN SPIRIT J DEEP IN
UNDERSTANDING AND PERFECT IN BEING.
(
As I LIVE MY LIFE SPIRITUALLY J I AM TRANSFORMED
AND ILLUMINATED. My SOUL IS ENRICHED AND MY ' .." .. '

MIND IS QUICKENED.

So LET IT BE!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 96 of 382
(

CHINESE GEESE DOZI NG

BY THE BEAVER DAM.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 97 of 382
(

----

MASTEF\ OMAR, AT THE

BEAVE" DAM.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 98 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX BLUE LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON SIX

THE FRAGRANCE OF KUNDALINI

"AND AS WE HAVE BORNE THE IMAGE OF THE EARTHY WE SHALL


ALSO BEAR THE IMAGE OF THE HEAVENLY."
1 CORINTHIANS 15:49
THEN CAME THE SACRED MOMENT~ WHEN ALL FILLS WITH COLOR~
ALL NAMELESS AND MYSTERIOUS. AND SUDDENLY WE ARE THERE
BENEATH A PANOPLY OF GORGEOUS ROSE CERISE. As IT CLEARED
AWAY~ I COULD SEE MY ASTRAL BEAUTY MIRRORED IN A TWILITE
POOL. ITS IMAGE LEANED OVER THE WATERS~ AN INTRIGUING
-SILHOUETTE: OF MELLOW SHADOWS. THE SOFT WHISPER OF SLEEPY
BIRDS KEPT US COMPANY AS THE DARKNESS DREW A DEEP BLUE
MANTLE OF SILENCE AROUND OUR SOLITARY FIGURES. WE FOUR
ARE HERE ALONE AND KNOW NOT WHERE WE ARE.

A SHAFT OF LIGHT STEPS FORTH UPON A FAR MOUNTAIN TOP. THE


ASTRAL MOON IN HESITATION CREEPS FORTH TO GREET THE NIGHT
AND A SOFT BALLET OF MOONBEAMS ORCHESTRATE A MELODY UPON
THE SILVER POND. ONE BY ONE IN A SILENT BLOSSOMING~ THE
BRIGHT STARS FILL THE HEAVENS AND WE SEE WE ARE BESIDE THE
BEAVER DAM STANDING IN THE MEADOWS.

THE GENTLE MURMER OF VOICES ARE HEARD AS OUR SOUL FRIENDS


APPROACH. THE MOON'S LIGHT NOW SHOWING ON THEIR HAPPY
FACES AND REFLECTING FROM OMAR'S~ GURU'S AND SINGH TAO'S
WHITE ROBES. MISS PRIM SCAMPERS UP FOR PETTING AND INSISTS
ON SITTING ON CYRUS' LAP AS WE ALL SEAT OURSELVES BEFORE
THE THREE MASTERS. A SHY~ GENTLE BREEZE RUFFLED OUR HAIR
AS LACY SHADOWS WEAVE PATTERNS AT OUR FEET.

AFTER GENERAL GREETINGS ALL AROUND~ WE SETTLED DOWN AND

u) REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 99 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 2

OMAR STARTED TALKING IN A CONVERSATIONAL TONE. IN THE AIR


BESIDE HIM APPEARED A COLORED ETHERIC FORM AND SPINNING
CHAKRAS. (ILLUSTRATION
, #1" LESSON 6)

"THERE ARE THREE OF YOUR ETHERIC CHAKRAS THAT PERFORM RATHER


SPECIAL FUNCTIONS" BUT ITS FORCE PASSES THROUGH ONLY ONE.
THAT ONE IS #3 CHAKRA WHICH TIES INTO THE DIFFERENT LEVELS
OF THE LOWER ASTRAL PLANES. AT BIRTH YOU BRING WITH YOU
CERTAIN PERSONALITY TRAITS TO BE CORRECTED AND IMPROVED.
YOUR BIRTH DATE AND TIME OF ENTRY WILL BE UNDER THE INFLUENCE
OF CERTAIN PLANETS AND THEIR GRAVITATIONAL MAGNETISMS.
THESE WILL BE BOTH GOOD AND ADVERSE TO BRING ABOUT A SPECI-
FIC ENVIRONMENT AROUND YOU AND ALSO TO ATTRACT CERTAIN
EXPERIENCES INTO YOUR EARTH LIFE. THESE INFLUENCES WERE
CHOSEN WITH YOUR HELP BUT UNDER THE FINAL SUPERVISION AND
WISDOM OF HIGHER BEINGS.

THE #4 CHAKRA RECEIVES FROM THE INTELLECTUAL SOUL REALMS


AND THE RACE COLLECTIVE MIND. #6 CHAKRA ATTRACTS FLOW FROM
THE MIND AREA FORCES OF THE ONE GOD MIND. BOTH #4 AND #6
GATHER FROM VASTLY DIFFERING COSMIC LEVELS. THE LOWER
FOUR CHAKRAS RUN THE PHYSICAL BODY FUNCTIONS. CHAKRA #6
AND #7 ARE ACTUALLY WORKING APART FROM THE LOWER FOUR.
CHAKRA #6 IS DIRECTLY CONNECTED INTO THE PITUITARY GLAND
AND CHAKRA #7 BEING CONNECTED INTO THE SPIRITUAL REGIONS ARE
GOVERNING THE PINEAL GLAND. As THESE TWO GLANDS ONLY COME
INTO ACTION WHEN A CERTAIN LEVEL OF SPIRITUAL DEVELOPMENT
HAS BEEN ATTAINED" THEY ARE USUALLY NOT FULLY ACTIVATING
TO THEIR FULL POTENTIAL. SEE ILLUSTRATION #2 LESSON #6.

"WHEN CHAKRAS ARE UNDEVELOPED" THEIR PETALS WILL BE SLUG-


GISH AND INACTIVE" FOR WHERE LITTLE FORCE FLOWS" LITTLE
UNFOLDMENT WILL OCCUR. THE CHAKRA ACTION IS CAUSED BY THE
HIGHER FORCES FLOWING ROUND AND ROUND THE OUTER WHEEL AND
ALTERNATELY OVER AND UNDER ITS SPOKES. (SEE ILLUSTRATION #1)
(I N LESSON 6 )

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 100 of 382
/. 5.

SEED ATOM.
b.

,'---,.'- / -@ ,
5 '---..
~

I /
f4;\
~
I

I.

NA VEL.
4-. '.

5
H EA RT.
C RQ\-( N.

ILLUSTRATION1J LESSO[~ #6

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 101 of 382
PINEAL~

,n - - - M U0 U L LA

--l V')
.
W l.u
~
U > Z
ex::"
V) w -1
>0- z
::c:
lL

ILLUSTRATION 2
I FSSON h

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 102 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 3
Now, REMEMBER THIS: EACH SPOKE IN A CHAKRA REPRESENTS A
DIFFERENT CHARACTERISTIC OF YOUR 'WHOLE SELF~ AND IT RADIA-
TES A SPECIALIZED INFLUENCE FROM IT. THE SHADES OF THE
COLORS YOUR CHAKRAS WILL BE SHOWING WILL INDICATE THE FORCE
RATE PASSING THROUGH INTO THE PHYSICAL. IT WILL SHOW WHE-
THER ITS FLOW IS STRONG OR WEAK. WEJ HERE IN THE ASTRALJ
ARE ABLE TO SEE YOUR CHAKRAS AND THEIR COLORS AND KNOW WHE-
THER YOU ARE RECEIVING MORE OR LESS OF CERTAIN ATTRIBUTES.

IN THE NAVEL CHAKRA J YOU WILL NOTE THAT THERE ARE TEN SPOKES.
ITS NORMAL COLORS WILL ALTERNATE IN PETALS OF BASIC MOSS
GREEN WITH VARIGATED THREADS OF PALE YELLOW J BLUE J PINK J
VIOLET AND SILVER. ITS NEXT PETAL BEING A BASIC DEEP ROSE J
INTERTWINED WITH PEACH J SKY BLUE AND TRACES OF PALE YELLOW
AND SILVER.

THESE COLORS CARRY MEANING IN THEMSELVES. ALSO NOTE THE


CIRCLING FORCES INDICATED AS A LARGE CIRCLE UPON ITS PETALS
IN CONTRAST TO ITS SMALLER INNER CUP MOUTH CIRCLE. THESEJ
TOO J WILL BE STRONGLY NOTICEABLE IN A CLEAR THINKERS CHAKRAS.
THE CENTER CUP HAS VIOLET SIDES HOLDING FIVE DOTS LIKE POLKA-
DOTS ON CLOTH WHERE THE FIVE BASIC ROSE COLORED PETALS
FEED ENERGY INTO THE CUP. ITS DOORWAY APPEARS AS INDIGO
BLUE AS IT CONNECTS INTO PHYSICAL. THIS NAVEL CHAKRA #3
IS VERY LOVELY TO VIEW."

WE ABSORBED ITS JEWELED SPARKLE AS IT FLOWERED ON THE LEFT


SIDE AT ABOUT THE WAIST SECTION OF THE FIGURE. OMAR NOW
SWUNG HIS ARM AND A HUGE COLORED CHAKRA APPEARED. (SEE
ILLUSTRATION #3) THIS IS THE NAVEL CHAKRA #3. IT IS SITU-
ATED IN THE SOLAR PLEXUS OF THE PHYSICAL BODY J BUT OUTSIDE
ITS OUTLINE J IN THE ETHERIC ENVELOPE. ITS TEN PETALS RE-
CEIVE TEN DIFFERENT COSMIC RADIATIONS J THREE WE SHALL
IGNORE NOW FOR THESE ARE COMING TO YOU AND CONTROLLED BY
THEIR LOGOI SENDERS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 103 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 4
SEVEN OF THE PETALS YOU SHOULD BE ACTIVATING VIA PERSONAL
SELF CHARACTERISTICS. THE EMOTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS WILL
BE COMING FROM YOUR PRESENT SOUL AND ITS PRESENTLY REALIZED
TRUTHS HOLDING THERE IN MIND. THE SENSATIONS YOU HABITU-
ALLY REACT IN WILL BE ACTIVATING THESE PETALS FROM YOUR PHY-
SICAL AREA. THUS} THESE TWO ACTIONS BUILD A THIRD. THE
NAVEL CHAKRA IS GOVERNED BY PLANET VENUS ENERGIES. THESE
BEING POWERS OF LOVE} ATTRACTION OF COHESIVE MAGNETIC FOR-
CES} BEAUTY} COLOR AND TONE. PERSONS WHO ARE MUSICIANS}
ARTISTS AND WRITERS WILL HAVE A NICELY DEVELOPED NAVEL
CHAKRA. THEY WILL ALSO HAVE HAD VENUS IN GOOD ASPECT IN
THEIR BIRTH CHARTS."

"I REALIZE THE IMPORTANCE OF ATTITUDE NOW}" I SAID. "IT


IS OUR PERSONAL INTENT AND ATTITUDE THAT CAN OPEN OR CLOSE
OUR CHAKRA CONNECTIONS."

"RIGHT} ROSE} MIND IS THE TOOL THAT KEEPS THE COSMIC ENER-
GIES FLOWING OR PRODUCES BLOCKS TO IMPEDE THE FLOW."

"SO SEVEN ENERGIES AS SEVEN COLORS FLOW AND MINGLE INTO


NAVEL CHAKRA? You SAID THREE ARE CONTROLLED BY LOGoI.
By WHOM ARE THE SEVEN BEING SENT?" INQUIRED VIOLET.

"SOME BY THE LORDS OF MIND. LORDS OF WISDOM} LORDS OF


MOVEMENT} SOME BY ARCHANGELS AND THREE ENERGY STREAMS COME
FROM THE MAN LORDS OF THE SUN REALM. THE MAN LORD ENERGIES
COME FROM FLAME REGION AND ARCHANGELS FROM THE INTELLECTUAL
SOUL ASTRAL AREAS. You WILL LEARN OF THESE BEINGS AND UNI-
VERSE REGIONS SOON. GURU WANTS TO COVER SOME ON THE HEART
CHAKRA AND THEN SINGH TAO WILL SPEAK ON IMPORTANT KUNDALINI
FORCES AND THEIR VIBRATORY ANIMATIONS."

A NEW CHAKRA NOW IMAGED LIKE A GOLDEN SPRING BLOSSOM AND LIT
UP THE AREA WHERE WE SAT. GURU POINTED TO IT AND SAID:

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 104 of 382
(

THE NAVEL CHAKRA - #3 - 10 SPOKES

ILLUSTRATION #3
(
LESSON #6

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 105 of 382
(

THE HEART CHAKRA - #4 - 12 SPOKES

(
ILLUSTRATION #4

LESSON #6

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 106 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 5

"THIS IS THE HEART CHAKRA #4 (SEE ILLUSTRATION #4). IT IS


THE HIGHEST OF YOUR BASIC LIFE CHAKRAS AND A MOST IMPORTANT
CHAKRA FOR IT FEEDS ENERGY INTO THE BLOOD STREAM AND HUMAN
HEART AND ALSO STIMULATES YOUR CONSCIOUS MIND-POINT WHICH
YOU ARE USING DAILY AS YOU INCARNATE ON EARTH. THE HEART
CHAKRA IS RULED BY YOUR SUN SOL AND ABSORBS A LIFE FORCE
FROM ITS SPIRITUAL RAYS. THIS HEART CHAKRA ALSO IS SHOWN
IN ANCIENT WISDOMS J SYMBOLICALLY AS A GOLDEN SNAKE (KUNDALINI)
COILED AROUND A SUN CENTER. THIS SYMBOL TOLD THE STORY OF
THIS CHAKRA'S PURPOSE; TO UNITE AND BALANCE PHYSICAL FORCES
WITH COSMIC ENERGIES. THE GOLDEN CHRIST RAYS J YELLOW AND
ORANGE J ARE SEEN IN A PERFECTLY DEVELOPED HEART CHAKRA.

"NOTICE THE TWELVE SPOKES. HERE EVERY PETAL IS BASICALLY


ORANGE AND YELLOW WITH THREADS OF ROSE J YELLOW GREENJ RED
VIOLET AND A THIN STRAND OF PALE BLUE. THE CENTER FLOWER
CUP IS MADE UP OF VARIGATED VIOLET J ROSE J GREEN AND BLUE AND
ITS DOORWAY SHOWS A DEEP VIOLET. THE SUN'S WARMTH AND EMPA-
THY RULES THIS CHAKRA."

GURU CONTINUED SPEAKING J "GODJ THE ABSOLUTEJ SENDS FORTH


FROM HIMSELF MILLIONS AND MILLIONS OF VARIED ENERGY FORMS.
THERE ARE SO MANY OF THESE WE CANNOT UNDERSTAND THEM ALL
BUT THE LOGOI DO J SO WE NEED NOT BE CONCERNED.

"THERE ARE CERTAIN TYPES OF ENERGY WE DO KNOW SUCH AS 'LIFE


FORCE' AND THE ELECTRICITY OF THE ETHERIC AND THE PHYSICAL
VITALITY NAMED "SERPENT-FIRE" WHICH IS ALSO AN ASPECT OF
LIFE-FORCE AND WHICH IS USED BY HUMANS FOR PROPAGATION. IT
IS THESE THREE ENERGIES WHICH ARE THE CAUSE BEHIND EACH EARTH
PERSON'S STATE OF ANIMATION. NOW J THESE THREE STRANDS OF
ENERGY ARE COMBINED INTO ONE LIFE FORCE STREAM AND ARE SENT
INTO PHYSICAL. HOWEVER J EACH OF THE THREE STRANDS ARE COMING
FROM DIFFERENT PLANETS. THEY ARE BEING BEAMED AND CONTROLLED
BY GREAT BEINGS UNDER THE CHARGE OF A WISE ONE J A LOGO BEING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 107 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 6

THE THREE ENERGY STRANDS ORIGINATE OUT OF GOD AND BECAUSE


OF THEIR TREMENDOUS POWERS COULD NOT BE TOLERATED IN ANY OF
THE LOWER LEVELS OF UNIVERSE J NOR BY THE LOWER VIBRATIONS
WITHIN THESE LEVELS. THEREFORE J AS IT SPREAD OUT J IT MUST
BE CUT DOWN IN ITS GREAT ACTION. THE LOGOI GOVERN THIS AS
THEY ALSO INFLUENCE THE SPIRITUAL SECONDARY CIRCULAR FORCES.
THIS SETS UP A SLOWER STREAM OF SPIRALING LIFE ENERGY. UPON
REACHING A YET LOWER UNIVERSE PLANE J IT IS AGAIN SLOWED BY
FLAME LORDS AND SUBDIVIDED IN ENERGY. SEE A PICTURE NOWj
THE ORIGINAL GOD LIFE POWERS BEING STRAINED THROUGH COUNT-
LESS CHAKRA-FLOWER BELLS OF HIGHER FINITE ENTITIES AND EVENTU-
ALLY ARRIVING IN MATTER AND UPON EARTH. THIS ENERGY POWER
YOU NAME CHRIST-POWER PRINCIPLE."

WE SAID WE HAD IT NOW IN MIND AND WE ALSO REALIZED THIS WAS


THE BASIC' PATTERN OF GOD'S ACTION FOR ALL THINGS OF UNIVERSE.
A TOP POINT ORIGIN J MULTIPLYING AND DIVIDING AND SPREADING
EVER WIDER AS ALL TRAVELED DOWNWARD INTO MATTER.

"YES J INVOLUTIONJ" SMILED GURU. "THIS CHRIST-LIFE FORCE


ALSO CONTAINS THREE ELEMENTS. IT IS ONE CHEMICAL ELEMENT
BUT IS FOUND IN ITS THREE STATES OF BEING J IN MATTERJ ASTRAL
AND SPIRIT. THESE THREE CHEMICAL STATES FORM SPIRIT J SOUL-
ASTRAL AND ETHERIC AND PHYSICAL BODIES BY THEIR LAW OF ADHES-
ION AND COHESION. THESE CHRIST-LIFE ELEMENTS ARE ALWAYS
ATOMICALLY MAGNETIZED TO FORM SPIRIT BODIES FOR "WHOLE SELF"
TO DWELL WITHIN WHEN ON THE HIGHER SPIRIT REALMS.

WHEN YOU ARE IN SOUL-AsTRALJ YOUR FORM OUTLINE HERE IS OF


CERTAIN HIGHER CHEMICAL ELEMENTS AND ELECTRICAL CHARGES
DRAWN TOGETHER UNDER THE DIRECTION OF YOUR SPIRIT FORM.
YOUR ASTRAL BODY AND ITS RHYTHMIC AND MAGNETIC FIELD IS
OUTLINED FROM YOUR SPIRITUAL QUALITIES."

"OH!"EXCLAIMED LILY J "DOES THIS MEAN OUR SPIRIT AND ASTRAL


APPEARANCE WILL DEPEND UPON OUR JEWEL DESIGN PATTERN?"

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 108 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 7
"THIS IS SOJ LILY" SAID GURU J PLEASED. "AND WHEN PROPER
TIME COMES TO GATHER TOGETHER AN ETHERIC BODY TO INCARNATE
SOMEWHERE IN UNIVERSE MATTER; THE HIGH LORDS OVER EACH GOD
MANCHILD J SET IN MOTION CERTAIN IMPULSES AND ENERGY CURRENTS
FROM SPECIFIC STARS AND PLANETS AND THESE AID EACH IN FORM-
ING THEM INTO A VEIL OF ETHERIC MATTER ELEMENTS. THESE ARE
INVISIBLE TO LOWER DENSER MATTER. THEN WHEN ALL IS DRAWN
IN FROM OUT OF UNIVERSE J YOU AND YOUR GUIDING LORDS CREATE
AND COMBINE THEM AND YOUR ETHERIC BODY FORM IS BORN."

"SO WE HELP CREATE OUR ETHERIC FORMS?" SAID VIOLET.

"IN PAST TIMES J NO. Now IN PRESENT TIMEJ YES. WHEN ETHERIC
IS BORN J CERTAIN SOUL FORCES ARE FED FROM ASTRAL CROWN CHAKRA
INTO ETHERIC CHAKRA FLOWERS. ETHERIC NOW PASSES THESE ON
INTO THE BODY AND IT NOW ANIMATES AND BECOMES ALIVE."

IT MADE SENSE TO US AS WE THOUGHT IT OVER.

"WHEN THE ETHERIC SOUL BEING ENTERS THE PHYSICAL FORM J IT


ENTERS THROUGH THE DOORWAY AT THE TOP OF THE PHYSICAL HEAD
CARRYING THE LITTLE ENERGY SEED J TRAILING ITS SILVER CORD.
THE SEED TRAVELS FIRST AFTER ITS ENTERING TO THE THIRD EYE
CHAKRA STATION. THEN ON DOWN AND THROUGH THE THROAT CHAKRA
STATION AND DOWN TO A PLACE FEW REALIZE IS PRESENT IN THE
HUMAN FORM. FOR THIS PLACE J LIKE THE ENTERING SEED J IS
MADE UP OF INVISIBLE ELEMENTS. THIS COZY POCKET HOUSES THE
'LITTLEST EGO SEED ATOM" WHICH REMAINS LODGED THERE SAFELY
FOR AS LONG AS YOUR PHYSICAL BODY LIVES."

"HOLY ONE" SAID ONE OF THE ASTRAL GROUP. "CAN YOU TELL
THEM OF THEIR UNIVERSE CONNECTIONS?"

"YES J ILANJ FOR IT IS IMPORTANT FOR ALL TO REALIZE." GURU


CLOSED HIS EYES A MOMENT. "LITTLE ONES J WHEN THE NEW ETHER-
IC'S FLOWER BELLS OPEN TO THE INRUSH OF ASTRAL SOUL FORCES J
IT BECOMES ANIMATED AND ALIVE. THEN WHEN THE NEW PHYSICAL

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 109 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 8

FORM IS COMPLETED AND EJECTED ON ITS EXACT DATE AND CORRES-


PONDS TO THE CORRECT PLANETARY ENERGY FORCES; THE PHYSICAL
TAKES ITS FIRST SPASMODIC BREATH. AT THIS MOMENT J THE ROOT
CHAKRA #1 QUIVERS INTO ACTION AND THE SPIRIT SOUL ASTRAL
FORCES UNITE INTO AND JOIN THE KUNDALINI SERPENT FIRE FORCES
AND PHYSICAL FORM LIVES. NOTICE THESE TWO ACTIONS OF LITTLE
SEED ATOM AS IT IS LODGING IN ITS POCKET. ONE FROM CROWN
CHAKRA AND ONE FROM THE ASTRAL FORCES; BOTH ENTERING ROOT
CHAKRA SIMULTANEOUSLY IN AN ACTION TO PRODUCE A LIFE CONNEC-
TION."
. .. . ..
WE COULD PICTURE THIS. DEAR SINGH TAO TOOK ..
OVER....NOW.. .. HE
".

SMILED SWEETLY. "THE FORCES


.. .
FROM CROWN
~ _. ..' CHAKRA
.. "
AND ASTRAL
. . . . _. . .. .

CHAKRAS ARE ALWAYS SPIRITUAL ENERGIES. THE KUNDALINI FORCEJ


HOWEVER J IS GENERATED FROM THE FORCES OF THE BODY PATTERNS
OF YOUR TWO EARTH PARENTS. THIS COMBINATION OF FORCES WERE
ACTIVE 'FROM THE MOMENT OF CONCEPTION AND ITS FORCES DECIDE
WHICH GENES SHALL COME FORTH IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF ...
THIS PHY- "

SICAL BODY SHELL. IT IS THESE GENES WHICH WILL ALSO CONTRI-


BUTE TO THE ENTITY'S KARMA AND CAUSE CERTAIN INHERITED
EFFECTS."

"WE ARE CONNECTED TO OUR LINEAGE BLOOD LINES THEN FROM OUR
PHYSICAL GENES?" VIOLET ASKED GENTLY.

"YESJ VIOLET DEAR. THIS KUNDALINI FORCE TIES INTO SOLAR


SUN AND AS IT MINGLES WITH THE HIGHER FORCES COMING IN
THROUGH CROWN CHAKRA J A THIRD FORCE IS GENERATED WHICH
OPENS THE ROOT CHAKRA'S BELL FLOWER AND AS THE TWO ENERGIES
MEETJ THIS THIRD STARTS UP ALL THE PHYSICAL BODY ACTIVITIES
TO MEET IN A PRECISE RHYTHMIC UNION TO THE ETHERIC. THIS
RHYTHM WILL BE PECULIARLY EACH ENTITIES OWN. YET IT CAN
IMPROVE WITHIN ITS OWN SCALE AS EACH PERSON LEARNS AND
GROWS AND DEVELOPS. AT THIS DOUBLE ENERGY ATTACHING OF
THE ROOT CHAKRA AND THE COMPLETE ATTACHING OF YOUR OTHER
SIX CHAKRAS J YOU BECOME IMPROVED WITHIN YOUR PERSONAL SCALE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 110 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 9

As EACH CONNECTS IN FULL~ YOU BECOME COMPLETELY HOOKED UP


FROM YOUR PHYSICAL UP INTO YOUR HIGHER CHRIST-SPIRIT FORMS."

"SINGH TAO~ I ALWAYS THOUGHT THE KUNDALINI FORCE WAS FROM


THE SPIRIT REGIONS?" SAID LILY~ PERPLEXED.

"LILY~ DEAR~ ALL FORCES ARE OF GOD~ BUT ALL DO NOT EXIST IN
THE SAME UNIVERSE REGIONS. KUNDALINI IS A MATTER FIRE FORCE
AND ITS POWERS BELONG WITHIN THE HEART AND CENTER OF ALL
PLANETS. IT IS THEIR INNER MAGNETIC FIELD. EARTH IS A LIV-
ING ENTITY WHICH IS ALSO EVOLUTING AND HER INNER FORCES FIL-
TER OUTWARD AND ARE JOINED TO HER ETHERIC FORM AND AURIC
INFLUENCES JUST AS ARE MANKINDS. IN FACT~ ALL LIVING THINGS
FEED UPON AND RENEW THEMSELVES FROM THE FORCES OF THE PLANETS
THEY VISIT AND DWELL UPON. THE ELEMENTS OF PLANET EARTH IN
MATTER FORM AND HER ETHERIC ARE SIMILAR TO HUMANITIES AND
RANGE FROM HYDROGEN ATOMS TO URANIUM~ BUT ALSO CONTAIN MANY
ELEMENTS AS YET UNKNOWN TO MANKIND. PLEASE REALIZE NOW
THAT THESE ATOMS IN THEMSELVES ARE ALSO LIVING ENTITIES IN
THEIR OWN RIGHT AND ARE DEVELOPING IN A CYCLIC ORDER AND IN
AN ASCENDING SPIRAL. AND IN SO DOING~ THEY CONSTITUTE MOST
OF EARTH'S ATMOSPHERE. IN FACT~ THEY FORM THE BASIC INGRED-
IENTS OF THE ENTIRE UNIVERSE."

"As ALL LIFE IS DUAL AND HAS ACTION WITHIN TWO POLARITIES)
COULD YOU BE MORE SPECIFIC?" I PLEADED. HE AGREED AMIABLY
AS ALWAYS.

"BOTH EARTH AND ALL THE LIFE UPON ITS CRUSTS AND UNDER AND
IN THE SEA HAS TWO POLARITIES WHENEVER LIFE INCARNATES ON
EARTH. THE NEGATIVE FIRE FORCE IS AT ITS LOWEST RHYTHMIC
POINT WITHIN MINERAL AND RAISES IN VIBRATION THROUGH PLANT
AND THEN HIGHER IN ANIMAL AND MAMMALS AND IS AT ITS HIGHEST
'AND STRONGEST NEGATIVE FORCE IN MAN."

HE SAW THIS PERPLEXED OUR HELD VIEWPOINT. "PLEASE DO NOT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 111 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 10

CONFUSE NEGATIVE FORCE IN THIS CASE WITH THE MENTAL IDEA


OF DENYING OR CONFUTING OR OMITTING~ OR WRONG OR BAD. WE
ARE USING THE IMPORT 'NEGATIVE' NOW TO DENOTE ITS OPPOSITE
ENERGY ACTION FROM AN EXISTING POSITIVE POLARITY. IN FACT~
THIS NEGATIVE POLARITY OF PLANETS IS THE GOOD FORCE WHICH
PROPELS ALL CREATURES TO EVOLVE~ INVESTIGATE AND TO DESIRE
TO LEARN AND GROW." HE CHUCKLED AS WE ADJUSTED OUR MENTAL
VIEWPOINTS. THEN WITH GOOD HUMOR CONTINUED:

"THE ROOT CHAKRA KUNDALINI FIRE FORCE IS MOST IMPORTANT AND


SHOULD NEVER BE IGNORED NOR IGNORANTLY SURPRESSED~ BUT SHOULD
BE WISELY CONTROLLED FOR IT HAS A VERY IMPORTANT PART TO PLAY
IN EACH PERSON'S EVOLVEMENT AND UNIVERSAL GROWTH. WHEN EACH
PERSON LEARNS HOW TO HANDLE THIS FORCE CONSTRUCTIVELY~ THEIR
EVOLUTION SPEEDS UP.

"THE SECOND MAIN FORCE IN YOUR ROOT CHAKRA IS GENERATED THERE


FROM SOL~ YOUR SYSTEM'S SOLAR SUN~ AND YOU BREATH IT IN AND
ABSORB IT FROM THE EXTERNAL SURROUNDINGS OF EARTH. AT BIRTH
WHEN THE NEW BABY ENTERS THE PHYSICAL BODY FORM AND FIRST
BREATHS IN~ IT SUCKS OUT OF THE ATMOSPHERE TREMENDOUS POTEN-
CIES OF AIR AND SUN ATOMS. THESE ARE DRAWN INTO THE BODY
LUNGS AND TRANSFERS TO THE CIRCULATORY SYSTEM TO RIDE IN
THE BLOOD STREAMS TO ALL PARTS OF THE PHYSICAL AND THIS IN-
CLUDES A MINGLING WITH THE ETHERIC FLOWER CHAKRAS. THE SUN'S
RAYS IN THEIR SEVEN COLOR SPECTRUMS ABSORB INTO THE HIGHER
ETHERIC AND ASTRAL COLORS IN THE CHAKRAS. THE HABIT OF
SMOKING COATS THE LUNGS WITH A TAR-LIKE SUBSTANCE AND RETARDS
THESE SUN RAYS FROM BEING ABSORBED."

"WE HAVE HEARD THE ABUSE OF THE FORCE KUNDALINI AND THAT IT
HOLDS BACK OUR SPIRITUAL PROGRESS TOO." I VENTURED.

"IN EVERY PERSON'S ROOT CHAKRA LIES THIS LOVELY GOLDEN SER-
PENT~ SPARKLING IN REDS~ YELLOW AND ORANGE JEWEL LIGHTS.

WHEN ASLEEP AND INACTIVE~ SHE RESTS IN A HOLLOW NEST IN THE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 112 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE 11

HEART OF THE ROOT CHAKRA. NOT UNTIL PUBERTY SHOULD SHE BE


STIRRED~ AND NOT UNTIL AFTER PUBERTY SHOULD SHE BE ACTIVE
IN THE SEX ACT. FOR HER LAW SHOULD BE OBSERVED AND OBEYED
TO RECEIVE THE HIGHEST ENERGIES FROM HER FORCES. UNFORTU-
NATELY~ IN UNKNOWINGNESS IT BECOMES ACTIVATED TOO EARLY AND
OFTEN LOSES ITS POTENCIES PREMATURELY.

"THIS FORCE WAS GIVEN FOR THE PURPOSE OF CARRYING ON HEREDI-


TARY STRAINS OF PARENT PATTERNS AND FAMILY~ RACE AND NATIONAL
TENDENCIES. WHENEVER YOU~ THROUGH KNOWLEDGE~ USE ITS FORCES
TO ACTIVATE FOR SPIRITUAL PURPOSES~ THEY WILL SUBLIMATE IN
THE CROWN CHAKRA~ RATHER THAN DOWN IN THE ROOT CHAKRA. So
THEIR FIRE WILL IGNITE A SPIRITUAL FIRE WITH THE PHYSICAL
SENSATIONS. WHEN~ FOR SPIRITUAL UNFOLDMENT~ THE PERSON RAI-
SES ITS EMOTIONS UPWARD THROUGH. THE SPINE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE
SO THAT ITS BLINDING FLASH OF LIGHT MAY BURST FORTH IN EITHER
THE THIRD EYE OR CROWN AREA AND NOT DOWN WITHIN THE ROOT
AREA AND GENITALS~ YOU WILL HAVE A PSYCHIC BREAKTHROUGH.

"ONCE ONE LEARNS HOW TO DRAW UP KUNDALINI'S POWERS~ A CHANGE


OCCURS. Now~ AT WILL YOU CAN MEET THE POSITIVE CONSTRUCTIVE
GOD FORCES POURING INTO YOUR ASTRAL CROWN CHAKRA WITH YOUR
RAISED EARTH KUNDALINI POWERS AND UPRATE YOUR PRESENT PRO-
GRESS POSITION. FROM ITS BLISS~ YOUR OVERALL PROGRESS NOW
QUICKENS. THE EARTH FORCES HAVE RAISED THEMSELVES. MIND
, HAS CONTROLLED SO EMOTION TRANSCENDS THE MATTER PLANET I NFLU-
ENCE AND CARRIES ON INTO THE HIGHER AREAS OF SELF. ALL PER-
SONS WHO CAN DO THIS HAVE REACHED A NEW STAGE IN THEIR EVOLU-
TION AND WILL COME SUITABLY PREPARED IN PERSONALITY TO EMBRACE
A NEWER AND A HIGHER LIFE PATTERN.

"THIS DOES NOT MEAN ALL MUST PRACTICE CELIBACY. SEX IS IM-
PORTANT TO BUILD VEHICLES FOR INCOMING SOULS. THERE IS A
SUITABLE LEVEL FOR THE SEX ACT AND KEEPING UPON IT IS NEITHER
WRONG NOR DEBASING BUT CAN BE BEAUTIFUL AND FULFILLING WHEN
REAL LOVE OF TWO SOULS ACTIVATE ITS FORCES. IT'S DEBASING
ONLY WHEN PRACTICED FROM LUST!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 113 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SIX PAGE l2

"RIGHT ACTION SHOULD BE USED TO RAISE KUNDALINI FOR SHE RES-


PONDS TO THE ROSY COLOR RAY WHICH HOLDS MATTER ATOMIC POWERS
AND CAN INJURE AND BURN WHEN NOT ACTIVATED IN SENSATIONS OF
WARM LOVINGNESS. NEVER DEBASE ITS ACTION; OBEY ITS LAWS."

SINGH TAO WITH HIS DEEP LOVING NATURE WAS THE PERFECT MASTER
TO COVER THIS SUBJECT. WE BASKED IN HIS DIVINE FRAGRANCE.

THE ASTRAL MOON SHONE HIGH OVER US AS WE EXCHANGED GREETINGS


AND LOVING MESSAGES WITH ONE ANOTHER. SOON THE COLORED MISTS
AROSE AROUND THE FOUR OF US SO WE GROUPED FOR OUR HOMEWARD
JOURNEY. OUR LAST SWEET SOUNDS OF ASTRAL WERE GENTLE 'GOODBYS'
AND THE SWEET NOTES OF A NIGHTINGALE.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 114 of 382
('

I LIVE IN HARMONY AS THE CHRIST SPIRIT REVEALS


THE PATTERN OF HUMAN PERFECTION IN ME, THROUGH
THIS POWER) I EXPERIENCE RIGHTEOUSNESS) TRUTH
AND WISDOM,

( I LIVE FEARLESSLY, THROUGH COURAGEOUS LIVING)


I DRAW TO MY BEING INFINITE ENERGY WHICH PERMITS
ME TO BECOME A PIONEER IN THE NEW AGE AS I HELP
TO PAVE THE WAY FOR A NEW CIVILIZATION,

THANK You FATHER

.- - ~ ----=-=._:::-" . . . -.
.. ":-.~-,....=====;:;===
~

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 115 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 116 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN ROSE LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON SEVEN

PLANETS AND CHAKRAS

"AND HE HAD IN HIS RIGHT HAND SEVEN STARS; AND OUT OF HIS
MOUTH WENT A SHARP TWO-EDGED SWORD AND HIS COUNTENANCE
WAS AS THE SUN SHINETH IN HIS STRENGTH."
REVELATION 1:16

WE FLOATED INTO A BRILLIANT LATE AFTERNOON SCENE. THE


ASTRAL SUN SPLASHED GOLD AND SAFFRON AGAINST THE LAVENDER
BLUE SKY. As WE APPROACHED THE SEA~ ITS TAWNY AND BLUE
GREEN SHADES CAUGHT OUR EYES AND DREW THEM ON TO SAND AND
- ROUGH BROWN BOULDERS WHERE WAVES EXPLODED IN FEATHERY
WHITENESS.

CORMORANTS AND GULLS WITH TINY BUSY SANDPIPERS~ INTERSPER-


SED AND PLAYED IN THE RECEDING SURF. OTHER SEA BIRDS WERE
BUSY IN THE CLIFF ROCKS.

WE LANDED ON THE HIGH BEACH IN A COVE WHERE A FEW TREES AND


FERNS GREW AND A TINY STREAM WANDERED DOWN THE ROCKY CLIFF
SIDE TO MERRILY RUN OVER THE SANDS AND JOIN THE SEA.

SOMEONE WAS TALKING CLOSE BY. THEN AS WE SOFTLY WALKED INTO


VIEW~ WE SAW A WHITEBEARD HOLDING A LARGE WOODEN CROSS AND
KNEELING BEFORE HIM WAS MORI HANDUS. FROM THE MURMER OF
THEIR VOICES~ WE REALIZED IT WAS SOME SORT OF A SACRED CERE-
MONY SO WE STOPPED AND SAT DOWN WHERE WE WERE. MANY VOICES
NOW SANG IN GLORIOUS CHANT AS MASTERS~ MONKS~ ST. THERESA
AND HER NUNS AND OUR SOUL GROUP FAMILY MEMBERS CAME ALONG
THE BEACH AND ONE BY ONE KNELT BEFORE THE WOODEN CROSS. As
EACH ONE DID AND THEN LOOKED UP AT ITS WEATHERBEATEN WOOD~
THE HEART AT ITS CROSS PIECE WOULD SEND A BEAM OF WHITE LIGHT

«J REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 117 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 2

FROM ITS CENTER TO SHINE UPON THE KNEELER. WHEN ALL HAD
PASSED~ MORI LED US AND WE~ TOO~ FOLLOWED SUIT AND RECEIVED
OUR BLESSING. ALTHOUGH WE WERE NOT THEN TO KNOW THE PUR-
POSE BEHIND THIS ACTION~ WE COULD SENSE A STRENGTHENING AND
FULFILLMENT.

THE WHITEBEARD WAS OUR FRIEND~ TENNECK~ WHO NOW CAME OVER AND
IN WARM LOVINGNESS EMBRACED US ALL. AFTER WE GREETED ALL
THERE~ SOME RETURNED UP THE BEACH AND BACK TO THE CASTLE.
YET SOME REMAINED TO HEAR OUR MASTER'S LESSONS.

To OUR SURPRISE~ MORI HANDUS WAS TO SPEAK FIRST. AFTER GIV-


ING US BLESSINGS~ HE SAID:

"IN THE FJRST ILLUSTRATION IN LESSON #6 WHICH OUR MASTERS


HAD ROSE COPY; YOU WILL NOTICE AROUND THE CENTRAL FIGURE~
THE CHAKRAS AND WITH EACH A PLANET SYMBOL. IT IS TIME NOW
TO UNDERSTAND HOW THESE CONNECT AND HOW THEIR POWERS AFFECT
A PERSON'S INCARNATION AND EVENTS."

GURU NOW MADE A MOVEMENT AND THE IMAGE SHONE BEFORE US.
(SEE ILLUSTRATION #1 OF LESSON :6) (NOTE WAVES.)

MORI CONTINUED~ POINTING TO #1 CHAKRA.

"NOTICE THE ROOT CHAKRA AND HER RED AND ORANGE RAYS ARE
UNDER THE MOON'S MAGNETIC PULL. SO ARE ALL GROWING THINGS
OF EARTH AND ALSO THE TIDES OF LARGE BODIES OF WATER. THE
MOON'S FORCES ALSO GOVERNS STATE OF HEALTH~ BOTH OF OUR
MIND CONNECTIONS AS WELL AS PHYSICAL BODY. WHEN A PERSON
IS BORN UNDER A FAVORABLE MOON ASPECT~ THEN THEIR HEALTH
WILL BE GOOD. IF MOON IS IN A WELL ASPECTED HOUSE IN YOUR
HELIOCENTRIC HOROSCOPE~ YOU WILL EXPERIENCE A GOOD STRONG
BODY~ HEALTH AND MENTAL ALERTNESS. HOWEVER~ IF THE HOUSE
AND MOON MANIFEST OF THEIR STRONG NEGATIVE FORCES~ YOUR
KARMA WILL NO DOUBT BE HEALTH ONES WITH MAYBE DIFFICULT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 118 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 3

TRENDS TO MENTAL LEARNING I UNLESS MERCURY IS VERY STRONGLY


PLACED.

INSANITY IS ALSO RULED FROM MOON IMPULSES WHEN THESE ARE


IMBALANCED FROM MENTAL BLOCKAGE. WE IMPLORE YOU TO NEVER
JUMP TO CONCLUSIONS YOU'RE DOOMED JUST BECAUSE A PLANET OR
HOUSE INDICATES DIFFICULT TRENDS. FOR THEIR POSITIONS ONLY
INDICATE WHAT CAN TAKE PLACE I NOT WHAT MllSI MANIFEST. You
CAN ENTER HERE AND TAKE CONTROL AND CHANGE AND IMPROVE SELF
AND MOVE OUT FROM UNDER THEIR FORCES."

WE WERE GLAD TO HEAR THIS. I KNEW I HAD NOW AT THIS· TIME


A VERY STRONG MOON I 20 0 IN LIBRAI WHICH COULD BE INDICATING
MY MISSION ON EARTH IN RELAYING OUR SOUL GROUP LESSONS ON
- 'f11ND' FOR IT SHARED JUPITER 26 0 AND EARTH ISO.

"WHEREVER MOON GOVERNS IN YOUR CHART / " MORI SAID I "THERE


YOU WILL FIND THE CLUES TO YOUR PRESENT PERSONALITY. IT
WILL ALSO TELL YOU WHERE YOU WILL LEARN AND EXPERIENCE YOUR
PRESENTLY NEEDED LESSONS.

"MOON ASPECTS WILL ALSO BE INFLUENCING YOUR SOUL MIND SUB-


CONSCIOUS AREAS I YOUR INSTINCTS AND PLAY A PSYCHIC PART FOR
YOUR PSYCHOLOGICAL CHANGES. THESE OCCUR IN EVERY PERSON'S
SEVEN YEAR GROWTH CYCLE. SO YOU SEE I MOON WILL ALSO BE
AFFECTING YOUR SOUL GROWTH AS WELL AS YOUR PHYSICAL GROWTH.
IMAGINATION OR ITS LACK STEMS FROM MOON POWERS. REMEMBERI
WE ARE SPEAKING FROM HELIOCENTRIC POSITIONS OF THE PLANETS.

"HELIOCENTRIC IS DIFFERENT FROM THE PRESENT DAY GEOCENTRIC


ASTROLOGY WHICH USES EARTH AS THE CENTER OF THIS SOLAR SYS-
TEM. HELIOCENTRIC TAKES SuN AS THE CENTER. THIS GIVES
DIFFERENT POSITIONS FOR MERCURY I VENUS AND MARS. THE FARTHER
PLANETS WILL BE THE SAME AS THEY REMAIN IN THE VARIOUS HOUSE
POSITIONS FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME BEFORE CHANGING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 119 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 4
"Now LOOK AT SPLEEN CHAKRA #2~ ILLUSTRATION 2~ LESSON 5.
IT IS RULED BY MERCURY WHICH INFLUENCES YOUR CONSCIOUS
MIND'S REASONING ABILITIES. How WELL OR HOW POORLY A
PERSON WILL BE ABLE TO REASON AND INTERPRET IDEAS DEPENDS
ON WHERE MERCURY IS SITUATED IN THEIR HOROSCOPE. THE
COLORS WHICH SHOULD BE FREELY FLOWING IN CHAKRA #2 ARE ALL
THE SEVEN SPECTRUM HUES. THESE MANY COMING TO THIS SPLEEN
COME FROM THE LIFE FORCES OF GOD'S ENERGY~ SUN AND FROM
THE PLANET ONE IS INHABITING. IN YOUR CASE~ EARTH. THE
GOD RAYS PRODUCE COLOR ATOMS WHICH SPLEEN CHAKRA SUBDIVIDES
AND DISPERSES THROUGHOUT BODY FOR HEALING AND PERFECTING
BALANCE. HEALERS USUALLY HAVE WELL DEVELOPED AND OPEN
SPLEEN CHAKRAS.

"ANY ONE OF THESE SEVEN PRIMARY COLORS CAN BE SUPPLEMENTED~


HOWEVER~ THROUGH LIGHT BULBS FOR RAY HEALING. THE ELECTRI-
CAL COLOR RAYS WILL FORTIFY AND REINFORCE AND HELP RESTORE
FOR PERFECT PHYSICAL FUNCTION AND ALSO SOUL HEALING AND
SPIRIT MANIFESTATION.

"SEE NAVEL CHAKRA #3 - ILLUSTRATION #3 - LESSON 6. SEE IT


HAS TEN RAYS. WE HAD SEVEN OF THESE RAYS MENTIONED LAST
LESSON. THE THREE HIGHER RAYS ARE SENT TO YOU FROM HIGH
LOGO BEINGS. VENUS RULES THIS #3 CHAKRA AND MAGNETIZES
THROUGH YOUR EMOTIONS AND SENSATIONS. WHEREVER VENUS IS
FOUND IN YOUR HOROSCOPE~ IT GOVERNS PHYSICAL FEELING POWERS.
ARTISTS~ WRITERS AND MUSICIANS TEND TO HAVE WELL DEVELOPED
NAVEL CHAKRAS. ITS SHADES OF SEVERAL REDS MIXED WITH A
GREAT DEAL OF GREENS BALANCE ONE ANOTHER. You CAN DISCOVER
MUCH THROUGH CHECKING YOUR HELIOCENTRIC HOROSCOPE CHART
ABOUT YOURSELF AND HOW YOUR PRESENT PATTERN IS FUNCTIONING."

NOTE: You CAN ORDER THE MAGI CENTER'S "HELIOCENTRIC ASTROLOGY"


LESSONS WHEN THEY COME OUT. O~R MASTERS AND MAGI MEMBERS RAVE
COMPILED THEM FOR YOUR PURPOSE; WE;-ARE t.vORKING"ON A HELIOCENTRIC
EPHEMERUS ALSO~ WHICH YOU MAY WANT WHEN AVAILABLE. PLEASE
CHECK WITH US ABOUT THIS WHEN YOU ARE READY FOR THE ABOVE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 120 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 5

MORI NOW JOINED THE OTHERS. GURU SPOKE NEXT.

"THE HEART CHAKRA #4 IS THE HIGHEST OF YOUR BASIC CHAKRAS


AND THE ONE WHICH HOOKS INTO YOUR CONSCIOUS MIND POINT OF
ETHERIC MIND. IT HOLDS THE GOLDEN CHRIST RAYS AND ALSO
SUN RAYS AND EXERTS A POWERFUL FORCE FOR BRINGING ABOUT
SELF-MASTERY. IT ALSO IS INFLUENCED BY EACH PERSON'S SPIRIT-
UAL CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE REAL WHOLE SELF. IT IS RULED BY
THE SUN WHO IS A LOGO BEING AND ACTIVATES WITHIN THE PERSON
FROM THEIR MALE POLARITIES. IT ALSO MAGNETIZES AUTHORITY
AND DRIVING POWERS UNDER THE HOUSE IT IS LOCATED IN AT YOUR
BIRTH AND ACCORDING TO ITS DEGREE AT THAT MOMENT."GURU
PAUSED.

"WE WILL SKIP THE SEED ATOM CHAKRA AS IT IS A SUBJECT IN


ITSELF AND GO ON TO THE THROAT CHAKRA #6. THIS CHAKRA
THOUGH IT IS REFLECTED DOWN INTO YOUR ETHERIC MATTER FORM
IS ACTUALLY AN ORGAN OF THE SOUL-AsTRAL BODY FORM. IT IS
DIRECTLY ATTACHED INTO ETHERIC VIA REFLECTION. IT IS THE
LOWEST OF TWO ASTRAL CHAKRASJ THROAT AND BROW. THIS #6
CHAKRA IS RULED BY MARS J WHICH GIVES FORTH A DYNAMIC ENERGY
FORCE FOR COURAGE AND DETERMINATION AND ALSO OTHER FORCES
FOR GREAT ACHIEVEMENTS WHEN COMBINED WITH POWERS OF GOOD
AND FROM THE ADVANTAGE OF THE HOUSE IT RESTS WITHIN. How-
EVER J UNDER LOWER ASPECTS J IT CAN M~NIFEST STRIFE J WARJ
DOMINATION FOR EVIL INCLINATION WHEN NEGATIVELY PLACED.

(SEE ILLUSTRATION 5J LESSON 7)


THIS LOVELY VIOLET AND ROSE LAVENDER CHAKRA HAS SIXTEEN
SPOKES AND A DEEP VIOLET BELL WITH PURPLE THROAT. IT ALSO
HAS THREADS OF WOVEN YELLOW J ROSE AND PALE GREEN THROUGH
ITS PETALS. STRANGELY J IN STATES OF ANGERJ A PERSON CAN
DRAW UP THE FIRE FORCES OF ROOT CHAKRA INTO THIS ASTRAL
CHAKRA AND MINGLE ITS WARLIKE ASPECTS INTO THESE GOOD ASTRAL
FORCES. THIS DAMAGES THE ASTRAL ORGAN WHICH CRIPPLES THE
ASTRAL BODY FORM SO THAT WHEN YOU TRANSIGHT OVER J YOU INHERIT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 121 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 6
A MAIMED BODY HERE IN OUR REALMS. As MARS FORCES ARE FIXED
IN THEMSELVES~ THIS YOU CANNOT CHANGE UP HERE~ BUT YOU CAN
CHANGE AND CONTROL FROM YOUR PRESENT MATTER ASPECT BY CHANG-
ING YOUR ATTITUDES~ MOTIVES AND PERSONAL INTENTS FROM AGRESS-
IVE WARLIKE HABITS TO CALM~ CONTROLLED BENEFICIAL INTENT."

I WAS SO GLAD I'D BEEN WORKING ON MY EMOTIONS ALL THESE YEARS)


AT HEARING THIS REGARDING ANGER. My MARS WAS SO IN CAPRICORN
AND BEING A LEO AND FIRE FORCE AT THIS BODY'S BIRTH~ ITS ROOT
FORCES WERE VERY POWERFUL. I MADE A NOTE TO WATCH FUTURE
REACTIONS MORE CAREFULLY.

"LET US EXAMINE BROW CHAKRA #7 (ILLUSTRATION #6 IN THIS


LESSON). WHEN THIS CHAKRA IS LAVENDER AND PURPLE ON ONE
SIDE AND. ROSE WITH YELLOW ON THE OTHER) IT IS IN A PERFECT
FORCE RATE. THE SEVEN COLORS AND SILVER) INTERTWINE INTO
ITS 100 PETALS. ITS BELL CUP IS A DEEP ROSE VIOLET AND ITS
MOUTH SOLID PURPLE. THIS CHAKRA RESTS IN THE ASTRAL INTELL-
ECTUAL FORCES AND HAS JUPITER RULING. HERE IT LIES IN THE
ASTRAL BODY'S ABSTRACT MIND AREA AND ON OUR ASTRAL ABSTRACT
MIND PLANE WHERE THE CASTLE DWELLS. WHEN YOUR JUPITER LIES
IN A BENEFICIAL HOUSE~ JUPITER WILL MAGNETIZE ITS HIGH ASPIR-
ING BENEFICIAL POWER TO WORK IN YOUR INCARNATION. IT GIVES
GREAT ABILITY OF THOUGHT~ ESPECIALLY IN THE LATER YEARS OF
AN INCARNATION. IT ALSO BRINGS JUSTICE FOR GOOD OR OPERATES
AS RETRIBUTION FOR EVIL. NOTE WHERE YOUR JUPITER LIES AND
WITHIN WHAT HOUSE AND NOTE THAT HOUSE FOR ITS ABILITIES AND
WHERE IT HAS ACTION IN YOUR LIFE. THIS IS A TASK EACH MUST
DO FOR THEMSELVES AS ALL ARE UNIQUE AND DIFFERENT."

WE NOW HAD A BREAK AND WE EARTHLINGS EAGERLY RAN DOWN TO THE


WATER'S EDGE AND PICKED UP LOVELY SHELLS AND RACED THE INCOM-
ING SURF LIKE HAPPY CHILDREN.

OMAR FINALLY CALLED US ALL TOGETHER AND WE SAT ON THE SAND


AROUND HIM WHERE HE SAT ON A ROCK. BESIDE HIM FORMED THE
BEAUTIFUL CROWN CHAKRA (SEE ILLUSTRATION #7).

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 122 of 382
(

,
0,

THE THRDAT CHAKRA - #6 - 16 SPOKES

ILLUSTRATION #5
(
LESSON t.q

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 123 of 382
THE BROW CHAKRA - #7 - 100 PETALS

ILLUSTRATION #6
(
"-
LESSON #7

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 124 of 382
THE CROWN CHAKRA - #8 - lJODa PETALS
ILLUSTRATION #7 LESSON J7

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 125 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 7
"THIS GLORIOUS MIND AND SPIRITUAL CHAKRA IS OF PRISMATIC
HUES OF MANY COLORS. IT IS A DOUBLE FLOWER. ITS OUTER
THOUSAND PETALS PREDOMINATES AS A RICH~ ROSY VIOLET WITH
WOVEN STRANDS OF BLUE LAVENDER~ ORANGE AND YELLOW AND SILVER.
ITS CENTER TWELVE PETALS ARE A RICH DEEP ORANGE AND YELLOW
GOLD. THE SPOKES ARE A DEEP BURNT ORANGE. THE CUP CENTER
IS OF A MIXED VIOLET ORANGE AND SILVER~ ITS HEAR1 OF DEEP
PURPLE. THIS SPIRIT MIND CHAKRA HAS EVER BEEN CALLED BY
THE AWAKENED SOULS~ THE 'THOUSAND PETALED LOTUS'. IT LIES
WITHIN OUR GOD MIND BODY FORM AND IT INCREASES IN UNFOLDMENT
AS WE ADD REALITY~ WISDOM AND SPIRITUAL KNOWLEDGE.

"FROM DIVINE GOD HIMSELF POURS ITS SPECIAL FORCES~ DOWN


THROUGH OUR CHAKRAS OF VARIOUS FORMSj AND THESE ARE MAGNETI-
ZED TO THE INNER CENTER BELL-FLOWER MOUTH AND FLOW INTO IT
FROM WITHOUT THE HIGHER FORMS TO MEET WITH THE INNER FORCES
OF MANKIND'S BODY ENVELOPES. AT MAN'S FIRST DEVELOPMENT~
THIS CROWN MIND CHAKRA ACTED ONLY AS A RECEIVING STATION.
A CHANNEL THROUGH WHICH HIGHER ONES COULD TEACH AND DEVELOP
THEIR CHARGES.

"WHEN MANKIND BECAME AN EGO BEING AT EARTH'S FOURTH INCARNA-


TION AND COMMENCED USING MIND HIMSELF FOR LEARNINGSj HE
OFTEN UNKNOWINGLY FORMED MENTAL BLOCKS. THESE SHUT OFF
COMMUNICATIONS WITH HIGHER MASTER TEACHERS. THEREFORE~ NOW
IS THE TIME AND EARTH IS THE PLACE TO OPEN THESE LINES AND
AGAIN GAIN FULL FORCE FROM THOSE AWAITING ON HIGH TO ASSIST
YOU. SOME PERSONS ARE OPEN IN AREAS FOR SEEING THE AURA~
AND IT WILL TELL BY ITS RESPLENDENT CHROMATIC HUES WHETHER
ITS WAVE LENGTH HAS A PROPER RAPIDITY OR NOT. IN CROWN
CHAKRA THERE IS ALWAYS IN THE MIND FORM~ A VERY VIVID WHITE
LIGHT SHOWING FLECKS OF GOLD. THIS COMES DIRECT FROM GOD
THE ABSOLUTE INTO EACH PERSON'S CROWN CHAKRA AND IS THEIR
MIND-SPARK. IT IS AT RARE MOMENTS SEEN IN PERSONS WHILE
ON EARTH~ SUCH AS SAINTS AND VERY HIGH MASTER MEN AND AVATARS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 126 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 8

"ITS REFLECTION FROM THE SPIRIT-MIND CROWN CHAKRA WILL COVER


THE ENTIRE TOP OF THE ENTITY'S HEAD. As IT SWIRLS INTO A
RAPID RATE OF FREQUENCY} THE SPIRIT CROWN CHAKRA IN THE
MIND BODY FORM WILL HAVE ITS THOUSAND PETALS UNFOLD AND
REVERSE THEMSELVES INSIDE OUT} AND NOW BECOME RECEPTIVE
TO GOD'S DIVINE LIGHT. IT WILL BE SEEN NOW AS A HALO."

SUDDENLY WE SAW THIS HAPPEN AROUND OMAR} GURU AND SINGH


TAO'S HEADS. IT WAS BEAUTIFUL AND AWE INSPIRING.

"WHENEVER THIS SHOWS} IT MEANS THE ENTITY HAS NOW GAINED


EXCELLENT KARMA AND HAS FINISHED IN THE LOWER PLANE OF
MATTER AND NEED NOT RETURN FOR MORE EXPERIENCE. BUT THESE
SOULS CAN ELECT TO RETURN TO PERFORM MISSIONS FOR CHRIST
AND HIS SEVEN LORDS FOR HUMANITY'S GOOD."

"THIS} THEN} IS THE GOAL WE ARE ALL STRIVING FOR}" STATED


CYRUS.

"YES} DEAR BROTHER} AND THE PLANET SATURN HELPS EACH GAIN
ITS GOAL. SATURN IS THE TESTER OF LIFE WHOSE FORCES} WHEN
USED CORRECTLY} CAN GIVE AMBITION AND POWERS FOR ORGANIZA-
TION AND MAGNETIZE WISDOM AND OPEN THE MIND TO THE SCIENTI-
FIC MEANINGS BEHIND NUMBERS. FOR SATURN IS THE PLANET WHICH
THE CROWN CHAKRA GOVERNS AND THIS IS WHY SO FEW SOULS HAVE
DARED VENTURE TO ELECT AN EXPERIENCE UPON HER SHORES WHILE
IN THE ASTRAL SCHOOLINGS.

"IT IS SATURN IN HER LOGO GLORY WHO INFLUENCES THE MIND FROM
HER MATTER TEACHINGS AND EXPERIENCES. ALSO} SATURN WHOSE
FORCES SHALL ENTER YOU AS GRAND MASTER OF OUR MAGI ORDER
AND THROUGH YOU ORDINATE INTO THOSE YOU INITIATE INTO THEIR
RIGHTFUL POSITIONS IN WORK FOR THE MAGI. THIS WORK WILL BE
SATURN'S CONSTRUCTIVE DEEP MYSTERY TRUTHS. THIS WAS WRITTEN
INTO YOUR STARS AND PLANETS} CYRUS. ALL WHO JOIN THE MAGI
HAVE IT WRITTEN PLAINLY IN THEIR PLANETS AND IT IS WAITING
AND READY FOR THEM TO MAKE THE MOST OF THEIR BLESSINGS."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 127 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 9

OMAR JOINED THE OTHERS AND WE NOW HAD GENERAL DISCUSSION IN


WHICH MY FIRST QUESTION WAS: "WHY HAVE THE SOUL GROUP USED
AN ASTROLOGY BASED UPON THE HELIOCENTRIC METHOD?"

SINGH TAO ANSWERED: "BECAUSE LITTLE ONE J YOUR SUN SOL IS


THE CENTER OF YOUR PARTICULAR SOLAR SYSTEM AT YOUR POSITION
WITHIN UNIVERSE. AND ALSO BECAUSE THAT IS THE WAY IT WAS
TAUGHT TO MANKIND BY THE WHITE GIANTS OF TAURUS WHEN THEY
INTRODUCED ITS EARTH MEMBERS TO THEIR WISDOMS."

"JUST WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE IN THE POPULAR GEOCENTRIC ASTRO-


LOGICAL SYSTEM USED NOW?" LILY INQUIRED. GURU ANSWERED THIS
TIME.

"GEOCENTRIC ASTROLOGY ORIGINATED IN THE LAST TIMES OF THE


ROMAN EMPIRE J BUT NOT THROUGH DIVINE INSPIRATIONj MORE
THROUGH ACADEMIC INFORMATIONS ANDJ THEREFORE J IT PRODUCED
FROM A THEORY OF PLANETS RETROGRESSING WHICH IS AN ILLUSION J
NOT A FACT. IT CAME FORTH IN THE AGE OF DARKNESS IN MANKIND'S
MINDS AND SO IS NOT BASED UPON THE REALITY OF WHAT OCCURS.
IT DOES NOT FOLLOW REAL COSMIC LAWS.

"HELIOCENTRIC ASTROLOGY DEALS IN VIBRATIONS AND ALSO IN THE


LUMINOUS COLORS AND THEIR VIBRATES OR PULSATIONS. SOLJ
YOUR SUN J AND HIS VIBRATORY FORCES RULE IN YOUR SOLAR SYS-
TEM AND HIS HELPERS ARE ALL THE PLANETS; ALTHOUGH THEIR
VIBRATORY FORCES ARE NOT AS STRONG AS SOLS J THESE PLAY A
VERY VIVID AND IMPORTANT PART IN EVERY PERSON'S EARTH LIFE.
COUPLED WITH EARTH'S PERSONAL VIBRATIONS J THESE CAUSE CER-
TAIN EFFECTS TO TRANSPIRE IN EVERY INCARNAT1NG PERSON'S
DAILY AFFAIRS AND IN THEIR PHYSICAL FORMS."

"Do WE TAKE ON IN OUR INCARNATING PATTERNS THE MAGNETISMS


OF SOL AND THE PLANETS? AND HOW DO THE HELIOCENTRIC HOUSE
POSITIONS COMPARE WITH THE GEOCENTRIC HOUSE INDICATIONS?
VIOLET ASKED. GURU POINTED TO MORI HANDUS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 128 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON SEVEN PAGE 10

"VIOLETJ MY DEARJ YOU HAVE HIT UPON HELIOCENTRIC'S MAIN


POINT IN YOUR FIRST QUESTION. FOR IT IS PRECISELY THE SUN
AND PLANET MAGNETISMS THAT INFLUENCE AN INCARNATING ENTITY'S
CHARACTERISTICS AND EMOTIONAL ACTIONS AND MIND MOODS. THERE
IS A DIFFERENCE IN THE INTERPRETATIONS OF THE GEOCENTRIC
HOUSES FROM WHAT THE ANCIENTS WERE TAUGHT BY THE MORE HIGHLY
DEVELOPED MAN-BEINGS FROM TAURUS AND THE PLEIADES."

"WHERE CAN WE FIND HELIOCENTRIC ASTROLOGY ON EARTH TO EXPLORE


AND LEARN?" I ASKED MORI.

"MOST HAS BEEN LOST OR DESTROYED OR IS UNAVILABLE J BUT WE


PLAN TO OVERSHADOW YOU J MESHA ROSE J AND SEE THOSE INTERESTED
SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT TO UNCOVER THE MYSTERIES OF THEMSELVES."

WE ASKED OTHER PERSONAL QUESTIONS AND THEN THE COLORED MISTS


SURROUNDED US. NONE OF US WANTED TO LEAVE THIS WONDERFUL
ATMOSPHERE NOR OUR FRIENDS BUT EARTH'S PULL WOULD NOT BE
DENIED. As WE FLOATED HOMEWARD J WE PASSED A GROUP OF SMILING
ANGELS RETURNING FROM MISSIONS UPON PLANET EARTH.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 129 of 382
i
1
·1
l..
~
I,

I LOOK TO THE HIGHEST) GOD THE ABSOLUTE) AS THE


SUPERIOR CONTROL OF MY LIFE. IN GREAT LOVE)
I AM HIS SERVANT.
" i:'.

LOVE MAKES MY ONENESS WITH GOD AN ACTUAL REALITY.


c· THE GOODNESS OF LOVE FOR GOD DELIVERS ME FROM
DARKNESS TO THE LIGHT OF LIFE.

THE POWER OF MY LOVE HEALS MY SOUL AND I AM


ENRICHED.
AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 130 of 382
(

8.

A T H RU 5 H VI ASS 1 N GIN G

INA C HERR Y T R. E E •

© REV, DR, DOROTHEA 1'1, RAt~SEY 1930

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 131 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 132 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 133 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT YELLOW LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON EIGHT
COLOR RAYS: PATHWAYS TO THE SOUL

"LIGHT IS SOWN FOR THE RIGHTEOUS AND GLADNESS FOR THE


UPRIGHT HEART."
PSALM 97:11

RELAXING QUIETLY IN OUR CHAIRS J WE PREPARE FOR OUR JOURNEY


INTO THE ASTRAL. THE SOFT STRAINS OF MUSIC CARRY US UPON
THEIR LOVELY COLORS. WE BECOME LIGHT AND FLOAT UPON A
GOLDEN PATH OF SOUND. As THE MELODY CARRIES US EVER HIGHER
IN CONSCIOUSNESS J WE SAIL OUT INTO A SOFT BLUE SKY. THE
AIR IS CLEAR AND OPALESCENT. WITH A GENTLE WHISPER J ANGELS
SURROUND US AND MURMER OUR NAMES. LIFTING US UP J WE GAIN
A PERFECT UNION OF SOUL. THEY SEEM TO BE ESCORTING US AS
WE HAPPILY PUT OURSELVES IN THEIR CARE. WE PASS OVER THE
CASTLE J AND TRAVEL TOWARD THE PURPLE MOUNTAINS WITH THEIR
SNOW CAPPED PEAKS J NOTING MANY SPOTS OF BEAUTY IN THE CAN-
YONS AND OPEN MEADOWS.

AHEAD LOOM ROCKY BUTTES AND MANY CAVES AND WATERFALLS J BUT
NOWHERE ARE THERE SIGNS OF HUMAN HABITATIONS. WILD LIFE
OF ALL KINDS ABOUNDS AND SEEMINGLY IN PERFECT HARMONY AND
PEACE. As WE APPROACH A PARTICULAR HIGH LEVEL J WE SEE A
NATURAL SHELF OF NARROW LAND. IT IS HERE WE COME TO REST
BESIDE A NARROW CAVERN OPENING.

THIS IS A PLACE OF SLOW FLOWING TIMEJ RICH IN WOOD AND


FLOWER SCENTED BREEZE. WE NOTICED THAT SOMEONE HAD MADE
A WILD GARDEN HERE. RUSTIC BENCHES AND TABLES WERE PLACED
UNDER THE SHADE OF ANCIENT TREES. As WE SAT AND WAITEDJ
WE SAVOURED THE QUIET BROKEN ONLY BY THE HUM OF HONEY BEES J
BUSY AMONG THE SWEET MIGNONETTE. SUCH A DEEP PROMISE OF
PEACE RESTED EVERYWHERE. THIS PART OF THE ASTRAL WAS RUGGED
AND BEAUTIFUL. IT VIBRATED WITH COLOR.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 134 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 2

AWAY BELOW AND IN THE DISTANCE THE CASTLE STOOD BESIDE THE
GLIMMERING INLAND SEA. HIGH OVER OUR HEADS J MORE ROCK
CLIFFS ROSE STRAIGHT UPWARD TO MEET ROLLING CLOUDSj THEM-
SELVES LIKE LEGENDARY SAILING SHIPS UPON A SAPPHIRE SEA
OF BLUE. THEIR DESTINATION PORT 'TOMORROW' BEYOND OUR
PRESENT DREAMS.

WE HEARD CHANTING AND THE CLASHING OF CYMBOLS AND TINKLING


OF BELLS AND AROSE TO MEET A PROCESSION COMING UP THE MOUNT-
AIN TRAIL. AMONG THEIR MANY TOILING FIGURES J WE SAW HAOLE
IN A STRANGE GARB AND HEAD COVERING J FOLLOWED BY MANY OF
OUR SOUL GROUP f1ASTERS AND MEMBERS. As THOSE WE KNEW CAME
UP TO US J THEY DREW US INTO THEIR RANKS AND WE SLOWLY PASSED
THROUGH THE NARROW CAVERN OPENING INTO A PLACE THAT LOOKED
LIKE A FAIRYLAND.

WITHIN THIS IMMENSE CAVERN OF EMERALD ROCK J NESTLED A GLEAM-


ING WHITE TEMPLE. LIGHT WAS EVERYWHERE J BUT WHERE IT CAME
FROM WE NEVER WERE TO KNOW. A GLEAMING PATH OF MATCHED
MARBLE LED US BY A SLIGHTLY DOWNWARD SLOPE INTO THE BEAUTI-
FUL TEMPLE.

IT LOOMED IN SIZE AS WE DREW NEARER AND TOWERED OVER US.


WE ENTERED ITS OUTER COURT THROUGH TWO HUGE PILLARS. SOME
OF OUR NUMBERS REMAINED HERE. OUR MASTERS LED US ON INTO
THE TEMPLE INTERIOR.

I WAS FORBIDDEN TO RECORD THE CEREMONY WHICH FOLLOWED. IT


WILL BE KNOWN TO THOSE WHO ATTAIN TO OUR SACRED ORDER WHEN
IT IS ESTABLISHED. HOALE WAS GIVEN A SPECIAL BLESSING.

AFTERWARD WE WALKED OUT AND TOOK OUR PLACES IN THE OUTER


COURT. SOMEONE HAD ERECTED A DIAS AND THREE FIGURES SAT
WAITING. BEFORE THE CENTER PERSONAGE RESTED AN ANCIENT
BOOK. HE CALLED HAOLE'S NAME AND HE STOOD BEFORE THEM.
As EACH ONE READ FROM THE BOOK J A BRIGHT BALL OF ENERGY

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 135 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 3

FORMED OVER HAOLE/S HEAD. WE COULD NOT UNDERSTAND THE LANGU-


AGE USED~ BUT REALIZED HAOLE KNELT IN OBEDIENCE TO ITS COM-
MAND. As HE AROSE~ THE SAME ANGELS WHO HAD ACCOMPANIED US
HERE~ NOW SURROUNDED HIM AND IT SEEMED AS THOUGH THE CAVERN
ROOF OPENED AND WITH HAOLE IN THEIR MIDSTj ALL ASCENDED UP-
WARD AND FROM OUR SIGHT.

THERE WAS GREAT REJOICING AMONG OUR FRIENDS AS SINGH TAO


EXPLAINED THAT HAOLE HAD BEEN CALLED FROM ON HIGH TO ACCEPT
HIS FULL AND FINAL MASTERSHIP DEGREE AND WHEN NEXT WE WOULD
SEE HIM~ HE WOULD BE SERVING IN THE PLACE THAT NEHRA HAD
LEFT VACANT~ WE~ TOO~ THEN REJOICED FOR HAOLE.

PRESENTLY~ WE REALIZED WE WERE TO RECEIVE OUR LESSON HERE


IN THE OUTER COURT OF THIS BEAUTIFUL MAGI TEMPLE. THE RE-
FLECTION FROM THE JADE-LIKE JEWEL ROCKS OF THE CAVERN UPON
THE WARM WHITE MARBLE BROUGHT OUT ALL THE SUBTLE RAINBOW
COLORS. You COULD FEEL THE COLORS CARRESSING VIBRATION.

THE THREE MAGI NOW CAME OUT FROM THE INNER TEMPLE AND MEL-
CHOIR~ WHO PERFORMS CERTAIN OF HIS WORK WITH THE COLOR RAYS~
WAS INTRODUCED AS OUR TEACHER. As HE FACED US~ THE CLEAR
BLUE RAY SHOWN BRIGHTLY ON HIS RIGHT AND THE WARM RED ON
HIS LEFT. YET ALL AROUND HIS FIGURE WAS A COMPLETE RING
OF GOLDEN COLOR.

HIS TALL FIGURE WAS ERECT AND MAJESTIC AND HIS TONES CLEAR
AND TRUE TO OUR HEARING. "BLESSINGS TO YOU FROM THE REALM
OF THE COLOR RAYS.

"My LOVED ONES~ COLOR LIGHTS THE PATHWAY OF SOUL AS IT


ASCENDS UPWARD TO SPIRIT. WE ARE NOW INTERESTED IN THE
COLORS OF PLANET EARTH. EARTH/S THREE BASIC ELEMENTS WHICH
CONSTITUTE MUCH OF HER MATTER ARE GENERATED BY THE ELEMENTS
WITHIN THE RAYS; RED~ YELLOW AND BLUE. THESE THREE RAYS
YOU SEE SURROUNDING ME PLAY A VERY IMPORTANT PART IN ALL

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 136 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 4

EARTH LIFE. THE ATOMIC VIBRATIONS OF THESE COLORS ARE


FOUND IN MATTER CHEMICAL FORMATIONS IN MANY OF YOUR PRE-
SENT DRUGS AND FOODS. THEIR ATOMIC VALUES ARE KNOWN AS
HYDROGEN~ OXYGEN AND NITROGEN.

THESE THREE RAYS PLAY A VERY IMPORTANT PART IN ALL EXTER-


NAL LIFE IN UNIVERSE. THE YELLOW RAY PRODUCES NUTRITION'S
GROWTH IN ALL MATTER. ON A HIGHER REALM PLANE IT ALSO
EXPANDS MIND AREAS. YELLOW IN SOUND OR TONE VIBRATES TO
THE MUSICAL NOTE "E" IN ITS VARIOUS COMBINATIONS.

"THE RED RAY IS AN ESSENTIAL BASIS FOR LIFE'S VITAL FORCE


AND RED ANIMATES MATTER AND CAN ALSO AID IN DISINTEGRATING
MATTER FORMS WHEN THESE HAVE SERVED THEIR PURPOSE. NOTHING
IN MATTER COULD MOVE OR EVEN CHANGE WHICH DID NOT POSSESS
THE RED FORCE. THE RED RAY CORRESPONDS TO THE NOTE "Cu.

"THE BLUE RAY CAUSES GERMINATION TO TAKE PLACE. IT IS THE


POWER WHICH BRINGS FORTH ALL THINGS INTO MANIFESTATION.
ITS TONE RESPONDS TO THE NOTE "G". WITHOUT THESE THREE
BASIC RAYS AND THEIR COLORS AND TONES~ THERE WOULD BE NO
UNIVERSE~ NOR COULD FORM EXIST."

WE SAT ENTRANCED AT THIS STATEMENT AND REALIZED WHAT A


LOT WE DID NOT KNOW PERTAINING TO OUR EXISTENCE.

THE MAGI MELCHOIR CONTINUED: "WHEN THESE THREE RAYS ARE


NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY WITHIN YOUR CHAKRA AREA~ YOU WILL
BE AT A DISTINCT DISADVANTAGE IN YOUR EVOLUTIONARY PROGRESS.
FORTUNATELY~ AT THIS TIME~ NO PERSON NEED BE HELD BACK BY
ANY RADIATION DEFICIENCIES. ALL NOW AWAKE CAN LEARN AND
BE LED AND GUIDED BY THE "ROVERS AMID THE PLANETS" WHO ARE
NOW ON EARTH AND ARE CHANNELS FOR THE HIGHER WISDOMS. THOSE
WHOM THE MAGI TOUCH AND WHO RESPOND WILL HAVE NOTHING TO FEAR.

"THOSE OF YOU WHO HAVE RESPONDED AND ARE NOW PARTAKING OF

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 137 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 5
OUR SOUL FAMILY HAVE PREVIOUSLY BEEN MEMBERS OF EGYPT'S
SCHOOLS OF WISDOM. WHETHER YOU NOW RECALL IT OR NOT J YOU
LEARNED THERE AGES AGO OF YOUR TWO POWERFUL PHYSICAL HEAD
CENTERS. THE PINEAL AND THE PITUITARY GLANDS. THESE J BY
THE WAY J ARE UNDER THE VIBRATOREAL RAYS OF NEPTUNE AND
URANUS. THESE RAYS ASSIST YOU IN SORTING OUT YOUR ERROR
CONCEPTS OF MIND FOR FURTHER AWAKENING TO OUR INFLUENCE.
EVERYONE NOW ON EARTH IS CARRYING CERTAIN KARMIC PATTERNS J
BOTH GOOD AND RETARDING. CERTAIN OF YOU J HOWEVER J BEAR IN
YOUR PATTERNS THE SIGNATURE SIGNS OF THE NEW AGE CITIZEN.

"You WHO POSSESS THE SIGN WILL BE THE ONES WHO WILL OPEN
THE CHAKRA DOORS INTO AN ETHERIC FREE FLOW~ ONLY THESE
PEOPLE WILL COME TO KNOW A TRUE EXULTATION AND REALIZATION
OF THEIR TRUE STATUS IN THIS PRESENT EARTH LIFE TIME.

"NEPTUNE AND HER POWERS DRAW YOU INTO ILLUMINATION. HER


RAYS PULL YOU THROUGH THE HIGHER HEAVENLY REALMS UPON
THEIR WAVE-INDULATIONS. THESE RAYS ALSO PLAY UPON YOUR
MIND FORCES AND AWAKEN THEM FROM COMPLACENCY INTO A NEW
SWEET ACTIVITY. As THIS OCCURSJ THE INDIVIDUAL HAS AN
ACCELERATED SIGHT FOR COLOR J A STIMULATION FROM ITS MANY
HEALING RAYS. EVEN AS I SPEAK THIS IS TAKING PLACE WITHIN
THOSE HEARING AND READING MY WORDS."

WE FELT A THRILL AT HEARING THIS. MELCHOIR CONTINUED:

"THERE IS AN EXQUISITE LUMINOUS SOFT BLUE LAVENDER WHICH


OFTEN MAY BE SEEN BY THE INNER EYE WHEN CERTAIN HIGHER
CONTACTS HAVE BEEN MADE WITH OUR SOUL ENTITIES. THE BLUE
AND PINK LAVENDERS ARE OUR SuuL GROUP COLORS.

"THE PITUITARY GLAND WORKS WITH THE THROAT CHAKRA. THIS


GLAND EMITS A VERY CLEAR BLUE RADIANCE. IT LOOKS LIKE A
BLUE FLAME WITH GOLD EDGES OF LIGHT. WHEN YOU SEE THIS IN
ANOTHER OR IN ONE OF US J YOU CAN KNOW THE PITUITARY IS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 138 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 6

ACTIVE. THIS BLUE RAY REPRESENTS THE 'WILL OF GOD' AND


ALSO THE "WORD POWER OF THOUGHT."

"WHENEVER YOU SEE WITHIN YOUR THIRD EYE AREA A SOFT PALE
SPRING GREEN WITH SPECKS OF GOLD~ REALIZE YOUR THROAT
CHAKRA IS IN ACTION AND ITS DOOR OPEN. AT FIRST SUCH
DEVELOPMENTS OCCUR UNDER THE AUSPICES OF SOUL TEACHERS
AND HIGHLY DEVELOPED COSMIC BEINGS. BETWEEN YOURSELVES
YOU CAN PICK UP EMENATIONS OF LOVE FROM HEART TO HEART
CHAKRA~ ESPECIALLY WHEN ONE MEMBER IS MORE ADVANCED IN
SPIRITUAL WISDOM THAN THE RECEIVER. TRY THIS."

AT THE CLOSE OF MELCHOIR'S LECTURE~ GURU TOOK US ON A


TOUR INSIDE THE MAGI TEMPLE SO WE MIGHT TOUCH AND EXAMINE
CLOSELY AND PARTAKE OF ITS HIGH ENERGIES. WHILE THERE
WE DRANK OF ITS SACRED COLOR TREATED WATERS FOR RENEWING
OF OUR WHOLE SELF.

UPON RETURNING TO THE OUTER COURT~ WE SAW THAT LANEENA


STOOD BEFORE THE GROUP AWAITING WITH HER SOULMATE~ THE
MAGI CASPER. As SOON AS WE TOOK OUR PLACES~ SHE BEGAN
HER CONTRIBUTION. HER CLEAR VOICE RANG OUT.

"THE HEALING COLORS OF GOD"

"TODAY WE REMIND YOU ONCE AGAIN THAT THE COLOR RAYS ARE
HERE IN UNIVERSE AS INDICATORS OF CERTAIN DIVINE FORCES.
THESE FORCES ACT UPON THE SPECIFIC DOORS OF EACH CHAKRA
AND ACTIVATE ITS OPENING FOR FREE FLOW.

"MANKIND'S ULTIMATE AIM IS TO OPEN WIDE ALL THE CHAKRA


DOORS THAT WE MAY BUILD A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR TOTAL
ACTIVATION BETWEEN AND WITHIN ALL OUR SEVEN FORMS OF BEING.
As THESE DOORS OPEN~ THEIR INFLOW AWAKENS BOTH OUR OUTER
AND INNER AWARENESS AND WE BECOME FULL CONSCIOUS DWELLERS
UPON ALL THE REGIONS OF UNIVERSE AS WE VISIT THEM~ IN

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 139 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 7
CIRCLING THE WHEEL OF KARMA AND REINCARNATION.

"THIS ACTION OF FLOWING COLOR FORCES ALSO HEALS. OCCULT


CHROMOTHERAPY HAD NEVER COMPLETELY LEFT EARTH BUT NOW IT
MUST AGAIN BLOSSOM FORTH FOR IT CAN HELP EACH PERSON PRE-
PARE FOR LIVING IN THESE NEW AND RARER ATMOSPHERES OF THIS
NEW AGE.

"HERE IN ASTRAL WE HAVE TWELVE COLOR RAYS AND EACH E~tANATE


FROM THE HIGHER TWELVE LOGOI DIVISIONS OF CREATOR LORDS.
EACH EMITS ITS OWN MUSICAL KEYNOTE OF ITS PARTICULAR SYN-
CHRONOUS RAY. THREE OF THESE HARMONIZE AND DIFFERENTIATE
INTO EACH ONE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS OF MATTER: FIRE) AIR)
WATER AND EARTH. EACH OPERATE WITHIN PHYSICAL FORM FOR AN
EVOLUTIONAL PROGRESS AS RECEIVED BY THE ENTITY.

"As EVERY SOUL IS BORN INTO MATTER UNDER ONE OF THESE FOUR
HEADINGS) YOU CAN EASILY KNOW WHICH PREDOMINATES TO INFLU-
ENCE YOUR PRESENT EARTH EXPERIENCE.

EIRE) REPRESENTS THAT THE SOUL HAS INCARNATED TO PURIFY


ITS SPIRITUAL FLAME. THIS PERSON WILL EXPERIENCE MUCH CHANGE
DURING EARTH LIFE. ALSO) MANY HARROWING EVENTS FROM WHICH
THEY CAN BENEFIT GREAT ADVANCEMENTS IF THEY ARE HANDLED VIA
THE COSMIC LAWS AND RULES.

PERSONS BORN UNDER LEO) ARIES AND SAGITTARIUS ARE CALLED


UPON TO FINISH MUCH EXISTING NEGATIVE KARMA. THESE PEOPLE
NEVER HAVE DULL OR SMOOTH AND EASY LIVES) BUT THEY CAN
ACCOMPLISH GREAT STRIDES FORWARD IF THEY WILL ALLOW THEM-
SELVES"TO UNLEARN MANY PAST MISTAKEN IDEAS.

THE AiR SIGNS ALWAYS COME TO WORK AND EXPAND AND DEVELOP
MORE POWERS OF MIND. LIBRA) AQUARIUS AND GEMINI CAN HAVE
WONDERFUL EXPANSIONS IN THEIR MIND ACTIONS AND ALSO IN THEIR
PSYCHIC OPENINGS OF IDEAS IF THEY) TOO) CAN UNLIMIT THEIR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 140 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 8

OLD CONCEPTS TO MOVE INTO NEW MEMORY RECALLS FROM THEIR


SOUL MIND CONTENTS. BUT THESE PEOPLE DO HAVE DIFFICULTY
SEEING A SUBJECT IN MORE THAN JUST ONE LIGHT. BE ABLE TO
CHANGE YOUR MIND ABOUT A PRESENTLY HELD CONVICTION SO YOU
CAN EXPLORE NEW VIEWPOINTS FOR YOUR REASONING POWERS TO
EXAMINE.

THE WATER PEOPLE COME INTO MATTER TO DEAL WITH THEIR


EMOTIONAL NATURES. THESE PERSONS WILL HAVE EXPERIENCES
DIRECTLY CONCERNED WITH THEIR PSYCHIC SOUL EMOTIONAL CENTERS.
THE LAWS OF EMOTIONAL CONTROL AND NERVOUS TENSIONS SHOULD BE
OBEYED. CANCER J PISCES AND SCORPIO ATTRACT TO THEMSELVES
MANY EARTH PROBLEMS WHICH STEM FROM THE NERVOUS SYSTEM AND
ITS LACKS OF CHAKRA ENERGIES.

THE EARTH PEOPLE - TAURUS J VIRGO AND CAPRICORN VISIT


EARTH TO GAIN BETTER UNDERSTANDINGS OF MATTER AND TO DEVELOP
AN INSTINCTUAL RAPPORT WITH THIS EARTH'S LOGO BEING. MANY
ALSO HAVE EXPRESS MISSIONS TO SET UP WHILE INCARNATING.
THEY J TOO J MUST RELEASE ERROR CONCEPTS AND FREE THE CHAKRA
FLOWS.

"NoW J ALL DO HAVE CERTAIN EXPERIENCES UNDER ALL EQllR OF


THESE GOVERNING FORCES BUT IT HELPS TO BE FAMILIAR WITH
THE ONE YOU ARE BORN UNDER. ITS EXPERIENCES AND EVENTS
WILL PREDOMINATE.

"EACH OF THESE TWELVE RAYS EMITS ITS OWN UNIQUE COLOR RAY
AND SOUND. EACH RAY AND SOUND WITHIN ITSELF HAS A RANGE
OF SEVEN OCTAVES. MOST OF THESE OCTAVE RAYS ARE TOO DELI-
CATE FOR OUR PHYSICAL SENSES TO SEE WHEN ON EARTHJ BUT
THEIR ENERGIES WILL BE DEVELOPING OUR ASTRAL SENSES.

"THESE TWELVE RAYS AND THEIR EIGHTY-FOUR SUB-RAYS PLAY


UPON MANKIND'S CONSCIOUSNESS AREA. As THEY FLOW INTO THE
CHAKRAS J THEIR TONES BUILD AND BESTOW CONSTRUCTIVE CHARAC-
TERISTICS AND TEMPERMENTS WHICH CAN INFLUENCE A PERSON'S

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 141 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON EIGHT PAGE 9

PHYSICAL APPEARANCE FOR A BETTER BEAUTY. LACK OF FLOW


CAN BE SEEN ON SOME PHYSICAL FACES AS PETULANCE) DISSATIS-
FACTION AND SULLENNESS. SO THESE COLOR RAYS CAN SHOW THE
PRESENT STATUS WHEN SEEN. WE CALL THEM THE SIGNPOSTS OF
THE PERSON.

"OMAR TOLD YOU THE FREQUENCY OF A CHAKRA MARKED ITS PETAL


NUMBER. EACH CHAKRA IS A SMALL FORCE FIELD OF SPECIAL
COLOR COMBINATIONS COMING FROM THE HIGH TWELVE. THESE
TWELVE YOU WILL SOON BE LEARNING ABOUT. As YOUR CHAKRAS
OPEN) IT TRANSFORMS YOU INTO EVER HIGHER FREQUENCIES OF
PERSONAL ENERGIES AND CONSCIOUSNESS.

"THESE SACRED LOGOI GOVERNORS; FIRE) AIR) WATER AND EARTH)


YOU CAN ALSO MAXIMIZE VIA SOUND) SUCH AS MUSIC) CHANTING
AND VOICE WHEN THE MASTERS USE A VOICE BOX AS A SOUNDING
BOARD FOR THEIR WORDS.

"FROM WHAT YOU HAVE LEARNED SO FAR REGARDING CHAKRAS) YOU


NOW SEE THE IMPORTANCE THEY PLAY IN ALL FORMS AND IN OUR
GROWTH AND EVOLVEMENT.

"YOUR NEXT VISIT WILL BE A SPECIAL CONVOCATION IN OUR REALM.


WE ARE ALL LOOKING FORWARD TO ITS WONDERS. SO BE SURE YOU
CAN COME. WE WILL EXPECT YOU."

IT WAS WONDERFUL TO SEE LANEENA AND CASPER AGAIN. ALL TOO


SOON ANGELS ARRIVED TO TAKE US BACK TO OUR LOWER HOME AREA.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 142 of 382
(

I AM SECURED IN THE WORLD AS I RELY ON THE DIVINE


WITHIN ME. As I SEEK ETERNAL TRUTH) I AM EXPLOR-
ING THE POWERS OF LIFE.

As I LIVE ETERNAL WISDOM AND FULFILL THE LAWS OF


( RIGHTEOUSNESS) I EXPERIENCE A PORTION OF A CREATIVE
AND FREE SOUL.

I STRIVE TO BE PURE IN HEART) FREE IN THOUGHTS)


AND GROUNDED I N TRUTH. I DECLARE I AM HAPPY) WISE
AND VICTORIOUS.

AND So ITIs !'

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 143 of 382
(

© REV I DR I DOROTHEA rt RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 144 of 382
( _____ \1\ ~ ~
~ fN
\

~~\. ~/
~ifj ~~

~)
:l/ \'
~1

\
TH£Y CAME FROM EVERYWHER.E..

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 145 of 382
(

Ast;a.Q

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 146 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE GREEN LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON NINE
THE BIRTHDAY PARTY

"AND THEY SHALL BE MINE SAITH THE LORD OF HOSTS IN THE DAY
WHEN I MAKE UP MY JEWELS; AND I WILL SPARE THEM AS A MAN
SPARETH HIS OWN SON THAT SERVETH HIM."
MALACHI 3:17

CASCADES OF COLOR ARE EVERYWHERE AS WE SOFTLY ENTER INTO


THE ETHERIC SPACIOUSNESS. THE MUSIC FADES BEHIND OUR
TRAVELING FORMS. THE BEAUTIES OF THIS INFINITY NOW BREAKS
INTO GALAXIES OF JEWELED DIAMONDS J AQUAMARINES J SAPPHIRES J
EMERALDS AND CLEAR JADE. As WE EMERGE THROUGH ITS WONDER-
- FUL ATMOSPHERE J WE ARE IN TIME TO SEE THE ASTRAL DAWN EMERGE
FROM THE NIGHT TIME'S COBALT WRAPPINGS. MORNING AWAKES J
REBORN AND THROBS TO THE MYSTIC PULSATIONS OF PRISTINE DAY.
WE SEE THE MIGHTY ASTRAL SUN GLOBE NOW SLOWLY MOVING UPWARD
AS IT CONQUERS ALL THE REGIONS OF SHADOW. MANY LIQUID
JEWELS OF MORNING DEW MAKE SPANGLED DESIGNS UPON THE CASTLE
ROADWAY. THEY GLISTEN UPON THE GRASS BLADES AND BEAD THE
FLOWER PETALS TO AWAKE THEM.

THERE IS A HUSHED STILLNESS AMONG ALL THE TRAVELERS UPON


THE ROAD AS EACH J INCLUDING OURSELVES J PARTAKE OF THIS
SUN'S HEALING FORCES. ITS GIFT OF BURSTING ENERGIES FROM
HIGHER REALMS WASHES OVER ALL.

AT LAST AN UNKNOWN INNER SIGNAL SEEMED TO ANIMATE AND WE


JOINED THIS THRONG OF HAPPY PEOPLE. SUCH A STRANGE COMING-
LING OF DIFFERENT AGES WERE THEIR DRESS STYLES AND APPEAR-
ANCES. HERE AND THERE WERE HORSES J DONKEYS AND EVEN SMALL
HAND CARTS AND ALL WERE CARRYING OFFERINGS OF CREATIVE
GIFTS. As WE APPROACHED THE CASTLE COMPOUND'S EAST GATEJ
I LOOKED AROUND AS WE WAITED OUR TURN FOR ENTRANCE AND

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 147 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 2
HEARD CYRUS SAY; "WHY J THEY COME FROM EVERYWHERE." TRULY J
THEY WERE CONVERGING FROM ALL DIRECTIONS TO JOIN THOSE ON
THE WINDING ROAD.

AT LAST WITHIN THE QUADRANGLE J WHICH WAS ALSO FULL OF PEO-


PLE J AMOS AND ROBIN DISCOVERED US AND LED US INTO A LARGE
SQUARE STONE ARMS ROOM OF THE CASTLEiS OUTER WALL SECTION.
FROM THERE WE CLIMBED STEEP STAIRS UPWARD TO THE BATTLEMENTS
WHERE THERE WERE A NUMBER OF LITTLE TOYLIKE CARS.

"THESE ARE AIR CARS WHICH TRAVEL THE HUGE AREAS AROUND THE
CASTLEiS PERIMETER." SHY ROBIN SAID AS AMOS URGED US INTO
THEIR SEATS. IT SEEMED BUT A MOMENT TO TRAVEL CLEAR AROUND
AND ONTO THE ROOF GARDEN SECTION OF ONE OF THE CASTLEiS
LARGE INNER BUILDINGS.

I HAVE NEVER REMEMBERED SUCH A COMFORTABLE RIDEJ NO BUMPS J


NOR VIBRATIONS OF ANY KIND. MORI WELCOMED US TO THIS LARGE
GROUP OF PEOPLE SEATED AMONG THE FLOWERS AND SMALL TUB ROSE
TREES AND MINIATURE POOLS OF THIS ROOF GARDEN. AT ONE END
WAS A RAISED PLATFORM. As WE TOOK OUR PLACES J MORI SAID:

"THIS IS A SPECIAL DAY AND MANY ASSEMBLIES ARE BEING HELD


FOR INDIVIDUAL GROUPS. IT IS A BIRTHDAY PARTY FOR OUR
CASTLE HOME TO COMMEMORATE ITS BEGINNING EONS BACK WHEN
OUR FIRST COSMIC FAMILY MEMBERS ATTAINED ITS LANDS AND
FIRST ERECTED ITS SMALL HOLY TOWER TO SEND ITS BEACON LIGHT
OUT OVER LAND AND SEA."

"WHERE DO ALL THESE PEOPLE COME FROM?" ASKED LILY.

"FROM ALL THE ACCEPTABLE LOWER LEVELS OF OUR REALM AND MANY
FROM EARTH AND THE OTHER ETHERIC LIFE OF THE SOLAR SYSTEMiS
PLANETS." HE ANSWERED.

"SOME SEEMED TO BE IN VERY ANCIENT GARBS AND STYLES" SAID


PUZZLED VIOLET.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 148 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 3

"YESJ SOME HAVE BEEN HERE FOR MANY AGES AND ARE JUST NOW
REALIZING THEY CANNOT REMAIN IN THEIR STATIC DESIRED STATE
AND NOW ARE WORKING TO RE-ENTER THE MOVING STREAM OF PRO-
GRESS. THESE WERE GOOD SOULS BUT STEEPED IN COMPLACENCY
OF THEIR ANCIENT REACHED POSITION."

CYRUS LOOKED AROUND: "I SEE NONE HERE IN THIS GROUP,"

"No/' MORI ANSWERED. "THE VARIOUS GROUPS MEETING TODAY


HAVE THEIR VIBRATORY ATMOSPHERES AND PRESENTATIONS GEARED
TO THEIR MEMBERS' ENERGY CURRENTS,"

SUDDENLY I BECAME CHAGRINED, WE HAD NO GIFT FOR OUR CASTLE,


THEN GURU SAIDi "LOOK BEHIND YOU J MESHA ROSE." I TURNED
- AND I WAS LOOKINGAT A YOUNG LAUGHING REPLICA OF THE PHYSICAL
BODY FORM I NOW WAS WEARING WHEN IN MATTER. AND SUDDENLY
WE WERE CRYING J LAUGHING AND KISSING ONE ANOTHER. THIS WAS
SHE WHO HAD LENT ME HER BODY FOR MY EARTH MISSION AND WHOM
I FELT I KNEW BETTER THAN I NOW COULD REMEMBER OF MY OWN
REAL TAURIAN SELF.

GURU GLOWED AT OUR REUNION, "EARTH ROSE IS THE GIFT TO OUR


CASTLE FROM ALL OF YOU. ALL FOUR OF YOU HAVE BEEN COMING
UP IN YOUR DREAM TIMES AND LENDING YOUR STRENGTHS AND MINDS
SO THAT SHE COULD ACCELERATE HER SCHOOLINGS AND ACHIEVE
HER SPECIAL ESTATE FOR LIVING HERE AT THE CASTLE. SHALEM
AND .M!\RGUERITEHAVE JOINED IN THIS GIFT, SOON SHE WILL BE
SITTING BESIDE LILY AT YOUR LITTLE DESKi THE ONE YOU USED J
MESHA ROSE J AND THESE TWO WILL ONCE AGAIN BE DEVELOPING IN
UNISON AS IN AGES PAST, IT WILL BE OUR EARTH ROSE AND LILY J
EACH WORKING FROM AN OPPOSITE POLARITY J WHO WILL BE CARRY-
ING ON THE WORK WHEN YOU RETURN AND ARE NO LONGER NEEDED
IN THE MAGI MISSION,"

WE FELT THAT EARTH ROSE WAS A GIFT TO US ALSO AS SHE SAT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 149 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 4
BETWEEN LILY AND VIOLET WITH HER SMALL SWEET FACE ALIGHT
WITH LOVE FOR US ALL. SHE WAS LIKE A DAINTY TINY ROSE.

MANY TRUMPETS BLEW FROM THE PARAPETS AND A GROUP OF TAUR-


IAN ASTRO MEMBERS J MALE AND FEMALEJ ENTERED AND TOOK THEIR
PLACES. EZI WAS AMONG THEM. THEY WERE SEATED NONE TOO
SOON FOR SUN REALM VISITORS AND MASTERS NOW TOOK THE PLAT-
FORM AS SHALEM PLAYED A ROUSING HYMN-LIKE RENDITION ON
THE SMALL PORTABLE ORGAN.

MORI HANDUS AND HIS MONKS NOW SANG IN LOVELY HARMONIC TONES
OF SONG "A PAEAN OF PRAISE TO OUR FATHER."

THEN AROSE A GIANT OF A MANJ SO BRIGHT IN HIS TAURIAN MAJESTY.


HIS MASTER ROBES ALSO WERE ENWRAPPED OVER ONE LEFT SHOULDER
BY A CRYSTAL BLUE CAPE. HE WORE A CROSS WHICH GLITTERED
LIKE DIAMONDS BUT WHICH I INTUITIVELY KNEW WAS MADE FROM
THE CRYSTAL FOUND ONLY ON A SACRED MOUNTAIN OF OUR LOST
TAURIAN WORLD. THE HALO WAS GLEAMING lN BRIGHT HUES AROUND
HIS SILVER HEAD; SOJ (THIS WAS A SUN BEING!)

"I AM EIDARJ I AM LIGHT. GOD'S LIGHT SURGES THROUGH ME AND


I AM A FOUNTAIN OF LIFE. I GIVE YOU VITALITY J YOUTH AND
BEAUTY FROM MY BEING. I AM ONE IN GOD. I COME TO BRING
YOU A MESSAGE. I HAVE COME TO TELL YOU MANY OF THE MAGI
MYSTERIES. I QUOTE:

"JESUS SAID: VERILY I SAY UNTO YOU J HEREAFTER YE SHALL SEE


HEAVEN OPEN AND THE ANGELS OF GOD ASCENDING AND DESCENDING
UPON THE SON OF MAN." JOHN 1:51

"WE KNOW IT IS NOT EASY FOR EARTH CONSCIOUS HUMANITY TO SEE


THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THEIR SOUL AND SPIRIT FORMS OR THE
PHYSICAL WHEN INCARNATING UPON EARTH. BUT YOU NEED TO REAL-
IZE YOUR SOUL ASTRAL VEHICLE FORM AND YOUR HIGHER SPIRIT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 150 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 5
FORMS DO EXIST AND EXIST JUST AS SOLIDLY AND REAL AS YOUR
LOWEST PHYSICAL BODY. SO I SHALL TELL YOU AS I AND MY
BROTHERS AND SISTERS TOLD ANCIENT MEN OF EARTH; TOGETHER
WE SHALL NOW APPROACH THESE IDEAS SLOWLY THAT THEIR UN-
FAMILIARITY MAY ASSIMILATE. THE SEEKERS WHO AWAKE TO OUR
MAGI SPECIAL TRAININGS FOR ATTAINING HIGHER KNOWLEDGE HAVE
BEEN INITIATES IN ANCIENT MYSTERY SCHOOLS. THESE IDEAS
SHOULD J IF YOUR MIND IS OPEN AND UNBLOCKED ENOUGH NOWJ BE
ACTIVATING AND AWAKENING PAST LEARNED COSMIC PROCESSES.

"FIRSTJ LET US REALIZE THERE ARE DEFINITE TIMES OF THE


MATTER-DAY WHEN CERTAIN POWERS AWAKEN IN THE SOUL RECEPTIVE-
NESS OF INNER MIND AND THESE TIMES CARRY POWERFUL COLOR RAYS
INTO THE CHAKRA CENTERS.

"You JUST WITNESSED DAWN IN THIS ASTRAL REALM. THE DAWN OF


SUN ON EARTH IS A TIME FOR ALSO QUICKENING THE SPECIAL RAYS
AND CARRYING THEIR LIGHT FORCES AND PULSATIONS OF ENERGY
INTO THOSE OPEN AND RECEPTIVE CHAKRAS. DAWN IS ALSO THE
HOUR WHEN IN PRAYER AND MEDITATION J YOU CAN PETITION THE
HIGHER ONES AND BRING TO THEM SACRED QUESTIONS AS THESE
ARISE IN THE HEART CENTERS.

"THE GREAT COSMIC ONES ATTEND THESE MOMENTS AS THEY TRAVEL


AROUND THE PLANET J FOR IT IS THEN ON THIS PARTICULAR RAY
SLANT OF THE SUN'S ARISING BEAMS THAT ITS RAYS CAN CARRY
ALSO FAR OUT INTO COSMIC SPACE. As YOU SEND OUT YOUR
PLEAJ IT GOES UPON THESE BEAMS. THUSJ SUNRISE TIME IS FOR
SENDING OF PLEAS. THE BEAMS WHICH ENTER UPON EARTH WILL
BE HEALING RAYS.

"WHEN YOUR MOON IS FULL J PREPARE YOUR HEART AND MIND FOR
RECEIVING YOUR ANSWER. AT MOONRISE BE READY AND RECEPTIVE
AND IN A DEVOTIONAL MOOD. As THE MOON'S RAYS RISE ABOVE
THE HORIZON J AWAIT AND UPON THESE RAYS WILL COME THE ANSWERS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 151 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 6

"THIS IS THE WAY WE TAUGHT EARTH PEOPLE TO FIRST COMMUNE


WITH GOD AND THE GREAT ONES OF THE COSMOS. THUS J YOU
LEARN THAT THE FORCES J RAYS AND ENERGIES OF YOUR LIFE GIV-
ING 'SOL' CAN PICK UP YOUR THOUGHTS AND QUESTIONS AND
CARRY THEM FAR INTO THE VAST AREAS OF SPACE AND INTO THE
HIGHER MIND VIBRATIONS.

"WE USE YOUR MOON'S RAYS AND ENERGY FORCES TO CARRY OUR
ANSWERS BACK TO YOU. WHEN YOU CAN J SIT IN THE MOON'S LIGHT
AND WITH CLOSED EYES LET ITS BEAMS SURROUND AND ENTER YOUR
. BRAIN RECEIVING STATION. FEEL THE PEACE AND LOVE AND CALM
AFFECTION IT WILL REFLECT FROM THE HIGHER ONES.

"You MUST PASSIONATELY DESIRE THIS CONTACT. THOSE WHOSE


HEARTS KNOW AN INSATIABLE YEARNING AND LONGING FOR THEY
KNOW NOT WHATJ CAN USE THIS EMOTIONAL POWER TO SEND THEIR
MESSAGE TO MEET INTO THE HIGHER WAVE-LENGTHS. THEN HAVE
PATIENCE. IT WILL BE YOUR 'YEARNING WILL' THAT SENDS.
BUT IT WILL BE 'PATIENCE' WHICH GAINS ITS RECEIVING FLOW
OF FREE WISDOMS.

"LET US NOW SPEAK OF ANOTHER WAY IN WHICH YOU EARTH INCAR-


NATES CAN KEEP IN CONSTANT TOUCH WITH THE HIGHER REALMS.
You DO NOT REMEMBER OR RECALL THESE JOURNEYS NORMALLY J BUT
THEY ARE IMPORTANT IN YOUR PROGRESS AND GROWTH WHILE TRAVEL-
ING UPON THE PATH.

"IN SLEEP YOU RETURN TO PLACES KNOWN TO SOUL AND YOU ARE
RENEWED AND RESTED. AT TIMES J YOU SIGHT-SEE AND MEET
FRIENDS. THOSE AWAKE AND SEEKING TRUTH OFTEN ATTEND CLASS
GROUPS. SOME TAKE TRIPS TO SEE OTHER PARTS OF THEIR PLANET
EARTH. You LIVE A BUSY EXISTENCE WITHIN YOUR STATE OF SLEEP.
THE SOUL GROUP WILL UNFOLD THIS FOR YOU LATER.

"I WOULD HAVE YOU KNOW MORE OF YOUR EARTH AND HER ANCIENT
DAYS. SO LET US RETURN TO THE LANDS OF LEMURIA.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 152 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 7

"WHEN WE CAME TO YOUR PLANET EARTH) HUMANITY WAS SMALL AND


PRIMITIVE AND DARK SKINNED) BUT EAGER FOR LEARNING AND AD-
VANCEMENT. THEY FREELY ACCEPTED OUR REVELATIONS AND AID
THROUGH CERTAIN CHOSEN OF THEIR LEADERS. WE TAUGHT THEM
EVERYTHING THEY COULD ABSORB AND SHOWED THEM HOW TO BUILD
CONDUCTORS FOR COSMIC ENERGIES WHICH WERE THE PYRAMIDS.
WE TAUGHT THEM OF THE STARS AND P.LANETS; WE SHARED WITH THEM
OF OUR SEEDS AND EXPLAINED THE TIMES FOR SOWING WITH THE
HELP OF MOON'S GRAVITATIONAL POWERS.

"To THOSE WHOSE MINDS WERE READY) WE GAVE A SACRED TRUST.


WE TOLD THEM OF GOD THE ABSOLUTE AND ENTRUSTED THEM WITH
THE HISTORY OF THEIR BEGINNINGS.

"THESE THINGS WHICH WE TAUGHT FIRST HUMANITY STILL LIVE ON


PLANET EARTH. BITS AND PIECES ARE FOUND IN NEARLY ALL OF
TODAY'S RELIGIONS BUT ARE UNRECOGNIZABLE. HIDDEN IN SECRET
CHAMBERS DEEP IN THE HEART OF THE WORLD'S MOUNTAINS LIE
HIDDEN SCROLLS) DIAGRAMS AND ROCK PAINTINGS. EVEN THE VOL-
CANIC VAULTS HOLD WONDERS) AND ALL THESE ARE GUARDED BY
NATURE. IN THE JUNGLES OF THE AMAZON UPON HIGH RIDGES AND
CAVES) CACHES OF ARTIFACTS OF STONE AND GOLD TABLETS REST.
BECAUSE OF DEADLY DOWN DRAUGHTS) NO PLANE OR HELICOPTER
DARE FLY NEAR AND IT REMAINS UNKNOWN. BENEATH YOUR OCEANS
LIE MANY KEYS THAT WHEN EARTH SHIFTS WILL GIVE UP THEIR
SYMBOLS AND HIEROGLYPHICS FOR MANKIND'S MIND.

"WHEN YOUR BRANCH OF OUR MANSTREAM OF LIFE WAS YOUNG AND


NEW) ALL OUR WISDOMS WERE FREELY SHARED AND COLLECTIVELY
USED) BUT WHEN OUR FIRST MEMBERS PASSED INTO THE ASTRAL
AND OUR CHILDREN OF MIXED AND TAURIAN BLOOD WERE STILL FAR
FEWER THAN THE NATIVE STRAINS OF EARTH) THESE LATTER WENT
BACK TO NATIVE WAYS. THE SEEDS WE HAD SOWN IN SELF DEFENSE
NOW BANDED TOGETHER AND KEPT THE WISDOMS SECRET AND SAFE
FROM WRONG) PROFANE) NEGATIVE AND DESTRUCTIVE USE. FOR
THE GOOD OF EARTH AND ALL PEOPLE) THEY USED THEM FOR GOOD
BUT IN SECRET.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 153 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON NINE PAGE 8

"MANY CAME TO BELIEVE FROM PERSONAL UNKNOWINGNESS THAT THE


HOLY ONES WERE MAKING MAGIC BUT THAT IS ILLUSION FOR MAGIC
DOES NOT EXIST ANYWHERE IN UNIVERSE. ALL THE MAGI'S FEATS
HAVE EVER FOLLOWED STRICT LAWS OF NATURE AND COSMOS. IT
COULD NOT BE OTHERWISE TO INTELLIGENT MINDS. NOTHING CAN
HAPPEN OUTSIDE OF OBEDIENCE TO LAW. AN ACTION WHICH CANNOT
OCCUR CANNOT HARM OR HURT. FAILURE TO ACT CAN HARM BECAUSE
OF AN UNFULFILLED NEED.

"THERE IS NO SUCH THING AS A MIRACLE. EVERYTHING IN UNIVERSE


FOLLOWS SOME DEFINITE LAW. EVEN GOD THE ABSOLUTE OBEYS LAW."
EIDAR BLESSED US ALL. (PRONOUNCED EE- I - DAR)

WHAT A WONDERFUL LECTURE. WE COULD HEAR CHEERS AND HAPPY


YELLS OF PLEASURE DOWN IN THE QUADRANGLE. As WE MINGLED
WITH FRIENDS AND EZI TOOK ME TO RENEW MY ASSOCIATION WITH
MY OWN PEOPLE~ OTHERS WERE SETTING UP TABLES WITH DELICIOUS
LOOKING EDIBLES.

THEN WE WERE CALLED TO LOOK OVER THE EDGE OF OUR ROOF INTO
THE GROUND COURTYARD WHERE AN ENORMOUS CAKE WAS BEING WHEELED
TO ITS CENTER. 'HAPPY BIRTHDAY HOME CASTLE' WAS BEING SHRIEK-
ED BY EXCITED VOICES. THEN WE SAW THREE MASTERS IN WHITE~
SIMULTANEOUSLY RAISE THEIR ARMS AND ITS WHOLE CAKE TOP FLAMED
IN CANDLES. A SUDDEN HUSH FELL NOW AND A VOICE ROSE IN
PRAYER.

"IN GRATITUDE WE THANK THEE~ OH FATHER~ FOR THIS OUR ASTRAL


HOME. MAY IT STAND HERE TO SHELTER US AND STRENGTHEN US AS
LONG AS ONE OF OUR SOUL FAMILY HAS NEED."

THE CAKE WAS LIKE FRUITCAKE OF EARTH AS WE ATE OUR PIECE.


I LONGED TO BRING SOME BACK BUT KNEW IT WAS IMPOSSIBLE.
WE STAYED AS LONG AS ANYONE AND SHARED HAPPILY IN ALL THE
JOY.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 154 of 382
THE SPIRIT OF GOD IS WHERE I AM. My BODY IS
SPIRIT AND MIND IN FORM. I AM LOVINGLY CREATED f
I
AND INTELLIGENTLY MAINTAINED. ~ .

I,
I

I AM ALIVE WITH GOD'S POWER. I AM AWAKE WITH


GOD'S JOY. I AM AWARE WITH GOD'S MIND. IN HIM
I LIVE AND MOVE AND HAVE MY BEING~ AND I AM NOW
BLESSED WITH HIS VIBRANT LIFE!

THE LOVE OF CHRIST PREVAILS IN ME. BLESSED


WISDOM THINKS THROUGH ME AND ALMIGHTY STRENGTH
EXPRESSES ME. GOD SUPPLIES MY EVERY NEED~ NOW
AND FOREVER MORE!
So LET IT BE!

.:~-=::-;-- • ==========FI:::-=~:::;~-=- --",,':::':~",,!----.---- ~--==.:=.-==~.=~~~., .


..

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 155 of 382
c

. ::-~+--- .. ~ --- -

(E) REV, DR, DOROTHEA f:1, RAMSEY 1990

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 156 of 382
(

4B-,)LU!3lZ' 'LX. S., . LCU&J:i11112LiJi4 au =

; ,.

:"\

---.----

(
LEANDER.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 157 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 158 of 382
SERIES TWO VIOLET LIGHT
LESSON TEN~
THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI
ROSE LESSON TEN

INCARNATIONS

"IT IS SOWN A NATURAL BODYj IT IS RAISED A SPIRITUAL BODY.


THERE IS A NATURAL BODY AND THERE IS A SPIRITUAL BODY."
I CORINTHIANS 15:44

ENTERING THE VEIL OF AWAITING BEAUTY OF COLORS J WE WERE


QUICKLY DRAWN UPWARD BY THE GENTLE HANDS OF ANGELS. CLAS-
PED IN THEIR LOVING ARMS J WE ASCENDED THE STAIRWAYS THROUGH
ETHERIC AND ASTRAL SKIES TO MINGLE INTO THE MOUNTAIN PEAKS
OF BLISS. ALL WAS BURNISHED GOLD WITH JADE GREENS AND PER-
IWINKLE BLUE. THEN GOLDEN RAINDROPS J LIKE LIQUID TREASURES J
WERE FALLING UPON OUR THIRSTY SOULS AND WE WERE HOLDING
THEM IN TRUST WITHIN THE PONDS AND BACKWATERS OF OUR EAGER
MINDS. WERE THESE A GIFT TO US FROM THE ASTRAL SUN?

Too SOON THESE CLOUDS OF JOYOUS COLOR PARTED AND DROPPED


THEIR JEWEL HUES IN SWEET RELEASE TO SCATTER 'LIFE' WHERE
EACH DROP FELL.

WE STOOD IN MASSIVE SUNFLOWERS WHICH TOWERED PROTECTIVELY


AROUND OUR FORMS. THERE WITHIN THEIR HUGE BLOSSOMS AND SOFT
GREEN LEAVES SAT SAFFRON J THE CAT J PATIENTLY AWAITING US.
WITH A LORDLY LOOK AND A BORED WALKJ HE LED US ONTO A PATH-
WAY.

IT WAS BEAUTIFUL HERE WANDERING AMONG THE TREES J GRASS AND


FLOWER BEDS OF THE CASTLE GROUNDS. SOON WE CAUGHT A GLIMPSE
BETWEEN THE TREES OF WHITE GRECIAN COLUMNS SHINING IN THE
SUN. THEN THE GENTLE SOUND OF THE RIVER. AND THERE BEFORE
US J LIKE A GRACEFUL HALF MOON J ITS MARBLE COLONNADE RESTED.
AT ITS INNER CURVE J THE SLOW BACKWATERS LAPPED AND SWANS WERE
IDLY SAILING. ONE WAS ADMIRING HIMSELF IN THE LOTUS LADEN
WATERS.

«J REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 159 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 2

FROM THE MIDST OF OUR AWAITING FRIENDS J LEANDER AROSE AND


CAME TO GREET US. BETTER KNOWN AS LEE TO ALLJ THIS MEMBER
OF OUR MANSTREAM OF LIFE WAS FROM THE CONSTELLATION TAURUS.
I REMEMBERED THIS LOVELY SPOT FROM A VISIT YEARS BACK WHEN
WE FIRST CAME IN CONTACT WITH THE SOUL GROUP.

MARSHA AND ELEANOR STROLLED UP WITH SEVERAL MORE WE KNEW BY


SIGHT AND WE COULD HEAR THE DEEP VOICES OF SOME OF THE MONKS
AND ROBIN'S JOYOUS LAUGH.

WE ALL SETTLED J AND LEE STOOD BEFORE US.

'INCARNATION AND YOU'

"IT IS TJME WE WENT MORE DEEPLY INTO WHAT TRANSPIRES DURING


OUR PROCESSES OF CHANGE FROM ONE UNIVERSE REGION TO ANOTHER."

OH J GOOD J I THOUGHT. I'D BEEN CURIOUS ABOUT THIS FOR A


LONG TIME BUT HAD BEEN TIMID ABOUT ASKING.

"You ARE ALREADY FAMILIAR WITH THE FACT YOU ALWAYS COME
INTO A MATTER INCARNATION WITH CERTAIN SELECTED PERSONALITY
TRAITS J STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES J TALENTS AND LIMITATIONS.
IF YOU HAVE SOUGHT TO KNOW YOURSELF J YOU ARE ALREADY FAMILIAR
WITH THESE IN YOURSELF.

"HOWEVER J UPON TRANSITION AND RETURN TO ASTRALJ YOU WILL


FIND YOURSELF A VERY DIFFERENT INDIVIDUAL FROM THAT LIMITED
PERSONALITY BORN INTO EARTH."

WE STIRRED IN EXCITEMENT.

"IF YOU HAVE SUCCESSFULLY IMPROVED YOUR CHARACTER TRAITS


AND LEARNED HOW TO MAKE YOUR EMOTIONAL AREA WORK FOR YOU
AND MASTERED YOUR CONCEPTUAL THOUGHT IDEAS; YOU WILL BE
RETURNING TRIUMPHANTLY. ANDJ THEREFORE J YOUR NEW ACHIEVEMENTS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 160 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 3
SHALL ADD CREDITS TO YOUR PRESENT SOUL CONTENTS.

"THE SOUL HAS AWAITED FOR YOUR RETURN INTO ITS ASTRAL VEHI-
CLE EAGERLY. SOUL WILL HAVE BEEN RECEIVING MUCH REALIZED
KNOWLEDGE FROM YOU AND ADDING IT TO ITS MIND CONTENTS. OR}
SADLY} IN SOME CASES} SOUL WILL HAVE RETROGRESSED DURING
AN INCARNATION.

"SOUL ALREADY HAS INFORMATIONS GATHERED FROM YOUR PREVIOUS


SOJOURNS IN MATTER AND THESE WILL BE IN THE ~IND'S CONTENT}
IN BOTH CONSTRUCTIVE AND NEGATIVE PATTERNS} AS TRUE FACTS
AND ERROR HELD IDEAS.

"UPON ARRIVAL HERE AND TAKING UP YOUR ABODE} YOU ADD THESE
SOUL CONTENTS TO YOUR MEMORY AND FIND YOU ARE MUCH MORE
THAN YOU NOW BELIEVE YOURSELF."

"WHY IS IT WE CANNOT HAVE MEMORY OF ALL NOW WHEN WE ARE HERE


VISITING IN THE ASTRAL?" CYRUS ASKED.

"BECAUSE YOU ARE ONLY A MATTER TRAVELER TO OUR REALMS AND


BASICALLY OPERATING IN ONLY THOSE SPECIAL AREAS OF SELF
WHICH WERE TAKEN AT BIRTH INTO MATTER." WAS LEE'S ANSWER.
"IT IS ONLY IN MATTER WHERE CHANGE IS ACTIVATED AT TOP SPEED."

"DOESN'T CHANGE OCCUR HERE IN THE ASTRAL ALSO?" THIS FROM


LILY.

"YES} CHANGE DOES OCCUR TO SOME EXTENT} BUT NOT AS EXPEDITI-


OUSLY BECAUSE IT WILL ALWAYS HAVE THE OLDER SOUL MIND NEGA-
TIVES TO COMBAT. THESE COME FROM YOUR PAST INCARNATIONS
AND HAVE BEEN LODGED THERE IN THE SOUL MIND FILES FOR SO
LONG THAT THEIR FORCES ARE STRONG IN EXPRESSING THEIR ERROR
IDEAS."

THIS WAS RATHER PUZZLING TO US} LEE COULD SEE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 161 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 4

"LOOK/' HE EXCLAIMED. "You KNOW YOUR PRESENT MIND VIEWPOINTS


HAVE EXPANDED SINCE LEARNING OF OUR LESSON CONTENTS AND YOUR
VALUES HAVE BECOME HIGHER BECAUSE OF ACQUAINTANCE WITH OUR
APPLIED KNOWLEDGES."

WE DEFINITELY AGREED.

"TODAY~ YOU EVEN THINK DIFFERENTLY THAN EVER BEFORE IN YOUR


PAST MATTER EXPERIENCES. WERE I ALLOWED TO GIVE YOU A PEEK
AT SOME OF YOUR PAST BLUNDERING INCARNATIONS~ YOU WOULD NOT
BE PLEASED. ALL YOUR PAST LIVES WILL NOT HAVE BEEN OUTSTAND-
ING~ SO ONLY THE KNOWING OF SPECIAL ONES WILL AID FOR AN IN-
SIGHT.

"1£ AI.J.. HAD BEEN HIGHLY SUCCESSFUL PERIODS~ YOU COULD GAIN
FROM RECALLING ALL THEIR EVENTS. OTHERWISE~ THEY ARE FRUIT-
LESS EXCEPT TO FEED THE CURIOUS EGO. IT WILL NOT ALWAYS BE
A PLEASANT SIGHT TO RECAPTURE A PAST INCARNATION~ AND IT IS
GOING BACKWARD IN TIME~ NOT FORWARD. IT'S MUCH LIKE TRYING
TO FIT YOUR PRESENT IMPROVED CHARACTER INTO A PRIMITIVE MAN'S
SHOES. ANY PAST PARTS OF SELF YOU NEED TO RESOLVE ~ BE
COMING THROUGH IN YOUR MATTER BIRTH EXISTENCES FOR CORREC-
TION AS PRESENT WEAKNESSES OF SELF.

"As LONG AS OUR SOUL MIND HOLDS THESE INCORRECT IDEAS AND
EMOTIONAL INCLINATIONS~ WE WILL BE CHAINED TO THE 'WHEEL OF
KARMA' AND BE OBLIGATED TO RETURN TO MATTER.

"IF~ AT PRESENT~ IN YOUR NEW AWARENESS YOU CAN DIRECT YOUR


INNER CONSCIOUSNESS IN THE RIGHT MANNER TO OBEY THE COSMIC
LAWS OF MIND~ YOU WILL DISCOVER YOU'RE RECEIVING COMPELLING
FORCES TO ACT OR DO~ IN A HIGHER STYLE OF AWARENESS.

"IF PEOPLE WOULD EXPEND AS MUCH ENERGY FOR CONTROLLING THEIR


THOUGHTS AND CONVERSATIONAL IDEAS AS THEY DO LAMENTING THEIR
MISFORTUNES AND CONSTANTLY TALKING ABOUT THEMj THEY WOULD

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 162 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 5
SUFFER LESS AND EVOLVE MORE. EVERY TIME YOU CLAIM A PAIN
OR DEBT OR MISFORTUNE J YOU ARE KEEPING IT BOUND TO YOU AND
YOUR EXPERIENCES."

WE KNEW FROM EXPERIENCE THAT HE SPOKE THE TRUTH.

"ANY PAST WISDOM OF SOUL OR SPIRIT NEEDED TO RESOLVE A PRE-


SENT PROBLEM IN YOUR EARTH LIFE 1£ THERE IN YOUR HIGHER MIND
FOR YOU TO RECEIVE IT. BUT HOW CAN YOU EVEN HEAR ITS MESS-
AGE WHEN YOU ARE CONSTANTLY DWELLING AND TALKING ABOUT YOUR
TROUBLES OR PHYSICAL AILMENTS?

"SPIRIT HOLDS ONLY TRUTHS ON ITS REGION LEVELS OF MIND AND


THESE ARE EAGER TO BREAK THROUGH AND TELL YOU THE 'RIGHT WAY'
TO HELP YOURSELF."

"OHJ WHY CAN'T PEOPLE SEE THIS J " CRIED VIOLET.· LEE SMILED
AT HER CONCERN.

"A CONTINUOUS VIEWING OF THE SELF FROM ONLY THE CONSCIOUS


SIGHT AND CONSCIOUS FEELINGS CAN BE BROKEN WHEN THE PERSON
DECIDES THEY HAVE HAD ENOUGH.

"THIS EARTH PHYSICAL LIFE PERIOD IS BUT A SMALL PART OF MAN-


KIND'S EXISTENCE. YET J IT'S A YfRY IMPORTANT PART FOR II
BUILDS OUR PERSONALITY PERFECTION. THE SOUL ASTRAL EXIST-
ENCE IS MUCH LONGER THAN EARTH LIFE EXCEPT WHEN A BABY DIES
OR A PERSON UNDER TWENTY-ONE YEARS OF AGE TRANSIGHTS. THESE
SOULS COME BACK SOON TO EARTH AND USUALLY AGAIN TAKE UP THE
SAME 'PERSONALITY' THEY HAD IN THE LIFE JUST CUT OFF.

"I HEAR THERE ARE EXCEPTIONS J " I PUT IN.

"A MASTER MAY RETURN FOR A BRIEF BABYHOOD OR CHILDHOOD TO


FINISH UP SMALL DETAILS OF KARMA. THIS IS THE EXCEPTION J
FOR THIS LAW."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 163 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 6
"Is IT TRUE THAT ONCE AN ENTITY HAS SUCCESSFULLY RESOLVED
CERTAIN IDEAS INTO MINDJ THEY NEED NOT REPEAT ITS TRIALS?"
VENTURED VIOLET.

"YES J IT IS TRUE J " LEE ANSWERED. "THE MIND CONTROL AND


EMOTIONAL EXPANSIONS OUR MASTERS ARE TEACHING AND WHICH
CHRIST AND HIS SEVEN LORDS TAUGHT; ALL SHOW HOW TO START IN
DOING THIS ACTION WHILE YOU ARE ON EARTH. EVERY TIME YOU
SOLVE EVEN ONE OF THE SMALLEST OF YOUR PROBLEMS J YOU SHED A
PERSONALITY WEAKNESS AND ALLOW 'SPIRIT You' TO SHINE OUT.
IT IS SO IMPORTANT TO REALIZE THE EMOTIONAL NATURE YOU BRING
TO EARTH AT YOUR BIRTH NOW BECOMES YOUR WORLD. CORRECT ITS
IMPULSES AND IMPETUOUSITIES AND YOUR "I" CAN BE CALM AND
NOBLE INSTEAD OF TENSE AND FEARFUL. You CAN ALSO BECOME
RICH IN MJND INSTEAD OF REMAINING POOR IN BlAZED OPINIONS.

"THE WORLD AROUND YOU IS THE TOTAL RESULT OF YOUR PRESENT


PERSONALITY BIRTH TRAITS. TAMARA WHO IS COMING NOW TO TEACH
THE SECOND SECTION OF OUR LESSON NAMES THIS 'PERSONALITY'
OUR 'LITTLEST EGO' PART. IT IS NOW YOUR 'CONSCIOUS-SELF'
AND YOUR MATTER EMOTIONAL AND MENTAL AWARENESS. YET IS NOT
THE REAL YOU -- YOU ARE MUCH MORE THAN YOU KNOW!"

IT WAS WONDERFUL TO DISCUSS LEE'S LECTURE WITH OUR FRIENDS.


THE SWANS COLLECTED AND WERE FED LITTLE BALLS OF DAMPENED
GRAINS J WHICH EACH TOOK FROM OUR FINGERS IN DELICATE MANNER.
DUCKS WHICH CAME FROM NOWHERE WERE NOT AS MANNERLY--THEY
CAME RUSHING TO POKE THEIR BILLS IN THE PAN OF FOOD.

I HEARD MARSHA SAY J "HERE THEY COME!"

LEADING THE COLORFUL GROUP WAS A TALL STATELY LADY OF QUEEN-


LY BEARING AND WE WERE TO DISCOVER HER A REAL QUEEN IN HER
BEAUTIFUL AND GRACIOUS SELF. SHE CAME OVER AND TOOK US EACH
SEPARATELY BY THE HAND WITH A SOFT GREETING. "1 HAVE LONGED
TO MEET YOU ONCE AGAIN J " SHE MURMERED. "IT HAS BEEN LONG
SINCE WE HAD MUTUAL COMMUNION."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 164 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 7
AGAIN WE TOOK OUR PLACES WITH LEE CLOSE TO LILY. ·STANDING
WITH HER BACK TO THE RIPPLING WATER WITH THE SUN MAKING
RICH REDS IN HER AUBURN HAIRJ TAMARA ANNOUNCED THE TITLE
OF HER TALK.

"LITTLEST EGO AND CONSCIOUS-SELF"

"THE WORLD AROUND YOU J WHEN IN MATTERJ IS DIFFERENT FOR


EVERYONE INCARNATING THERE. IT IS THE TOTAL RESULT OF YOUR
PRESENT PERSONALITY OR WHAT I CALL YOUR "LITTLEST EGO" PARTJ
WHICH MAKES UP THE CONSCIOUS PHYSICAL SELF YOU KNOW AS "I".
You BUILT THIS "LITTLEST EGO" YOURSELF FROM YOUR PAST MATTER
INCARNATIONS J ACTIONS AND BELIEFS. JUST AS NOW IN TIME YOU
ARE BUILDING WHAT YOU WILL BE IN YOUR NfXI MATTER BIRTH.
THE WORLD YOU SEE AROUND YOU IS WHAT YOU SEE IN YOURSELF.
You CAN SEE ONLY WHAT YOU HAVE IN YOUR OWN MIND.
"EVERYONE HAS SOME POOR KARMIC CONDITIONS WHICH THEY HAVE
ACCUMULATED FROM LACK OF KNOWING ANY DIFFERENT OR OF LACK
OF OBEDIENCE TO GOD'S LAws AND PRINCIPLES. THESE WILL BE
EVENTS AND PERSONAL FEELI NGS WITH \lmI CH You ARE NOT HAPPY.

"JOYOUSLY J EVERY WILLING PERSON CAN START RIGHT NOW AND WORK
ON AREAS OF SELF AND IMPROVE AND MOVE THESE OVER TO JOIN
THEIR RIGHT SOUL IDEAS AND THEIR TRUE SPIRIT MIND FACTORS."

"IT IS VERY DIFFICULT/' I SAID J "TO CONVINCE SOME PERSONS


OF EARTH TO GIVE UP THEIR PET HABITUAL WAY OF THINKING.
WE TRY BUT SOME COME RIGHT BACK WITH MORE NEGATIVES ENDEAVOR-
ING TO PROVE THEIR CASE MORE DIFFICULT OR SPECIAL OR NOT
APPLICABLE TO WHAT WE ARE TEACHING. WE KNOW THIS IS NONSENSE
BUT CAN'T HELP THEM WHO WILL NOT HELP THEMSELVES."

"No MY DEARS J YOU CANNOT HELP ANYONE WHO REFUSES TO FACE


J

WHAT THEY ARE PRACTICING. WE CAN ONLY CONTINUE TO POINT


OUT LAWS AND FACTS. REMEMBERJ THE WARNINGS THE MASTERS GIVE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 165 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 8

AGAINST 'MANEUVERING.' CONTINUE YOUR WORK AND RELEASE THEM


AND ALLOW THEM TO GO THEIR WAY. MANY BELIEVE THEY ARE FOLL-
OWING GOD'S WILL. THEY WILL EVENTUALLY AWAKEN AND GAIN RE-
LIEF AND FREEDOM IN SOME MATTER EXISTENCE.

"GURU SPOKE SOME WORDS I'VE ALWAYS REMEMBERED:

'THERE IS A DOOR TO WHICH I NEED A KEY.


THERE IS A VEIL THROUGH WHICH I CANNOT SEE.
BUT NO ONE ELSE CAN DO THIS TASK FOR ME."

"OUR GURU MASTER TELLS US OFTEN WE MUST LEARN HOW TO ADAPT


TO OUR STRESSES} STRAINS AND TENSIONS. BECAUSE PROLONGED
MENTAL AND PHYSICAL STRESS FROM WORRY} ANGER} FEAR} ANXIETY
AND FRUSTRATIONS LEAD TO ALL MANNER OF ILL HEALTH IN THE
PHYSICAL VEHICLE. WE MUST LEARN TO CHANGE OUR RESPONSE TO
PHYSICAL ILL HEALTH.

"THE EARTH PERSON OF MENTAL ALERTNESS WILL ENDEAVOR TO CON-


CENTRATE UPON THEIR THINKING HABITS AND RESHAPE THEIR OWN
LIFE. IF YOU DETERMINE TO CONTROL YOUR CIRCUMSTANCES ACCORD-
ING TO THE COSMIC LAWS OF MIND} YOUR CIRCUMSTANCES WILL AD-
JUST FOR THE BETTER. CHANGE DOES NOT LIE IN THE EXTERNAL.
You CAN'T GET A SHOT OR TAKE A PILL FOR A MIND CHANGE.
"THE GREAT LAw OF KARMA CAUSES LIFE TO PERFECT ITSELF. BE-
CAUSE NOT TO DO SO EVENTUALLY BECOMES UNBEARABLE. WHY WAIT?
THE LONGER WE PUT OFF THE TASK} THE GREATER WILL THE PROBLEMS
MOUNT UP. KARMA ALSO APPLIES TO UNIVERSE AND ALL IT CONTAINS.

"THIS UNIVERSE ITSELF IS A FORM FILLED WITH LIVING PARTS}


STARS} PLANETS} NEBULAS} SPACE DUST CLOUDS AND COMETS AND ALL
ARE VEHICLES FOR GOD'S CHILDREN TO EITHER LIVE IN OR UPON.
ALL INTELLIGENCE IN UNIVERSE IS BECOMING AND MOVING INTO ITS
PERFECT GOD PATTERN.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 166 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TEN PAGE 9

"OUR MANSTREAM IS BUT ONE OF THE GOLDEN SKEINS OF GOD'S


CHILDREN, WEJ TOO J ARE DEEPLY WOVEN INTO THE WHOLE UNIVER-
SAL DESIGN, OUR PATTERN IS NO MORE OR LESS INTRICATE THAN
ARE THE GREAT LOGOI'S PATTERNS OF WHICH MORE WILL BE SAID
AT A LATER TIME.

"BEING OF HUMANITY J WE ARE NATURALLY MOST INTERESTED IN OUR


PLACE AND OUR FORMS AND HOW TO USE THEM FOR THEIR HIGHEST
MANIFESTATION POWERS,

"NEXT LESSON WE SHALL MEET TOGETHER AGAIN AND THEN WE SHALL


EXPLORE THE BUILDING OF OUR PHYSICAL J ASTRAL AND SPIRIT FORMS,
UNTIL THENJ THINK UPON OUR WORDS AND ASK YOURSELF: "Do I
CONDONE THE HABITS MY 'LITTLEST EGO' IS PRACTICING TODAY?"

As MARSHA JOINED TAMARAJ I THOUGHT THEM TWO OF THE LOVELIEST


OF LADIES, THEY WERE SO REGAL AND POISED J YET SO WARM AND
FRIENDLY TO EVERYONE, THERE WAS NO SIGN OF SELF-IMPORTANCE
IN EITHER OF THEM; NO ACTION OR NEED EVIDENT TO BE THE MAIN
OBJECT OF ATTENTION, YET TH'ERE WAS A SWEET SURENESS OF SELF
AND RESPECT FOR TRUTH, NEVER J I THOUGHT J WILL I FIND BETTER
IMAGES TO EMULATE,

WE WERE HAPPY VISITING WITH ELEANOR WHEN SAFFRON IMPORTANTLY


TOOK CHARGE OF US BY A LOUD 'MEOW!' RELUCTANTLY J WE PARTED
FROM OUR FRIENDS TO RETURN TO THE SUNFLOWERS J WHERE MIST
ENFOLDED US, OUR LAST SIGHT WAS SAFFRON WATCHING OUR DEPART-
URE WITH INSCRUTABLE EYES,

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 167 of 382
..
,: ": "',.

'I.,."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 168 of 382
I CENTER MY CONSCIOUSNESS UPON THE ACT OF ATTUNE-
MENT WITH THE INFINITEj THE SPIRIT OF GOD ACTING
FROM WITHIN MY OWN BEING URGES A SPIRITUAL APPROACH
TO MY LIFEJ ITS PROBLEMS AND ITS TRIUMPHS.

I ACCEPT THE QUALITIES WHICH FLOW FROM THE GREAT


SOURCE INTO MEJ AND WHICH THUS BECOMES OBJECTIFIED
IN MY LIFE FOR NOTHING BUT GOOD SHALL COME TO ME
AND NOTHING BUT GOOD SHALL GO FROM ME.

My LIFE BECOMES CORRELATED WITH THE GREATER LIFE


THROUGH THE INNER WAY! GREAT ABUNDANCE IS MINE
IN PERSONAL TREASURESj JEWELS OF POISE J CONTENT-
MENT AND JOY BECOME RADIANTLY EXPRESSED.

AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 169 of 382
(

~ REV, DR, DOROTHEA M, RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 170 of 382
,/

TAMA.~A .' t4
THE WALLE)) GARJ>!W .

.~

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 171 of 382
(

~~. 117'l

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 172 of 382
SERIES n~o
LESSON ELEVEN ORANGE LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON ELEVEN
liTHE COS~lIC BUILDING OF SPIRIT. SOUL AND BODY"

"Now SET YOUR HEART AND SOUL TO SEEK THE LORD YOUR GOD;
ARISE J THEREFORE J AND BUILD YE THE SANCTUARY OF THE
LORD GOD."
1 CHRONICLES 22:19
FLOATING OUT FROM THE JEWELLED MISTS J WE FOUND OURSELVES
BESIDE THE BEAVER POND. THE BEAVERS WERE BUSY WORKING ON
THEIR DAM AND LODGE. THEY DIDN'T SEEM TO MIND OUR WATCHING
THEM.

iT WAS WITH GRATEFULNESS THAT WE ABSORBED THE PURE ASTRAL


ENERGIES. RECEIVING A STRONG IMPRESSION J WE WANDERED ON
TO FIND THE 'WALLED GARDEN.'

WHEN WE LEFT EARTH'S ATMOSPHERE J IT HAD BEEN COLD J MISTY


AND RAINING BUT HERE ALL WAS SOFT WITH SPRINGLIKE FAIRNESS.

WE PASSED THROUGH THE GARDEN'S ARCHED GATEWAY AS THE CASTLE


GONG ISSUED THREE DEEP TONES. As ITS MELLOW TONE VIBRATED
INTO THE DISTANCE J ALL WAS STILL AGAIN. OUR EYES TOOK IN
THE FAMILIAR POND IN WHICH LITTLE FROGS WERE SPORTING.
HENRY'S ROLY-POLY SQUIRREL WAS STUFFING HIMSELF ON NUTS AND
THE BIRDS WERE SINGING. WE SEATED OURSELVES NEAR THE SQUIR-
REL AND BREATHED IN THE FRAGRANCE OF THE FLOWERS. ONLY THEN
DID WE NOTICE TAMARAJ DEEP IN THE SERENITY OF MEDITATION
AS SHE SAT FRAMED IN FLOWERS. WE COULDN'T TAKE OUR EYES OFF
HER PURE BEAUTY. ITS DIVINE EXPRESSION MATCHED THE PERFEC-
TION OF THE BLOOMS FRAMING HER FACE.

THE SOFT SHUFFLING OF FEET RIPPLED THE QUIET LIKE A FRIENDLY


CARESS AS ASTRAL FRIENDS ENTERED THE GARDEN. SOFT EYES

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 173 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 2

SIGNALED SILENT WELCOME. You COULD FEEL THE GLAD JOY EVERY-
WHERE. TAMARA STIRRED AND OPENED HER EYES. A GLORY OF WHITE
LIGHT SURROUNDED HER.

"GREETINGS~ MY DEARS." WE SHIVERED IN DELIGHT. "I HAVE JUST


COMMUNED WITH THE 'GREAT ONES.' THEY WOULD HAVE ME CARRY YOU
DEEPER INTO THE SUBJECT OF 'JEWEL SEEDS."

ANTICIPATION RAN THROUGH OUR GROUP LIKE ALIVE WAVE. TAMARA


SETTLED COMFORTABLE.

"OUR CREATOR GOD BROUGHT EACH OF US FORTH FROM OUT OF HIS


'CROWN JEWEL CHAKRA.' HE THEN SET US ADRIFT INTO UNIVERSE
FOR THE TASK OF BECOMING LIKE UNTO 'HIM.' HE SET HIS OLDER
CHILDREN TO_ LEAD US INTO 'BEING' AND KNOWLEDGE.

"WITHIN OUR GOD JEWEL IS A SACRED CASKET. IT RESTS IN THE


CENTER OF OUR SACRED FLOWER DESIGN. IN THIS CASKET ARE TWO
SETS OF SPARKLING SEED-ATOMS. THESE ARE OUR 'SELF' AND OUR
SOULMATE. OUR GOD PATTERN LIES WITHIN THE PODS THIS SEED-
ATOM HOLDS. As WE HAVE INVOLUTED DOWNWARD AND INTO THE DIFF-
ERENT REGIONS OF UNIVERSE~ CERTAIN OF THESE PODS REMAINED
WITHIN THEIR REALMS.

"WE ALREADY KNOW THE 'ACORN' HOLDS THE SEED POD PATTERNS
WHICH~ WHEN FOLLOWED~ BECOMES A MIGHTY OAK TREE. AND SO
IT IS WITH US." SHE SMILED UPON OUR RAPT FACES.

"OUR JEWEL SEED ATOM IS ALSO A POWER STATION AND IN FORM


RESEMBLES A SCINTILLATING CHAKRA. As IT REMAINS BEHIND IN
OUR GOD JEWEL~ ONLY SENDING OUT ITS PODS INTO THE REGIONS
OF UNIVERSE~ THESE PODS ARE FORMED FROM THEIR GEOMETRIC
DESIGNS INTO OUR VARIOUS REGION BODY VEHICLES AND PERSONALI-
TIES. YET OUR ORIGIN EVER REMAINS WITHIN OUR GOD JEWEL AND
CLOSE TO GOD THE ABSOLUTE. "

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 174 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 3

"SO~ IT'S ONLY THE SEED PODS AND NOT OUR SEED-ATOM ITSELF
THAT TRAVEL THROUGHOUT UNIVERSE." I ANNOUNCED.

"YES~ DEAR~ AND SOON YOU WILL SEE WHY GOD PLANNED IT THIS
WAY."

"Is OUR 'GOD JEWEL' OUR 'REAL SELF' OR OUR 'WHOLE SELF'?"
LILY WANTED TO KNOW.

"THE SELF WE CALL 'REAL SELF' IS THE GOD JEWEL. You WON'T
HAVE A COMPLETED 'WHOLE SELF' UNTIL YOU HAVE FINISHED DEVEL-
OPING IN ALL EARTH'S SEVEN ROUNDS."

"I SEE~" MUSED LILY.

nLET US START OUR MIND IMAGE NOW." TAMARA CONTINUED~ "As THE
MANSTREAM OF LIFE AND NEWEST EGO BEINGS COME FORTH IN THIS
PRESENT UNIVERSE~ WE ARE BODILY A TRIANGLE OF THREE. THIS
MEANS OUR FOUNDATION IS MADE UP OF THREE ASPECTS:

I. SPIRIT SELF
2. SouL-AsTRAL SELF.
3. ETHERIC AND PHYSICAL SELF.

"WHEN WE SUCCEED IN MAKING A TOTAL CONNECTION OF THESE THREE


PARTS OF SELF~ WE BECOME A FINAL 'WHOLE SELF' AND THEN READY
TO RETURN TO OUR GOD JEWEL AND OUR FATHER GOD."

"SO WE ARE STILL FAR FROM BEING WHOLE/' STATED VIOLET PEN-
SIVELY. THERE WAS A COMFORTABLE FEELING OF FELLOWSHIP IN
THIS KNOWLEDGE~ A FEELING OF TOGETHERNESS.

REASSURINGLY~ TAMARA GAVE US THE RECALL OF OUR PROGRESS SO


FAR.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 175 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 4
"DURING OUR DOWNWARD INVOLUTIONAL PERIODS TO WHERE WE ARE
NOW INCARNATING INTO MATTER) OUR REGION EXPERIENCING WAS
DONE UNDER THE ABLE DIRECTION OF THE UNIVERSE' HIGHER ONES."

CYRUS ASKED KINDLY) "THIS INVOLUTION PERIOD IS FOR PREPARA-


TION ONLY?"

"YES!" WAS HER REPLY. THEN SHE CREATED ILLUSTRATION 1 OF


THIS LESSON) GIVING THE EXPLANATIONS.

"THE FIRST THREE EARTH ROUNDS AND THE FIRST PART OF THE
EARTH'S PRESENT INCARNATION WAS PREPARATION. THEREIN WE
GAINED OUR THREE BODY FORMS; SPIRIT) SOUL AND PHYSICAL AND
ALSO STARTED FILLING OUR 'MIND-POINT' WITH DATA."

A SOFT SWEET BREEZE MOVED THE AIR AS WE RUMINATED OVER THESE


FACTS.

"LET US GO BACK NOW AND START FROM OUR GOD JEWEL AND TRACE
DOWN OUR PROGRESS TO THE PRESENT. WE WILL NEED TO UNDER-
STAND OUR PAST AS WE GO FURTHER IN PROGRESS."

INTUITIVELY) ALL PRESENT KNEW WE WERE ABOUT TO RECALL VERY


VALUABLE MEMORIES.

"THE FIRST ROUND OF EARTH AND OUR MANSTREAM INTO UNIVERSE


WAS IN THE HIGHEST LOGOI REGIONS OF PURE SPIRIT (CHECK
ILLUSTRATION 1 OF THIS LESSON). As OUR FIRST POD ENTERED)
THE LOGO AND ANGEL MIND BEINGS CAME FORTH WITH ITS TWO TINY
PODS TO SUPPORT THEM AND GUIDE AND NURSE THEM. THE LOGOI)
FLAME LORDS AND BRIAH ARCHANGELS NOW FOLLOWING THIS POD'S
MANY INNER SEED-PATTERNS) BUILT A BEAUTIFUL CRYSTAL-LIKE
PRISM FORM. OUR SPIRIT FORM LOOKS MUCH LIKE A LOVELY SNOW-
FLAKE. As THEY BUILT OUR TWIN FORMS) THESE FIT INTO ONE
ANOTHER TIGHTLY TO EVENTUALLY JOIN AS ONE GOD UNIT IN THE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 176 of 382
T

THE SEVEN I NCARNATI ONS


OF EARTH.

JE\vEL REAL~~

. .
D I V I N E S P I R I T.

AS T RAL

BETWEEN EACH GLOBE A NIGHT PERIOD OCCURS TO RECAPITULATE


WISDOMS SO FAR ASSIMILATED. PLANET EARTH GOES INTO A •
SLEEP STATE THEN FOR THE SAME REASONS.

ILLUSTRATION IJ LESSON #11

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 177 of 382
THE SEVEN INCARNATIONS OF EARTH

EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATION 11 LESSON #11

1. THE ROUND OF RAW SPIRIT MATTER. WHERE MANKIND RECEIVED


THE OUTLINE FOR HIS SPIRIT) ASTRAL AND PHYSICAL BODY
FORMS) OVERSHADOWED BY LOGOI) FLAME LORDS AND BRIAH
ANGELS.

2. THE ROUND OF BEGINNING LIFE FORCE AND FIRE FORCES. MAN-


KIND STILL UNDER THE CARE OF LOGOI) FLAME LORDS AND
BRIAH ANGELS.

3. THE ROUND OF BEGINNING 'THOUGHT AND MIND"ENERGIES'


FOR INDIVIDUAL CREATING QUALITIES.

4. MAN AT FIRST IS STILL BEING LED AND OVERSHADOWED UNTIL


GROWTH REACHES A STAGE TO MOVE INTO A PERSONAL EGO STATE.
THEREAFTER) EACH PERSON IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR OWN
CONCRETE THOUGHT DEVELOPMENT. MATTER IS THE REGION OF
CONCRETE THOUGHT IN MIND.

5. NEXT EARTH INCARNATION WHICH SHALL COME FORTH IN THE


HIGHER SOUL-ASTRAL REALMS.

6. THE ROUND OF A FULL 'LIFE AND MIND' ATTAINMENT IN WHICH


MANKIND WILL DWELL WITH THE FLAME BEINGS AND BE KNOWN
AS SUN BEINGS, THIS TAKES PLACE IN DIVINE SPIRIT REGIONS.

7. THE ROUND OF FULFILLMENT AND UNION WITH THE 'WHOLE SELF'


WHERE MAN RECAPITULATES ALL SELF WISDOM AND PREPARES TO
TRANSIGHT BACK INTO THE GOD JEWEL FOR RETURN TO GOD --
REGION OF PURE SPIRIT.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 178 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 5
SEVENTH EARTH INCARNATION ROUND IN FUTURE J WHERE WE AND OUR
SOULMATE BECOME ONE 'WHOLE SELF'.

"THE HIGHER ONES CREATED OUR PURE SPIRIT FORM FOR US. IT IS
BUT AN OUTLINE FORM AND NOW IN COSMIC TIME WE ARE IN THE PRO-
CESS OF FILLING IN ITS OUTLINE. THIS REGION OF PURE SPIRIT
IS DOMINATED BY THE COLOR VIOLET •. WEJ LIKE EARTH HERSELF J
KNEW MANY WAKING STATES INTO UNIVERSE BUT BETWEEN EACH WE HAD
SLEEP STATES WHERE WE RETURNED TO OUR JEWEL."

WE HAD BEEN SO QUIET AND INTENT UPON TAMARA'S WORDSJ THE


PLOP OF THE LITTLE DIVING FROG SOUNDED LOUD TO OUR EARS.

"MORE SHALL COME FORTH REGARDING THESE COSMIC 'SLEEP' AND


~NIGHT' PERIODS IN THE FUTUREJ" TAMARA ASSURED US. "IN THE
SECOND EARTH AND MANKIND ROUND J ALL WAS BROUGHT INTO THE
DIVINE SPIRIT REGIONFIRSTJ THEN LATER INTO ITS LOWER FLAME
REGIONS. THIS IS THE COSMIC REGION WHERE ~lIND HOLDS SWAY.
HERE OUR 'MIND-FORM' WAS CREATED AND IMPRESSED UPON THIS
REGION'S FORCE ELEMENTS. OUR FORMS THERE ARE ON THE ORDER
OF THE COSMIC STARS AND SUNS J AND ARE CONNECTED INTO THE
GREAT UNIVERSE VITAL-FORCES. IT WAS HERE THE HEIRARCHIES
LAID DOWN THE SKELATAL OUTLINES FOR OUR ETHERIC-ASTRAL SYM-
PATHETIC NERVOUS SYSTEM AND OUR PLANTLIKE PHYSICAL NERVOUS
SYSTEM. THESE TWO CORRESPONDING SYSTEMS ARE THE PATHWAYS
THE MIND IMPULSES FOLLOW IN OUR ETHERIC AND PHYSICAL BODIES.

"THE PHYSICAL BRAIN OUTLINE IS THE ROOT OR MAIN CONNECTING


STATION IN THE LOWER MATTER FORM. (SEE ILLUSTRATION 2J
LESSON 6) THESE NERVE SYSTEMS RESEMBLE PLANT J TREE AND
FLOWER FORMS AND FOLLOW THE ENERGY PATTERNS OF VITAL LIFE
FORCES. THIS REGION'S BASIC COLOR VALUE IS INDIGO. REMEMBERJ
WE WERE NOT YET INDEPENDENT SELF 'THINKERS' THEN. WE WERE
'RECEIVERS' ONLY AND BEING LED LIKE VERY YOUNG CHILDREN INTO
KNOWLEDGE."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 179 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 6
"I HAVE A QUESTION) TAMARA/' SAID CYRUS. SHE NODDED. "OUR
MANKIND WHO ARE NOW SUN BEINGS AND HAVE ATTAINED LIKE NEHRA
TO AGAIN BE IN THE FLAME REALMS) SHOW THEMSELVES TO US) AS
DO YOU OF ASTRAL IN HUMAN FORM. ARE THESE DELIBERATE THOUGHT
FORMS OF WHAT THEY WERE WHEN IN MATTER? "

"YES) CYRUS. You WILL SEE SUN BEINGS WITH YOUR INNER SIGHT
BOTH IN THEIR NATURAL FORMS) WHICH ARE ROUND NEON-LIKE SPARK-
LING ORBS OR YOU SEE THEM AS HUMAN FORM ENTITIES. THEY CAN
SHOW THEMSELVES EITHER WAY. WHEN THEY COME IN HUMAN LIKENESS)
IT IS FOR ALERTING THE RECEIVER TO THEMSELVES FOR A SPECIFIC
REASON. WHEN THEY COME AS LIGHTS) IT'S USUALLY TO ADMINISTER
AID OR REINFORCE A PERSONAL NEED OF MIND OR FORM."

"THANK YOU!" SAID OUR GRATIFIED CYRUS.

"UPON EARTH'S THIRD INCARNATION) THE LOGOI) FLAMES AND BRIAHS


WORKED FROM YET ANOTHER POD OF SEEDS FROM THE JEWEL SEED-ATOM
AND NOW CREATED OUR ASTRAL-SOUL FORM. THIS) TOO) WAS A VERY
IMPORTANT EXPERIENCE FOR US. HERE IN THIS THIRD EARTH INCAR-
NATION) WE HAD OUR EGO OUTLINE BUILT AND THE DESIGNS FOR OUR
FUTURE PHYSICAL SENSE ORGANS. Up TO THIS TIME) OUR SPIRIT
SENSES WERE LIKE CHAKRA ENERGY WHEELS. Now) IN ROUND THREE)
WE EXPERIENCED WITH THE HELP OF OUR COSMIC NURSES CERTAIN
FORCES GATHERING IN A CENTRIFUGAL GROUP. As THEY DID SO)
THEY RE-FORMED INTO NEW WAVE LENGTHS TO EMERGE FOR USE IN
OUR INDIVIDUAL PURPOSE.

"REALIZE THAT THEN) AS EVEN NOW) OUR SPIRIT) MIND AND ASTRAL
HAD NO CONNECTING POINTS. EACH RESTED IN A SAFE ISOLATION
WITHIN THE REGION OF ITS CREATION. WE ARE STILL KNOWING
SEPARATION. IN SOME INDIVIDUAL CASES) THERE REMAINS MORE
UNCONNECTEDNESS THAN OTHERS FOR WE ARE STILL LABORING IN
THIS TASK OF CONNECTING AT THIS TIME IN OUR DEVELOPMENT."

"1 WOULD THINK THAT IF THE HIGHER ONES COULD BUILD OUR VARI-
OUS FORMS) THEY COULD CONNECT THEM." CYRUS TENDERED.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 180 of 382
SERIES T~JO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 7
"IT WASN'T IN GOD'S PLAN,," TAMARA REPLIED. "You WILL SEE
WHY AS THE LESSONS PROCEED.

"IN THIS ASTRAL ROUND THREE} BLUE IS ITS BASIC COLOR BUT AS
IT'S A REGION OF COLOR AND THEIR ENERGIES} THE BASIC BLUE
IS MOSTLY USED BY THE ANGELOI WHOSE NATIVE REALM IS THE
ASTRAL REGION. OUR ASTRAL VEHICLES WERE BUILT OF PURE COLOR
AND ENERGY BY THE HIGHER ONES."

I NOW ASKED. "WHAT ARE THE ANGELOI'S NATIVE FORMS? WE SEE


THEM ALSO AS LIKE UNTO HUMANS."

"THEIR FORMS ARE LIKE COLOR IN VARIED DESIGNS AND THESE DE-
SIGNS CONSTANTLY CHANGE WITH THEIR 'THOUGHTS.' WHEN YOU SEE
THOSE LOVELY 'BLUE ROUND COLOR SHAPES}' ROSE} YOU ARE SEEING
BRIAH ANGELS. THE ANGELOI'S COLOR FORMS} WHILE VARIED AND
BRIGHT} ARE NOT OF THE FORCE INTENSITY OF THE FLAMES OR
LOGOI. "

VIOLET HAD A QUESTION. "WILL WE ALSO CREATE IN 'THOUGHT-FORM'


TO THOSE BELOW OUR REGION} NEXT UNIVERSE?"

"THOSE OF YOU WHO ATTAIN THE FULL SEVEN ROUNDS OF REQUIRED


ACCOMPLISHMENTS WILL HOLD A PLACE IN UNIVERSE MUCH LIKE THE
ANGELOI NOW HOLD. YOU} TOO} WILL THEN BE QUALIFIED MIND
CREATORS} VIOLET." TAMARA POINTED TO ROUND 3.

"THE ASTRAL REGION IS WHERE CIRCUMSTANCES ARE SUCH THAT EACH


MIND-POINT CAN CREATE THAT WHICH THEY CONCENTRATE TO DESIRE.
ANGELS DELIBERATELY CREATE AND SHOW THEMSELVES TO MANKIND IN
A FAMILIAR AND RECOGNIZABLE BODY FORM. THE HUMAN MASTERS
AND HIGH GOVERNORS OF ASTRAL DO LIKEWISE FOR THEMSELVES AND
ALSO FOR ALL NEWCOMERS TO OUR SHORES. EACH THEN CAN BE OPER-
ATING WITHIN A FAMILIAR VEHICLE UPON ARRIVAL HERE AND RECOG-
NIZE THEIR LOVED ONES. THE NATIVE ASTRAL VEHICLES ARE VERY
BEAUTIFUL AS ARE ANGEL FORMS} BUT ARE TOTALLY MADE UP OF

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 181 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 8
COLORS AND AS SUCH WOULD BE UNRECOGNIZED BY THE PEOPLES OF
EARTH. You WHO HAVE OPEN PSYCHIC SIGHT DO OFTEN SEE PERSON-
AGES OF OUR REGION IN THEIR NATIVE COLOR FORMS BUT BELIEVE
THEM ONLY TO BE COLORED LIGHTS."

"EVERYTHING HERE IS ALWAYS THE SAME WHEN WE COME OVER"


TAMARA" AND YOU ALL LOOK THE SAME" EVEN THE ANIMALS AND
BIRDS." VIOLET ADDED" "How DO THE BIRDS AND ANIMALS STAY
THAT WAY?"

"THE MASTER CREATORS TAKE CHARGE OF ALL LIFE BEINGS WHO CAN-
NOT YET CREATE AND MAINTAIN THEIR OWN 'THOUGHT-FORMS.' LOOK
NOW!" TAMARA AND THE MONKS AROSE AND CLOSING THEIR EYES"
OUTSTRETCHED THEIR ARMS TOWARD THE FOUR OF US. SUDDENLY WE
FOUND OURSELVES AMID A VAST OCEAN OF COLORS" EACH OF DIFFER-
ING BRIGHTNESS AND SPARKLE. IT WAS VERY GAY AND BRILLIANT"
BUT RATHER DISCONCERTING AND CONFUSING. JUST AS SUDDENLY"
THE GARDEN AND OUR GROUP WAS BACK AND I WAS GLAD FOR I HADN'T
FELT REALLY COMFORTABLE IN THAT MOVING MAZE OF COLORS.

"LET US GO ON,," SAID TAMARA. "WE MUST COVER ROUND FOUR YET."

"AGAIN" WHEN EARTH INCARNATED INTO THE LOWEST MATTER REGIONS


OF UNIVERSE" WE WERE WITH HER. AT FIRST" WE WERE STILL LIKE
PUPPETS AND CARED FOR BY THE HEIRARCHIES OVER US. BUT AS
OUR PHYSICAL SENSE ORGANS CAME FORTH" OUR PHYSICAL BODY FORM
BECAME MORE DENSE AND SOLID. EVENTUALLY" THE TIME ARRIVED
FROM OUR ACCUMULATED GROWTH AND PROGRESS WHEN WE AGAIN RE-
TURNED TO EARTH IN POSSESSION OF A SELF-EGO. Now" WE WERE
ON OUR OWN" NO LONGER PUPPETS NURSED BY EXTERNAL MINDS.

"AND DOWN THE AGES" WE HAVE BEEN ADDING TO OURSELVES AS WE


ENTERED MATTER UNTIL THIS TIME WHEN EARTH REACHED HER LOWEST
INTO MATTER. THE LOWEST OF MATTER IS WHERE EARTH SAILS TODAY.
HENCEFORTH" SHE WILL NOT DIP SO DEEPLY AFTER HER NEXT SLEEP
TIME. THUS..r THIS IS THE COSMIC TIME FOR US TO PREPARE OUR-
SELVES FOR OPERATING IN HIGHER AND MORE RARIFIED MATTER

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 182 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 9

ELEVATIONS IN THE FUTURE OF THIS FOURTH ROUND. No LONGER


CAN WE DEPEND ON LOGOI J FLAMES OR ANGELS TO DO THE WORK FOR
US. Now ~ ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR OURSELVES AND WILL REMAIN
RESPONSIBLE RIGHT UP TO THE MOMENT WE RETURN TO OUR JEWELS.
IT IS NOW OUR 'WILLJ' OUR 'CHOICE' AND OUR 'POWER' THAT SHALL
CARRY US ONWARD OR HOLD US BACK.

"AT THE CLOSE OF THIS FOURTH INCARNATION OF EARTH IN MATTERJ


THE AVENUE FOR THIS PRESENT WORK SHALL BE CLOSED. IN FUTURE
ROUNDS FIVE J SIX AND SEVEN J WE SHALL BE BACK ON EARTH BUT
EARTH WILL BE UP IN THE HIGHER REGIONS J NEVER TO RETURN TO
MATTER AGAIN IN THIS PRESENT UNIVERSE TIME. (SEE ILLUSTRATION
1 THIS LESSON)

"LIFE IS ETERNALJ BUT TIME IS NOT IN THIS COSMOS. GOD HAS


PROVIDED US WITH AMPLE TIME TO GAIN OUR RIGHTFUL NEEDS AND
WISDOMS IF WE WILL. WE HAVE THE HELP OF ONE ANOTHER IN THIS
TASK AND OVERSHADOWING OUR NEEDS ARE STILL THE LOGOI J FLAME
BEINGS AND ANGELS EVER READY TO HELP US AT OUR REQUEST.

"THE STEPS WE TOOK DOWNWARD IN INVOLUTION WERE TUTORED AND


GUIDED. WE NOW POSSESS OUR FORMS AND BASIC MIND CONTENTS.
THE STEPS WE ARE ABOUT TO TAKE UPWARD WILL BE UNDER OUR OWN
POWERS AND INTELLIGENCE. WE ARE NO LONGER SPECKS IN SPACE.
WE ARE NOW FULL FORMS AWAITING TO BE FILLED OUT. WE ARE
MOVING ONWARD AND FORWARD J NOT ONLY AS INDIVIDUALSJ BUT AS
A STREAM OF LIFE.

"MATTER'S BASIC COLOR IS YELLOW. THE ENERGIES OF YELLOW AND


GOLD HARMONIZE WITH THE MIND FORCES OF GOD. WE ALREADY KNOW
IT IS THE EXTENT OF OUR WORKING MIND KNOWLEDGES WHICH ARE
OUR PERMANENT VALUES J NOT OUR PHYSICAL FORM OR EXTERNAL
MATTER THINGS."

Now THAT WE HAD AGAIN CAUGHT A GLIMPSE OF WHERE WE HAVE BEENJ


WE COULD SEE SOMETHING OF THE ROAD AHEAD. Now IT LOOKED MORE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 183 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON ELEVEN PAGE 10
INVITING TO OUR SENSES. To us OF THE SOUL GROUP IT HOLDS
OUT A PROMISE HARD TO RESIST.

TAMARA SEEMED SATISFIED AS SHE TUNED INTO OUR MINDS FOR SHE
SAID: "THE ROAD LIES UPWARD IN YOUR FUTURE TIMES" ITS PATH
LEADS EVER HOMEWARD."

THERE WAS COMPLETE SILENCE ONCE HER VOICE DIED OUT; BROKEN
ONLY WHEN THE SLEEPING SQUIRREL AWOKE TO SCAMPER HASTILY OUT
THE ARCHWAY.

WITH OUR THOUGHTS FULL AND OVERFLOWING" WE BID 'GOODBYE' TO


ALL. CLOSELY ENTWINED" WE FOUR LENT OURSELVES TO THE RAIN-
BOW MIST AND TRAVELED DOWN TO OUR LOWER HOME.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 184 of 382
THE GOD QUALITIES IN ME ENABLE ME TO ACHIEVE
RELEASE FROM INNER TENSIONS OF BODY) EMOTIONS
AND MIND.
WHILE MY MIND AND HEART ARE AT REST) I AM BECOMING
A STABILIZED CENTER OF SPIRITUAL CONSCIOUSNESS.

WHILE MY MIND AND HEART ARE AT REST I AM BECOMING


AWARE OF THE GOD PRESENCE IN ME.

WITHIN ME - GOD IS - As THE DIVINE IMAGE I WALK


IN HIS WAY. EVERY ELEMENT IN MY LIFE IS AT PEACE.
I AM IN THE INFINITE LIGHT AND THE INFINITE LIGHT
I SIN ME.

AND SO IT IS!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 185 of 382
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 186 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 187 of 382
(
(b'rus-

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 188 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE ROSE LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWELVE

"EGO AND THE ANGELS OF SLEEP"

"FOR HE SHALL GIVE HIS ANGELS CHARGE OVER THEEJ TO KEEP


THEE IN ALL THY WAYS."
PSALM 91:11

ALL WAS WELL AND WE WERE TRAVELING THE BYWAYS OF UPPER


CONSCIOUSNESS. THE RAINBOW HUES MET US LIKE STAIRWAYS
INTO FUTURE TIME. A TUNEFUL HUM OF ANGEL MELODIES WERE
ERASING OUR EARTHLY CARES AND LEAVING US REFRESHED IN
JOYOUS ENERGY. WE ARRIVED IN ASTRAL UPON THESE HEAVENLY
RAYS.

THE ASTRAL SUN BEAMED DOWN IN LIQUID GOLD AND SET THE SPIRE
OF A NEARBY ABBY ABLAZE. A DOE AND HER FAWN SHYLY VENTURED
FROM OUT OF THE NEARBY WOODS. BUTTERCUPS J DAISYS AND CLOVER
NODDED IN THE TALL GRASS. SOFT J DEEP VOICES CAME FROM THE
ABBY AS ITS MONKS UNITED IN PRAYERFUL UNISON. WE DRANK IN
THIS DEEP CONTENTMENT.

IT WAS MOMENTS BEFORE WE BECAME AWARE A COLORFUL SYMBOL WAS


FORMING ABOVE US IN THE SKY. MOMENTARILY ITS COLORS BECAME
MORE POTENT UNTIL IT BLAZED IN FULL GLORY •. As THE ABBY MONKS
IN THEIR BROWN ROBES SURROUNDED US AND KNELTJ WEJ TOO J DROP-
PED TO OUR KNEES. THE DOE AND HER FAWN APPROACHED LOOKING
UPWARD AND AS THREE ANGEL FACES MANIFESTED OUT OF THE HEAVENS J
ALL BECAME STILL.

THE HIGH SYMBOL SHONE DOWN UPON OUR HUMBLE GROUP AND CONCEN-
·TRATED ITS BEAM UPON A TALL KNEELING FORM. As ITS LIGHT
BORE FORTH A HALO FORMED. LITTLE BIRDS FLUTTERED DOWN TO
LAND UPON HIMJ AND THE FAWN HUDDLED CLOSE TO HIS SIDE.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 189 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE PAGE 2

As HE PRAYED~ HIS HAND REACHED OUT IN TENDER FONDLING TO


THE BABY DEER. SWEET~ GENTLE LOVE AND KINDNESS FILLED THE
ATMOSPHERE AS ANGEL FACES BLESSED US ALL. THIS MOMENT WAS
ONE~ ALMOST MORE THAN OUR HEART CENTERS COULD BEAR.

ST. FRANCIS AROSE AS THE SYMBOL AND ANGEL FACES FADED AND
COMING OVER OUR WAY~ HE GAVE HIS SERVANT~ CYRUS~ A SPECIAL
BLESSING. THEN j ALTHOUGH WE THREE HAD NOT BEEN HIS FOLLOW-
ERS~ HE TOUCHED OUR HEADS IN HOLY BENEDICTION. THEN~ STILL
IN SILENCE~ THEY ALL FILED WITHIN THEIR ABBY.

HAPPILY~THE DOE AND FAWN SKIPPED LIGHTLY INTO THE WOODS


AND THE BIRDS AND INSECTS RESUMED THEIR NATURE SOUNDS.

IT WAS _ONLY MOMENTS LATER THAT THE WHITEBEARD ELIOKIM IDDO


APPEARED WITH ILAN AT HIS SIDE. AFTER 'GREETINGS' ELIOKIM
INFORMED US: "I HAVE COME TO OPEN THE PORTALS OF SLEEP TO
YOUR AWARENESS.

"DEAR CHILDREN: GOD ESTABLISHED ENERGY LANEWAYS FOR HIS


CHILDREN TO TUNE INTO AND TRAVEL UPON THEIR ENERGY WAVES.
THESE COSMIC UNIVERSAL LANES ARE USED BY THE SEED PODS DUR-
ING INVOLUTION AND AT TRANSITING FROM ONE REGION TO ANOTHER
OR BACK UP INTO THE JEWEL. Now~ AT THIS PRESENT TIME~ 'EGO'
USES THESE PATHS."

ELIOKIM SWUNG HIS ARMS AND FORMED AN IMAGE. I HAVE TRIED


TO FOLLOW ITS INDICATIONS IN ILLUSTRATION 1 OF THIS 12TH
LESSON. THE ~~ITEBEARD POINTED TO ITS LOWEST CENTER SPOT.

"WHENEVER A PERSON DIES IN THE MATTER REGION~ THEIR SEED-


ATOM POD~ WHICH HOUSES 'LITTLEST EGO~' GENTLY MOVES UPWARD
AND OUT OF THE TOP OF THE HEAD AND INTO THE ETHERIC FORM'S
GEOMETRIC REFLECTION FROM THE ASTRAL CROWN CHAKRA. LITTLEST
EGO REMAINS HERE IN ETHERIC FORM FOR A BRIEF TIME; LONG

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 190 of 382
SEVENTH FORM. PURE REAL SELF JEWEL

Left hand side up and down travel


of Littlest Ego, in sleep, trance
'"
I The right hand side travel
goes up only . It is the
I
and coma, psychic states. transition pathway.
I
Area of Pure Life Spirit.
FORM SEVEN
Resolved true memory data It's only used in very last
incarnation of Universe and
Littlest Ego stops off in then goes on back up into
Spirit to become organize~d~-7)~~~ Real Pure Jewel Self . The
into a personality. Divine Real Self will insti-
Area of Spiritual Growth.
gate a new incarnation to
Area of Moral Discrimination.
the proper environment on
karmic cycles.
FORM SIX

Entity awaits new personal-


ity from Pure Real Self.
FORM FIVE
When entity so elects the
Expanded Ego now chooses
to serve mankind and learn
Intellectual Soul, High Astral deeper of the subjects he
and all Soul Groups Second has expanded . Thus, acti-
Schooling. vating a new and better
future incarnation.
Littlest Ego goes down between
Sentient Soul Center where FORM FOUR
it leaves part of se l f.
4
Second schooling area.
Soul Ego, where Littlest Positive mind data of the
Ego comes each night in ~ subjective files lie here.
deep sleep. 3 Reunion with Soul Group
takes place here.
Sentient Soul First Schooling
FORM THREE

Seed Atom and Littlest Ego


now magnetize to the right
level and schooling starts
of subjective memory files
on all unresolved problems .
In psychic state, Ego goes
where influenced.
At death, seed atom and
Littlest Ego abide three
days before going on up
to the lower AStral . In the
psychic state, it does not.

FORM TWO

At death
Littlest Ego stops in Etheric Littlest Ego travels up
to place essence patterns to on right lane only.
be magnetized to form the
physical in its image.

Littlest Ego at birth )


enters Seed Chakra.

ILLUSTRATION 1, LESSON 12

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 191 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE PAGE 3
ENOUGH TO UNLOAD MUCH MENTAL RUBBISH AND ERROR CONCEPTS.

"ONCE THIS IS ACCOMPlISHED~ EGO MOVES INTO ITS SOUL-AsTRAL


FORM. THIS ASTRAL FORM NOW TRAVELS OUT INTO SPACE AND CON-
TACTS YOUR SOLAR SUN SOL AND HOOKS INTO A COSMIC BEAM WHOSE
RAY NOW CARRIES THEM TO THE SOUL HOME. SOL~ BEING BUT A
REFLECTION OF OUR ASTRAL SUN~ THE PATHWAY WILL BE AN IDENTI-
CAL ONE. HOWEVER~ THE MATTER REGIONS ARE THREE DIMENSIONAL~
WHERE ASTRAL REGION IS FOUR DIMENSIONAL. THE CONNECTING
POINT OF THESE TWO AREAS FOR EARTH SOULS LIES IN SOL.

"ONCE THE SOUL FORM LEAVES SOL~ 'TIME' ALSO CHANGES •. SO


REALIZE MANY UNUSUAL AND UNKNOWN THINGS DO OCCUR OVER HERE
IN OUR ASTRAL REGION.

WAFTER A TIME PERIOD IN OUR REALM~ A SOUL BEING WILL AGAIN


TRANSIGHT~ BUT NOW INTO THE HIGHER FLAME REGIONS AND ASSUME
THE NATIVE FORM PREPARED BY THE LOGOI~ FLAMES AND BRIAHS.
THIS DIVINE SUN WILL FURNISH THAT PATHWAY. EVENTUALLY~ THE
ENTITY MAY~ AS IT EVOLVES AND GROWS~ MERGE INTO A NEW COM-
PLETE HARMONY AND ATTAIN A 'WHOLENESS.'

"BEFORE THAT TIME~ THE EGO USUALLY ONLY MANAGES TO ERECT


NEW FOUNTAINS OF ASSIMILATED WISDOMS AND THEIR NEW RHYTHMS
CARRY THEM OVER AND DOWNWARD AGAIN FOR A NEW KARMIC CYCLE
AND ANOTHER DIP INTO MATTER."

"SO THAT'S HOW IT HAPPENS." I WAS ENTHRALLED WITH ITS IMAGE.

"JUST WHERE DO WE PICK UP OUR NEW PERSONALITIES?" LILY WANTED


TO KNOW.

"ILAN!" SAID ELIOKIM. ILAN LOOKED FLUSTERED FOR A MINUTE~


THEN OBLIGED.

"WELL~ LILY~ REMEMBER YOU LEFT PART OF THE MATTER SUBJECTIVE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 192 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE PAGE 4
CONTENTS OF YOUR CONSCIOUS-MIND POINT IN THE ETHERIC REGIONS?"
LILY NODDED THAT SHE REMEMBERED. "WELL J YOU ALSO LEAVE THE
ERROR FILLED SOUL-MIND FILE CONTENTS IN THE ASTRAL REGION
MIND TO AWAIT YOUR CYCLE RETURN. IN DIVINE AND PURE SPIRIT
REGIONS J YOUR MIND CONTENTS ARE OF ONLY REALIZATIONS OF tRUTHS
ANDJ THEREFORE J REALITY. SO UP THERE NONE SHALL BE DUMPED AT
ALLJ BUT ONLY N.E1i FACTS ADDED. SO!" HE DREW A LONG BREATH.
"ON THE RETURN BEAMS EGO AGAIN PICKS UP THE SOUL MISCELLANE-
OUS DATA AND AS EGO LOWERS FOR A NEW MATTER ENTRANCE; IT
PICKS UP THE OLD RUBBISH DEPOSITED IN ETHERIC."

HE STOPPED AND LOOKED AT LILY EXPECTANTLY. PERPLEXED J LILY·


GAZED BACK. "BUT J ILANJ YOU STILL HAVEN'T SAID WHERE WE
PICK UP OUR NEW MATTER PERSONALITY!"

"OH!"-HE LOOKED CONFUSED. THEN IT DAWNED ON HIM. "WHYJ YOU


PICK IT OUT FROM WHAT'S IN SOUL FILES AND FROM OUT OF THE
RUBBISH OF ETHERIC!"

ELIOKIM LOOKED AMUSED. "I'M AFRAID ILAN'S CHOICE OF DESCRIP-


TION ISN'T EXACTLY TACTFUL J BUT HE HAS CONVEYED THE CORRECT
IDEA."

VIOLET NOW WANTED TO FIND OUT JUST HOW A PERSON WHO HADN'T
BEEN ABLE TO RECOGNIZE THEIR INCORRECT MIND CONTENTS DURING
MATTER COULD KNOW WHAT TO JETISON IN ETHERIC.

"THE LORDS OF MINDJ WISDOM AND KARMA TAKE CARE OF THAT FOR
US." ILAN WAS HAPPY TO SAY. "AND THEY ALSO SELECT WHAT IS
TO BE OUR NEW PERSONALITY CONTENT AND AID IN PARENTAL CHOICES
AND SO FORTH. WE AREN'T UP TO ALL THAT YET."

"YES!"J AHEMJ MURMERED ELIOKIM. "LET US MOVE ON TO EXPLORE


THE DOWNWARD LANES FROM PURE AND DIVINE REGIONS. THESE HAVE
BEEN NAMED "MOON" RAYS J BECAUSE THEY CARRY ENERGIES WHICH
REACH FROM PURE SPIRIT REGIONS CLEAR DOWN AND INTO THE MATTER
REGION.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 193 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE PAGE 5

"AFTER THE NEW PERSONALITY AND KARMIC DESTINY PATTERN HAS


BEEN AGREED UPON; A NEW SELECTION OF BIRTH PLANETS ARE
DRAWN UP~ FOR INFLUENCING THE ENTITIES MATTER EXPERIENCES.
THE BIRTH HOROSCOPE INDICATES POTENTIAL POSSIBILITIES. WHEN
ALL IS IN ORDER ONCE AGAIN~ A CHILD IS BORN INTO MATTER."

WE SAT QUIETLY THINKING IT ALL OVER. A YOUNG AND NEWLY


MADE WHITEBEARDASSISTANT NAMED SHEM STROLLED INTO OUR LITTLE
CIRCLE. SOFT CHANTING WAS HEARD COMING" FROM THE ABBY.

"I CAME AS SOON AS I RECEIVED YOUR CALL~ SIR!" WERE HIS


WORDS TO ELIOKIM.

"YOU'RE JUST IN TIME~ SHEM~" WAS THE REPLY. "You KNOW THESE
GOOD FOLKS SO YOU CAN START ANY TIME." WE REALIZED ELIOKIM
MUST LEAVE SO WE THANKED HIM FOR THE LESSON.

"THE THEME OF MY TALK IS 'You AND THE COSMOS~' BEGAN SHEM.


"JESUS SAID: VERILY I SAY UNTO YOU~ HEREAFTERYE SHALL SEE
HEAVEN OPEN AND THE ANGELS OF GOD ASCENDING AND DESCENDING
UPON THE SON OF MAN." JOHN 1:51

"BEING FAMILIAR REGARDING THE ORIGIN OF SOLAR SYSTEMS FROM


PRIMAL NEBULA ACTIONS AND REALIZING HOW ATOMIC COMBINATIONS
AND FUSIONS CAUSED PLANETS TO APPEAR IN UNIVERSE; YOU KNOW
THESE LAWS GOVERNING GASIFORM AND AERIFORM STATES COULD NEVER
HAVE PRODUCED ANIMAL OR HUMAN SOUL FORCES WHICH LIVE ON
MATTER PLANETS. THEREFORE~ THERE MUST BE IN UNIVERSE A
SPIRITUAL REALITY CONTAINED IN PRIMAL MATTER~ A 'LIFE FORCE'
OR 'LIFE SPARK: THIS IS SO."

WE WONDERED WHERE HE WAS LEADING US.

"WITHIN EVERY ATOM OF PRIMAL MATTER~ IN EVERY PRIMAL NEBULA


OF UNIVERSE~ THERE IS AND HAS TO BE A WEAVING ACTIVITY OF
THE ESSENCE 'LIFE' AND 'SPIRIT.' IT IS THE ACTIVITY OF SPIRIT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 194 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE PAGE 6

WORKING WITH 'LIFE ENERGY' IN THE HIGHER AND FINER COSMIC


ENERGY FORCES WHICH IS NOW CREATING THE FUTURE WORLD PLANETS
OF TOMORROW."

"SHEM" SIR,," INTERRUPTED ILAN. "DOES THIS MEAN THAT THE PRE-
SENT SPIRITUAL FOUNDATIONS OF A REGION WILL LIVE ON INTO A
NEW COSMIC AGE TIME?"

"1 MEAN JUST THAT" lLAN. THIS SOLAR SYSTEM OF OURS AND THE
SUN SOL AND PLANETS WERE A PRODUCT OF AN EARLIER STAGE OF
UNIVERSE EXISTENCE. THE PLANET FORMS CAME FROM OUT OF THE
PAST AND OUT OF ANCIENT AGES OF SPIRITUAL INNER FORCES."

STILL PUZZLED" BUT EAGER TO UNDERSTAND" I ASKED: "How DOES


THIS OCCUR?"

"RIGHT TODAY" ON ALL THE MANY CONSCIOUSNESS LEVELS OF MATTER


DEVELOPMENT" THE GOD CHILDREN OF EARTH ARE SENDING OUT FROM
THEMSELVES" STREAMS OF 'WILL' ENERGIES. THESE MIXED ENERGIES
MINGLE AND MERGE INTO THE LIGHT RAYS FROM YOUR SUN SOL. SOL
DRAWS THESE EARTH ENERGIES UPWARD TO NOW MINGLE WITH THE
ANGELOI ENERGIES. IN SO DOING" THIS PREPARES A NEW ATMOSPHERE
FOR THE FUTURE. THE HIGHER ASTRAL FORCES AND YOUR SOL'S
ENERGIES DILUTE THE NEGATIVES OF THE MATTER MIXED ENERGIES.
THIS INSURES THE BASIC GOD FOUNDATIONS OF ALL WILL LIVE ON
IN THE FUTURE."

IT SOUNDED FINE" EVEN THOUGH WE COULDN'T QUITE GRASP ITS


WHOLE MEANING. SHEM WENT ON.

"THERE ARE CLOSE COSMIC RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN THE REGIONS OF


UNIVERSE. THROUGH SUCH" EACH CAN REFLECT BACK SPIRITUAL IMAGES
AND CAUSE THESE TO PICTURE DOWN IN EARTH AND MANKIND'S MIND
AREAS. THESE REFLECTIONS TRAVEL DEFINITE ROUTES OR PATHS OF
ENERGY ALSO. SO TINY MAN CAN DIRECT HIS INNER COMMUNICATIONS
ALONG THESE ROUTES AND CONTACT WITH THE HIGHER MINDS."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 195 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE . PAGE 7
"THESE ROUTES)" ADDED ILAN) "ARE NEVER WITHIN THE EXTERNAL
AREAS OF UNIVERSE."

"NEVER" ADMONISHED SHEM. "To RECEIVE UNIVERSAL KNOWLEDGE AND


TO ENTER ONTO THE PATHWAYS TO THE HIGHER SPIRITUAL WORLDS) WE
MUST USE THE INNER CONSCIOUSNESS CHANNELS OF SELF. THE SUN
SOL AND MATTER'S 'ROSY RAYS' ARE EXTERNAL BUT WHEN WE RAISE
UPON THEM) THEY REACH A STATE OF INNER CONTACT OF MIND AND
LEAD US UP INTO DIVINITY."

"THE RETURN TAKES A DIFFERENT ROUTE." CONTRIBUTED lLAN. SHEM


NODDED IN AGREEMENT.

"To RETURN) THE BEAM LANES FORM FROM THE DIVINE MOON FORCES.
THESE SPIRITUAL AND ASTRAL ENERGIES ORGANIZE A CONFIGURATION
-WHICH ALERTS THE MIND'S 'THINKING' PROCESSES. IT ALSO AIDS
EARTHLY REFLECTION PROPERTIES OF MIND. AND IT DRAWS DOWNWARD
INTO EARTH."

I WAS THINKING TO MYSELF; "THESE ENERGIES AND THEIR LANEWAYS


CANNOT BE EXCLUSIVELY WITH PLANET OR STAR IF THEY ARE UNIVERSE
LANEWAYS." SHEM MUST HAVE READ MY THOUGHTS FOR HE SAID:

"THESE ENERGY RAYS AND LANEWAYS PERMEATE ALL THROUGH UN.IVERSE


AND ALL REGIONS) YET THEY ALSO DO STAND CONCENTRATED AT THEIR
DIFFERENT STAR AND PLANET POINTS IN UNIVERSE. MERCURY) VENUS)
EARTH) MARS) JUPITER) SATURN) URANUS) NEPTUNE AND PLUTO AND
SOL HAVE A POLARITY FIELD AND CONNECTING CIRCUIT INTO AND WITH
THESE LANEWAYS. THEREFORE) WHEN A 'WILL THOUGHT' IS DIRECTED
FROM ONE TO ANOTHER WAY STATION) A RETURN CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED."

EAGERLY) ILAN ASSURED US. "THESE LANEWAYS BEING UNIVERSAL;


EVERYONE FOLLOWS THEM IN EXACTLY THE SAME MANNER. By A MAG-
NETIC ~ FORCE GOING OUTWARD AND A MAGNETIC fULL FORCE TO
RETURN. THE FORCES THEMSELVES SAFEGUARD US."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 196 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON TWELVE PAGE 8

SHEM TOOK OVER. "ELIOKIM IS THE WHITEBEARD GOVERNING THE


'SLEEP STATES' OF EARTH INCARNATES. THE EGO CANNOT EXIST
CONSTANTLY DOWN IN MATTERJ NOR CAN PHYSICAL FORM OPERATE IN
AN EVER CONSTANT ACTIVITY. ETHERIC MUST RECOUP PHYSICAL'S
VITAL ENERGIES. THEREFORE J SLEEP LOWERS THE PHYSICAL RHYTHMS
AND CURRENT RATES. WHEN THIS OCCURS J EGO RAISES UP FROM OUT
OF THE SEED CHAKRA AND INTO THE ETHERIC FORM. HEREJ WHEN
EGO DESIRES J ANGELS NURTURE IT AND CARRY IT ONWARD UP TO
SOUL-AsTRAL FOR MORE NURTURING."

"THAT'S WHAT IS CALLED ASTRAL TRAVEL J ISN'T IT?" VIOLET WAS


ANIMATED WITH INTEREST.

"RIGHT!" SHEM SMILED. HE WAS TAKEN WITH VIOLET'S CHARM. "BUT


MANY EGOS JUST WANT TO TRAVEL ON EARTH'S CRUST AND SIGHT-SEE."

A LARGE MACAW J BEAUTIFUL IN PLUMAGE J CAME SAILING IN AND


LANDED NEAR US AND STARTED SCREAMING AT SHEM IN A RAUCOUS
VOl CE.

ILAN LAUGHED AS SHEM SAID; "GUESS TIME IS UP ACCORDING TO OUR


COLORFUL FRIEND HERE. WE WILL CONTINUE THIS SUBJECT NEXT
SESSION."

WE AROSE J WISHING WE COULD PROLONG THINGS. OUR TWO ESCORTS


WALKED A WAY WITH US ON THE WOODSY PATH TO WHERE WE ENTERED
THE COLOR BEAM PATHWAY. WE SAID 'GOODBYE,'

THE SUN WAS STILL HIGH AS WE TRAVELED BACK J BUT COLD AND RAIN
MET US ON EARTH.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 197 of 382
(

I AM A CENTER OF CONSCIOUSNESS THROUGH WHICH THE


INFINITE CONSCIOUSNESS IS MANIFEST.

I AM A CENTER OF ORDERLY ACTION THROUGH WHICH


INFINITE WILL IS EXPRESSED.

I AM A CENTER OF HARMONY IN WHICH INFINITE LOVE


RESIDES.

I AM IN THE IMAGE AND LIKENESS OF GOD. I AM A


PART OF HIS BEING) AND HE IS A PART OF MINE.

THE GOD PRESENCE BRINGS ORDERLINESS AND STABILITY


TO EVERY SITUATION IN MY LIFE.
AND SO IT IS!

""..,.....z=;,..=::.:<;===========l=:I·===:~o:::.::.:·:·- .:.::::;.:...----.=-=-=--=
.. .,-,
..~====:=:;;:=.-:;.-= ~ .-

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 198 of 382
f;
j

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 199 of 382
(

\.
t

---=-_.
-
(
THE EDGE OF THE VILLAGE
-

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 200 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN ORANGE LI GHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON THIRTEEN

"THE PATHWAY TO HEAVEN"

"I LOOKED AND BEHOLD A DOOR WAS OPENED IN HEAVENj AND THE
FIRST VOICE WHICH I HEARD WAS AS IF IT WERE A TRUMPET TALK-
ING WITH MEj WHICH SAID~ COME UP HITHER~ I WILL SHEW THEE
THINGS WHICH MUST BE HEREAFTER."
REVELATION 4:1

THE HIGH SNOWY PEAKS GLEAMED THEIR RAYS UPWARD AS WE CAME


INTO THIS ASTRAL WORLD. ITS GREETING REFRESHED OUR SPIRITS.
SOON WE WERE OVER AND BEYOND THE SNOWLINE. HERE ALL WAS
RUGGED ROCKY TERRAIN~ THE HAVEN OF THE MOUNTAIN SHEEP. ON
A HIGH POINT~ A KINGLY RAM STOOD SENTINEL AND WATCHED AS WE
FOUR MADE WAY THROUGH THESE HIGH ENERGY CURRENTS. How BEAUTI-
FUL AND PROUD HE LOOKED.

OUR PATH WAS DRAWING US STRAIGHT AS AN ARROW OVER THE FOOT-


HILLS NOW AND FINALLY DEPOSITING US BY THE ESTUARY WHICH
LIES BELOW THE CASTLE'S SOUTHERN TIP AND AT THE CLIFFSIDE
STAIRWAY.

UPON ARRIVAL~ BOTH COWS AND FARMER LOOKED UP AND HE WAVED US


A WELCOME FROM ACROSS THE STREAM. A PEACEFUL NOSTALGIA OF
EARLIER GENTLE AGES LAY ABOUT US. THE SOOTHING SONG OF THE
ESTUARY WATER LAPPED AT OUR FEET.

PRESENTLY~ ELIOKIM AND TAMARA COULD BE HEARD DESCENDING WITH


THEIR GROUP FROM THE CASTLE. SOMEWHERE NEAR WAS THE RHYTHMIC
SOUND OF SOMEONE SAWING WOOD. THE CHURCH BELL RANG AND FROM
. THE LANES VILLAGERS APPROACHED. WHEN ALL WERE ASSEMBLED~ OUR
GROUP WAS QUITE IMPRESSIVE AND I RECOGNIZED FACES WHICH CAME
TO OUR EARTH SESSIONS AND LESSONS AMONG THOSE PRESENT.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 201 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 2
TAMARA WAS OUR FIRST TEACHER THIS DAY. SHE WORE HER ORANGE
ROBE AND AROUND HER PLAYED MANY SHIMMERING SHADES OF VIOLET.

"DEAR ONES: LET US AGAIN DEAL WITH 'LITTLEST EGO' AND THE
HEAVENLY PATHWAYS IT USES. LET US FOLLOW FORGOTTEN LANEWAYS.
LET US REALIZE THESE LANEWAYS ARE FAMILIAR ROUTES TO OUR EGO.

"IN THE EARTH NIGHT TIME SLEEP PERIODS) EGO HAS A CHOICE OF
TRAVEL. As IT VACATES THE BODY) IT MAY TRAVEL EARTH BYWAYS
OR TRAVEL UP TO ETHERIC OR GAYLY RUSH ON TOWARD A SOUL DELIGHT.
ITS NIGHTLY JOURNEYS) WHILE PHYSICAL FORM IS BEING REGENERATED
AND RENEWED) COVER ONE THIRD OF YOUR WHOLE INCARNATION TIME
WHILE UPON PLANET EARTH. THEREFORE) YOU SHOULD BECOME AWARE
OF ITS EXPERIENCES."

THIS WAS SOMETHING I'D ALWAYS WANTED TO KNOW.

"WITH NO DIRE CONSCIOUS RESULTS WE TRAVEL ON ALREADY LAID


DOWN PATHWAYS EVERY NIGHT OF OUR INCARNATING LIFE ON EARTH.
WE ALSO TRAVEL IN THE SAME MANNER AT OUR FINAL TRANSITION
FROM EARTH INTO ASTRAL. SO THESE VERY IMPORTANT TRIPS WILL
NOT BE NEW TO YOUR 'EGO'.

"WE ARE OUR 'EGO') NOT OUR 'CONSCIOUS-SELF'. THIS LATTER IS


BUT A TEMPORARY PART WE ARE PLAYING UPON THE STAGE OF LIFE.
A PART WE RELINQUISH AT THE END OF THE PLAY WHEN WE RESUME
OUR REAL SELF. WOULD YOU LIKE ME TO DESCRIBE HOW THIS TAKES
PLACE?'

MURMERS OF ASSENT WERE HEARD FROM ALL THE GROUP.

"IN THE FINAL TRIP) 'EGO' CHOOSES THE 'RIGHT HAND PATH'.
(SEE ILLUSTRATION 1) LESSON 12) Now 'EGo' TRAVELS IN STATE
INSIDE THE SEED-POD AND AS THEY REWIND UP THE SILVER CORD)
A STOP IS MADE IN ETHERIC.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 202 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 3
"THIS STOP IS AN ESSENTIAL PERIOD FOR 'EGO' WITH THE HELP
OF ITS ANGELS AND HIGHER ONES FOR EGO HAS A BRIEF JOB TO
DO HERE IN ETHERIC. THE USELESS MATERIALS OF MIND MUST BE
WINNOWED OUT AND SOME DISCARDED COMPLETELY AND SOME DEPOSI-
TED TO BE LATER PICKED UP J FINISHED AND RESOLVED WHEN 'EGO'
.RETURNS FOR ITS IiE.XI INCARNATION. THE MINIMUM TIME FOR THIS
TASK WILL ALWAYS CORRESPOND TO THREE EARTH DAYS IN tIMEJ BUT
CAN BE LONGER."

"IT ISN'T FIXED THEN REGARDING OUR STOPOVER?" SOMEONE SAID.

"No ITS TIME ISN'T FIXED. As SOON AS YOU AND THOSE HELPING
J

HAVE COMPLETED THE MIND CLEANSING AND AFTER DEPOSITING THE


CONTENTS OR SACHEL TO AWAIT YOUR RETURN J YQU ARE MET AND ES-
-CORTED TO THE ASTRAL LEVEL YOU VIBRATE WITH."

THE VILLAGERS WERE NODDING TO US THAT THIS WAS TRUE.

"DURING THIS ETHERIC TIMEJ YOU APPEAR TO YOURSELF EXACTLY


AS YOU WERE IN AGE AT YOUR DEMISE J YET HEALTHY AND FREE.
THOSE WHO ARE CARRIED OVER 'ASLEEP' WILL BE HAVING THEIR
WORK PERFORMED FOR THEM AND WILL NOT BE AWARE OF THIS EVENT.
THOSE 'ASLEEP' WILL FIND THEMSELVES WHEN THEY AWAKEN IN ONE
OF OUR HOSPITALS. THIS IS NOT BECAUSE OF YOUR PAST PHYSICAL
HEALTH STATE BUT BECAUSE OF UNPREPAREDNESS OF SELF FOR HAND-
LING YOUR TRANSITION."

"Is IT A DISADVANTAGE TO BE CARRIED OVER IN A COMPLETE SLEEP


STATE?" THIS WORRIED ME SOMEWHAT.

"YES J IN A WAY. You LOSE THE DELIGHT OF THROWING OFF BUR-


DENS AND THE RELEASE OF BECOMING EVER MORE EXHILERATED AS
YOU JETISON MIND DEBRIS. You MISS THE THRILL OF SEEING YOUR-
SELF TAKE ON THE YOUTHFUL GLOW AND FEEL THE ZEST FOR LIFE."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 203 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 4

"WE GET THAT IN ETHERIC? THEN WHY DO SOME NOT SEE AND REAL-
IZE THEY HAVE MADE A CHANGE?" ASKED CYRUS.

"IT HAPPENS SO NATURALLY~ CYRUS. AND ALL AROUND THEM ARE


THEIR SCENES AND PLACES OF EARTH SPECIALLY CREATED. ANOTHER
FACTOR IS THAT ANGELS DO NOT POSSESS WINGS AND LOOK LIKE OUR
HUMANITY. IN BEWILDERMENT AND FROM LACK OF KNOWLEDGE OR
TAUGHT MISCONCEPTIONS~ THEY DECIDE TO PLAY SAFE AND REMAIN
CLOSE TO THEIR EARTH FAMILIES AND HOME SCENES. THESE~ OF
COURSE~ FADE OUT IN TIME AND THEN THESE LOST ONES ROAM AT
RANDOM SEEKING THEM AGAIN."

"Is THERE NO GUIDE THERE TO HELP THEM?" I ASKED.

"AFTER REFUSING TO COOPERATE WITH THEIR ANGELS AND GUIDES~


ROSE~ WE CANNOT BREAK THE LAW AND FORCE THEM TO ACCEPT OUR
SUGGESTIONS~ NOR CAN WE ACCOMPANY EACH INDIVIDUAL ALL THE
TIME AS WE HAVE A CONSTANT STREAM OF VISITORS COMING OVER WHO
DO ACCEPT OUR SUCCOR."

SO THAT WAS WHY WE HAD BEEN DRAFTED TO START OUR 'HELP THE
DEAD' PROGRAM.

"THERE IS ANOTHER MISSION WHICH OCCURS IN ETHERIC. AFTER


THE MIND CLEANSING AND JUST BEFORE 'EGO' IS ESCORTED INTO
THE ASTRAL~ AN ACTION IS PERFORMED BY THE LOGO ATTENDING~
FOR THE 'BREAK-UP' OF THE OLD ETHERIC PATTERN. Now~ AS YOU
LEAVE~ ITS ELEMENTS METAMORPHOUS INTO THEIR ORIGINAL ATOMIC

PARTICLES."

VIOLET~ WHO HAD BEEN EATING SOME GRAPES A VILLAGER BROUGHT~


ASKED: "THE PARTICLES OF OUR PHYSICAL GO BACK INTO EARTH
ELEMENTS BUT WHAT ARE THE ELEMENTS OF OUR ETHERIC-FORM?"

"THE ETHERIC ATOMIC PARTICLES.ARE GATHERED AND DRAWN IN FROM


THE MATTER STARS. THESE ARE MAGNETIZED FROM YOUR FOURTH

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 204 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 5
SEED POD. ITS ENERGY PATTERNS WHICH GOD LAID DOWN ATTRACT
AND DRAW THEM FROM THEIR VARIOUS STAR GLOBES."

A COLORFUL PARROT FLEW IN AND PROCEEDED TO PULL AT TAMARA'S


SCARF. "No! No!" SHE ADMONISHED AS WE ALL LAUGHED. "THIS
MOMENT IS NOT FOR PLAY."

LILY) CYRUS AND I HAD BEEN ENJOYING SOME PEACHES AND PEARS.
CYRUS ENTICED THE PARROT WITH FRUIT SCRAPS AS HE ASKED:
"THIS IS OUR INTELLECTUAL SOUL FORM WE ARE IN NOW) WHAT IS
OUR SENTIENT FORM LIKE? AND IS ITS REGION MUCH LIKE THIS?"

"SENTIENT FORM STARTS OUT TO APPEAR AS THE YOUNG EARTH FORM


LOOKED) BUT IT GRADUALLY CHANGES IN IMPROVEMENT AS THE EGO
GOES THROUGH THE SCHOOLINGS THERE AND LEARNS FOR MORE CON-
STRUCTIVE ENLIGHTENMENT. SENTIENT HAS MANY LEVELS FROM THE
LOWER HELLISH ATMOSPHERES TO EXACT EARTH COUNTERPARTS TO
HIGHER AND MORE ELEVATING REGIONS. EVERYONE IS TAKEN TO
THEIR EXACT RIGHT PLACE WHICH HARMONIZES WITH THEIR ENERGIES
AND ACCOMPLISHMENTS. HERE ONE MEETS FRIENDS AND OLD ACQUAINT-
ANCES AND WHEN SETTLED AND READY) THEY ENTER A SCHOOL FOR
PERFECTING THE POTENTIALS.

"THE TEACHERS COME FROM THE HIERARCHIES AND GOVERN THE SCHOOLS
AND COUNSEL) AND WHITEBEARDS ARE THE TEACHERS. AT TIMES)
HUMAN ENTITIES TEACH SPECIAL SUBJECTS AND GAIN PERSONAL ADVAN-
CEMENT FROM SO DOING.

"EVERY IMAGINABLE AID FOR LEARNING IS AVAILABLE FOR THE PAR-


TAKING. YOUR 'FREE CHOICE' IS HONORED BUT COUNSELORS ARE PRE-
SENT SHOULD YOU DESIRE ASSISTANCE FOR GREATER EXPEDITIOUSNESS.
ONCE THESE SCHOOLINGS ARE COMPLETED) THOSE OF OUR SOUL GROUP
ARE READY TO EMBARK ON OUR GOLDEN SWAN AND COME HOME TO OUR
CASTLE TO REMAIN IN SERVICE AND ADVANCED DEVELOPMENT HERE."

GENTLY DISENGAGING THE PARROT FROM CHEWING MY BUTTONS) I THOUGHT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 205 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 6

SENTIENT SOUL A VERY IMPORTANT STAGE OF OUR KARMIC CYCLE J AND


I WAS GLAD FOR OUR PRESENT LESSONS AND THEIR IMMEDIATE HELP
NOW. THIS SHOULD REALLY PAVE OUR WAY IN THE FUTURE.

CYRUS VOICED MY THOUGHTS. "THIS STUDY NOW AND THE DISLODGING


OF OUR 'WRONG COMMANDS' AND REPLACING OF PRESENT ATTITUDES
SHOULD ENABLE US TO REALLY TAKE FULL ADVANTAGE WHEN WE REACH
OUR SENTIENT SCHOOLS."

SMILING UPON HIMJ TAMARA ANSWERED. "IT WILL CUT DOWN YOUR TIME
THERE. ANDJ NO DOUBT J INSURE YOU MANY SPECIAL VISITS UP HERE
DURING ITS DURATION."

THIS REMINDED LILY AS SHE SAID: "FREDERICK MENTIONED ~ WOULD


HAVE ASTRAL MISSIONS TOGETHER LATER ON. Do ALL SOULMATES HAVE
TIME T6 WORK TOGETHER HERE IN THE ASTRAL?"

"No J DEAR. WORKING AS A TEAM IS A PRIVILEGE THAT IS EARNED.


UNEVOLVED SOULMATES SELDOM MEET OR EVEN KNOW OF ONE ANOTHER.
WE ALSO HAVE A SITUATION WHICH IS SAD. ONE SOULMATE WILL BE
WORKING J PROGRESSING AND FULFILLING THEIR OUTLINE J BUT THE
MATE IS UNAWAKENED AND UNDESIROUS OF CHANGING."

"WELL!" SAID CYRUS J "THAT'S NOT FOR ME!" EVERYONE LAUGHED AND
TAMARA SAID. "You ARE SAFE WITH YOUR MATE."

ELIOKIM TOOK OVER NOW AFTER WE STRETCHED AND FED SOME DUCKS
AND GEESE BEGGING FROM THE GRASSY SIDES OF THE ESTUARY.

"FROM ASTRAL THOSE EVOLVED ENOUGH SHALL TRANSIGHT INTO THE


FLAME REGIONS AS D1D NEHRA. HAOLE IS THERE TEMPORARILY ATTAIN-
ING HIS MASTER INITIATION. THIS IS THE REGION OF CHRIST JESUS
AND HIS SEVEN LORDS AND OF MASTERS AND AVATARS J SAINTS AND
HOLY SAGES AS WELL AS THE DISCIPLES OF CHRISi AND THE SEVEN.
THIS TRANSITION AND CYCLE POINT J YOU WILL NOT ACHIEVE YET.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 206 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 7
ONLY MASTERS DWELL IN THE FLAME SPIRIT REGIONS AND ONLY AFTER
THEY HAVE LEFT AND COMPLETED THE WHEEL OF KARMA.

"You CAN" WHEN YOU BECOME A JUNIOR MASTER" OCCASIONALLY VISIT


UP IN THIS HIGH REGION. BUT ALL WHO ATTAIN TO THE RANK OF
MASTERSHIP ARE NOT AT ITS TOP POTENTIAL AND FINISHED IN MATTER.
To BE A FULL FLEDGED MASTER" THE 'EGO' MUST BE ABLE TO PERCEIVE
ITS OWN TOTAL 'CONSCIOUSNESS' AND SEE IT AS A THING APART.

"WHEN YOU ATTAIN TO BECOMING A FULL MASTER AND ABIDE IN THE


FLAME REALM" YOU'RE NOW CALLED A SUN BEING. FLAME BEINGS
ARE JUNIOR LOGOS" BUT SUN BEINGS ARE THE ELECT HOLY ONES OF
OUR OWN MANSTREAM.

"THE FLAME CHILDREN OF GOD ARE NATIVE TO THIS REALM. OUR SUN
BEINGS ARE GUESTS UPON ITS LEVELS AND IN A COSMIC RELATIONSHIP
WITH THESE LOGOI AND EACH OTHER. HERE DWELL THE FLAME LORDS
OF ~10VEMENT" WI SDOM" KARMA" MIND AND MANY OTHER TITLES. OUR
SUN BEINGS NOW LEARN FROM THEM THEIR DIVINE WISDOMS AND UNFOLD
THEIR INDIVIDUAL PATTERN DESIGNS FROM THEIR JEWEL" UNDER THE
FLAME LORD'S TUTELAGE. MOST OF YOU WILL MAKE YOUR ARCH FOR
YOUR PRESENT KARMIC CYCLE FROM OUR POINTS OF INTELLECTUAL SOUL
REGIONS OR SENTIENT SOUL REGION. HOWEVER" CHRIST AND LORD
MAITREYA AND SUN BEINGS DO ELECT TO RETURN TO EARTH FOR SPECIAL
MISSIONS TO HELP HUMANITY AND THE LOGO EARTH. SOME ELECT TO
BE BORN AGAIN" SOME TEAM UP TO TAKE OVER A PREPARED BODY FORM."

"WHERE DO WE RESEARCH FOR NEW EARTH PARENTS AND SUCH?" WAS


LILY'S EAGER QUESTION.

"THE HEIRARCHIES CAN COME TO ASSIST YOU IN THIS TASK ON ANY


REGION FROM LOGOI THROUGH ASTRAL" AND CERTAIN MEMBERS OF ITS
HIGHER REGIONS CAN AND DO GO WITH YOU CLEAR BACK INTO THE
MATTER ETHERIC REALM AND STAY'WITH YOU TO THE VERY MOMENT OF
YOUR UNITING INTO YOUR NEW PHYSICAL FORM. THE ACTUAL RESEARCH-
ING IS DONE FOR PARENTS" MATTER ENVIRONMENT AND NEW PERSONALITY

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 207 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON THIRTEEN PAGE 8

IN THE FLAME MIND REGIONS. THEN YOUR GUIDES SPAN WHOLE BLOOD
LINES OF EARTH AND REVIEW COMING EVENTS OF PLANET EARTH AND
ITS MANSTREAM. FROM ALL THIS nATAJ THE LORDS OF KARMA WORK
OUT FOR YOU A TEMPORARY DESTINY OUTLINE PATTERN. (NOTICE THE
PHRASING OF HIS SENTENCE) NOW J IF YOU ARE AN EGO WHO HAS
BEEN ADDING TO YOUR MIND CONTENT AND WORKING AT IMPROVING
YOUR IMAGE J THIS 'OUTLINE' IS DISCUSSED WITH YOU AND YOUR CON-
SENT REQUESTED. BUT THE UNEVOLVED EGO SIMPLY IS PLACED IN THE
ACTION AND CARRIED FORTH INTO BIRTH FROM THE DECISIONS OF THE
HIGH LORDS. MOST WHO WILL HAVE INTEREST IN OUR PROGRAM WILL
HAVE APPROVED OF THIS 'LIFE'S' EVENTS AND ALSO HAVE INITIATED
EFFORT TO COPE WITH THE PROBLEMS SELECTED TO TEACH THEM NEEDED
VALUES."

"SOJ THAT IS OUR CYCLIC KARMIC WHEEL LANES J " I SAID SHUFFLING
THE PARROT OVER TO CYRUS FOR AWHILE.

"THAT IS ITS LANES WHICH CORRESPOND TO THE LANES EGO TAKES AT


SLEEP TIME."

"SINCE YOU SPOKE ABOUT DREAMS AND SLEEP J WE HAVE BEEN RECORD-
ING THOSE WE COULD REMEMBER." LILY ASSERTED. "FINEJ" HE SAID
"As YOU STUDY 'DREAMS' LATER ON J YOU WILL HAVE A BASE FOR INTER-
PRETING THEM."

"CHILDREN!" TAMARA ANNOUNCED. "THIS SUBJECT WILL BE CONTINUED


NEXT MEETING TIME FOR ITS IMPORTANT TO US ALL AND OUR MANSTREAM."

WE VISITED FOR AWHILE J MET NEW FRIENDS AND EMBRACED OLD. THEN
TAMARA AND ELIOKIM KISSED US AS THE ROSY RAYS GATHERED TO BRIDGE
US HOMEWARD.

WE SAILED BACK OVER THE HILLS AND THE RAM SHOOK HIS HORNS AS
WE PASSED. THEN THE JEWEL LIGHTS FROM THE SNOWY PEAKS BID US
FAREWELLJ AND WE LOWERED INTO MATTER.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 208 of 382
" ,~

i
1 I ATTUNE MYSELF TO THE GOD THAT RESIDES WITHIN
j,

i ME.' THROUGH THE GOD WITHINJ I RECEIVE ALL THE


QUALITIES WHICH I NEED TO BETTER MY LIFE.
I
J
~t>
,".,
'
,,' ~"

~ ~ j" :
FROM THE GOD WITHIN I RECEIVE THE TALENTS AND
SKILLS NECESSARY TO MAKE MY LIFE MORE EFFECTIVE.

THROUGH MY ATTUNEMENT WITH THE GOD WITHINJ I


BECOME ELEVATED TO A HIGHER CONSCIOUSNESS. My
ENTIRE BEING AND ALL MY AFFAIRS ARE THEREBY f
!
SPIRITUALIZED AND DIVINELY GUIDED. !

THANK YOU FATHER!


":.:.

",:

===~,-",.."-~.--:-=--====::;;:::;;;;;;,-=-o_,;·,·.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 209 of 382
(

WOLVES PLAY I NG.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 210 of 382
-THE Bf\OTHER__S_-____

HUGO.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 211 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN BLUE &YELLOW LIGHT

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON FOURTEEN

"SLEEP TRIPS AND THE SECOND HIGHER SELF"

"WHEN THOU LIEST DOWN THOU SHALT NOT BE AFRAID; YEA) THOU
SHALT LIE DOWN AND THY SLEEP SHALL BE SWEET."
PROVERBS 4:24

IN CONTENTED SOMNOLENCE WE DRIFTED HIGH BETWEEN THE GOLD OF


ASTRAL SUNLIGHT AND THE CLEAR BRIGHT BLUE OF THE WATERS
BELOW. SOFT STRAINS OF MUSIC SEEMED TO DRAW US ONWARD.
PINE SCENT AROSE FROM BUSHY TREE TOPS) THE TONES OF A DIS-
TANT TRUMPET SANG OUT.

CIRCLING OVER THE MOUNTAIN TERRAIN WE LOWERED NEAR A CLOSED


ROCKY NOTCH HOLDING A SMALL BASIN OF WATER. Two BEAUTIFUL
SILVER GREY WOLVES WERE PLAYING THERE. WE PASSED OVERHEAD
UNNOTICED. AHEAD RESTED THE ANCIENT ABBY SURROUNDED BY
FRESH MORNING SUNSHINE. Two FIGURES AWAITED US IN HAPPY
EXPECTATION. EAGERLY) SHEM INTRODUCED US TO HIS BROTHER)
PERE HUGO. WE LEARNED HE WAS OUR CAROL'S SOULMATE AND WAS
WORKING HERE IN ST. FRANCIS' BAND.

FOLLOWING HUGO THROUGH THE ANCIENT TIMBERS AND STONE RICH


IN MELLOW VIBRATIONS) WE CAME TO A LONG REFECTORY DINING MEET-
ING ROOM. IT WAS EMPTY NOW BUT FOR THREE SILENT MONKS) BUSILY
PLACING CUTLERY FOR THE NOON REPAST.

A DOUBLE DOOR REVEALED THE CHAPEL INTERIOR) LUMINOUS IN SUN-


LIGHT COMING THROUGH BEAUTIFUL STAINED GLASS WINDOWS.

WE MOVED OUT INTO A LARGE YARD ENCLOSURE. HERE ALL WAS BUS-
INESSLIKE IN QUIET ACTIVITY. THIS WAS THE BROTHERHOOD'S

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 212 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 2

'SILENT TIME'. BEAUTIFUL HORSES WERE BEING GROOMED. GARDENS


WERE BEING TENDED AND PRODUCE GATHERED. FRUIT TREES WERE
YIELDING LUCIOUS FRUITS. NEARBY~ WOOL WAS BEING CARDED~
WOVEN AND DYED. Two BROWN FIGURES WERE BENT OVER A LARGE
WOODEN LOOM. NEARING IT~ WE NOTICED THE CLOTH DESIGN. IT
WAS A THING OF BEAUTY DEPICTING CHRIST AND HIS SEVEN LORDS.

LONG STEMMED ROSES WERE LAID INTO OUR ARMS. THE DONORS~ WE
LATER LEARNED~ WERE BROTHER BERNARD AND LEO~ TWO OF ST.
FRANCIS' ORIGINAL MEMBERS.

WALKING INTO ANOTHER LATTICED ENCLOSURE~ WE CAME UP TO ELIOKIM)


PETHOR~ ST. FRANCIS~ TAMARA AND OTHERS WHOM WE KNEW. FROM
UNDER A BLOOMING LI LAC TREE~ MACNE I LL TROTTED UP WITH WAGG I NG
TAIL. ~E WAVED TO IBZAN~ JASON AND ABBIKANANDA AS MORE FROM
OUR PLANET EARTH ARRIVED. GAZING AROUND~ I RE-EXPERIENCED A
CHILDHOOD CONTENTMENT OF SELF.

IT WAS PETHOR WHO GAVE THE OPENING PRAYER~ THEN ST. FRANCIS
WELCOMED ALL TO THE MONASTERY.

ELIOKIM STOOD AND ADDRESSED US: "CHILDREN OF EARTH~ YOU ARE


THEY WHO SHALL BE OUR FUTURE SERVANTS~ OUR MESSENGERS OF GOD)
OUR HOLY HEALERS. You ARE OUR LEADERS OF TOMORROW. As WE
MEET TOGETHER~ THESE PERIODS WILL BE YOUR MOST PRECIOUS ASSETS
FOR YOUR FUTURE.

"TODAY WE EXPLORE THE SLEEP STATE AND GIVE ATTENTION TO THE


'TIME' ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN."

THERE WAS A RIPPLE OF SETTLING SOFTLY EVIDENT AROUND US.

FIRST WE SHALL MENTION THE CHANGE ELEMENTS OF SOUL-AsTRAL


AND MATTER. WE KNOW THE DIMENSION ENERGIES ARE DIFFERENT)
WE MUST SEE THAT 'TIME' IS ALSO. LET US SAY~ EGO HAS LIVED

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 213 of 382
SERIES TWO
. LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 3

FOR THIRTY MATTER YEARS ON EARTH AND THINKS OF SELF AS BEING


THIRTY YEARS OLD. SLEEP OVERTAKES THE PHYSICAL FORM AND EGO
NOW TRAVELS UPWARD INTO THE ASTRAL. A CHANGE OCCURS FOR EGO
LEFT BEHIND ALL PHYSICAL MEMORIES OF YEARS AND AGE. THESE
ARE SHED LIKE A COAT AND UPON REUNITING WITH THE SECOND HIGHER
SELF; IT IS FOUND TO BE STOPPED AND PRECISELY AT THE POINT IN
'TIME' THAT IT WAS WHEN EGO LEFT TO BE BORN INTO THE PHYSICAL
FORM. NOTHING HAS CHANGED IN THE SECOND HIGHER SELF.

"LET US ALSO SUPPOSE EGO NOW TRAVELS THE PATH LANES UP TO


SPIRIT EGo. (SEE ILLUSTRATION I" LESSON 12). IT" TOO" IS
SEEMINGLY STANDING STILL IN A WAITING STANCE. IT WOULD ALMOST
APPEAR TO LITTLEST EGO THAT THESE HIGHER SELVES WERE EXPERIENC-
ING A 'TIME' RECESSION. WHAT IS HAPPENING IS THAT COSMIC
_TIME RATES ARE SO SLOW FROM AN EARTHLY VIEWPOINT" NONE MOVE
FORWARD DURING THE MATTER SOJOURN. NOT UNTIL THE INCARNATE
RETURNS TO THE ASTRAL AFTER TRANSITION AND COMPLETES STUDY
OF THE COLLECTIVE KNOWLEDGES" WILL THE SPIRITUAL 'TIME' ADVANCE.

"SPIRIT 'TIME' IS MEASURED AND MOVES ONLY FROM A PERSONAL


ACCUMULATED WISDOM STANDPOINT."

My MIND WHEELS WERE SPINNING BUSILY WHEN PETHOR REQUESTED;


"GIVE THAT EQUATION YOU'RE MULLING OVER OUT LOUD TO ALL"
MESHA ROSE." HASTILY COLLECTING WORDS" I REPEATED; " SPIRIT
'TIME' PREDICATES UPON COLLECTED MATTER WISDOMS PLUS ASTRAL
MIND CONNECTIONS FOR ITS 'TIME' MOVEMENTS."

LISTENING" VIOLET NODDED. "IT'S THESE WISDOMS WE BRING INTO


ASTRAL MIND THAT MOVE 'TIME' FOR US IN THESE HIGHER REGIONS."

"YES" VIOLET" SAID ELIOKIM. "IT IS NOT THE EARTH YEARS THAT
COUNT BUT THE COLLECTED AND UNDERSTOOD MIND MATERIALS. FROM
THESE ETHERIC ACTS AS A MEDIATOR BETWEEN THE REALMS AND THE
MIND LEVELS."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 214 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 4
"LET'S SEE~" LILY CONSIDERED. "IT IS OUR ETHERIC FORM THAT
HOLDS THE SUBJECTIVE CONNECTION TO THE LOWER PORTION OF OUR
MIND."

ELIOKIM AGREED AND SAID: "AND IT'S ETHERIC SUBJECTIVE THAT


IS HOLDING YOUR PRESENT CONSCIOUSNESS OF MATTER 'TIME.' THE
ETHERIC SUBJECTIVE ACCOMMODATES EGO FOR KNOWING.AND MEASURING
AND~ REMEMBER~ IT HAS EXISTED THIRTY YEARS IN MATTER.~

"THEN OUR 'TIME' OF MATTER IS ACTUALLY A CONVENIENCE FOR US."


CYRUS CONTRIBUTED.

"EXACTLY!" FROM ELIOKIM. "YET~ REMEMBER THE LITTLEST EGO


PART ITSELF HAS REALLY NQI ~ A DAY SINCE BEING BORN
INTO THE MATTER FORM. IT HAS GROWN IN WISDOM~ BUT ONLY THE
PHYSICAL FORM AND ITS ATOMIC PARTICLES AND CHEMICALS AGE."

LILY LOOKED UP. "EGO DOES NOT AGE BUT CAN EXPAND."

"RIGHT!" ELIOKIM NOW ASKED US. "HAVE YOU EVER SUDDENLY AWAK-
ENED FROM A DEEP SLEEP TO WONDER FOR A SECOND WHERE YOU WERE?"
WE HAD KNOWN SOMETHING LIKE THIS~ ESPECIALLY WHEN TRAVELING
AROUND.

"THIS OCCURS BECAUSE ETHERIC WASN'T ABLE FOR A SPLIT SECOND


TO RECONNECT AND FLASH YOUR MATTER MEMORIES INTO YOUR MATTER
CONSCIOUSNESS. WHEN YOU CAN'T RECALL A WORD OR NAME OR
ANSWER~ THIS HAPPENS IN THE SAME MANNER."

"As OUR LITTLEST EGO IS NOT TOTALLY THE 'I AM' COULD YOU SHOW
HOW WE ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER?" THIS QUESTION CAME FROM AN
EARTH VISITOR WE DIDN'T KNOW. PETHOR ELECTED TO TAKE OVER
ITS ANSWER AND ASSUMED ELIOKIM'S PLACE.

"THE REAL SELF~ THE GOD CREATED PATTERN~ NEVER MOVES FROM

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 215 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 5
THE JEWEL IN THE PURE SPIRIT REALM. THAT WHICH WE TERM "I"
IS ONLY A REFLECTED PART OF THE GOD CREATED YOU! THE REFLEC-
TIONS FROM "I AM" REST IN THE FOURFOLD FORMS OF SPIRIT" MIND"
ASTRAL AND MATTER BODIES. THE THREE UPPER fQQ REFLECTIONS
SEND DOWN FRAGMENTS OF THEIR CONTENTS WHICH MAKE UP 'LITTLEST
EGo. '

"EGO PER SE CANNOT AGE FOR EGO DWELLS IN MIND. MIND BEING A
SPARK FROM GOD HIMSELF IS NOT OF THE COMPOSITION OF PHYSICAL
OR ETHERIC MATTER NOR EVEN OF ASTRAL ELEMENTS. IT CANNOT
DISINTEGRATE INTO ANY OTHER STATE NOR CHANGE IN ESSENCE. IT
CAN BECOME MORE OF WHAT IT IS" IT CAN EXPAND.

"HOWEVER" A DETERIORATION IN THE PHYSICAL BRAIN CELLS CAN


OCCUR AND THUS CLOSE OFF A CONNECTION INTO MIND. BECAUSE
THIS IS SO" SOME HAVE THEORIZED THE LOSS OF MIND OR ATTRIBUTED
AGING TO POOR MIND ACTIVITY. THIS IS AN ERROR.

"You CANNOT LOSE ANY PARTICLE OF MIND. HOWEVER" AS A LITTLEST


EGO" YOU CAN BLOCK A CONNECTION WITH MIND TEMPORARILY. THE
REST OF YOUR EGO AREAS HAVE NOT BECOME SEPARATED FROM THE MIND
CONTACT. ONLY 'LITTLEST EGO' AREA WILL HAVE BEEN BLOCKED FROM
THE MIND CONNECTION. MIND AND REAL You CANNOT DISINTEGRATE FOR
BOTH ARE OF GOD.

"LITTLEST EGO' THROUGH LACK OF WISDOM AND KNOWLEDGE CAN BE


TEMPORARILY SHORT CIRCUITED FROM CONNECTION INTO MIND. BUT
MIND WILL STILL BE THERE BEHIND ALL THE MATERIAL BLOCKAGE
AND RUNNING IN PERFECT ORDER AND WAITING USE."

JUST THEN A GONG RANG OUT AND PETHOR SAID WE WOULD ADJOURN
TO HAVE LUNCH. "THIS" TOO" HE ADDED" "Is FOR YOUR EDIFICATION
SO OBSERVE CLOSELY WHAT IS SERVED."

As WE FILED BACK THROUGH THE MONASTERY YARD" MANY AIR CARS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 216 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 6

WERE WAITING LOADED WITH FOODS J FRUITS AND FLOWERS. As MONKS


WERE NOW CONVERSING WITH ONE ANOTHER J I ASKED WHERE THE CARS
WERE GOING. "To THE SENTIENT HOSPITALS TO SUPPLY AND CHEERJ"
WAS THE ANSWER. REALIZING WE COULD NOT TAKE OUR ROSES DOWN
INTO THE LOWER ATMOSPHERES J I ASKED IF WE MIGHT CONTRIBUTE
OURS TO SOMEONE DOWN IN SENTIENT. THEY SAID WE COULD SO AFTER
LUNCHEON WE GAVE THEM OUR ROSES J BUT WE STILL HOLD THEIR BEAUTY
IN OUR MEMORIES.

WE ATE A WONDERFUL VEGETABLE CASSEROLE WITH TINY FLAT ROUND


BREAD LOAVES OF FULL GRAINED WHEATS AND NUTS. WE SAMPLED A
SPREAD MADE OF FLOWER NECTAR AS YELLOW AS MOLTEN GOLD. WE
LEARNED AN INSECT LIKE UNTO THE BEE FAMILY J BUT NOT KNOWN UPON
EARTH AT THIS TIMEJ HAD GATHERED AND NURTURED IT INTO THE DEL-
ECTABLE CONSISTENCY OF SOFT BUTTER. IT WAS SWEETJ YET HAD A .
GENTLE TANG OF WILD FLOWERS. FRUIT SALAD J TOMATO J ONION J
CELERY AND WATERCRESS WERE AVAILABLE. FRUIT DRINKS AND TEAS
COULD BE PROCURED. OUR DESSERTS WERE TARTS; STRAWBERRYJ BLUE-
BERRY J BLACKBERRY J CHERRY AND MANY MORE I LOST COUNT. THE
TART ITSELF WAS BAKED BUT THE FRUIT INSIDE WAS NATURAL WITH
A GLAZE OF ITS JUICES AND ALL SPRINKLED OVER WITH CHOPPED
NUTS. ALL WAS SERVED BEAUTIFULLY WITH AN ARTISTIC EYE FOR
COLOR HARMONY.

"THE AIR CARS AND THEIR CARGOS WERE LEAVING AS WE RECONVENED.


THE SOFT TONES OF AFTERNOON RESTED OVER US AS ELIOKIM CONTIN-
UED UPON THE SUBJECT OF THE SLEEP STATE.

"THE ENERGY LEVELS OF THE STATE OF SLEEP SLOW DOWN THE NORMAL
CONSCIOUS-SELF ACTIVITIES. THEN EGO SLIPS AWAY OUT OF THE
SEED-ATOM AND TRAVELS UP THE SILVER CORD AND RETURNS TO THE
SECOND HIGHER SELF. PLEASE NOTICE THE '~' RHYTHMS OF
PHYSICAL FORM MUST FIRST SLOW DOWN BEFORE SLEEP OCCURS.
LIKEWISE J TO CONSCIOUSLY ACCOMPANY EGO ON SUCH A TRIP J PHYSI-
CAL MUST BECOME RELAXED AS IN MEDITATION OR TRANCE. THIS
LATTER IS BUT ANOTHER FORM OF THE SLEEP STATE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 217 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 7

"UNFORTUNATELY~ THE MAJORITY OF HUMANITY DOES NOT REALIZE


HOW IMPORTANT IT IS TO HOLD AND MAINTAIN A NATURAL NORMAL
APPROACH INTO THE SLEEP STATE. DRUGS DESTROY ITS NATURAL
MANIFESTATION.

"SLEEP IS SOMETHING THAT TAKES PLACE ALL DURING AN INCARNATES


EARTHLY EXISTENCE. To INDUCE IT ARTIFICALLY WITH SEDATIVES
INTERFERES WITH THE NATURAL SLEEP LAWS. SLEEP IS FOR THE
PURPOSE OF RENEWING AND NOURISHING THE PHYSICAL FORM. IT
IS ALSO FOR BENEFITING 'LITTLEST EGO.' IT ALLOWS A RETURN TO
ITS SOURCE FOR RECAPITULATION PERIODS~ 'ADVISORY SESSIONS AND
TRAININGS. WHEN THE INDIVIDUAL BECOMES AWARE IN CONSCIOUSNESS~
THE EGO RETURN CAN AWAKEN YOU TO ANALYZE PRESENT ATTITUDES
AND THOUGHTS FROM THE NEWLY LEARNED 'HIGHER EGO'S STANDPOINT.

"THE SECOND HIGHER SELF RESTS WITHIN THE GREATER AND MORE
POWERFUL AREAS OF YOUR GOD MIND SPARK. I NOW INTRODUCE FATHER
HUGO WHO I.S HERE TO ACQUAINT YOU WITH THIS SOUL AND SPIRIT
ASPECT OF YOUR REAL SELF."

THE RESEMBLANCE BETWEEN HUGO AND SHEM WAS PROUNOUNCED. HUGO


APPEARED TO BE THE ELDER. RAISING HIS ARMS IN BENEDICTION~
HE QUOTED PSALM 35:23.

"STIR UP THYSELF~ AND AWAKE TO MY JUDGMENT~ EVEN UNTO MY


CAUSE~ MY GOD AND MY LORD."

HIS SMILE WAS APPEALING. HIS AURA REACHED OUT AND TOUCHED
THE LISTENERS.

"As YOU LEARN TO REACH OUT INTO YOUR MIND'S HIGHER AREAS~
YOU WILL CONSCIOUSLY BEGIN TO ANALYZE YOUR ATTITUDES AND
THOUGHTS FROM YOUR HIGHER EGO EVOLVEMENTS. As THE SOUL
AND SPIRIT EGO PORTIONS ABIDE AND OPERATE IN MORE POWERFUL
AREAS OF MIND~ THESE POSSESS MANY IMPULSES WHICH CAUSE
"LITTLEST EGO' TO ACT IN INVOLUNTARY WAYS FAR BEYOND ITS PRE-
SENT LIMITED ASPECTS AND KNOWLEDGE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 218 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 8

"THE SPIRIT EGO IMPULSES WILL ALL BE CORRECT AND CONSTRUCTIVE


IMPULSES~ BUT THE SOUL EGO MIND FILES HOLDS BOTH TRUE AND
ERROR FILLED BELIEFS AND CONCEPTS. THUS~ THE SOUL EGO IMPUL-
SES MAY HOLD WISE INTELLIGENCE BUT ALSO SOME ARE OF A LOWER
CALIBER. THESE IMPULSES MAY OR MAY NOT CONFORM TO WHAT THE
INDIVIDUAL IS BEING TAUGHT AS RIGHT AND ACCEPTABLE. EARTH
LAWS ARE 'MAN MADE' RULES NOT COSMIC GOD LAWS. WE ALL KNOW
THAT WHAT MAY BE AN ACCEPTED CUSTOM IN ONE NATION AND PEOPLE
MAY BE 'TABOO' IN ANOTHER. THEREFORE~ THERE EXISTS A STATE
OF FRUSTRATION AND TENSION BETWEEN THE PRESENTLY HELD BELIEFS
OF SOME SOUL MIND SECTIONS AND THE NEWLY ACCEPTED MATTER AND
ENVIRONMENTAL AND LINEAGE LAWS."

"WE CAN RECOGNIZE THIS IS SO~ FOR EACH OF US HAS ACTED IMPUL-
SIVELY AT SOME TIME AND AFTERWARDS SAID; "I DON'T KNOW WHY I
DID THAT SILLY THING~ ACTUALLY I KNEW BETTER"~ OR "I REALLY
DON'T KNOW WHY I DID THAT BUT I'M GLAD IT TURNED OUT RIGHT."
SO NOW LET'S LOOK INTO THE CAUSE BEHIND SUCH ACTIONS."

HE CLASPED HIS HANDS BEHIND HIS BACK~ PAUSED; THEN ASKED:


"Do YOU REALLY BELIEVE A PERSON COULD GET VERY FAR BY .o.ti.LY
USING THE LIMITED KNOWLEDGES AND MEMORIES OF THE ETHERIC
SUBCONSCIOUS? SUPPOSE WE HAD NO INSTINCTS~ NO INTUITIVE
IDEAS~ NO HUNCHES. WE COULD COLLECT FACTS AND THEORIES FROM
OTHER EARTH INCARNATES BUT WOULDN'T THAT RATHER LIMIT OUR
SELF REALIZATIONS TO THE FEW WE WOULD MANAGE VIA REPEATEDLY
LEARNING THEM OVER AND OVER?

"r"ANY PERSONS ARE OPERATING THUSLY RIGHT NOW FROM ONLY THEIR
SUBJECTIVE MENTAL CONTENTS. MANY NOW MISTRUST THEIR OWN
INNER INSTINCTS~ HUNCHES AND EVEN THE INTUITIVE IDEAS. ALL
BECAUSE THEY ARE UNABLE TO MATERIALLY TEST THEM~ SO THEY
LABEL THEM SUPERSTITION. THEY DARE NOT THINK OUTSIDE OF
THEIR OWN LIMITATIONS. THEY FEAR THE UNKNOWN.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 219 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN PAGE 9

"IT IS INSTINCT COUPLED WITH INTUITION THAT IMPULSES THE IN-


CARNATE TO DECIDE TO 'THINK' FOR THEMSELVES AND REALIZE THERE
IS MORE TO THE SELF THAN THIS LITTLEST EGO PART. THEY CAN
USUALLY LOOK BACK OVER THEIR PRESENT EARTH LIFE AND BECOME
AWARE WHERE THE HIGHER EGO IMPULSES MOVED THEM TO DESIRE TO
CHOOSE AND DELVE INTO CERTAIN QUESTIONS REGARDING SELF. MANY
ALSO ARE EMOTIONALLY AWARE OF BENEVOLENT POWERS) LEADING THEM
AND GOVERNING THEIR CHOICES IN SPITE OF LITTLEST EGO'S INTER-
FERENCES. THESE ARE THEY WHO LISTEN TO THE 'INNER VOICE.'
THESE ARE THE "KNOWERS."

A SLIGHT BREEZE HAD ARISEN AND GENTLY BLEW HIS BROWN ROBE.
"OUR FATHER PREPARED WELL FOR US IN HIS PLAN. WE ARE IN EACH
INCARNATION) LIMITED TO ONLY THE TRAITS AND ASPECTS ASSIGNED
.FOR OUR 'LITTLEST EGo.' AND WE ARE ALSO LIMITED THROUGH KAR-
MIC HEREDITY AS TO BRAIN STRUCTURE AND PHYSICAL ORGAN FORMA-
TION. To OFFSET THIS) GOD PUT OVER US THE HIERARCHIES AND
ANGELS) AND LATER THE MASTER MEMBERS OF OUR MANSTREAM. HE
DID THIS TO INSURE WE COULD RECEIVE A SUFFICIENT FOUNDATION
UPON WHICH TO OPERATE DURING OUR MATTER TRAVEL. THUS) SOUL-
EGo) THE SECOND HIGHER SELF) WAS TEAMED WITH 'LITTLEST EGO'
FOR ITS FIRST SEVEN YEARS IN MATTER.

"IT IS DURING THESE CRUCIAL YEARS) WE SET DOWN AND ACCOMPLISH


VAST AND AMAZING FEATS OF DEVELOPMENT. SPIRIT AND SOUL EGO
ASSIST BY IMPRESSING THEIR GREATER ENERGY PATTERNS. AFTER
BIRTH) THEY IMPRESS THE BABIES SOFT PLASTIC BRAIN STRUCTURE
IN UNIQUE TRACKS; ESPECIALLY IN A DESIGN OF ITS OWN PERSONAL
PATTERN. THEY ASSIST THE PARENTS WORK OF TEACHING THE BABY
TO GAIN BODY EQUILIBRIUM) AND TO TEACH WALKING UPRIGHT AND
THE ART OF TALKING AND SPEECH FORMATION. IT IS OUR SPIRIT
EGO AND SECOND HIGHER SELF THAT LEADS THE LITTLEST EGO TO
COOPERATE WITH THE PARENTS WORK AND THUS BRING THE ENTITY
INTO A FIRST RELATIONSHIP WITH MATTER. THE HIGHER EGOS AND
OUR PARENTS CONTROL OUR FIRST ABILITIES FOR ORGANIZATION AND
BALANCE INTO THE PHYSICAL FORM.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 220 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FOURTEEN· PAGE 10
"OUR ABILITY FOR SPEECH FIRST COMES FROM SPIRIT
. -.
EGo.
....
SPEECH
IS A FELLOWSHIP GIFT. IT IS STIMULATED AND ACTIVATED BY
FELLOWSHIP OF OTHER HUMANS AND CLOSE ASSOCIATION WITH PAR-
ENTS AND LOVED ONES. ITS DIVINE IMPULSE WAS SET UP IN US
BY SPIRIT. IT WAS INITIATED AND CARRIED OUT IN IMPULSE BY
SOUL.

"IT WILL BE DEVELOPED AND EXPANDED BY PARENTAL ATTENTION AND


REPEATED COMMUNICATION OF PARENT TO BABY. THUS~ THE PARENTS
ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR OFFSPRING RECEIVING THE NECESSARY
TIME AND ATTENTION TO THESE BASIC TASKS.

"THUS~ THE 'SEEKER PARENTS' HAVE THE PRIVILEGE OF SERVING GOD


THROUGH THEIR CHILDREN. WE NEVER KNOW FOR WHOM WE MAY BE
PREPARING A PHYSICAL BODY FORM I OR WHOM WE MAY BE ENTRUSTED
BY GOD TO RAISE AND CARE FOR IN HIS WORK. THEREFORE~ AS WE
TEACH AND IMPROVE OURSELVES BY CONNECTING INTO OUR SECOND
HIGHER SELF TO OPEN OUR PSYCHIC CHANNELS FOR PREFERRED WIS-
DOMS~ DO NOT FORGET THOSE GOD PLACED IN OUR TEMPORARY CARE.
THIS~ TOO~ IS A 'GOD MISSION' •

"You WILL HAVE ANOTHER NEW TEACHER NEXT SESSION. THEY WILL
BRING YOU NEWS OF MORE SOUL MEMORIES AND DREAMS. LET US BOW
OUR HEADS AND EACH SILENTLY THANK OUR FATHER FOR HIS COPIOUS
BLESSINGS." WE DID SO.

THERE WAS MUCH EXCHANGE OF NEWS AND JOYOUS REUNION WITH MAC-
NEILL IN ECSTASY AT ALL THE SOCIABILITY. LOVE FLOWED EVERY-
WHERE IN FREE ABANDON. WE HELD OUR SHARE CLOSE AS WE RETURNED
AND GAVE OF IT TO THOSE WHO WERE AWAITING US.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 221 of 382
As I BECOME ATTUNED WITH THE INFINITE BEING) I
BECOME INFUSED WITH DIVINE CREATIVE ESSENCES.

THESE CREATIVE ESSENCES PERMEATES EVERY CELL OF


MY BEING AND IS ESPECIALLY CENTERED IN MY MIND.

I DECLARE I AM DIRECTED BY DIVINE INTELLIGENCE)


GOVERNED BY INFINITE WISDOM AND INSPIRED BY A
LOVING SPIRIT. AND GOD IN ME AS I AM EXPRESSES
THE GOODNESS OF HIS LIFE) AS MY LIFE!

AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 222 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 223 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 224 of 382
;~
r
(

CANORA

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 225 of 382
SERIES TWO
LESSON FIFTEEN VIOLET &PINK LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON FIFTEEN

"WONDERFUL MANKIND"

"FOR THOU HAST MADE THEM A LITTLE LOWER THAN THE ANGELS} AND
HAS CROWNED THEM WITH GLORY AND HONOUR."
PSALM 8:5

WE WERE STANDING BY THE RIVERBANK WHERE THE PATH MEANDERED


IN BORDERS OF WILD FLOWERS. OUR ARRIVAL HAD STARTLED A
FEEDING RABBIT. THE DISTANT CASTLE STOOD SHIMMERING IN
THE ASTRAL SUNSHINE. ALL WAS PEACE.

A STRONG IMPULSE URGED US TO TAKE THE DIRECTION DOWNWARD AND


AWAY FROM THE CASTLE. THE MEADOW WAS RICH IN CLOVER} GOLDEN-
ROD AND DAISYS} NESTLING IN THE LACY TALL GRASS.

A SMALL} BROWN EYED MAN WITH WAVEY CHESTNUT HAIR CAME SAUN-
TERING TOWARD US} ACCOMPANIED BY A BLACK AND WHITE POINTER
AND A FRISKY GOLDEN PEKINGESE. SUDDENLY} THE DOGS LOOKED
UP AND DASHED PAST US TO JOYOUSLY JUMP AROUND EARTH ROSE WHO
HAD COME UP THE PATH BEHIND US. THESE WERE HER BELOVED DOGS
SO MUCH MISSED BY HER WHEN EACH LEFT THE EARTH.

AFTER THIS HAPPY WELCOME} SHE DREW THE SMALL MAN FORWARD AND
PROUDLY INTRODUCED HIM AS HER GRANDFATHER WILLIAM AND A VERY
DEAR COSMIC FRIEND OF LONG STANDING. WHAT A HAPPY FOUR THEY
WERE} ONCE AGAIN REUNITED TOGETHER.

"WILLIAM IS VISITING ME WITH THE DOGS. HE IS DOING WORK OF


CATALOGING IN THE LIBRARY." You COULD SEE THE LOVE BETWEEN
THESE TWO.

"WILLIAM IS TO STAY NOW SO WE WILL BE TOGETHER FOR A NICE

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 226 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 2

PERIOD OF TIME." ROSE HUGGED HIM AS HIS EYES LOVINGLY


CARESSED HER.

UPON LEARNING THAT WE WERE HEADED CORRECTLY FOR OUR CONTACT J


WE FOLLOWED INSTRUCTIONS TO "KEEP ON UNTIL YOU CROSS THE
STILE." THEY LEFT US AND WE STROLLED ON OUR WAY THROUGH
THIS GLORIOUS ASTRAL DAY.

FIRST WE SAW THE CIRCLING DOVES. THEY WERE WEAVING OVER A


GROUP OF PERSONS. SAINT JULIANJ OUR HEALING MASTER OF OUR
MAGI SOUL GROUP J WAS IN THE CENTER. CLIMBING THE STILE J WE
HURRIED TO JOIN THEM. IMAGINE OUR EXCITEMENT AT FINDING TWO
OF OUR MEMBERS' SOULMATES THERE AND TO HAVE THEM AS SPEAKERS
AT THIS GATHERING •
.
THERE ARE MANY SPECIAL TEACHERS WHO WORK UNDER THE DIRECTION
OF THE TWELVE WHITEBEARDS. THE DIVINE ONES J LIKE ST. JULIANJ
ARE THEY WHO HAVE LED EXEMPLARY EARTH LIVES. STEPHEN AND
CANDRA WERE IN TRAINING OVER HERE AND LEARNING BY DOING MUCH
AS WE WHO ARE NOW STUDYING ON EARTH.

ST. JULIAN SPOKE: "TODAY J I'M NOT SPEAKING ON MY SUBJECT


'HEALING' BUT ON INCARNATION.

"THE PEOPLES OF EARTH NEED TO DWELL INTO WHAT TRANSPIRES


WITHIN IHE ~ AS A RESULT OF THIS NORMAL ACTION OF CYCLING
AROUND THROUGH THE DIFFERENT UNIVERSE REGIONS.

"You HAVE A FAIRLY GOOD AWARENESS OF YOUR PRESENT PERSONALITY.


YET UPON TRANSITION FROM THE MATTER REGION J YOU WILL FIND
THINGS WILL BE DIFFERENT FOR YOU AND WITHIN YOU. HOPEFULLY J
YOU WILL DISCOVER THIS CHANGEABLENESS TO BE OF A CONSTRUCTIVE
ONE. WHILE IN THE SENTIENT SOUL EMOTIONAL PLANES OF ASTRALJ
THESE WILL SHOW UP IN YOUR EMOTIONAL AREA FIRST. LATERJ YOU
WILL DISCOVER MANY IMPROVEMENTS OCCURRING IN YOUR MENTAL

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 227 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FI FTEEN PAGE 3

ACTIONS. ALL THIS WILL BE TAKING PLACE IN YOUR SOUL-AsTRAL


BODY. THIS IMPROVEMENT UNFOLDS FROM WHATEVER COLLECTIVE
KNOWLEDGES YOU HAVE GATHERED FROM EARTH LEARNING.

"YOUR SPIRIT EGO SELF HOVERING OVER SOUL WILL SEEM TO BE


REMAINING STILL BUT FOR EVERY GENUINE FACT YOUR SOUL HAS
REALIZED" AN ADDITION WILL BE ADDED TO YOUR SPIRIT MIND
FILES. WE SHOULD BE ENRICHING OURSELVES ON EACH LEVEL WE
. STOP AS WE CYCLE AROUND THE WHEEL OF KARMA SO THAT UPON OUR
RETURN AGAIN INTO OUR NATIVE MATTER" WE WILL BE IMPROVED
AND MORE SUFFICIENT TO ACHIEVE.

"AFTER THE SENTIENT SCHOOLINGS" EACH PERSON IS GIVEN A VIEW


OF THEIR WHOLE PROGRESSION SO FAR. OF COURSE" THOSE WHO
ARE LESS EVOLVED AND DO NOT DESIRE· TO ACCOMPLISH DO NOT
RECEIVE THIS VIEW. THEREFORE) SOME ARE RE-ROUTED BACK INTO
MATTER BY THE LORDS OF KARMA. OTHERS ARE ALLOWED TO REMAIN
HERE AND AS THEY ARE FOR MANY AGES." THERE WAS A MURMER
THROUGHOUT THE AUDIENCE.

"THE WHITEBEARDS DO NOT ENCOURAGE PERSONS TO SIT TO RECEIVE


RECALL OF PAST INCARNATIONS FOR THE REASON THAT FEW ARE USU-
ALLY OF AN OUTSTANDING NATURE AND SOME EVEN UNPLEASANT. WAIT
UNTIL YOU HAVE BETTER CONNECTIONS BETWEEN CONSCIOUS SELF AND
SOUL. AT THAT TIME YOU) TOO) WILL POSSESS GREATER UNDERSTAND-
INGS OF THESE FRAGMENTS FROM YOUR PAST."

LILY AND I HAD BEEN GIVEN A FEW OF OUR PAST EVENTS BUT UNDER
OUR MASTER'S CHOICES.

"GOD HAD A REASON FOR PLACING A VIBRATORY WALL BETWEEN UNEVOL-


VED MATTER CONSCIOUSNESS AND SOUL AND SPIRIT MEMORIES. As
UNDERSTANDING AWAKENS THE PSYCHIC CHANNELS WILL OPEN NATURALLY
AS THE MATTER CONSCIOUSNESS ARISES AND EXPANDS." WE KNEW THIS
WAS TRUE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 228 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 4

"THE PHYSICAL EARTHLY LIFETIME IS BUT A VERY SMALL PART OF


MANKINDS WHOLE EXISTENCE. YET FROM ITJ WE DO START THE BASf
FOR MATCHING OUR GOD PERFECTION.

"THE ASTRAL-SOUL EXISTENCE PERIODS WE KNOW UPON THE CYCLE


WILL BE OF LONGER TIME DURATION. OUR WHOLE PURPOSE AT THIS
COSMIC TIME IS TO COLLECT IDEAS THROUGH ATTAINING TO UNDER-
STAND THEIR CONTENT AND PROCESS THESE INTO FACT. IF THAT
WHICH WE HAVE GATHERED IS OF A USEFUL AND CONSTRUCTIVE NATURE J
SOUL WILL RETAIN ITS WISDOM FOREVER FOR USE. IF THE INFORMA-
TIONS ARE OF ONLY PARTIAL CONTENTS J LATER EARTH LEARNING CAN
ADD INFORMATION TO THEM AND CARRY THEM ONWARD TO A GREATER
EXPANSION.

"SOUL WILL ALREADY HAVE MUCH DATA ON FILE FROM OUR PAST EARTH
LIFE COLLECTING. OUR LIFE STREAM IS NOW AT THE PLACE OF
EVOLUTION THAT WE CAN SUPPLANT OLD ERRORS FOR NEWER WISDOM
IDEAS AND DO THIS BEFORE COMING INTO SOUL EXISTENCE. IT NEED
NOT TAKE MORE AGES OF TIME AND KARMIC CYCLING. IT CAN BE DONE
BEFORE LEAVING EARTH.

"EVERY TIME YOU SOLVE A PERSONALITY PROBLEM J YOU SHED AN OLD


WEAKNESS AND ALLOW SPIRIT TO SHINE FORTH IN ITS PLACE. IT
NEED NOT TAKE AGES OF COSMIC TIME TO DO THIS ONCE A SOUL IS
AWAKENED." To us THIS WAS WONDERFUL NEWS.

"THE EMOTIONAL NATURE EACH OF US BRINGS TO EARTH WILL HAVE


SOMETHING IN IT WE WILL NEED TO CORRECT. OUR MENTAL ATTITUDES
WILL ALSO HAVE PLACES IN NEED OF WISE ATTENTION. NOBODY COMES
INTO MATTER IN A STATE OF PERFECTION. IF WE WERE PERFECT J
THERE WOULD BE NO NEED OF ENTERING MATTER AT ALL. THAT WHICH
IS EXPERIENCED WHILE IN MATTER IS EACH PERSON'S OPPORTUNITY
FOR BETTERING SELF AND MIND.

"THE LAWS OF MIND ARE SUCH THAT WE CAN MAKE CHANGES. WE CAN

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 229 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 5

SWITCH OPINIONS AND REPLACE CONCEPTS AND ATTITUDES AND OUR


VERY DECISION TO DO SO ALERTS THE HIGHER ONES WHO GATHER TO
US AND LEND THEIR STRENGTH AND GUIDANCE IN THE TASK.

"THIS GREAT COSMIC LAw OF KARMA CAUSES ALL 'LIFE' TO PERFECT


ITSELF J FOR NOT TO DO SO EVENTUALLY BECOMES UNBEARABLE. IN-
TELLIGENCE AWAKENS HUMANITY TO MATURE BEFORE OUR PROBLEMS BE-
COME UNMANAGEABLE.

"KARMIC LAW GOVERNS ON ALL THE LEVELS OF MIND AND EMOTION.


Now YOU ARE LEARNING HOW TO USE THESE LAWS AND HOW TO CHANGE
CAUSE INTO A CONSTRUCTIVE JUDGMENT OF PERSONAL ACTION •. You
ARE IN THIS TASK WITH ALL THE UNIVERSE AS YOUR STUDENT PARTNER."

SOMEONE MURMERED 'THINK OF THAT! ALL UNIVERSE AS OUR PARTNER.#

"TRUE J OUR MANSTREAM OF LIFE IS BUT ONLY ONE STRAND IN THE


GOLDEN SKEINS OF GOD'S WEAVING. HOWEVER J WE ARE WOVEN DEEPLY
INTO THE UNIVERSAL DESIGN. WE ARE IN TRAINING TO BECOME WORKING
PARTS. As YOU CHANGE YOURSELF AND PRACTICE THE PRINCIPLES
YOU WILL NOT ONLY BE IMPROVING YOURSELVES J BUT ALSO HELPING TO
HEAL EARTH'S BALANCE. BLESS YOU!"

ST. JULIAN CAME OVER TO EACH OF US NOW AND GAVE US WORDS OF


PERSONAL ENCOURAGEMENT. AFTER HIS DEPARTURE J WE SAT DRAWN
TOGETHER IN A MUTUAL GROUP AND STEPHEN TALKED.

"How COMPLEX ARE THE CHILDREN OF OUR FATHER GOD. MANY ARE
THE LEVELS WITHIN OUR TINY MIND SPARKS. TRULYj. WE CAN CALL
OURSELVES 'WONDERFULJ WONDERFUL MAN.' How EXCITING IT IS
AS WE LEARN AND OPEN NEW VISTAS BEFORE OUR MENTAL AWARENESS
AND SEE JUST HOW THESE INVISIBLE RADIATIONS FROM OUR THOUGHTS
AND NEW REACTIONS CAN INFLUENCE EXTERNAL EVENTS.

"THUS J WISDOM IS NOT AN ACTION CONFINED ONLY TO A DIRECT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 230 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 6

LINE FROM ABOVE TO US BELOW 1 BUT IS AN ENCIRCLING LINE WHICH


GOES FORTH FROM US TO OTHERS. YET ALWAYS WHATEVER WE SEND
OUT FROM US EVENTUALLY CIRCLES BACK TO US J ITS STARTING POINT.
THUS J SENDING OUT GOOD ENSURES US IN RECEIVING GOOD. SOJ AS
YOU AND I RELEASE A THOUGHT RADIATION J IT TRAVELS EVERYWHERE
IN UNIVERSE. ABOVE J BELOW AND IS RECEIVED ABEAM AND ASTERN
AS WELL AND ITS MAGNETIC FORCE ALWAYS DRAWS BACK TO US ITS
EXACT COUNTERPART."

A VOICE FROM OUR GROUP SAID: "THEN IT WILL PAY US TO EXAMINE


WHAT OUR THOUGHTS ARE BROADCASTING!" "AND HOW!" ANOTHER VOICED.

"WE ARE LUCKY J " STANLEY ASSURED. "WE CAN FOLLOW OUR MASTER
TEACHER'S LEAD AND KNOW OUR BROADCASTING CAN BE OF CORRECT
ATTITUDES. WE ALSO KNOW NOW THEIR RADIATIONS ARE LIKE UNTO
A RADIO-ACTIVE SUBSTANCE AND THAT IT CAN PENETRATE THROUGHOUT
THE ATMOSPHERES WHERE WE DWELL."

"SO OUR GROUP HEALING AND STUDY AND PRAYER SESSIONS HOLD A
GREATER VALUE THAN JUST HELPING OURSELVES. THEIR ENERGIES
GO OUT INTO EARTH'S ATMOSPHERE." SAID LILY.

"IT IS WHY THE MAGI AND SOUL GROUP STARTED THIS PROGRAM. FROM
THE PLACES ALL OVER THE WORLD J NEW MIND AND ATTITUDE WORK IS
NOW CAUSING THIS ATMOSPHEREIC MOVEMENT FOR A SPIRITUAL CHANGE
AND YOUR STUDENTS ARE THOSE FAITHFULLY CAUSING THIS WONDERFUL
ACTION."

"SOJ IN SPITE OF OUR PRESENT FAULTS AND WEAKNESSES J WE CAN


OVERCOME." CYRUS ADDED.

"ABSOLUTELY!# STEPHEN'S FACE WAS SHINNING. "No THOUGHT IS


fYfR DORMANT. GOOD OR BADJ IT CARRIES AN ENERGY ACTIVITY
AND EVERY TIME WE REACH OUT TO ACCEPT A REAL TRUTH J WE OPEN
OURSELVES TO AN INTIMATE GLIMPSE OF OUR REAL SELF."

A MURMUR OF ASSENT AND APPROVAL RAN THROUGH THE CROWD. STEPHEN


CONTINUED:

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 231 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 7

"THESE HIGHER MIND CONTACTS OF CONSTRUCTIVE THOUGHTS AND


DESTRUCTIVE THOUGHTS ARE ALWAYS ABSORBED BY THE ETHERIC AND
PHYSICAL BODIES. As YOU OF EARTH HAVE THESE TWO BODY FORMS
NOW AS YOUR ACTIVE FORMS J THE THOUGHTS ELECTRICAL STRUCTURES
REFLECT THEIR ENERGIES WITHIN THEIR PARTS. THIS ACTION CAUSES
HEALINGS WHEN THOUGHTS CHANGE AND ARE CONSTRUCTIVE. IT CAUSES
ILLNESS AND MENTAL IMBALANCE TO OCCUR IN THE BODY PARTS WHEN
-ATTITUDES AND BELIEFS AND THOUGHTS ARE NEGATIVE."

LILY ASKED: "ARE NOT HEALING FORCES ALWAYS BENEFICIAL?"

"NOT IF THE ONE TO RECEIVE THEM CONTINUES TO HOLD ONTO THEIR


NEGATIVE IDEAS AND PATTERNS OF HABITUAL THINKING." ANSWERED
STEPHEN. "You CANNOT HEAL ANYONE WHO REFUSES TO ACCEPT HEALTH
OR CHANGE."

"FRIENDJ" SAID THE MAN SEATED NEXT TO ME. "TELL US MORE OF


THESE VIBRATIONS."

STEPHEN LOOKED PLEASED AND COMPLIED. "HEALING FORCES J WHILE


INVISIBLE J ARE VERY TANGIBLE ENERGIES. You OF EARTH ALREADY
KNOW THAT THE VOCAL VIBRATORY POWERS CAN J AT A CERTAIN PITCH J
START AN AVALANCHE OR BREAK A GLASS. LIKEWISE J VOICE VIBRA-
TIONS IN GROUP PRAYER J MANTRAS OR AFFIRMING CAN OVERPOWER THE
LOWER NEGATIVE ENERGIES TO REGROUP FOR A BETTER WAVE LENGTH.

"ALSOJ THE ABSORBED COLOR RAYS IN WATERJ WHEN TAKEN INTO THE
PHYSICAL FORM J CAN CONDUCT VITAL LIFE FORCES FROM ITS INVISI-
BLE COLOR RAYS. THESE ASTRAL RAYS CONNECT INTO THE HEAVIER
ENERGIES OF THE WATER SUBSTANCE AND ARE CARRIED IN IT AND
ABSORBED BY THE PHYSICAL FORM. AGAIN J AS YOU SIT IN THE RAYS'
BEAMS J ITS HEAT CARRIES THE HEALING ENERGIES TO MOVE BENEFI-
CIALLY INTO THE BODY ATOMS AND CELLS. THE WATER OR ELECTRICITY
DOES NOT HEAL IN ITSELF. THEY BOTH DO CONDUCT THE OTHER INVISI-
BLE ENERGIES SO THEY MAY DO SO."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 232 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 8

"Is THIS ALSO A FACET OF THE ANCIENT WISDOMS?" VIOLET WANTED


TO KNOW.

"YES~ VIOLET. THE TERM~ ANCIENT WISDOMS~ COVER A VAST FIELD


OF KNOWLEDGES. THESE HIGHER IDEAS AT FIRST MAY SEEM LIKE WE
ARE JUGGLING SEVEN COLORED BALLS IN THE AIR WITH TWO IN OUR
HANDS~ AT FIRST. YET AS WE TRAVEL INTO THEIR MANY FACETS~
OUR CONSCIOUS ATTENTIONS WILL TIE THEM ALL TOGETHER AND THE
WHOLE PATTERN WILL BECOME CLEAR. LITTLE BY LITTLE~ WE WILL
CATCH THE WHOLE PICTURE AS IT SLOWLY EMERGES. THEN WE SHALL
SEE MAN WHOM GOD MADE TO BECOME ONLY A LITTLE LOWER THAN THE
ANGELS.

"GOD HAS SAID; 'THOU ART WONDER~ 0 MAN.' RESPECT IN YOURSELF


THIS GREATNESS. BRING IT OUTWARD AND ALLOW ITS GLORY TO BE
SEEN."-

"ALWAYS REMEMBER~ OUR HOME LIES WITHIN GOD. So LET US USE OUR
'LEVELS' AND 'TIME' WISELY THAT WE MAY BECOME WORTHY TO BE THE
FUTURE RULERS OVER OUR NATIVE MATTER REALM~ NEXT UNIVERSE TIME.

"IT HAS BEEN WONDERFUL~ THIS MEETING WITH OUR EARTH FRIENDS.
BLESS YOU!"

CANDRA SMILED AT US. "NEXT SESSION WE ARE ALL TO BE TAKEN BY


THE MASTERS TO ANOTHER GALAXY TO VISIT A DYING PLANET. THERE-
FORE~ THIS SESSION WILL BE LONGER THAN USUAL TODAY."

THIS WAS FINE WITH US AS WE NEVER WANTED TO RETURN ANYWAY.

"I SHALL DISCUSS 'DREAMS AS SOUL MEMORIES.'

"SOUL MEMORIES ARE NOT FANTACIES. THEY ARE VERY REAL AND CAN
BE RECALLED THROUGH THE PROCESS OF INTERPRETING YOUR NIGHTLY
DREAMS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 233 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 9

"FROM OUR MASTERS) WE HAVE LEARNED WE FUNCTION ON THREE BASESj


MATTER) SOUL-AsTRAL AND SPIRIT. OUR MATTER LEVELS (ETHERIC &
PHYSICAL) AND SOUL-AsTRAL REGIONS ARE NOT OPERATING IN THE HIGH
SPIRIT REGIONS. THEY ARE THE REGIONS FOR OUR SCHOOLINGS AND
PREPARATION. WE STUDY AND LEARN IN MATTER. THEN WE ORGANIZE
AND HARMONIZE OUR MATTER FINDINGS IN SOUL-AsTRAL. THESE ARE
THE REGIONS OF LABOR.

"WHEN OUR MENTAL FINDINGS DO NOT HARMONIZE TOGETHER) WE ARE


LIKE A HOUSE DIVIDED AGAINST OURSELF. WE ARE NOT IN A POSITION
FOR BECOMING A WHOLE UNIT OF SELF."

"SO THESE REGIONS HAVE THEIR OWN PURPOSE AND WE ARE EXPECTED
TO PERFORM THEIR PURPOSES WHILE IN THEM." STATED CYRUS.

"EXACTLY!" CANDRA ASSURED HIM. "WE MUST FIRST LEARN TO TAKE


ADVANTAGE OF WHERE WE FIND OURSELVES IN UNIVERSE."

EVERYONE IN THE GROUP AGREED TO THIS. CANDRA CONTINUEDj

"WE ALL KNOW SPIRIT IS EVERYWHERE PRESENT. B.u.r! SPIRIT CAN-


NOT BE USED BY US IN OUR LOWER TASKS ACCORDING TO ITS LAW
UNTIL WE DEVELOP AN AWARENESS AND KNOWLEDGE OF THE REGION'S
PURPOSE. WE DESIRE TO USE THE SPIRIT FORCE AS WE LEARN AND
RECAPITULATE OUR ACQUIRED KNOWLEDGES. ONLY TO THE DEGREE WE
CAN RECOGNIZE SPIRIT) CAN WE USE ITS ENERGIES. THUS) YOU CAN
SEE THE IMPORTANCE OF STRIVING TO GAIN AN EQUAL HARMONY IN
YOUR PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT.

"SCIENCE IGNORES SPIRIT AND CONCENTRATES ONLY ON MATTER FACTS.


THEREFORE) SCIENCE IS OFTEN IMBALANCED AND COMPELLED TO RE-
ASSESS ITS THEORIES.

"RIGHT NOW MANKIND IS STILL IN AN IMBALANCED STATE. WE ARE


STRIVING TO BALANCE OURSELVES. WE ARE IN THE ACT OF BECOMING
CONSCIOUSLY AWARE OF OUR MENTAL CONTENTS) SO IT IS HERE IN
OUR MIND FILES WHERE IMBALANCE WILL LIE."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 234 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON FIFTEEN PAGE 10

YES~ I COULD SEE WHAT HE MEANT. BEING MIND AND SPIRIT~ THE
IMBALANCE WOULD BE IN OUR OWN COLLECTED IDEAS.

"WE HAVE A WAY IN WHICH WE TAP OUR SOUL MIND PORTION AND CAN
AT TIMES TAP OUR SPIRIT INTUITIVE FILED TRUTHS OF MIND AND IT
IS VIA OUR DREAMS," HE REVEALED.

"THEREFORE~ OUR DREAMS HOLD IMPORTANCE INASMUCH AS THEY OFTEN


REVEAL HIDDEN IDEAS FROM OUR CONSCIOUS AWARENESS. IDEAS WHICH
ARE INFLUENCING OUR MATTER EXISTENCE. DREAMS CAN ALSO GIVE US
WARNINGS OF ALL KINDS~AND WHEN UNDERSTOOD AND FOLLOWED~ CAN
OFTEN SAVE US FROM WRONG CHOICES AND ACTIONS.

"SOUL ALSO SPEAKS TO THE CONSCIOUS SELF THROUGH DREAMS AND


REVEALS CONFLICTS OF IDEA. THE DREAM CAN SHOW THE ENTITY
WHEN tHEY ARE GOING AGAINST THEIR BEST INTERESTS.

"SPIRIT IN DREAMS WILL REVEAL AN UNKNOWN TRUTH TO THE CONSCIOUS-


SELF AND OPEN NEW AREAS OF THOUGHT AND REVEAL NEW HORIZONS OF
POSSIBILITY. THEREFORE~ IT IS TIME WE BECOME AWARE OF THE
DREAM PERIODS OF OUR EARTH SLEEP TIMES.

"WE SHALL BE USING DREAMS SOON IN OUR DEVELOPMENTAL WORK. I


WOULD SUGGEST ALL START A DREAM DIARY. LIST ALL THAT OCCURS
AND MOST IMPORTANT~ NOTE HOW YOU EELI AND REACTED AS THE DREAM
PROGRESSED. THIS DIARY WILL BE READY WHEN WE GO INTO DREAM
INTERPRETATI"ON AND WILL UNFOLD A MESSAGE TO CONSCIOUSNESS.
AFTER THE NEXT SESSION~ WE SHALL BE EXPLORING THE DREAM STATE
TOGETHER.

"IT IS A PRIVILEGE TO HAVE MET WITH YOU AND ONE I LOOK FORWARD
TO AGAIN IN THE FUTURE. BLESS YOU!"

WE HAD MUCH TO THINK UPON AS OUR LARGE GROUP OF EARTHLINGS


WENDED HOMEWARD AND INTO ETHERIC WHERE WE PARTED COMPANY TO
JOURNEY TO OUR DIFFERENT EARTH POINTS.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 235 of 382
BECAUSE I BELIEVE IN THE POWER OF GOD AND KNOW
THAT THE LAW OF GOOD OPERATES UPON MY WORD OF
FAITH} I SPEAK THIS WORD WITH COMPLETE ABANDON-
MENT. I SPEAK IT WITH ENTHUSIASM AND JOY.

I KNOW THAT I AM GOVERNED BY DIVINE INTELLIGENCE}


THAT MY WORD IS A CHANNEL OF INSPIRATION THROUGH
WHICH GUIDANCE CONTINUALLY FLOWS TO ME.

I AM COMPLETELY RECEPTIVE TO THIS GUIDANCE AND


LIVE IN A CONSCIOUSNESS OF JOYFUL EXPECTATION
OF THE GOOD} ACKNOWLEDGING THAT GOD} AROUND} IN
AND THROUGH ME} IS THE ONLY POWER THERE IS.

-===============\=:I..:::.:::~-::~ . . ...-....... -.. _._=....===

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 236 of 382
(

c ,

\

I) JJ
I DVaN.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 237 of 382
(

(
WHITEBEAF\D AND SUN BEING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 238 of 382
SERIES TWO VIOLET &BLUE LIGHTS
LESSON SIXTEEN

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON SIXTEEN

"A FORCED NIGHT PERIOn"

"THE EARTH IS THE LORDS J AND THE FULLNESS THEREOF; THE


WORLD J AND THEY THAT DWELL THEREIN."
PSALM 24:1

As WE LEFT OUR EARTH GROUP J WE WERE WONDERING WHAT IT WOULD


BE LIKE OUT IN THE REGIONS OF ANOTHER GALAXY. OUR PSYCHIC
AREAS DO NOT KNOW. ALTHOUGH WE CAN RECEIVE CONTACT FROM PER-
SONS GONE BEFORE US AND HEAR THEIR REPORTS J NONE HAVE TOLD US
OF THIS UNKNOWN.

As WE ENTERED ASTRAL TERRITORY J AN EAGLE HOVERED OVER US


ALMOST MOTIONLESS. WAS HE A SENTINAL FOR OUR MASTERS OR
JUST CURIOUS? A RUSHING STREAM BELOW SEEMED TO BE TALKING
TO ITSELF SAYING "HURRY-HURRY" AS IT TUMBLED OVER EMBEDDED
BOULDERS. THE SKY WAS BLUE AND LAVENDER. PINE NEEDLES WERE
A CARPET FOR OUR FEET AT LAST AND WE HURRIED AFTER SOME DIS-
TANT FIGURES TO THE AMPHITHEATRE MEETING PLACE IN THE WOODS.
IT WAS PACKED TO OVERFLOWING J BUT SHALEM MET US AND LED US
INTO A SMALLER GROUP UPON THE STAGE. HERE I MET MANY OF
LILY'S CLASSMATES FROM EARTH AND WE WERE TO GREET OTHERS WHO
HAD VISITED US FROM THE ASTRAL AT THE RECENT SESSIONS THAT
WE GIVE AT OUR INTERNATIONAL CENTER ON EARTH.

THE MAST~RS SEEMED TO BE HOVERING AROUND A DISTRAUGHT PERSON.


HIS RAVISHED FACE WAS WORN AND TEAR STAINED AND HE SEEMED TO
BE IN DEEP ANGUISH. SHALEM TOLD US THIS WAS IDYON FROM THE
GALAXY ANDROMEDA; A GREAT PROPHET WHO HAD COME BEGGING FOR
HELP FOR HIS WORLD AND PEOPLE. UNFORTUNATELY J IT WAS TOO
LATE TO SAVE THEM. HE WAS TO BE A PART OF OUR GROUP GOING
OUT IN SPACE IN ASTRAL TRAVEL.

CD REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 239 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 2

WHEN WE WERE SEATED WITH THE OTHERS} WE WERE GIVEN SMALL


GLASSES OF CORDIAL WHICH SPARKLED IN RAINBOW COLORS AND
TASTED DELICIOUS. WE KNEW WE WERE BEING PREPARED FOR THE
TRIP BY THIS ACT.

TRUMPETS SOUNDED AND JOAB EBER CAME DOWN THE CENTER AISLE
AND UP ON THE PLATFORM. HE WENT STRAIGHT TO IDYON AND
CLASPED HIM IN HIS ARMS AND LOOKING UPWARD SAID. "GREAT
FATHER} BEHOLD THY GRIEVING SON WHO HAST OFFERED HIMSELF FOR
THE LIVES OF HIS PEOPLE. COMFORT HIM AND OVERSHADOW HIS
MIND THAT HE MAY BE RELEASED FROM THIS ANGUISH. FATHER} THIS
HAS BEEN A FAITHFUL SERVANT UNTO THEE AND TO HIS PEOPLE.
IMPRESS UPON HIS INNOCENCE THE TRUTH OF THIS TERRIBLE DIS-
ASTER. MAY THIS PRAYER ASSURE HIS HEART OF THY LOVE."

THEN ALL THE MANY MASTERS PRESENT CAME UP AND SURROUNDED


IDYON AND JOAB AND A WHITE LIGHT DESCENDED DOWNWARD UPON
ALL. FROM OUT OF ITS LIGHT} A VOICE LIKE THUNDER SPOKE.
"BEHOLD} MY SON IDYON} THE FAITHFUL. GRIEVE NOT} FOR MY
LAW HAS BEEN OBEYED."

TIMOTHEOUS ARRIVED BESIDE US AND PROCEEDED TO DESIGNATE WHO


WAS TO BE IN OUR SECTION OF THE TRAVELERS. THERE WERE TO
BE FOUR SECTIONS OF TWELVE PERSONS EACH. TIMOTHEOUS} OMAR}
MORI HANDUS AND FIVE OF HIS MONKS AND WE FOUR WERE IN OUR
PARTY. Two OTHER GROUPS WERE FORMING. THEN JOAB EBER} IDYON
AND FIVE MASTERS AND FIVE MONKS WERE THE LEADING GROUP. EACH
GROUP HAD A SUN BEING AND A MASTER OVER THEM. WHEN READY} WE
NUMBERED FORTY-EIGHT SOULS. TIMOTHEOUS GAVE US A SHORT RE-
VIEW AS WE WAITED.

"EVERYTHING IN UNIVERSE} WHETHER ANIMATE OR INANIMATE IS SUB-


JECT TO THE KARMIC CYCLIC LAW IN THEIR YOUNGEST EVOLVEMENT.
ACTION AND REACTION AND STATES OF LIFE AND DEATH APPLY TO
PLANETS} STARS AND ALL OF GOD'S CHILDREN. As THIS EBBING

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 240 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 3

AND FLOWING OCCURS~ CONSCIOUSNESS COMES FORTH AND SUBMERGES


FROM ONE REGION INTO ANOTHER. THESE CHANGING STATES ARE
TIMES FOR ABSORBING COSMIC ENERGY FORCES AND TIMES FOR EX-
PANDING THEM. THESE REGENERATION TIMES PRODUCE PERIODS OF
EXTERNAL ACTIVITY AND INACTIVITY AND EACH SHOULD HAVE AN EX-
TERNAL ACTIVITY IN AS LONG A TIME PERIOD AS ITS INACTIVITY.
HOWEVER~ THIS IS NOT ALWAYS SO.

"THE SLEEP STATE IS FOR THE PURPOSE OF RE-GATHERING COSMIC


FORCES TO PROLONG THE FORMS USEFULNESS AND FOR A BRIEF MENTAL
SORTING AND BALANCING FOR BETTER AWAKENED OPERATION. PLANET
EARTH HAS HER SLEEP PERIODS JUST AS DOES MANKIND AND THESE
SHOULD FOLLOW A NORMAL LAID DOWN RHYTHMIC PATTERN THAT FITS
INTO THE PLANET'S PARTICULAR WAVE CURRENTS. WHEN EXTRANEOUS
CIRCUMSTANCES INTERFERE WITH A PLANET ~·OR A PERSON'S RHYTHMS~
DISASTER OCCURS.

"IN THIS TRIP INTO SPACE WHICH WE ARE ABOUT TO TAKE~ WE WILL
VISIT A NEIGHBORING GALAXY AND SOLAR SYSTEM~ AND WE SHALL
WITNESS FOR OURSELVES A 'FORCED PLANET NIGHT' STATE."

JOAB EBER HAD ALL OF US GATHER UPON A MARKED OUT CIRCLE AREA
ON THE STAGE. THE AUDIENCE NOW BURST INTO SONG AND AS ITS
VIBRATIONS STRENGTHENED~ A VAPORY COLORED SUBSTANCE FORMED
UNDER OUR FEET. HEAT AND COLOR COULD BE FELT ARISING ALL
AROUND US. As ITS INTENSITY GREW~ ITS POWER SOMEHOW LIFTED
US ALL AND CARRIED US UP INTO THE ASTRAL SKY AND OUT INTO
THE INKY COLDNESS OF SPACE. ITS DARKNESS HUNG IN JEWELLED
STELLER GROUPS. As OUR STRANGE WARM CHARIOT OF VAPOR ACCEL-
ERATED IN SPEED~ THE STARS AND LAMPLIKE PLANETS WHIRLED PAST
AT AN INCREDIBLE SPEED~ EVEN TO BECOMING A STEADY BLURE OF
LIGHTS. YET UPON OUR CLOUD~ THE ATMOSPHERE WAS CALM AND
COMFORTABLE AS THOUGH WE WERE INSIDE A GLASS DOME. CONVERSA-
TION WAS POSSIBLE AND TIMOTHEOUS TOLD US WE WOULD GO MORE
SLOWLY BY SOME OF OUR SOLAR SYSTEM PLANETS ON OUR RETURN SO
I

THAT WE COULD GET A CLOSE VIEW OF THEM.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 241 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 4
EVENTUALLY OUR SPEED SLOWED SO THAT WE COULD SEE ANDROMEDA
APPROACHING AND ADMIRE HER SWIRLING JEWELS AND FLAT CIRCULAR
IMAGE. As WE ENTERED THIS GALAXY J STARS AND PLANETS WHIRLED
PAST UNTIL WE CAME TO A SEEMING EMPTY AREA WHERE A VERY BRIGHT
STAR APPEARED TO FILL IN THE WHOLE SPACE BEFORE US. WE COULD
SEE ITS GIGANTIC MASS OF MOLTEN FIRE AS WE SLOWLY APPROACHED.
IT SEEMED TO POSSESS A THINNER AND MORE VAPORY ATMOSPHERE
THAN OUR SOL LOOKED TO BE. THE SWIRLS OF FIERY FLAMES SHEETED
OUT LIKE SAILS INTO THE SPACE AND THEN RAPIDLY DISAPPEARED
OUT OF SIGHT AND AWAY.

AROUND THIS MIGHTY STAR J FIVE PLANETS WHEELED ON SEPARATE


COURSES. ALL WERE MUCH LARGER THAN EARTHJ OMAR TOLD US.

THE FURTHERMOST PLANET SEEMED TO BE SURROUNDED IN A GREYLIKE


DUST CLOUD. WHILE CONTINUING TO FOLLOW ITS ORBIT J IT DID SO
IN A SLUGG1SH DEAD FASHION. IT ~AS BEING DRAGGED IN A HELP-
LESS FASHION. THE OTHER FOUR PLANETS WERE RICH IN GOLDEN
LIGHT.

TIMOTHEOUS INFORMED US THAT THE DUST COVERED PLANET WAS OUR


TARGET. COMING CLOSER WE GENTLY ENTERED THE GREY DENSE AT-
MOSPHERE AT ITS OUTER RAY BELT. Now THE RAYS FROM THIS SYS-
TEM'S SUN LOOKED MOLTEN AND FIRELIKE AS IT PIERCED THROUGH
THE OPAQUE HAZE. As WE NEARED THE SURFACE J ALL APPEARED TO
BE COPPER COLORED. WE SHUDDERED. THIS WAS A DESOLATE WORLD
OF DIMNESS J SMOKE J OLD FIRES STILL BURNING HERE AND THERE AND
ACCENTED IN DARK SHADOWS. ALTHOUGH THE SUN WAS SHINING BRIGHTLY
ABOVE THE SURFACE J DOWN HERE IT WAS NOT EASY TO MAKE OUT THE
RUINS EVERYWHERE AROUND US.

"BEHOLDJ A WORLD WHICH SUFFERS AS IN NEURASTHENIAJ"SAID TIM-


OTHEOUS. "SHE HOVERS NEAR DEATH AND ONLY REST CAN SAVE THIS
LOGO FORM FROM TOTAL DISINTEGRATION."

IN SILENCE AND AWE WE FOLLOWED WHERE THE MASTERS LEDJ ALWAYS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 242 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 5
SURROUNDED BY CLEAR AND DEVASTATING EVIDENCE OF MAN-MADE DES-
TRUCTION. DISSOLUTION LAY AS FAR AS THE EYE COULD SEE AND
CLOSE AT HAND~ WE EXAMINED CRUSHED AND CRUMBLING WALLS AND
BLAST BURNED GROUND. AT PLACES COULD BE SEEN EVIDENCE OF
ONCE MAGNIFICENT DESIGNS OF ART WORK. HERE WERE HUGE BLOCKS
OF CARVED MARBLE~ WHOSE SIZE COMPARED WITH THE BLOCKS IN THE
PYRAMID OF GIZA. WHAT MIGHTY POWER DISLODGED THESE· AND REN-
DERED SOME TO SUCH RUBBLE?

WE NOTICED EVERYTHING WAS DRIED OUT AND PARCHED. AROUND US


LAY A HEAVY COOPER-LIKE HEAT OF OMINOUS DEAD CALM. ASIDE
FROM OUR OWN~ NOT ONE SOUND COULD BE HEARD ON THIS SILENT
WORLD.

WE CAME UPON A GROUP OF WITHERED TREES~ NOT BURNED BUT COM-


PLETELY DRIED AND DYING UPON THE HARD CRACKED SOIL. BESIDE
THEM WERE SMASHED PAVING STONES WHICH LED US TO A RUINED
FOUNTAIN BASIN HOLDING DEHYDRATED WATER PLANTS~ MUCH LIKE
TISSUE PAPER IN ITS CRACKED REMAINS. As THOUGH THROWN OUT~
A STATUE OF A LOVELY FEMALE LAY BY ITS SIDE~ STRANGELY LEFT
INTACT AND UNBROKEN. SHE WAS BEAUTIFUL.

"WHAT OF THE PEOPLE?" WE SAID ALMOST IN UNISON. A SADNESS


COVERED OUR MASTERS' FACES AS TIMOTHEOUS ANSWERED: "SO MANY
WOULD NOT HEED IDYON'S WORDS OR SIGNS." WE GLANCED AT IDYON
WHOSE FACE NOW STREAMING WITH TEARS EXCLAIMED; "I CRY FOR MY
WAYWARD PEOPLE."

OMAR STRAIGHTENED HIS SHOULDERS AS THOUGH SHIFTING A HEAVY


BURDEN. "WELL~ EACH CHOOSES WHAT THEY SHALL BELIEVE AND
FOLLOW AND WHAT THEY SHAL( DO." SADLY~ WE NODDED AGREEMENT.

ON A LIGHTER NOTE~ MORI HANDUS ENCOURAGED; "SOON THESE CON-


TAMINATED CLOUDS OF NOXIOUS POISONS AND DEADLY RADIATIONS WILL
RELEASE THEIR CONTENTS AS 'TIME' ACCOMPLISHES ITS WORK. THEN~
AS MANY AGES SHALL PASS~ THE PLANET FORM WILL KNOW A CLEANSING
AND METAMORPHOSIS. THEN~ HOPEFULLY~ A DAY WILL DAWN WHEN THIS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 243 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 6

INJURED LOGO CAN EMERGE FROM HER PRESENT COMA. AT THAT MOM-
ENT~ NEW AWAKENING AND NEW LIFE SHALL ENTER AND ANOTHER CYCLE
COMMENCE.~

"BUT WAS THIS NOT A FORCED NIGHT PERIOD? Do NOT THE NORMAL
'NIGHT PERIODS' OCCUR AT ONLY CERTAIN RHYTHMIC TIMES?" I
ASKED.

OMAR PATTED MY ARM. "YES~ CHILD. THE NORMAL 'NIGHTS' OCCUR


IN OBEDIENCE TO COSMIC LAW. THIS NIGHT CAME ABOUT AS A RESULT
OF THE INHABITANTS OF THIS PLANET AND THEIR FOOLISHNESS AND
PLAY. IN IGNORANT CONCEIT AND FROM GREED OF MONEY AND POWER)
ITS PEOPLE INCAUTIOUSLY RUSHED FORCES THEY DID NOT COMPLETELY
UNDERSTAND. IN HUMAN WITLESSNESS AND POWER HUNGRY IRRATION-
ALITY~ THEY WENT TOO FAR. THEIR CARELESS EXPERIMENTING CONNECT-
ED INTO FORCES UNKNOWN TO THEM; UNKNOWN EVEN TO THEIR PLANET'S
RHYTHMIC CURRENTS AND WAVELENGTHS AND ATTRACTED ENERGIES FROM
OUT OF SPACE TO PENETRATE INTO THE:PLANET'S ATMOSPHERE. THIS
CONNECTION OF ENERGIES SET UP A CHAIN REACTION NONE COULD
STOP FOR ITS EXPLOSIVE POWERS ACTED INSTANTLY."

WE STOOD APPALLED AT THIS REVELATION. TALL AMOS LOOKED AROUND.


"I TAKE IT~ IT WAS MUCH LIKE THROWING A LIGHTED MATCH INTO A
PILE OF FIRECRACKERS. EACH EXPLODES IN A DIFFERENT DIRECTION
AND UPON LANDING SETS OFF COMBUSTIONS WHEREVER IT LANDS."

OMAR HAD TO SMILE. "IT WAS UPON THAT ORDER~ AMOS."

WITH A WORRIED LOOK~ VIOLET INQUIRED. "WHAT OF THIS 'LOGO


BEING?' Is HER FORM HERE ABOUT TO DIE?"

PUTTING HIS ARM ABOUT HER~ TIMOTHEOUS SOOTHED. "WE HOPE NOT.
MANY FROM ALL REALMS ARE NURSING THIS PLANET FORM AND HEALING
FORCES ARE CONSTANTLY BEING ADMINISTERED. SHE HAS RETREATED
FROM THIS SHATTERED SHELL AND NOW RESTS IN HIGHER ASTRAL
LEVELS~ RECOUPERATING HOPEFULLY TO REJOIN HER MATTER FORM AND
CONTINUE HER PRESENT CYCLE."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 244 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 7
You COULD SEE RELIEF ON LILY'S FACE~ A RELIEF I KNEW EVERY-
ONE FELT IN THEIR HEART CENTERS. How NATURAL IT SEEMED TO •• 0' •

KNOW A COMPASSIONATE CONCERN FOR THIS INJURED LOGO ONE.

BEING THOROUGHLY SHOCKED AT THE WANTON DESTRUCTION WE WERE


VIEWING~ LILY ASKED: "WHAT OF THE KARMIC DEBT OF THIS
PLANET'S PEOPLE? NOT ONLY HAVE THEY INJURED A'LOGO TO NEAR
DEATH BUT THEY KILLED MANY OF THEIR OWN TRUSTING LIFE STREAM
MEMBERS. SURELY NOT ALL DESTROYED HERE MUST PAY THIS KARMIC
DEBT?"

TIMOTHEOUS SIGHED. "ONLY THE CLOSED MINDS AND FIXED .SOULS


WERE LEFT UPON ITS SURFACE. IDYON AND THE 'SPACE SERVANTS
OF GOD' HAD REMOVED ALL WHO SO DESIRED."
. . . ..

~WHERE ARE THE SOULS OF THOSE DESTROYED NOW?" CLARABELLE


ASKED FROM HER GROUP. "THAT'S WHAT I WOULD LIKE TO KNOW"~
ADDED CYRUS.

"MANY ARE RIGHT HERE AROUND US~ LOST AND BEWILDERED AND FRI-
GHTENED. WE SHIELD YOU FROM THE DISTRESS OF SEEING THEM."
WE COULDN'T HELP BUT BE RELIEVED WE COULD NOT SEE THEM.
"»AVE THEY LOST THEIR POSITION ON THE GOD PATH~ THROUGH THEIR
SENSELESS RACE FOR POWER?" I NEEDED TO KNOW.

"YES" WAS THE MASTER'S ANSWER. "THEY LOST BECAUSE THEY PUT
GREED JAND POWER BEFORE ALL AND IGNORED SPIRIT AND MIND'S
NEEDS."

"FROM NOW ON~ I'M KEEPING AN EYE ON WHAT I'M DOING


.
AND THINK-
. ' .

ING AND CONTRIBUTING TO MATTER LIFE." SAID VIOLET SINCERELY.

"EVEN BRILLIANT MINDS CAN HOLD BLIND SPOTS AND APPLY THEIR
GENIUS TO DESTRUCTIVE INVENTIONS AND UNTRUE SCIENTIFIC THEOR-
IES. MIND CONTENTS CAN BE FILLED WITH VALUABLE FACTS BUT

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 245 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 8

BARRON OF THE COSMIC REALITY OF UNIVERSE. IN THIS CASE) THE


ENTITY WOULD POSSESS NO TRUTH UPON WHICH TO BASE THEIR DIS-
CRIMINATORY POWERS AND JUDGMENTS. ANY DECISION THEY WOULD
POSE WOULD BE INCOMPLETE OF ALL I.I:ff. FACTS NEEDED. UNFORTU-
NATELY FOR YOUR PLANET EARTH) IT HOLDS MANY BRILLIANT MINDS)
STILL CLOSED TO ALL FACTS OUTSIDE THE LIMITED MATTER SCIENTI-
FIC DISCOVERIES."

As WE PICKED OUR WAY CAREFULLY THROUGH THE RUBBLE) TIMOTHEOUS


GESTURED.

"OBSERVE THE FEELING OF 'WITHDRAWNESS)' OF VACANCY. EVEN IN


REMOTE VACANT SPOTS OF EARTH) YOU WILL NOT FEEL SUCH FOR YOUR
PLANET'S LIFE-FORCE IS STILL WITHIN ITS FORM AND NATURE AND
YOUR LOGO IS PRESENT THERE IN A SOOTHING UNDERTONE OF THROBB-
ING LIFE EVERYWHERE. HERE IT IS MISSING."

How TRUE! No LIVING ACTION OF CONSCIOUSNESS BUT OUR OWN WAS


PRESENT HERE. ONLY A SMALL FLICKER OF FLAME HERE AND THERE
STILL BURNED. EVEN THE SMOKE FROM SMOLDERING HEAPS HELD A
DEADNESS OF INACTION.

"YET WITHIN THIS PLANET'S CENTER) A FEEBLE FLAME BURNS WEAKLY


AND THE LOGOI PEOPLES TEND ITS ENERGIES FROM THEIR OWN MAGNET-
IC CURRENTS. ALSO) THE SYSTEM'S SUN VALIANTLY POURS HIS POWER
TO THIS CHILD FORM." JOAB NOW GATHERED OUR GROUPS TOGETHER
FOR RETURN. OUR HEARTS WENT OUT IN LOVINGNESS TO IDYON AS HE
GAVE A LAST GAZE UPON THE LAND HE LOVED SO WELL.

WE CAUGHT A HINT OF TEARS IN OMAR'S VOICE AS HE ENTREATED


OUR PARTY. "REMEMBER) ALWAYS LIFE IS EVERYWHERE. PROTECT
YOUR WORLD AS SHE PROTECTS AND SHELTERS YOU. KNOW GOD) OUR
FATHER) JUDGED TO A FINE POINT THE 'TIMES' FOR ALL LIFE IN
THEIR GROWING AND EVOLVING ACTIONS AND TO DISTURB THESE TIME
PERIODS MAY ROB EACH LIFE OF ITS PROPER RESTS OR RECAPITULA-
TION TIMES."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 246 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SIXTEEN PAGE 9

IDYON EXHORTED: "BREAK NOT THESE GOD COSMIC LAWS. You DO


SO AT YOUR PERIL. OH) MANKIND LEARN FROM THE FATE OF THOSE
WHO HAVE GONE BEFORE YOU."

WE WERE QUIET AS WE SLOWLY PASSED BY PLUTO) URANUS AND SATURN


WHICH WE SAW FROM A DISTANCE. BUT JUPITER WAS CLOSE AND
LOOKED EXACTLY AS OUR SATELLITES PICTURES PORTRAYED.

ONWARD WE TRAVELLED TO AT LAST RETURN TO THE DARK CASTLE


ROSE GARDEN~ THE ASTRAL NIGHT RUSTLED SOFTLY. HERE IT WAS
A FRIENDLY LIVING NIGHT EXPENDING IN FULFILLING LIFE FORCES.
THESE SEEMED ALMOST EXTRAVAGANT IN CONTRAST TO THE DEADNESS
WE HAD LEFT IN ANDROMEDA.

As WE FOUR TRAVELLED ONWARD TO EARTH) WE DISCUSSED HOW PRE-


CIOUS IS THIS FORCE OF LIVINGNESSj HOW GENEROUS OUR FATHER
GOD TO LET US HAVE IT SO FREELY.

RETURNED) WE STOPPED TO PRAY. OUR PRAYER WAS THAT EARTH'S


PEOPLE AND EARTH HERSELF WOULD NEVER NEED TO KNOW THE DEVASTA-
TION WE HAD WITNESSED THIS NIGHT. WE WATCHED THE NEW DAY
DAWN. OUR SOL SEEMED TO SMILE A BLESSING ON HIS EARTH.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 247 of 382
;"','

""- ;",

-.c.

I DECLARE THAT INFINITE ABUNDANCE IS MINE. I AM


ALWAYS LED ON THE PATH OF GOODNESS AND DIVINELY
INSPIRED.
,
j
i
GOD'S INFINITE RICHES ARE MINEJ BUT THEY ARE MADE
THROUGH MY OWN CREATIVE ACTION. I DO NOT DOUBT
MY PROGRESS FOR I KNOW I AM DIVINELY GUIDED IN
ALL I'DOJ SAY AND THINK.
"(

As I PERFORM MY DAILY DUTIES TO THE BEST OF MY


ABILITY J GOD'S ABUNDANCE IS FILLING THE STOREHOUSE
OF MY SOUL.

AND So IT Is!

,
i
(
\

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 248 of 382
(

v ,..

. - .
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 249 of 382
(

c ..

, ..., "

.~,<;, " " .~"


CIc

( eace.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 250 of 382
c

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 251 of 382
SERIES Two ROSE &YELLOW LIGHTS
LESSON SEVENTEEN

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON SEVENTEEN

"THE MUSIC ROOM"

"AND THE KING SAID UNTO THEMJ I HAVE DREAMED A DREAMJ AND
MY SPIRIT WAS TROUBLED TO KNOW THE DREAM."
DANIEL 2:3

DRIFTING PEACEFULLY IN HIGHER CONSCIOUSNESS SEEMED TO BRING


US CLOSER TOGETHER THAN EVER BEFORE. AN UNFOLDING KNOWLEDGE
OF ONENESS CAME FORTH STRONGLY. IT HELD A COLLATING POWER
AS OF LOVE AND MUSIC INTERTWINING. WE ENTERED THE ASTRAL
OVER THE DEEP BLUE WATERS. ONLY THE GENTLEST OF BREEZES
~UFFLED THIS SEA J YET ITS CURRENT CARRIED US OVER THE VILLAGE
AND INTO THE MEADOWS BEHIND. FROM AFAR A TEMPLE BELL RANG
OUT TO VIBRATE OUR SOULS TO ITS MYSTIC TONES. HERE AND THERE
WERE CLUSTERS OF TREES. WE WALKED TOWARD THE CASTLE'S REAR
ENTRANCE THROUGH FRAGRANT WILD FLOWERS THAT SPRINKLED OVER
A CARPET OF GREEN. KINGFISHERS AND HERONS FED IN THE WILLOW
THAT BORDERED THE STREAM WHICH SEPARATED THE VILLAGE FROM
THE CASTLE'S CLIFFS.

CLIMBING THE STAIRWAY UP ITS SIDE J WE HALTED BRIEFLY TO GAZE


AROUND AND SNIFF THE SLIGHT SALT BREEZE.

Two SQUIRRELS WERE PLAYING ON THE FLOWER DECKED STONE WALL


AS WE PASSED TO REACH THE ROUNDED MUSIC ROOM ENTRANCE. CHEER-
FUL MUSIC GREETED OUR EARS J ACCOMPANIED BY GREETINGS AS WE
SOUGHT FOR PLACES TO SIT.

STEPHEN AND CANDRA WAVED AND SHALEM SMILED AND NODDED FROM
THE PIANO AND CALLED J "SAVE ME A SEAT NEXT TO YOU." MUSIC
AND HAPPY VOICES MINGLED AS NEWCOMERS ENTERED AND SETTLED
DOWN.

© REV. DR. DOROTHEA rt RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 252 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 2

OMAR STOOD FORTH ACCOMPANIED BY A MASTER WHO SEEMED FAMIL-


IAR TO US J BUT WHICH WE KNEW WE HAD NEVER SEEN ON OUR VISITS.
WE LEARNED THIS WAS MASTER KUTHUMI FROM ANOTHER SOUL GROUP
AND NOW WE REALIZED WHY HE LOOKED FAMILIAR. THE PORTRAYALS
OF HIM WE HAD SEEN ON EARTH DID HAVE A NEAR RESEMBLANCE BUT J
OF COURSE J NONE HAD DONE HIM JUSTICE. THIS BEAUTY OF SPIRIT-
UALITY WE EARTH BEINGS CANNOT CATCH IN OUR ATTEMPTS TO REPRO-
DUCE THE ASTRAL IMAGES J NO MATTER HOW HARD WE TRY. WE CAN
BUT DO OUR BEST AND THIS DOES HELP FOR WE FELT WE WERE FAMIL-
IAR WITH THIS MASTER.

MASTER KUTHUMI SPOKE ABOUT THE WORK ALL OF THE ASTRAL SOUL
GROUPS WERE LABORING TO BRING FORTH ON EARTH. HE TOUCHED
ON THEIR DIFFERENCE OF PRESENTATION AND THEIR MUTUAL GOALS
TO BRING FORTH GREATER MIND CONSCIOUSNESS AND INNER SECURITY
OF BEING TO ALL.

GURU CALLED UPON SHALEM FOR PRAYER J THEN OUR LESSON BEGAN.
STEPHEN WAS AGAIN SCHEDULED TO BE OUR FIRST TEACHER.

"DREAMS AS SOUL MEMORIES"

"How VERY WISE IS THE WHOLE MIND. IN DREAMS WE COME TO UN-


COVER THE MIND'S AMAZING FEATS. DREAMS CAN SHOW US OUR INNER
REALITY J AND POINT OUT OUR NEEDS AND EVEN REVEAL TO US THE
WAYS IN WHICH WE CAN BRING FORTH NEW PERSONAL PATTERNS FOR
BEHAVIOR.

"YESJ MIND IS COMPLEX AND REMAINS COMPLEX UNTIL WE EACH LEARN


TO UNDERSTAND THIS PART OF OUR WHOLE SELF. IN THIS PROCESS
OF GROWING AND BECOMING ON THE PATHWAY J WE ENGENDER DRIVES
AND MOTIVATIONS J DESIRES AND FANTASIES AND BREW UP COUNTLESS
DIFFERENT ATTITUDES WHICH WE THEN FIT ONTO OURSELVES.

"MANY OF THESE WERE IN OUR PAST LIFE EXPERIENCES AND SOME


ARE NOW IN OUR MATTER CONSCIOUSNESS 'PARTIAL PATTERN.'

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 253 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 3

THESE~ IN CONSCIOUS-SELF~ WE MAY SEE FOR OURSELVES BUT THOSE


DEEP AND REPRESSED IN THE SOUL ARE SELDOM RECOGNIZED BY THE
CONSCIOUS SIGHT. YET THEY WILL BE INFLUENCING OUR DAILY
ACTIONS AND CHOICES AND DECISIONS.

"CONSCIOUS-MIND SELF WE ALL KNOW. WHAT WE DO NOT KNOW IS


THAT IT ACTUALLY IS A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE SOUL AND SPIRIT
SELF.

"ALL OUR MANY PAST LITTLE EARTH CONSCIOUSNESS PARTS AND THEIR
CONTENTS WHICH WE GATHERED~ NOW REPRESENT OUR PRESENT SOUL
MIND AND ITS CONTENTS. As YOU ARE WELL AWARE FROM PREVIOUS
LESSONS~ THIS SOUL MIND PORTION HOLDS ALL DATA FROM YOUR VERY
BEGINNINGS IN MATTER TO THIS MOMENT IN TIME. YET MOST OF
HUMANITY ARE TOTALLY IGNORANT OF ITS BURIED EXISTENCE. As
THESE REMAIN FORGOTTEN AND QUIESCENT IN DEEP MEMORY~ THEY
ARE UNKNOWN BUT THE ACTIVE RESULTS THEY CAUSE WORK JUST AS
SHARPLY.

"THE SOUL MEMORIES DO REST QUIETLY AS LONG AS TH~ ENTITY IS


PROGRESSING HARMONIOUSLY~ BUT LET SOME EFFECT UPSET THE CON-
SCIOUS EQUILIBRIUM AND~ PRESTO~ AN UNCONTROLLED REACTION
OCCURS EMOTIONALLY. WE FLY OFF THE HANDLE LIKE A LOOSE BOLT~
HIT OUT IN ALL DIRECTIONS IN TEMPER AND BLAME EVERYONE AND
EVERYTHING BUT OURSELVES FOR THIS REACTION.

"EVEN WHEN MOST DO ENDEAVOR TO WATCH THEIR BEHAVIOR AND CHECK


THEIR CONSCIOUS ACTIONS AND REACTIONS AND HABITUAL WAYS OF
DOING THINGS AND THINKING~ THERE WILL BE DWELLING WITHIN
EACH MANY HIDDEN RUMBLINGS. THESE ARE SO DEEP DOWN~ OUR
EARTH CONSCIOUSNESS CANNOT CATCH A GLIMPSE OF THEM. GOD
PROVIDED FOR THIS PROBLEM~ HOWEVER~ AND THERE ARE INDIRECT
SIGNPOSTS TO ALERT CONSCIOUSNESS AND SHOW THE MATTER TRAVELER
WHERE HIS DANGERS LIE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 254 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 4
"DREAMS ARE FOR THE PURPOSE OF AIDING THE STUDENT'S CONSCIOUS
WORK IN THIS AREA AND THEY DO SO JUST AS SLIPS OF THE TONGUE
POINT TO SUBJECTS WE NEED TO RESOLVE OR CORRECT. WE KNOW A
FREE WORD ASSOCIATION CAN ALSO FINGER A HIDDEN AREA OF UN-
KNOWN DISQUIET WHEN DONE CORRECTLY.

"BUT THESE LATTER BEING PERFORMED WHEN WE ARE AWAKE AND CON-
SCIOUS J ARE VULNERABLE TO OUR DESIRE TO PRODUCE A GOOD AND
CONSTRUCTIVE SCORE AND SO WE LEAN TOWARD PERSONALLY INFLUENC-
ING THEIR OUTCOME.

"IN OUR DREAM STATE J WE OFTEN HAVE EXPERIENCES WE WOULD FLEE


FROM WHEN AWAKE J OR REFUSE TO ENTERTAINJ OR OWN UP TO OR PER-
FORM. IT IS THESE TYPES OF DREAMS WHICH SEEK TO TELL US SOME-
THING. IF WE CAN BECOME HONEST WITH SELF J WE WILL SEE THESE
-
AS MIND IDEAS IN NEED OF UPDATING. LIKE THE SLIPS OF THE
TONGUE J THESE DREAM REVELATIONS ARE USUALLY IDEAS J THOUGHTS
AND FEELINGS CONTRARY TO WHAT OUR PRESENT CONSCIOUS-MORALE
WOULD VOICE OR PERFORM. IF NOT GIVEN ATTENTION J AND NOW CON-
SCIOUSLY REASONED OUT FOR A NEW RESOLVEMENT J THESE CONFLICTS
AND ANCIENT DESIRES OR FEARS WILL CONTINUE TO RULE OUR DAILY
AFFAIRS AND CONSCIOUS-SELF.

"THE SOUL MIND ENERGIES ARE MUCH GREATER AND STRONGER THAN
ARE THE CONSCIOUS-SELF MIND POWERS. THEREFOREJ THESE HIGHER
FORCES WILL NOT ALWAYS STAY CONFINED BEHIND THEIR MENTAL
PRESERVES. IN MOMENTS OF STRESS J UPSET OR HURT FEELINGS J A
BREAKTHROUGH CAN OCCUR J AND CERTAIN OLD BEHAVIOR AND ACTIONS
TAKE OVER AND RULE YOU.

"NoWJ IT IS PRECISELY THESE HIDDEN SOUL IDEAS THAT YOU DON'T


CONSCIOUSLY KNOW ABOUT WHICH ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR MANY OF YOUR
EARTH TROUBLES AND EMOTIONAL UPSETS. AND AS LONG AS THE MIND
DOORS REMAIN CLOSED AND BLOCKED J YOU J AS A CONSCIOUS WORKER J
CANNOT SEE THEM TO CORRECT AND BALANCE THEM OUT FROM YOUR PRE-
SENT IMPROVED UNDERSTANDING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 255 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 5

"Do NOT CENSOR OR BE ASHAMED OF DREAM CONTENTS FOR THE HIDDEN


DRIVES MANY DEPICT WERE NORMAL FOR THE 'TIME PERIOD' AND PER-
SONAL STATE YOU WERE IN WHEN SUCH WAS LAID DOWN IN YOUR SOUL
MIND FILES.

"MAN HAS MANY DRIVES AND URGES IN HIS PATTERN. THOSE YOU SO
FAR HAVE LEARNED HOW TO MANAGE AND CONTROL WILL NEVER SHOW UP
TO BOTHER YOU. THE DRIVES THAT ARE CAUSING CONFLICTS HAVE
ONLY NOW COME INTO YOUR CONSCIOUS AWARENESS SO THESE ARE
'RIGHT ACTION' FOR YOU TO ENCOUNTER AND HANDLE NOW.

"EVERYONE IN MATTER HAS CERTAIN DRIVE PROBLEMS TO RESOLVE NO


MATTER WHAT THEY MAY TELL YOU TO THE CONTRARY ABOUT THEMSELVES.
SOME MAY BE HANDLING THE SITUATION BETTER OR COVERING UP MORE
SUCCESSFULLY THAN OTHERS~ BUT EVERYONE IS IN THIS TOGETHER."

PEOPLE WERE NODDING EVERYWHERE AT THIS LAST SENTENCE.

"IN THE SLEEP PERIODS GOD HAS PROVIDED~ THERE ARE TWO SECTIONS
FOR CERTAIN KINDS OF EGO EXPERIENCING. IN THE SLEEP REM SEC-
TION~ YOU ARE NOT IN THE DEEP SEPARATION STATE FROM CONSCIOUS

AWARENESS THAT YOU ARE IN THE OTHER DREAM SECTION OF SOMNAM-


BULl SlUM. IN THE DREAM STATE YOU ARE IN AN INBETWEEN CONSCIOUS-
NESS EGO STATE~ MUCH LIKE A TRANCE CONSCIOUSNESS BUT WITH NO
MATTER ENERGY PRESENT.

"THERE WILL BE A SOUL-CONSCIOUSNESS AWARENESS IN DREAMS AND


ALSO THE SOUL FACULTY OF ATTENTION~ AWARENESS AND IMAGINATION~
PLUS THE SOUL SENTIENT EMOTIONS. SO~ IN DREAMS~ YOU ARE SEE-
ING~ FEELING AND EXPERIENCING MUCH AS YOU WILL DO AFTER
TRANSITION.

"IN CULTIVATING A MEMORY FOR YOUR DREAMS AND THEIR MESSAGES~


YOU ARE ALSO CULTIVATING YOUR SOUL PSYCHIC CONSCIOUSNESS."

As STEPHEN CLOSED HIS LECTURE~ A BUZZ OF CONVERSATION BROKE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 256 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 6

OUT AS EVERYONE DISCUSSED DREAMS SO FAR. SHALEM AND ~~RGUERITE


PLAYED DOUBLE MUSIC ON SEPARATE ORGANS AS WE RELAXED. THEN
THE CASTLE PLAYERS" WHO HAD BEEN IN THEIR USUAL ORCHESTRAL
PLACES" PLAYED MUSIC LIKE NONE ON EARTH; IT'S HAVING BEEN
CREATED AND WRITTEN IN THE ASTRAL. GURU TOLD US IT WOULD
BE COMPOSED ON EARTH IN THE FAR FUTURE THROUGH ONE NOW PLAYING
BEFORE US WHEN HE IS ONCE AGAIN IN A FUTURE INCARNATION. HE
DIDN'T INDICATE WHICH PERSON TO OUR DISAPPOINTMENT. RENEWED
AND READY" CANDRA TOOK THE STAND.

"MIND, SOUL AND DREAMS"

"PERHAPS YOU WONDER WHY SOME OF YOUR DREAMS APPEAR CLEAR AND
PLAIN TO YOU WHILE OTHERS ARE BLURRY" CONFUSED AND UNCONNECTED.
STEPHEN JUST TOLD YOU THAT YOUR DREAMS ARE FROM YOUR SOUL CON-
SCIOUSNESS" BUT WHY THE DIFFERENCE IN THE DREAMER'S VIEWING?

"WELL" ACTUALLY IT STEMS FROM YOUR PRESENT HELD EMOTIONAL CON-


TENTS OF SENTIENT SOUL. You SEE" THE WARNING DREAMS WHICH
INDICATE NEED FOR CORRECTING DRIVES" MOTIVES AND ERROR CONCEPTS
COME FROM YOUR PRIMITIVE DATA; THE UNRESOLVED AND AS YET UN-
CONTROLLED ASPECTS OF SELF.

"THESE CONTENT IDEAS TEND TO BE VERY DISTURBING TO THE CONSCI-


OUS-SELF'S PRESENT LOGIC AND MORALS. THESE FRIGHTEN EGO AS
THE SENTIENT EMOTIONS ACCOMPANY THE DREAM" THUS CAUSING ITS
CONTENTS TO APPEAR CONFUSED AND SOMETIMES SENSELESS· TO THE
DREAMING LITTLEST EGO.

"IN EACH NEW INCARNATION WE HAVE AN OPPORTUNITY TO ORGANIZE


FOR MORE CONTROL OVER OUR UNFINISHED FILES AND DATA. As YOU
EXPAND YOUR MATTER CONSCIOUSNESS AND DEVELOP NECESSARY SOUL
ATTRIBUTES WHICH ARE ALREADY YOURS" YOU DEVELOP FOR THE DIS-
POSING OF YOUR DREAMS. DREAMS REPEAT BUT USUALLY IN A DIFFERENT
GUISE UNTIL THEIR NEEDS ARE RESOLVED OR FULFILLED.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 257 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 7

"THE MORE EVERYONE CAN CORRECT THESE OLD SOUL INFORMATIONS


THROUGH STUDY AND REASONING AND DREAM CONTENT RESOLVING J THE
FREER ALL WILL BECOME. As YET J MOST PERSONS ARE VICTIMS OF
HABITUAL UNCONTROLLED REACTING WHILE IN MATTER. SO NOW WE
SEE THAT EVERYONE NEEDS TO LEARN NOT ONLY HOW TO COPE IN
MATTER WITH ITS EXPERIENCES WHILE ON EARTHJ BUT WE ALL NEED
TO COPE WITH OUR DREAMS ALSO.

"DREAMS ARE ALWAYS GIVEN US EXACTLY WHEN AND WHERE THEY ARE
NEEDED IN LIFE AND EXPERIENCING. THAT'S WHY WE ASK YOU TO
WRITE DREAMS DOWN AND DATE THEMJ AND MOST IMPORTANTLY J ACCOM-
PANY THEM WITH THE EMOTIONS YOU FEEL AT THEIR ACTION .AND IN-
CLUDE ALL DETAILS J NO MATTER HOW SMALL OR SUBTLE."

WE NODDED TO EACH OTHER AN AFFIRMATION OF PURPOSE.


.
CANDRA
ASKED:

"\~HO
GIVES YOU THESE DREAMS? IT'S TIME WE SPOKE OF THIS.
SOMETIMES IT'S SOUL CONSCIOUSNESS ITSELF WHICH WILL UNLEASH
FILE INFORMATIONS THAT IT BELIEVES TIES IN WITH YOUR DAILY
CONSCIOUS NEEDS. REMEMBERJ ITS SYMBOLS WHICH TALK TO YOU ARE
'MATTER IMAGES' AND 'WORDS.' ANGELS WILL ALSO CONSTRUCT
DREAMS WHILE WATCHING OVER US AND OUR BEHAVIOR WHEN THEY SEE
A NEED GOING UNHEEDED.

"DREAMS ALWAYS ARE TELLING US SOMETHING WE NEED TO KNOW.


THEY ALSO ALWAYS HAVE WITHIN THEM SOMEWHERE A MOTIVE OR AN
URGE OR A WISH J AND ONE OF THESE WILL BE DESIRING TO ATTRACT
YOUR CONSCIOUS-SELF TO ITS AWARENESS SO THAT IT CAN BE EITHER
FULFILLED OR CONTROLLED.

"THESE OLD PRIMITIVE UNFINISHED SOUL IDEAS WILL REMAIN AS


NEGATIVE ENERGIES AND ROIL AROUND IN THE MIND IN RESTLESS MOTION
UNTIL YOUJ AS A CONSCIOUS MATTER BEING J DO SOMETHING ABOUT
THEM. THEY WILL ALSO CONTINUE TO DISCHARGE ANXIETY J FEARJ FRUS-
TRATION AND CONFUSION OF UNDERSTANDING FROM BELOW YOUR CONSCIOUS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 258 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 8

AWAKE SELF SO IT CANNOT DO A CORRECTION. BECAUSE IT CANNOT


SIGHT WHERE THE TROUBLE RESTS.

"HERE AGAIN J GOD ARRANGED A SAFEGUARD FOR US. PRIMITIVE


BUILD-UPS DISCHARGE IN A HIGH EXPLOSION AND WE HAVE A NIGHT-
MARE. IN SLIGHTLY CONFUSED AND SCARY DREAMS J IT WILL BE
CHIPS OFF THE PRIMITIVE CONTENT.

"THEN SOUL OR ANGEL ENTERS HERE AND OFTEN WILL DISGUISE A


HIDDEN MOTIVE OR DRIVE." ITS SYMBOL IS DRESSED UP WITH OUTER
TRAPPINGS J PERHAPS TO COVER A REAL STRONG INNER TENDENCYj FOR
EXAMPLE LET US SAY J AGGRESSIVENESS.

"EXAMPLE: CONSCIOUS IS ASLEEP AND IMMOBILIZED AND YOU DREAM


YOU ARE VALIENTLY FIGHTING SOME SITUATION AND BRAVELY UNCOVER-
ING AN INJUSTICE DONE TO YOU AND YOU WIN. IT WAS A HARD STRUG-
GLE J BUT YOU WON. You AWAKEN WORN OUT AND SOMEWHAT UPSET.
WHAT HAS HAPPENED IN THIS DREAM?

I. MENTALLY YOU ACTUALLY DID FIGHT TO A STANDSTILL


AND YOU DISCHARGED MANY NEGATIVE SOUL ENERGIES
AND ALSO PLANTED NEW THOUGHTS OF RIGHTNESS AND
JUSTICE IN THE DREAM.

2. AT THE SAME TIME IN THIS DREAMJ YOU HAD NO REAL


IDEA OF ~ THE FIGHT WAS OVER, You DID FEEL
THE STRUGGLE FOR RIGHT AGAINST WRONG,

"SO THE SYMBOLS TELL YOU THAT YOU WERE ACTUALLY BATTLING A
HIDDEN LURKING PRIMITIVE LUST OF AGGRESSION J STILL EMOTIONALLY
DESTRUCTIVE IN ITS ENERGIES, As YOU FOUGHT IN THE DREAMJ YOU
WERE CHANGING THE IDEA DATA POLARITY TO A MORE 'THOUGHT OUT'
AND 'CONTROLLED' SURVIVAL.

"AGGRESSION IS NEEDED FOR SURVIVAL J BUT NOT UNCONTROLLED


AGGRESSION. WE NEED PLANNED USES OF ITS FORCES,

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 259 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 9

"Now" BECAUSE OF THE MANNER IN WHICH THE DREAM SYMBOLS WERE


DRESSED UP AS 'JUSTICE' VERSUS 'INJUSTICE'" THE DREAMER COULD
ACCEPT THE ENEMY AGGRESSION IN THEIR PATTERN" AND ACT OUT IN
THE DREAM A WINNING COMBAT. THUS" GAINING A VICTORY OVER THE
PRIMITIVE EMOTION. THE DREAM JUSTIFIED THE FIGHT.

"RECIPROCITY HAPPENS BETWEEN SOUL AND CONSCIOUS-SELF. ALL


THAT TOOK PLACE IN THE MIND OF THIS DREAMER NOW BENEFITED ALL
OF THE MATTER" SOUL AND SPIRIT FORMS.

"WE KNOW MANY NIGHTLY DREAMS" YET NOT ALL ARE RECALLED INTO
THE WAKING CONSCIOUSNESS NOR NEED THEY BE. REALIZE MUCH DOES
GO ON BELOW THE MATTER CONSCIOUSNESS ALL THE TIME AS YOU
SLEEP.

-"WE WOULD LI KE YOU TO REALIZE THAT THE DREAMS YOU DO CATCH


SIGHT OF AND RECALL UPON AWAKENING ARE MEANT TO BE HAULED IN
FOR A CLOSER LOOK AND UNDERSTANDING. THESE REMEMBERED DREAMS
HOLD IMPORTANT MESSAGES SOMEWHERE WITHIN THEIR CONTENTS. SO
WRITE THEM DOWN IMMEDIATELY WHEN YOU AWAKE" EVEN IF IT BE IN
THE MIDDLE OF THE NIGHT."

WE MADE ANOTHER MENTAL NOTE TO DO SO.

"DREAMS HELP US DISCOVER HOW WE ARE MADE UP IN THE MENTAL


AREA. To DEVELOP AN OPEN AND REGULAR EXCHANGE OF DREAM RE-
CALL; COMMAND SOUL JUST BEFORE SLEEP TO HAVE THE CONSCIOUS
PART REMEMBER ITS DREAMS. Do THIS EVERY NIGHT REGULARLY
AND HAVE PEN AND PAPER AND A HANDY LIGHT READY TO RECORD OR
A TAPE RECORDER UPON WHICH YOU CAN REITERATE ITS CONTENTS
AND EMOTIONS.

"As YOU PULL SOUL AND CONSCIOUSNESS TO WORK TOGETHER" YOU


ARE STRENGTHENING YOUR PSYCHIC APPARATUS. SOME TELL US
'I NEVER DREAM!' THIS STATEMENT REVEALS TO US A VERY WEAK
PSYCHIC CONNECTION AREA OF SELF.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 260 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON SEVENTEEN PAGE 10

"CONSCIOUS-SELF IS AND HAS TO BE ALWAYS CONNECTED VIA THE


SILVER CORD AND CHAKRAS. You COULD NOT LIVE IN MATTER WERE
YOU CUT OFF COMPLETELY FROM SOUL-ASTRAL AND SPIRIT. You
WOULDN'T EXIST. You CAN LIVE WITHOUT A PHYSICAL AND ETHERIC}
BUT AT THIS POINT IN COSMIC TIME NOT WITHOUT A SOUL MIND AND
SPIRIT. THROUGH THIS CONNECTEDNESS} DREAMS COME ABOUT AS A
NORMAL AND NATURAL PHENOMENA."

AFTER CANDRA'S TALK} KUTHUMI CAME OVER TO PERSONALLY GREET


US AND ASK SOME QUESTIONS ON OUR VIEWS OF PRESENT EARTH EVENTS.

WE WERE EAGER THIS TIME TO RETURN AND TELL THOSE AWAITING US


OF KUTHUMI AS MANY WERE ACQUAINTED WITH HIS EXISTENCE.

ONCE AGAIN} ALL OF US FROM THE PLANET EARTH DEPARTED TOGETHER


FOR HOME.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 261 of 382
TODAY I DELIBERATELY RELEASE MYSELF TO THE SECURITY
OF INFINITE SPIRIT. My FAITH IS THE FAITH OF GOD)
AND IS WITHOUT CONFUSION.

I KNOW THAT WITHIN ME IS ALL I NEED TO ACT WISELY


AND TO REACT RIGHTLY TO EVERY EXPERIENCE I MOVE
THROUGH.

I AM CONSCIOUS THAT EVERY WORD I SPEAK WILL BE


MANIFESTED BACK TO ME IN IDENTICAL MANNER AS GIVEN.
THEREFORE) I SPEAK IN LOVE. I GIVE IN LOVE AND
I BLESS OTHERS WITH MY LOVE.
AND So IT Is!

'.-,'.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 262 of 382

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 263 of 382
(
MESl-1A ROSE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 264 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN ORANGE &GREEN LIGHTS
THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI
ROSE LESSON EIGHTEEN

"THE ASTRAL LEVELS OF REGION"

"FOR NONE OF US LIVETH TO HIMSELF J AND NO MAN DIETH TO


HIMSELF."
ROMANS 14:7

GURU HAD ASSIGNED ME TO TELL WHAT I KNEW OF THE DIFFERENT


LOWER ASTRAL LEVELS. IN THE SEVEN YEARS OF MY TRAINING IN
THE DESERT J HE HAD TAKEN ME ON MANY TRIPS INTO THE VARIOUS
LEVELS.

EVERYONE DESIRES TO KNOW THESE LEVELS AS WELL AS OUR CASTLE


AREA. SO WHAT ARE THE LOWER LEVELS OF ASTRAL LIKE? MANY
PSYCHICS CATCH BRIEF GLIMPSES BUT THESE CONTACTS ARE LIMITEDJ
NO DOUBT BECAUSE THE MESSAGES THEY BRING FROM FRIENDS AND
LOVED ONES ARE WHAT IS IMPORTANT TO COME THROUGH.

THE UNKNOWN ALWAYS HOLD US IN A SENSE OF UNEASINESS AND IN-


SECURITY J EVEN WHEN WE TRAVEL TO NEW PLACES AND ENVIRONMENTS
HERE ON EARTH. How MUCH MORE STRANGE WILL BE OUR EXPECTED
TRAVELS INTO ASTRAL AT OUR FINAL TRANSITION.

IN POINT OF FACT J WE MAKE THE TRIP OFTEN BUT DO NOT RETAIN


ITS MEMORY. WE SLIP EACH NIGHT INTO THE ETHERIC HIGH MATTER
PLANES AND ON INTO ASTRAL IN OUR SLEEP STATE. WE DO NOT FEAR
SO WE NEED NOT FEAR OUR JOURNEY INTO THE ASTRAL. WE NEED
ONLY A CONSCIOUS KNOWLEDGE OF THIS FAMILIAR PATH WE TAKE.
IN SLEEP WE BYPASS THE VEIL OR DOORWAY J FOR WE MAKE BUT A
TEMPORARY JOURNEY. UNLESS WE TRANSIGHT THROUGH SUDDEN VIO-
LENCE J WE WILL NORMALLY MAKE OUR FINAL JOURNEY IN A COMFORTABLE J
LEISURELY AND ENJOYABLE MANNER; NOT FLASHING INTO THE OTHER
DIMENSION AS STANLEY DID. HIS JOURNEY WAS SO LIGHTENING QUICK J
HE WAS NOT AWARE OF PASSING THROUGH THE LOVELY VEIL OF COLOR

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 265 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 2
NOR ANY OF ITS JOURNEY. NOR IN SLEEP ARE WE SOMETIMES AWARE
OF COLORS IN OUR DREAMS. OTHER PERSONS ALWAYS DREAM IN COLOR.
WHAT EACH SEES AND EXPERIENCES WILL DEPEND ON THEIR PERSONAL
DEVELOPMENT. HOWEVER J THERE IS A UNIVERSAL EXPERIENCE COMMON
TO US ALL.

THE ASTRAL REGION HAS MANY WONDERFUL PLACES AND MANY ARE MUCH
LIKE THE EARTH ENVIRONMENTS. THESE LATTER VERY CLOSELY RESEM-
BLE ALL THE EARTH AREAS J BOTH NATURAL AND MAN CREATED.

LET US TAKE THE LOWER LEVELS FIRST. I WAS TAKEN BY GURU TO


VISIT THESE AREAS FOR THE PURPOSE OF WITNESSING THE UNDESIR-
·ABLE AREAS MANY EARN FOR THEMSELVES J EITHER UNKNOWINGLY OR
UNCARINGLY OR PURPOSELY. FEW OF US WOULD EVER DESIRE TO COME
TO SOME OF THESE J YET THEY ARE CROWDED WITH MOBS OF PEOPLE.
THEIR MURKY ATMOSPHERES REMIND ONE OF BIG EARTH CITIES ON A
DARK AND SMOGGY DAY. SHOULDER TO SHOULDER J PEOPLE MOVE IN A
DULL STATE OF CONSCIOUSNESS. THEY ACT AS THOUGH BLIND TO
ONE ANOTHER'S PRESENCE J YET BUMP AND SHOVE ONE ANOTHER.
SOME HUDDLE IN HOPELESS GROUPS J OR IN PLACES RELATED TO THE
KIND THEY LOVED TO GRAVITATE TO FOR PLEASURE WHEN ON EARTH.
HALF HEARTED FIGHTS BREAK OUT J QUICKLY STARTED AND AS QUICKLY
ENDED FROM MENTAL APATHY. THEY SEEK PLEASURES OF THE PHYSICAL
FLESH AND TASTE APPETITES J BUT ARE NO LONGER OF SUCH A FORM
AS CAN GRATIFY THESE HUNGERS THAT THEY HAVE TRAINED THEIR
SOUL TO DESIRE.

WE WENT EVERYWHERE UNSEEN AMONG THE PEOPLE. OVERALL LAY A


DIRTY J DRAB GREY. No COLORS LINGER HEREJ JUST HORRID J UNTIDY
GLOOMINESS.

"CAN THEY NOT GET HELP?" I ASKED GURU.

"OHJ YES. SPORADICALLY SOME WAKE TO DESIRE TO CHANGE; TO


REALIZE THIS PRISON IN WHICH THEY FIND THEMSELVES IS OF THEIR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 266 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 3

OWN MAKING AND DESIRE. THESE PEOPLE ARE SOME OF THE EARTH-
BOUND OF GOD'S CHILDREN. THESE ARE THEY WHO HELD THEIR LOWER
DESIRES AND SELF-INDULGENCES AS THE ONLY REAL IMPORTANT
VALUES."

"Is THIS HELL?" I QUAVERED.

"DEAR ME) NO) ROSE" GURU LAUGHED. "HELL) AS YOU NAME IT)
IS MUCH LOWER IN CONSCIOUSNESS AND ENERGY THAN THIS AREA.
MAN NAMED THESE AREAS) PERDITION OR ·PURGATORY. THESE ARE PLA-
CES OF TORMENT FOR THOSE NOW HERE BECAUSE THEY HOLD ONLY DES-
TRUCTIVE) NEGATIVE THOUGHTS AND DESIRES OF AN EVIL LIKE TEN-
DENCY.

As WE MOVED THROUGH THESE DINGY STREETS AND PASSED BY THEIR


NASTY DILAPIDATED BUILDINGS) I NOTICED HOW DOUBLY HANDICAPPED
ALL PERSONS WERE. "Do THEY EVER GET OUT) GURU?" HIS ANSWER
SURPRISED ME.

"YES) QUITE A FEW YOU SEE NOW WILL WAKE UP AFTER A TIME AND
CRY OUT FOR HELP. THEN WE CAN COME AND HELP THEM TO FREE THEM-
SELVES) BUT UNTIL THEN WE CANNOT HELP FOR WE MUST OBEY THE LAW
TOO. Now) LET US GO TO A LEVEL MANY BELIEVE IS HEAVEN." I
WAS ONLY TOO GLAD TO LEAVE.

STRANGELY) WE DID NOT ENTER A BEAUTIFUL AREA. TRUE) IT WAS


A GREAT IMPROVEMENT UPON WHAT WE HAD JUST LEFT BUT NOTHING
LIKE OUR CASTLE ATMOSPHERE. THE SUN WAS SHINING THROUGH A
PEARLY MIST AND THERE WERE GARDENS AND TREES AND WATERWAYS.

PEOPLE SEEMED BETTER DRESSED AND THE BUILDINGS MORE GRACEFUL


AND BETTER KEPT UP) BUT SOMEHOW THERE WAS AN UNDERLYING
SHODDINESS; AN AIR OF CHEAPNESS) A GAUDY OVERTONE. MANY
CHURCH BUILDINGS WERE HERE AND PEOPLE SEEMED TO BE GOING IN
AND OUT OF THEM. A PSEUDO-RESPECTABILITY LAY EVERYWHERE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 267 of 382
~ERIES IWO
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 4
THE PEOPLE'S FACES~ HOWEVER~ DID NOT LOOK HAPPY. DISCONTENT
AND AVARICE WERE PLAINLY PRINTED. THESE PEOPLE~ TOO~ HAD A
CLOSED IN LOOK. THERE WAS PLENTY OF COLOR HERE BUT A LACK
OF HARMONIOUS BLENDING IN THEIR SHADES~ EVEN IN THE WELL
DRESSED.

"WHY DO THEY THINK THIS IS HEAVEN?" I WONDERED ALOUD.

"I'LL SHOW YOU~" SAID GURU LEADING ME RAPIDLY ALONG A MISTY


PARKWAY PLANTED IN MANY FLOWER DESIGNS. WE SKIMMED DOWN ITS
LONG LENGTH UNTIL AT ITS END A GOLDEN STAIRWAY AROSE INTO THE
AIR AND MIST. ASCENDING AND DESCENDING WERE ANGEL FIGURES.
I PEERED CLOSELY~ THEN IN QUESTION I GLANCED AT GURU. THE
ANGEL FIGURES NEVER GOT OFF THE BOTTOM STAIRS THAT I COULD
SEE~ THEY SIMPLY VANISHED. PERPLEXED~ I WALKED CLOSER BEYOND
A RAILING PUT TO STOP SUCH ACTION. GURU DID NOT STOP ME.
CLOSE UP~ I FOUND ALL WAS ILLUSION AND UNREALITY. GURU WAS
BESIDE ME NOW AND SPOKE:

"BEHOLD~ THE STAIRWAY OF GOLD LEADING INTO HEAVEN FROM GOD."

"THEY BELIEVE THAT?" I EXCLAIMED IN AMAZEMENT.

"DEFINITELY~ AND THEIR COLLECTIVE AND SUSTAINED BELIEF HOLDS


ITS ILLUSION CLEARLY IN PLACE. Now LOOK BEHIND YOU DOWN THE
PARKWAY FROM WHENCE WE TRAVELED."

I DID AND SAW THAT IT~ TOO~ WAS A STREET OF SEEMING GOLD. I
KNEW IT WAS NO SUCH THING AS WE HAD JUST TRAVERSED ITS LENGTH.

"THEY DESIRE IT THIS WAY~" GURU POINTED OUT. "THESE FIT


THEIR ACCEPTED IDEAS OF HEAVEN."

YET FROM THE PEOPLES FACES ALL WAS NOT WELL AND THEIR ILLUSIONS
NOT FILLING THEIR NEEDS. THE REWARDS OF THIS HEAVEN WAS NOT
SATISFYING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 268 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 5
I WAS GLAD WE HAD COME FOR SHOULD I EVER FIND MYSELF ON THIS
LEVELJ I'D KNOW TRULY THOSE GOLDEN STAIRS WERE POINTING TO A
HIGHER AND GREATER HEAVENLY AREA WHERE OUR CASTLE DWELLS.
AND I WOULD QUICKLY SET ABOUT TO EARN ITS RIGHT.

As WE POKED ABOUT IN THIS RATHER STIFF AND UNNATURAL LEVELJ


I STILL COULD NOT DISMISS THE IDEA AND CURIOISITY OF HELL.
I WONDERED WHETHER IT WAS ACTUALLY A PLACE AND LEVEL OR ONLY
MYTHICAL. GURU DID NOT KEEP ME IN DOUBT.

"HELL IS VERY REALJ ROSE J OVER HERE. I SHALL NOT SUBJECT YOU
TO ITS LEVELS J NOR ITS VERY REAL VIOLENCE. EVEN WITH MEJ IT
WOULD BE UNSAFE. MASTERS ONLY ENTER IT IN STRONG GROUPS TO-
GETHER. WITHIN ITS BOUNDERIES DWELL ENTITIES SO PERVERTED OF
MIND IDEAS AND THOUGHTS AND INTENTIONS THAT YOU COULD NEVER
IMAGINE. THESE ARE THEY OF SUCH MENTAL IMBALANCE AND EVIL
DESIRES AS ARE INDESCRIBABLE. EVIL SOULS OF OUR MAN STREAM
DWELL HERE WHO HAVE DEVELOPED IN SELF THE DEMONIC TENDENCIES.
ALTHOUGH 'DEMON' IS BUT A SYMBOL SIGNATURE J THESE ENTITIES
ARE A DANGER TO OTHERS OF OUR MAN STREAM; A DANGER BECAUSE
GOD IN HIS WISDOM CUT THEM OFF FROM THE PRIVILEGE OF REBIRTH
INTO MATTER. MANY OF THESE POSSESS HIGH EVIL INTELLIGENCE J
HOWEVER J AND SOME EVEN KNOW THE COSMIC LAWS WELL AND HOW THEY
WORK.

IT HAS BEEN KNOWN THAT SOME OF THESE EVIL SOULS HAVE USED
THESE LAWS TO OVERSHADOW WEAKJ NEUTRAL SOULS AND FORCED THEM
WHILE ON EARTH TO SUCCUMB TO EVIL ACTS UNDER THEIR DIRECTION.
WHENEVER THEY CAN ATTACH THEMSELVES THROUGH MENTAL CHANNELS J
THEY DO SO AND LEAD THE WEAK ASPECTED EARTH PERSON INTO
UNCONTROLLED AND VICIOUS ACTS.

SHUDDERING J I MOVED CLOSER TO GURU WHO PUT HIS ARM ABOUT ME.

"AT VERY RARE TIMES J THE EVIL SOULS DO MANAGE TO OUST ANOTHER
SOUL WHILE IT IS IN A COMA; THESE CASES ARE FEWJ FORTUNATELY J

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 269 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 6

AND OCCUR WHEN VIOLENT SHOCK CAUSED UNCONSCIOUSNESS. WHEN


THE SOUL ENDEAVORS TO RE-ENTER THE BODY FORM J IT CANNOT FOR
IT'S INHABITED BY THE EVIL SOUL."

I DIDN'T LIKE THIS NEWS AT ALLJ BUT IT DID ACCOUNT FOR SOME
DRASTIC PERSONALITY CHANGES IN INCARNATES WHICH IS ON RECORD.

GURU REASSURED:
"SEEKERS AND LABORING PERSONS WORKING IN IMPROVEMENT OF THEIR
PATTERNS NEED NOT WORRY ABOUT SUCH AN EXPERIENCE; BECAUSE YOU
ARE RIGHT NOW IN A CONNECTED STATE WITH US J YOUR MASTERS.
THEREFORE J NO SUCH SUBSTITUTION COULD TAKE PLACE FOR YOUR
EVERY MOMENT IS KNOWN TO US AND YOU ARE IN QUa kARE FOR AS
LONG AS YOU ARE SEEKING TRUTH AND WISDOM AND ALSO IN A CLOSE
COMMUNIcATION WITH GOD THE FATHER."

I RELAXED AT THIS. THEN I BEGAN TO WONDER ABOUT THE CASES


WHERE A COUPLE OF OUR STUDENTS COULD NOT GIVE UP THEIR EGO-
TISTICAL STATUS AND OPINIONS AND HAD LEFT THE SOUL GROUP WORK.

"WHAT OF THOSE TWO WHO FELL AWAY BECAUSE THEY COULDN'T FACE
THEIR FAULTS?" WAS MY TREMULOUS INQUIRY.

"DEAR CHILDJ" MURMURED MY LITTLE MASTER TENDERLY. "THEN IT


WOULD BE THEY WHO SEVERED THE CHAIN OF OUR PROTECTION J NOT
US. REMEMBERJ r·1ARSHA TELLI NG YOU THAT YOU ARE THE ONES THAT
MUST COME TO US?" I NODDED. "IT'S ALSO YOUR CHOICE WHETHER
YOU WILL REMAIN IN OUR CARE."

"OHJ GURU J PLEASE NEVER LET ME GO!" I CRIED. "DEAREST LITTLE


ONE J I CANNOT LET YOU GO IF YOU "WILL" TO STAY." THUS J HE
COMFORTED ME.

"LET US NOW TALK OF HAPPIER THINGS. DESCRIBE THE LOVELINESS


OF TRANSITION AS YOU KNOW IT FROM COMING BACK AND FORTH INTO
EARTH ON YOUR MISSIONS J ROSE."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 270 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 7

I COULD OBEY GURU IN THIS. I MANAGED TO GAIN CONTROL OVER


MY SOUL'S LURKING FEAR ASPECTSj I REVIEWED CONSCIOUS EXITS
I'D MADE FROM MANY PHYSICAL FORMS. SO HERE IS MY FIRST
HAND ACCOUNT:

BECAUSE ALL MINE WERE NORMAL J NOT VIOLENT DEPARTURES FROM


THE BODY J ALL WERE VERY RELAXED J CALM AND ENJOYABLE. You
WILL FEEL IT'S LIKE YOU ARE PEACEFULLY FLOATING ON FLUFFY
SHEEPS DOWN WITHOUT A CARE OR WORRY. YOUR FIRST SENSATION
IN THIS PLACIDITY WILL BE THE MANY RINGING OF BELLS IN YOUR
EARS. SOME PERSONS ALSO HEAR THE RUSHING OF WINDS AND KNOW
A FEELING OF BEING CARRIED UPWARD. You NEED NOT FEEL CON-
CERN HERE FOR YOU AND YOUR EGO SELF ARE SAFELY TRAVELING UP
A WELL KNOWN KIGHTLY PATHWAY. ONCE A CERTAIN POINT IS
REACHED IN A HEIGHT OF CONSCIOUSNESS~ ALL WILL BECOME QUIET
AND ALSO BECOME VERY LIGHT. Now YOU WILL FEEL SO FREEJ AS
THOUGH A HEAVY LOAD WERE GONE FROM YOU. PERHAPS AT THIS
TIMEJ YOU WILL S.EE A SCENE UNFOLD AROUND YOU J OR YOU MAY
LOOK BACK AT YOUR BODY •. IT IS IMPORTANT IF YOU DO LOOK BACK
TO RELEASE YOURSELF AND TURN AWAY EVEN FROM LOVED ONES LEFT
BEHIND. IMPORTANT NOW TO LOOK ONWARD AND UPWARD AND EXPECT
SOMETHING WONDERFUL.

SHOULD YOUR PAST LIFE NOW REVIEW J EXPECT CERTAIN REGRETS J


BUT DO NOT DWELL IN GUILT UPON THEM. THIS IS NOT THE TIME
OR PLACE FOR CORRECTING MISTAKES. To LINGER OVER THEM COULD
HOLD THE ENTITY CAPTIVE AT THIS STAGE J WHEN THE NORMAL PRO-
CEDURE IS TO MOVE ON. You ARE IN A TIMELESS MOMENT NOW AND
CAN REST IN ONLY LlVING VIBRATIONS. No FEAR OR GUILT OR EVEN
SADNESS WILL BE FELT WHEN YOU CAN RECOGNIZE YOU ARE A GOD
CHILD AND THIS IS A NORMAL PART OF OUR FATHER'S PLAN.

SOMEONE FAMILIAR TO YOU WILL NOW COME TO WELCOME YOU. FAMILY J


FRIENDS J YOUR ANGELSJ MASTERS OR HIGHER BEINGS WHOM YOU WILL

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 271 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON EIGHTEEN PAGE 8

WELCOME. How FORTUNATE ARE WE STUDENTS AND SEEKERS FOR WE


CAN NOW RECOGNIZE CERTAIN PERSONS HERE IN OUR SOUL FAMILY.

FEAR OFTEN INTERFERES IN OUR ASTRAL SEEING ABILITY SO FORGET


AND DISMISS THE OLD MYTH OF DEATH BEING PAINFUL. How CAN
DEATH BE PAINFUL? PAIN IS ONLY FELT AND EXPERIENCED IN THE
LOWER PHYSICAL BQnY AND AT DEATH WE HAVE LEFT THAT AND TRAVELED
INTO THE ETHERIC FORM AND ARE ABOUT TO LEAVE IT AND GO ON INTO
OUR ASTRAL-BODY.

AFTER GURU APPROVED OF MY DESCRIPTION J WE THEN TRAVELED


TOGETHER ON INTO THE HIGHER ASTRAL INTELLECTUAL LEVELS. THESE
ARE TRULY THE HEAVEN OF OUR DREAMS. THESE PLACES ARE CLEAR
AND SPARKLING AND BEAUTIFUL. THEIR CITIES ARE LIKE ALABASTER
AND LAID OUT IN ARTISTIC DESIGNS. NATURE HERE EXCELS IN -
COLOR J IN PARKS AND FLOWER FILLED ESPLANADES. MIGHTY TEMPLES
OF KNOWLEDGE AND WISDOM REST IN THIS LEVEL. HUGE SPREADING
COLLEGES OF CREATIVE ARTSJ SCIENCES AND COSMIC WISDOM ABOUND.
GOLDEN BEACHES FRINGE THE SHORELINES J AND OVERALL LIES AN AIR
OF EXQUISITE HAPPINESS. FACES ALL SHINE WITH GOODWILL AND
CONTENTMENT. BEAUTIFUL AND COLORFUL RAIMENT ADORNS EVERYONE
IN ECLECTIC COLOR VARIATIONS.

TRULY GOD HAS PREPARED WISELY FOR ALL HIS CHILDREN; GIVING
EACH AND EVERYONE THAT WHICH THEY BELIEVE THEY DESIRE; YET
LEAVING AVENUES OF THE MIND WHICH CAN OPEN AND CHANGE OUR
PRESENT DESIRES FOR RECEIVING SOMETHING BETTER.

FROM HERE WE JOURNEYED EVEN HIGHER TO COME TO OUR CASTLE


HOME PLACE. HERE I RESTED IN LOVING COMPANY AWHILE. THEN
I TRAVELED ALONE HOMEWARD TO MY 'BELOVED ONES' OF EARTH.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 272 of 382
I
t
1
'1
I
I
1I
1
I

:;;l.~~o>O ~ .

'It" As I ASK FOR GUIDANCE FROM GOD) I HAVE RE-


ESTABLISHED PEACE AND HARMONY WITHIN MY SELF
AND MY AFFAIRS.

My
~;;i
THOUGHTS ARE ORDERLY AND I AM UNDISTURBED
BECAUSE I LISTEN TO THE STILL SMALL VOICE
WITHIN.
!~ff
0_< 0'0

:,-,. °

:.:~:-:; . PEACE IS AT THE CENTER OF EVERYTHING. THEREFORE}


IT DWELLS WITHIN ME AND I DECLARE DIVINE ORDER
IS TAKING PLACE IN MY THOUGHTS AND IN MY AFFAIRS.

So LET IT BE!

(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 273 of 382
(

---,--------,--
(

KASYAPA) Oll V!- BRANCH OF PEACE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 274 of 382
(

(
BUDDHIST· TEMPLE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 275 of 382
SERIES Two ROSE &BLUE LIGHTS
LESSON NINETEEN

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON NINETEEN

"THE INNER ROOM OF SOUL"

"LET EVERY SOUL BE SUBJECT UNTO THE HIGHER POWERS. FOR THERE
IS NO POWER BUT OF GOD. THE POWERS THAT BE ARE ORDAINED OF
GOD."
ROMANS 31:1

UPON ENTERING THE ASTRAL REALM} A LOVELY PICTURE MET OUR


EYES. LILAC AGAINST A ROSE-PINK SKY HOVERING DREAMLIKE OVER
A SILVER SEA. BELOW THE UNEARTHLY VISION OF SHINING BATTLE-
MENTED WALLSj TAKING SHAPE IN THE GENTLE MORNING SUNLIGHT.
ALL WAS TOWERS AND CLUSTERING DOMES AND SPARKLING ARCHES.

WE WERE IN A DIFFERENT AND UNKNOWN PORTION OF THE CASTLE AREA.


A CROSS OF GOLD STOOD OUT AGAINST THE BLUE SKY. TEMPLE CHIMES
ROSE UP TO SOOTH OUR HEARING. No PLACE ON EARTH CAN COMPARE
TO THIS} OUR ASTRAL HOME.

As WE FLOATED NEARER} THERE WAS THE SOFT SOUND OF FLUTTERING


PENNANTS LIKE THE FLAP OF MANY BIRD WINGS. GENTLY} WE LOWERED
TO LAND UPON A VAST SLAB OF GLEAMING WHITE MARBLE BESIDE A
BUDDHIST TEMPLE. BEFORE US WAS A FLOURISH OF ARCHES. CAUTI-
OUSLY ENTERING} WE SAW A HUGE ROTUNDA WITH COLUMNS REACHING
SKYWARD TO PAINTED VAULTED CEILING. THE WALLS IN PLACES WERE
HUNG IN SILK} WHISPERING WITH ELABORATE EMBROIDERED DESIGNS.
A HIGH ROUND PEDESTAL ROSE BENEATH THE CEILING DOME AND UPON
IT AN IMPRESSIVE FIGURE STOOD. HE SPOKE THESE WORDS:

"WELCOME TO THE SANCTUM OF HOLY WISDOM. HEREIN DWELLS THE


ESSENCE OF BUDDHA} ONE OF THE SUN REALM'S SEVEN LORDS."

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 276 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEEN PAGE 2

ITS SPECIAL ATMOSPHERE CARESSED US AS THE FOUNTAIN ON OUR


RIGHT TINKLED ITS HAPPINESS. ITS SPRAY REFLECTED JEWELLED
RAINBOW HUES. ITS BASIN BRIMMED IN CLEAR COLOR SPARKLES.
WE LOOKED BACK OUT THROUGH THE ARCHES AT THE GREEN HILLS
FROM WHENCE WE HAD COME. THEN AT ALL THE PEOPLE AROUND US
AND GLORIED IN OUR WELCOME.

A LOUD BONG FROM THE TEMPLE GONG HAD ALL JOIN TOGETHER BEFORE
THE PEDESTAL. As OUR FRIENDS CHANTED UNKNOWN MANTRAS J WE
LOOKED IN WONDER AT THE HEIGHT AND BRILLIANCE OF THE TEMPLE'S
CEILING; THEN AT WALLS WHICH WERE A PERFECTLY BLENDED RICHNESS
OF COLORS. PART OF THE WALLS WERE COVERED IN RICH SILK J THE
REST WAS POLISHED PORPHYRY* AND REFLECTED THE MANY SMALL SWING-
ING LAMPS IN POOLS OF GOLD.

(* PORPHYRY IS A ROCK HAVING RED AND WHITE FELDSPAR CRYSTALS


EMBEDDED IN A FINE DARK RED OR PURPLE GROUNDMASS)

THE CHANTING OVER J THE NEW MASTER BEING INTRODUCED HIMSELF.

"CHILDREN OF EARTHJ I AM MASTER KASYAPA. I REPRESENT 'CETANA'


(THOUGHT)J THE REGROUPING OF IDEAS. THIS SANCTUARY IS OF OUR
LORD BUDDHA. WE ARE HAPPY TO RECEIVE YOUR PRESENCE." ALL
EYES TURNED OUR WAY IN SOFT WELCOME. WE COULD FEEL THEIR WARM
REGARD.

"KNOW J MY LITTLE EARTH ONES J THAT SOUL ALSO HAS A TEMPLE ROOM
WITHIN IT. THIS ROOM CAN BE ENTERED ONLY THROUGH MEDITATION.
You ARE ALLOWED TO ENTER THIS SOUL ROOM THROUGH THE MERITS
YOU POSSESS IN SOUL-MIND.

"FROM THE CENTER OF THIS SECRET ROOM CAN BE RECEIVED CLEAR


DIRECTION ON HOW YOU MAY REACH DIVINE LOVE AND PEACE AND GOOD."

THE VIBRATIONS FAIRLY HUMMED AS HE SAID THIS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 277 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEE~ PAGE 3

"UPON SUCCEEDING TO THE ENTRY OF INNER SOUL~ YOU WILL KNOW


AT LAST YOU HAVE ATTAINED THE PLACE AND MOMENT OF PERFECT
BALANCE IN SOME THREE ASPECTS OF YOUR PERSONAL PATTERN.
THESE MOMENTS WILL NOT BE FREQUENT BUT THEY WILL BE UNMIS-
TAKABLE TO YOUR AWARENESS.

"As YOU GROW AND BECOME MORE AND MORE TO KNOW THESE PERFECT
MOMENTS OF MEDITATION~ WITH THEIR HIGH EXPERIENCES~ ITS HIGH
ATMOSPHERE WILL REMAIN WITH YOU FOR LONGER PERIODS OF TIME.
NEW INDICATIONS WILL UNFOLD OF THE WONDROUS LIFE TO COME TO
YOU UPON TRANSITION FROM EARTH.

"No LONGER NEED YOU WAIT FOR THESE JOYOUS MOMENTS. MANY OF
EARTH HAVE ENTERED THIS INNER SACRED CHAMBER OF THE SOUL AND
SEEN FOR THEMSELVES ITS WONDERS AND SIGHTED THEIR PROMISED
~ULFILLMENT."

A HAPPY TREMOR RAN THROUGH THE AUDIENCE SEATED BELOW THE


PEDESTAL.

"HERE IN YOUR OWN INNER ROOM OF SOUL IS WHERE EACH SHALL FIN-
ALLY QUENCH AND CONSUMMATE THAT STRANGE YEARNING AND LONGING
YOU KNOW AT TIMES WHILE TRAVELING EARTH.

"THIS INNER ROOM OF SOUL IS A PLACE ONLY YOU WALK WITHIN


ALONE. HERE LIES THE REVELATION OF YOUR PURPOSE AND EVENTUAL
DESTINATION IN GOD'S PLAN. IT AWAITS YOUR ENTRY."

A PURE WHITE LIGHT SEEMED TO SHINE ALL AROUND KASYAPA AND THE
GROUP MURMERED AT ITS RAYS WHICH SEEMED TO G1VE OUT OFF-SHOOTS
WHICH MAGNETIZED TO OUR INDIVIDUAL ASTRAL BODIES.

"LET US SPEAK NOW OF THE IMPORTANT GATEWAY AREA LEADING INTO


SOUL." KASYAPA STRETCHED OUT HIS ARMS OVER US AND LIGHTENING
LIKE STREAKS SPRANG FORTH OVER OUR HEADS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 278 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEEN PAGE 4
"EARTH CHILDREN" THIS GATEWAY IS IN YOUR ETHERIC FORM. FROM
OUT OF ITS THROAT' AND BROW CHAKRA" MANY TRAILS LEAD. You WILL
ALWAYS ENTER ASTRAL THROUGH ONE OF THESE PASSAGES."

I HAD ALWAYS HAD THE IDEA WE TOOK THE SAME ROUTE EVERY TIME
SO THIS WAS SOMETHING TO THINK UPON LATER.

"HERE IN THE HIGH ETHERIC REALMS OF MATTER" MANY WONDERFUL


THINGS TAKE PLACE. THIS IS A STOPOVER OF REAL IMPORTANCE AS
WE MAKE OUR FINAL TRIP. IT IS A PLACE FOR UNLOADING MANY
EXTRANEOUS MIND IDEAS. Now" AT THIS TIME" YOU ARE COMPLETELY
DISCONNECTED FROM THE OLD PHYSICAL BODY SO YOU HAVE A NEW
FREEDOM FOR ACTION. WITH THE HELP OF YOUR ANGEL FRIENDS" YOU
COMMENCE A SHORT PROGRAM FOR DISCARDING USELESS SUBJECTIVE
MIND DATA. As THIS ACTION PROCEEDS" YOU EXPERIENCE A LIGHT-
ENING OF YOUR EMOTIONS. THEN COMES THE TIME WHEN ANGELS AND
HIGHER ONES SEPARATE FROM YOU THE ELEMENTS BORROWED FROM OUT
OF UNIVERSE WHICH MADE UP YOUR LAST PERSONALITY AND DESTINY
PATTERN. THESE ARE RELEASED AND GO BACK INTO THE STARS AND
HEAVENLY CONSTELLATIONS FROM WHENCE THEY CAME. JUST AS THE
PHYSICAL FORM'S MATTER ELEMENTS DECAY AND GO BACK INTO THEIR
ORIGINAL ATOMIC PARTICLES" SO DO THESE INVISIBLE PERSONALITY
INFLUENCES OF ETHERIC GO BACK TO THEIR LOGO OWNERS FROM WHENCE
THE LORDS OF KARMA PURCHASED THEM.

"THE ETHERIC HIGHER ATMOSPHERES ARE SUITED FOR THIS TASK OF


DISPERSING OR COLLECTING OF THE INVISIBLE ELEMENTS NEEDED BY
EVERY ENTITY UPON FIRST ENTRY OR FINAL EXIT OF ITS REALM.

"WHEN THIS TASK IS COMPLETE" SOMEONE COMES FOR YOU AND YOU
ARE IN THEIR CARE FROM THEN ON."

WE LOOKED AT ONE ANOTHER" CONTENT TO KNOW THESE FACTS.

"HOWEVER" IF AN EARTH ENTITY IS BUT LIMITED IN THEIR AWAKENING"


THESE DEAR ONES USUALLY REMAIN ASLEEP ALL THE WAY OVER INTO

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 279 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEEN PAGE 5
ASTRAL. THEREFORE~ THEY KNOW NOTHING OF THIS PERIOD NOR DO
THEY KNOW OF THE CONTENTS OF THEIR MIND FILES WHICH WILL HAVE
BEEN REMOVED.

"ETHERIC IS ALSO WHERE CERTAIN MUNDANE IDEAS OF PARTIAL VALUE


WILL BE DEPOSITED FOR THE ENTITY TO PICK UP ONCE AGAIN WHEN
THEY RETURN TO TAKE UP ANOTHER INCARNATION. THIS DATA WILL
BE OF SUCH A WEAK AND UNFINISHED STATE~ IT WILL NOT HAVE
POSSESSED SUFFICIENT MATERIAL FOR ANASTRAL SCHOOLING~ BUT IT
WILL EVENTUALLY HAVE AN IMPORTANCE TO THE GOD CHILD ON THE
NEXT WHEEL OF LIFE.

"THE LORDS OF WISDOM AND KARMA SUPERVISE THESE DECISIONS.


THEY HAVE YOUR COMPLETE RECORDS FROM WHICH TO PREMISE THEIR
SELECTIONS.

"THESE TASKS MUST TAKE PLACE WITHIN THE MATTER REGIONS. THESE
TASKS OPERATE WITHIN THE AREAS FOR RENOVATION OF THE MIND CON-
TENTS. MATTER~ BEING THE AREA OF CONSTANT CHANGE~ ITS LAWS
OF COMPOSITION AND DISSOLUTION SERVE THIS WORK IN ETHERIC.

"THIS MATTER UNITY OF FORCES WORKING TOGETHER HELP OUR INTELLI-


GENCE. THEY SEPARATE DELUSION FROM REALITY. THIS ETHERIC
ACTION OF CLEANSING AND SORTING OF THE MIND CONTENTS ASSURES
EVERY GOD CHILD A FRESH CHANCE FOR NEW AND BETTER PROGRESSION
EVERY CYCLE."

WE COULD SEE HOW IT WOULD.

"IT IS UPON THESE REPEATED CYCLES OF KARMIC EXPERIENCING IN


ALL THE REGIONS OF UNIVERSE WHERE THE TRANSMIGRATION OF SOUL
OCCURS.

"WE DO NOT TRAVEL MATTER WITHOUT SIGNPOSTS TO GUIDE OUR WAY.


THE GREAT ONES OF OUR MAN STREAM LEFT US MANY RULES WE CAN ADOPT
FOR SUCCESS. LORD BUDDHA GAVE HUMANITY THE "NOBLE EIGHTFOLD
PATH."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 280 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEEN PAGE 6

HE DID THIS AS HE PRECEDED LORD CHRIST AND PREPARED THE WAY


FOR THE FUTURE AND HIS COMING.

"BUDDHA HAD IN HIS AGE TIME OF EARTH AN ENORMOUS NUMBER OF


ADHERENTS. ~~NY OF YOU WERE IN THEIR RANKS. THEREFORE J IN
AGES PAST J YOU BENEFITED FROM BUDDHA'S PRINCIPLES."

WE RECEIVED A RECALL OF THIS HERE AT THIS MOMENT.

"REALIZE NO ONE LORD OF OUR MANSTREAM HIERARCHY OF BEINGS


KNOWS ALL THE UNIVERSAL WISDOMS J NOR DID ANY LORD BRING ITS
ENTIRETY TO EARTH. MANKIND CANNOT YET ASSIMILATE ALL KNOW-
LEDGES REQUIRED TO EVENTUALLY BE KNOWN REGARDING THIS UNIVERSAL
WISDOM~ NEITHER EAST OR WEST HOLD ITS ENTIRE CONTENTS OF THIS
GOD WISDOM.

"LET US SEE HOW BUDDHA'S AND CHRIST'S PRESENTATIONS AND OUR


PRESENT REVELATIONS ALL ASSUME A HARMONY OF PURPOSE TOGETHER.
HERE ARE THE EIGHT STEPS OF BUDDHA'S RULES:

1. RIGHT BELIEF 5. RIGHT MEANS OF LIVLIHOOD


2. RIGHT AIMS 6. RIGHT ENDEAVOR
3. RIGHT SPEECH 7. RIGHT MINDFULNESS
4. RIGHT ACTION 8. RIGHT MEDITATION

How FAMILIAR THESE SOUND TO OUR EARS.

Now A TEARFUL LADY SEATED AMONG US RAISED HER HAND. KASYAPA


GAVE HER PERMISSION TO SPEAK.

"SRI KASYAPA J I AM DESOLATE. I HAVE WORKED SO HARD DOWN THE


AGES AND WAS SO HAPPY IN MY PROGRESS BUT MY SOULMATE IS NO-
WHERE HERE. OTHERS ARE UNITED WITH THEIR SOULMATES WORKING
TOGETHER} BUT I REMAIN ALONE. WHAT AM I TO DO J HOLY ONE?"

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 281 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEEN PAGE 7
You COULD SEE THE COMPASSION IN HIS FACE AS HE SENT THE BLUE
HEALING AND SOOTHING RAYS TO SETTLE AROUND HER TEARFUL FIGURE.

"AHJ IT IS INDEED HEARTBREAKtNG WHEN A SOULMATE FAILS. AL-


THOUGH EACH JEWEL SEED HALF IS THE COMPLIMENT OF THE OTHER
AND IT IS GOD'S WISH BOTH SHALL EVENTUALLY WORK TOGETHER AND
REUNITE AS A WHOLE SELF; THIS SOMETIMES DOES NOT TRANSPIRE.
THEREFOREJGOD HAS PREPARED FOR THAT AND SHOULD ONE HALF OF
THE SEED SUCCEED AND THE OTHER NEVER CATCH UP J THE SUCCESSFUL
SEED ENTITY CAN UNITE WITH A CLOSE COSMIC FRIEND WHO MAY BE
SITUATED ALONE ALSO AND WITHOUT THEIR MATE. IF YOU ARE THE
MALE HALF OF YOUR JEWEL J THE COSMIC FEMALE HALF WOULD NOW
RETURN WITH YOU TO YOUR JEWEL AWAITING IN PURE SPIRIT REALMS.
IF YOU ARE THE FEMALE HALF OF YOUR JEWEL J YOU WOULD GO TO
.YOUR MALE COSMIC FRIEND'S JEWEL. You WILL 'NQI ~ YOUR
EFFORTS J BUT YOUR LAGGARD MATE WILL LOSE THEIR PLACE ON THE
GOD PATH AND FAIL TO RETURN TO THE JEWEL. THERE WILL BE SOME
EMPTY JEWELS WHEN WE ALL RETURN AT UNIVERSE' END. GRIEVE NOT J
LITTLE ONE J YOU HAVE EARNED YOUR SALVATION SO FAR. KEEP UP
YOUR GOOD WORK AND ALL SHALL BE WELL. YOUR LAGGARD MATE CAN
STILL HAVE TIME TO AWAKE AND WORK TO REACH YOU SO LONG AS
EARTH IS INCARNATING IN HER PRESENT FOURTH ROUND. PRAY FOR
YOUR MATE."

ANOTHER OF THE GROUP ASKED KASYAPA; "WHO WAS YOUR SOUL MATEJ
HOLY ONE?" I'M SURE HE WAS A GREAT SOUL"

"YESJ PAJI CHILD J SHE IS GREAT. I AM OUR MALE HALF. SHE WAS
A CEYLON MONK IN 430 A.Di NAMED GAYA. SHE J THROUGH HER ADHER-
ENCE TO BUDDHA'S TEACHINGS J PUT TOGETHER AN CYCLOPEDIA CALLED
"PATH OF HOLYNESS." SHE BECAME A MASTER OF OUR BUDDHA'S
DOCTRINE AND ALL ITS CONTAINED KNOWLEDGES. THESE COMMENTARIES
STILL EXIST ON EARTH TODAY. HER ACCOMPLISHMENTS HAVE FURTHERED
OUR JEWELS' PROGRESS AND GIVEN US A SPLENDOR OF DIVINE HEIGHT.
IJ AT THAT TIMEJ WAS ALSO ON EARTH AND ATTAINED FOR MYSELF IN

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 282 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON NINETEEN PAGE 8

TIBET THE STATUS OF LAMA. IT WAS MY THIRD INCARNATION TO


REACH THAT HEIGHT. WITHIN ALL THE LORDS AND CHRIST'S TEACHINGS
RUN THE ORIGINAL THREADS OF THE TRUTHS BROUGHT TO EARTH BY
OUR ELDER TAURIAN BROTHERS. ITS FRAGMENTS ARE IN ALL RELIGIONS.
THERE IS NO RELIGION HIGHER THAN TRUTH.

"CLEAR YOUR MIND FILES AND PLACE THESE TRUTHS IN THEIR VACAN-
CIES AND YOU WILL BE WITH US ON THAT DAY WHEN WE ALL RETURN
INTO OUR JEWELS AND TRAVEL BACK HOME INTO GODJ OUR BELOVED
PARENT."

MANY CAME UP AND GREETED US AFTER KASYAPA HAD FINISHED HIS


LECTURE.

As WE AT LAST RECEIVED OUR PARTING BLESSING FROM KASYAPA J A


BREEZE TOOK US UPON HER CURRENT WAVELENGTH AND FLOWER SCENTS
ACCOMPANIED OUR HOMEWARD JOURNEY INTO MATTER.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 283 of 382
~: -.. .

1
)'

r
j,
!
\
THE ORIGINAL THINKERJ THINKS THROUGH ME NOW. I
. '.!

.1
AM NEVER SEPARATED FROM THIS THINKER. ALL THINGS
: j
;'1 ARE POSSIBLE WITH GOD FOR GOD IS ALL THINGS. GOD
~
IS WITHIN ALL AND WITHIN ME. I PERMIT HIM TO
FLOW IDEAS INTO MY CONSCIOUSNESS AND I AM ALERT
,1

,j TO NEW IDEAS.
,!
I DIVINE INTELLIGENCE CONSTANTLY POURS GOOD IDEAS J
d THOUGHTS J LOVE AND JOY THROUGH ME. I BELIEVE
i .,
THI S. I ACCEPT THI S. 1
1

AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 284 of 382
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 285 of 382
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 286 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY BLUE &YELLOW LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY
"OUT OF THE PAST"

"EVERY GOOD GIFT AND EVERY PERFECT GIFT IS FROM ABOVE} AND
COMETH DOWN FROM THE FATHER OF LIGHTS} WITH WHOM IS NO VARI-
ABLENESS} NEITHER SHADOW OF TURNING. OF HIS OWN WILL BEGAT
HE US WITH THE WORD OF TRUTH} THAT WE SHOULD BE A KIND OF
fIRST FRUITS OF HIS CREATURES."
2 JAMES 1:17-18

EMERGING FROM THE COLOR MIST} WE COULD SEE HIGH OVER THIS
ASTRAL WORLD. THE CLEARNESS SHOWED A COLORFUL TERRAIN BELOW.
MOVING LANQUIDLY ALONG} THREE SWANS BEAT ACROSS OUR LINE OF
-VISION. THEIR GREAT AND POWERFUL WINGS GLORIOUS IN THE SUN-
LIGHT. THEY SETTLED DOWN UPON THE POND IN DEEP REPOSE.

WE NOW LANDED IN THIS SHINING WORLD OF PALE GOLDEN LEAVES.


THESE WERE BEING TREMBLED AS THE FAINT BREEZE FINGERED THEM.
WILD FLOWER HEADS TOSSED IN WELCOME. HERE IN THIS FAR AND
SHELTERED SPOT} THE PUNGENT SCENT OF CHRYSANTHEMUMS DRIFTED
AND MINGLED WITH THE SCENT OF PINE TREES.

A GIANT SYCAMORE LEANED ITS FRAGRANCE OVER THE POND. WE


WALKED OVER TO MEET ITS SHELTERING OCCUPANTS. MARK KENSINGTON}
FREDERICK} HOWARD} STANLEY AND HENRY} WE KNEW. OF THE OTHERS
THERE} THESE WERE EARTH VISITORS LIKE OURSELVES; LILY KNEW
SOME OF THEM.

TODAY WE WERE TO BE FILLED IN MORE FULLY REGARDING MANKIND'S


DOWNWARD JOURNEY IN UNIVERSE. WHEN ALL WAS QUIET} MARK BEGAN:

"IN EARTH'S SECOND ROUND INCARNATION} WE YOUNGEST OF GOD'S


CHILDREN WERE STILL UNDER THE CARE OF LOGOI BEINGS. YET
THESE WERE THE FLAME LORDS} WHO DWELT IN THE FLAME REGIONS

<I) REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 287 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 2

OF UNIVERSE. THEY J TOO J WERE ASSISTED BY ANGELS. THIS TIME


BY ARCHANGELS CALLED ARCHIA J WHO HOLD ENERGY FORCES LIKE UNTO
THE SOLAR SUN.

"THE FLAME BEINGS OPERATE UNDER TITLES SUCH AS LORDS OF WISDOM;


LORDS OF FORM; LORDS OF MOVEMENT; LORDS OF MIND AND MANY MORE.
WHEREAS THE LOGOI WHO FIRST BROUGHT US FORTH IN THE FIRST ROUND
ONE WERE UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE SERAPHIM STREAMJ THESE FLAME
BEINGS ARE UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE LOGOI THRONES. (SEE ILL-
USTRATION IJ LESSON 4 AND ILLUSTRATION IJ LESSON 11)

"IN THE SECOND INCARNATION OF EARTHJ OUR MANSTREAM RECEIVED


ITS PATTERNS OF INDIVIDUAL PERSONALITY AND VARIED PHYSICAL
ASPECTS. ALSO J OUR NERVOUS SYSTEM LAYOUT AND BRAIN STRUCTURE
INTIMATIONS.

"THESE FLAMES AND ARCHIA INCORPORATED MANY SUCCESSFUL APPEN-


DAGES FROM THEIR OWN INTERNAL FORM PATTERNS. THEY EXPERIMENTED
FIRST BY FAITHFULLY FOLLOWING THE ENERGY PATTERNS WITHIN EVOL-
VED MINERALS J LIKE THE CRYSTAL. THEN THEY DREW THESE INTO
HIGHER DESIGN. EVENTUALLY J THEY GAVE THESE FORMS TO THE SUB-
LIFE PLANT KINGDOMS AS VEHICLES. ELEVATING AND ADDING TO THE
PLANT LAY-OUTJ THEY EVOLVED THE ANIMAL AND MAMMAL LIFE-FORMS
OF EARTH. FROM THEIR LABORS SO FARJ THEY COMBINED THESE AND
CAME UP WITH THE HIGHEST OF EARTH'S FORM VEHICLES; OUR OWN
PHYSICAL MECHANISM.

"As WE WERE BROUGHT INTO A SERIES OF SECOND ROUND INCARNATIONS


BY OUR PATRONS J THEIR VIBRATIONS WERE IMPRESSED AND INCORPORA-
TED UPON OUR GOD MIND SPARK AND ITS READY-MADE FORM. THUS J WE
OWE SOME OF OUR INTELLIGENCE TO THE LOGOI J FLAMES J BRIAH ANGELS
AND ARCHIAJ WHO TOGETHER FORMED OUR WHOLE MATTER FORM.

"IT WAS THESE THRONES OR FLAMES THAT CREATED OUR INTERNAL OR-
GANS AND OUR NERVOUS SYSTEMS. THE LOGOI CREATED OUR EXTERNAL
OUTER FORMS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 288 of 382
SERIES Two PAGE 3
LESSON TWENTY

"FREDERICK J HOW ABOUT TAKING ON 'ROUND THREE'?"

"RIGHT!'" FREDERICK WAS EAGER. HE LOVES TO TALK.

"WHEN EARTH INCARNATED INTO THE ASTRAL REGIONS FOR HER THIRD
INCARNATION J SHE LEFT BEHIND THE SUNFORCE ENERGIES AND WAS
NOW EMBRAC.I NG ITS OPPOS I TE POLAR I TY OF ENERGY WH I CH PiE ANC I ENTS
NAMED 'MOON FORCES' FOR WANT OF A BETTER CONTRAST. ACTUALLY J
OUR ASTRAL ENERGIES ARE LITTLE LIKE THE EARTH'S MOON ENERGIES J
WHICH IS BUT A VERY WEAK IMITATION OF THIS AS11AL COSMIC FORCE.
THE NAMES "MOON AND SUN' FORCES ARE BUT SYMBO~S OF THE TWO
POLES OF THIS WONDERFUL SET OF RHYTHM WAVE-LENGTHS.

"THE ASTRAL REALMS ARE THE ANGELOI'S NATIVE PLANE. IN THIS


THIRD ROUND J EARTH AND MANKIND WERE ADMINISTERED AND ADDED
UPON BY ANGELS.

"THE ANGELOI WERE SUPERVISED BY THE LOGOI BUT THESE HIGH BEINGS
REMAINED UP ON THEIR OWN NATIVE REALMS.

"IT WAS ARCHANGELS J BRIAHS J ARCHIA AND ANGELS WHO DID THS
ACTUAL LABOR UPON OUR FORM DESIGN. THEY LAID DOWN OUR EMBRY-
ONIC PATTERN FOR OUR VARIOUS CYCLING ETHERIC AND PHYSICAL FORMS.
THESE THEY GAINED FROM THE DESIGNS OF OUR j~WEL SEED-PODS.
THEY STILL SUPERVISE THE CREATION OF OUR ETHERIC. FORMS EACH
TIME WE ENTER MATTER FOR REBIRTH INTO A PHYSICAL FORM. ANGELOI
NOW SUPERVISE GENETIC COMBINATIONS. THEY COOPERATE IN THIS
WITH THE LORDS OF KARMA AND DESTINY. ANGELOI ALSO ADDED TO
OUR MIND-SPARK CONTENTS. BUTS ITS FORM J REMEMBERJ CAME FROM
GODJ OUR PARENT J READY-MADE.

"THIS ADDING BY LOGOI J FLAME LORDS AND ANGELOI TO OUR MIND


CONTENTJ EXPANDED OUR CONSCIOUSNESS TO WHERE WE "COULD BECOME
AN 'EGO BEING'. THEY TAUGHT US OF THEIR KNOWLEDGE IN ORDER
TO GIVE US A FOUNDATION.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 289 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 4
"IN ROUND FOUR WE WERE STILL AT FIRST BEING MENTALLY OVER-
SHADOWED BY ALL THE HIGHER ONES. UPON BECOMING SELF-EGOSJ
WE WERE EXPECTED TO TAKE OVER OUR OWN LIVES.

"INTELLIGENCE IS SOMETHING WE BUILD UP. WE HEAR A LOT ABOUT


RAISING THE CONSCIOUSNESS; ABOUT GOING WITHINJ ABOUT MEDITA-
TION J CHANTING AND BREATHING EXERCISES FOR EXPANDING CON-
SCIOUSNESS. Now THESE ARE BUT THE SUGAR AND CREAM IN THE
COFFEE. THEY J THEMSELVES J WON'T RAISE YOUR CONSCIOUSNESS
BUT THEY WILL AID THE PREPARED STATE TO RISE EASIER AND
HIGHER."

"WHAT THEN IS THE PREPARED STATE AND HOW DO WE ATTAIN TO ITS


GOAL?" LILY ASKED HIM.

"GOODJ ~OW WE ARE GETTING SOMEWHERE J " WAS FREDERICK'S COMMENT.


HE SHIFTED AROUND SO HE HAD US ALL IN HIS VIEW. "Now GET
THIS! ALL CONSCIOUSNESS OCCURS WITHIN MIND. WE USE THE TOOLS
THE WHITEBEARDS RECOMMENDED TO PREPARE MIND FOR THE ABILITY
TO HAVE A CONSCIOUSNESS EXPANSION OCCUR. You COULD SIT IN
MEDITATION A HUNDRED YEARS AND NEVER GET BEYOND FIRST BASE J
MEDITATING AS SO MANY DO NOW. THEY BELIEVE THEY ARE CORRECTLY
OPERATING BECAUSE NO ONE OVER THEM KNOWS ANYTHING DIFFERENTJ
EITHER. THE REAL MASTERS OF EARTH AREN'T AVAILABLE TO THE
MAJORITY OF THE POPULATION. THIS WISDOM IS COMING FORTH NOW
BECAUSE IT'S TIME IS HERE."

"WELLJ LET'S HEAR IT" LILY URGED.

"THE TOOL WE USE FIRST IN THIS CONSCIOUSNESS EXPANSION ACTION


OF MIND IS WILL. OUR INDIVIDUAL ASPECT "WILL POWER" IS THE
ATTRIBUTE OF OUR SOUL-SELF WHICH COUPLES ITSELF WITH OUR SEN-
TIENT EMOTIONAL ABILITIES AND FROM THESE TWO 'CAUSES' US TO
EXERT OUR OTHER MIND ASPECTS FOR LEARNING."

WE THOUGHT THAT OVER A MOMENT.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 290 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 5

"OUR SPIRIT AND OUR ASTRAL MIND SECTIONS ALSO POSSESS A PER-
SONAL CONTENT OF 'WILL-POWER' BUT IT'S AN 'INWARD ENERGY' IN
ITS FASHION OF OPERATION J NOT AN 'OUTWARD'J EXTERNAL ACTION
WHICH STARTS AN ACTION IN MATTER. You ARE IN MATTER WHEN
YOU DO YOUR INITIAL ACT OF MEDITATING TO MOVE FROM THAT POINT
TO TRAVEL INWARD. THE CONSCIOUS~MIND MUST DESIRE AND WANT TO
HAVE KNOWLEDGE OF HOW MIND OPERATES AND BE IN SOME MEASURE OF
CONTROL OVER ITS ASPECTS AND THOUGHT CONTENTS.

"NoWJ CAN YOU SEE WHY THE WHITEBEARDS AND ~~STERS HAVE TAUGHT
US SO MUCH ON THE SUBJECT OF MIND HOUSECLEANING AND CORRECT
REPLACEMENT?"

WE COULD J INDEED. WE COULD ALSO SEE HOW CONTINUING TO HARBOR


ERROR CONCEPTS COULD BLOCK OUR CONSCIOUSNESS FROM RISING TO
THE LEVELS WE WERE STRIVING TO REACH. THEY WOULD BE LIKE
BARRIERS AND HURDLES TO THE CONSCIOUSNESS.

"STANLEY WILL NOW GIVE YOU ANOTHER VIEWPOINT WHICH CAN BE OF


VALUE. As OUR PAST GOVERNS OUR PRESENT J WE CAN PROFIT FROM
HIS CONTRIBUTIONS."

VIOLET WAS PROUDLY GAZING AT HER SOULMATE AS HE NOW DREW OUR


RAPT ATTENTION.

"EVEN THOUGH WE ARE INCARNATING BACK AND FORTH IN ROUND FOURJ


OUR ANGEL GUIDES AND THE HIGHER ONES STILL HAVE US IN THEIR
CARE. THIS WAS GOD'S PROMISE AS HE SENT US ON OUR WAY THROUGH
UNIVERSE. PSALM 91:11 "FOR HE SHALL GIVE HIS ANGELS CHARGE
OVER THEEJ TO KEEP THEE IN ALL THY WAYS."

"MOST OF US ARE USING OUR OWN POWER AND ALSO OUR ATTRIBUTE
"WILL" WHETHER RIGHTLY OR WRONGLY NOW. IT IS THIS 'WILL'
THAT CAUSES US TO BE IMPRESSED FROM 'WITHOUT' WHEN IT IS
RIGHTLY USED. WHEN WRONGLY USED AGAINST COSMIC LAW J IT CAUSES
US TO FAIL TO BE AWARE. 'WILL' WORKS HAND IN HAND WITH OUR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 291 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 6

PHYSICAL SENSES AND OUR 'EGo'. OUR NOSE AND EARS ATTRACT US
TO SOUNDS AND SMELLS OCCURING IN OUR OUTER ENVIRONMENT.

"LET'S GO BACK NOW TO ROUND THREE. THERE WE SOUGHT ALL OUR


INFORMATIONS FROM WITHIN OUR ANGEL'S MIND AS IT WAS HOOKED
INTO OUR MIND. Now IN ROUND FOUR J WE HAVE SHIFTED AND ARE
USING OUR 'WILL' ENERGIES TO DEVELOP THE PERCEPTIVENESS OF
OUR OUTER PHYSICAL SENSES.

"AT THE BEGINNING OF ROUND FOUR J WE COULD NOT USE EYES J EARS J
NOSE J TASTE OR PHYSICAL NERVE END FEELINGS EXPERTLY. BUT AS
EACH TIME WE INCARNATED J WE CAME IN A LITTLE LOWER ON EARTH'S
ENVIRONMENTAL LEVELS J WE IMPROVED AND OUR 'WILL' AND OUR 'EGO'
JOINTLY INTRODUCED COHERENCE INTO OUR ACTIONS.

"MORE AND MORE WE BECAME INDEPENDENT UNITS ABLE TO ADOPT IDEAS


FOR OURSELVES FROM OUR ASSOCIATES AND USE THEM FOR OUR ACTIONS.
WEJ OURSELVES J SUBJECTED OUR INTELLIGENCE AND OUR ACTIONS TO
THE MINDJ ITS THOUGHTS AND IDEAS. THIS WAS NO MEAN FEAT TO
ACCOMPLISH. WE CAN TAKE PRIDE HERE IN OUR ACCOMPLISHMENTS.
SO THIS IS WHERE WE ARE NOW IN liME.

"WE WERE SO BUSY ATTAINING TO THIS STATE J WE DID LITTLE MORE


THAN GATHER FACTS. THIS WAS NORMAL AND ALL IN ACCORD WITH
GOD'S PLAN. BUT! EARTH AND WE UPON HER WHEN IN MATTER AT
THIS TIMEJ ARE NOW AT THE APEX OF THE DIP INTO MATTER SPACE.
HENCEFORTH J EARTH ANDJ OF COURSE J THOSE UPON HER WILL BE AGAIN
RISING UPWARD AND THUS ELEVATING INTO RARER ATMOSPHERES OF
MATTER AND SPACE AND WILL BE CONTINUING THIS FOR THE REST OF
THIS FOURTH ROUND.

"SO! As PERFECT HARMONY THROUGH CORRECT AND CONTROLLED MIND


ACTION RESULTS IN PERFECTION J OUR NEW WORK LIES IN THE DIREC-
TION OF UNDERSTANDING OUR MIND AND ITS LAWS AND EXAMINING ITS
HIDDEN CONTENTS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 292 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 7

"WE ARE NOT JUST A MATTER CONSCIOUS BEING. THAT IS BUT A


PART OF SELF. WE ARE A UNIT MADE UP OF DIFFERENT PARTS J
MUCH LIKE WATCH PARTS. THESE NEED TO WORK IN UNISON TOGETHER
FOR THE BEST RESULTS .

."AT THIS TIME IN OUR EVOLUTION J WE NEED TO SYNCHRONIZE OUR


PARTS. MUCH LATER IN OUR FAR FUTURE J THESE PARTS WILL NO
LONGER BE NEEDED BUT THEY ARE VERY IMPORTANT NOW.

"HENRY WILL CARRY ON AND SHOW YOU WHAT OCCURS WHEN WE "THINK".

WE WERE BUSILY ABSORBING STANLEY'S WORDS WHEN EARTH ROSE AND


HER DOGS JOINED US. WE WERE COMING TO SEE THAT REALITY WAS
NOT EXACTLY AS WE HAD BEEN LED TO BELIEVE.

HENRY WAS LOOKING VERY SERIOUS AS HE STARTED.

"IT MAY BE DIFFICULT TO REALIZE THAT WHEN YOU 'THINK' THIS


ACTION IS NOT ACTUALLY TAKING PLACE IN MATTER OR IN YOUR
BRAIN MACHINE.

"TRUE J THE CONNECTIONS OF IDEAS DO REFLECT BACK DOWN INTO


YOUR BRAIN AS ELECTRICAL SIGNALS. YET THE REAL ACTION IS
OCCURING IN INTELLECTUAL MINDJ WHICH DWELLS IN YOUR ASTRAL-
SOUL AREA. ONCE YOU SEE THAT 'IDEA' ACTIVATES WITHIN YOUR
HIGHEST SOUL LEVEL J YOU CAN SEE WHY 'EMOTION' AFFECTS YOUR
IDEA ASSOCIATIONS. THE LOWER AREA OF SOUL-AsTRAL IS AN EMO-
TIONAL CENTER.

"OUR EGO IS NEW AND WE ARE NOT YET AS EXPERT IN HANDLING IT


AS WE WILL BECOME. THE 'SOUL' ALSO IS IN COSMIC TIMEJ A ~
PART OF SELF. REMEMBERJ WE WERE NOT A SOUL SELF IN ROUND
THREEJ NOR EVEN A SPIRIT SELF IN ROUND Two. ONLY THEIR
PATTERN FORMS WERE SET DOWN IN THOSE ROUNDS. WE WERE STILL
BUT TINY PUPPETS OR BABY ENTITIES BEING HELD SAFELY IN THE
ADULT CARE OF THE HIGHER ONES.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 293 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 8

"IN THESE FIRST THREE ROUNDS)


. .
WE WERE ONLY POTENTIAL ... FORMS.
OUR SELF SEED IMAGES WERE CLOUD-LIKE AND. UNFORMED.
. .... - .
OUR MIND
.

SPARK BEING FROM THE ONE GOD MIND DID HAVE E.QB.M. AND IT ATTACH-
ED ITSELF TO OUR CLOUD-LIKE ESSENCE.

"LATER UPON RECEIVING EGo) OUR FORM) LIKE THE . DUSTS. .OF, UNIVERSE)
WAS PUT INTO A CYCLING
.
ACTION BY THE GREAT ONES
...
. ..
AND
.
THUS
..
DREW
.

VIA MAGNETISM ITS ELEMENTS


.
AND LIKENESSES FROM OUT
.
THE
... .. .
UNIVERSE.
THIS CLOTHED OUR SKELETAL FRAMES AND SEED POD PATTERNS. ONLY
THEN DID THE ANGELOI RELEASE US ON OUR OWN.

"OUR FUTURE OPERATIONS STEM FROM THESE EARLY BEGINNINGS


. .. .. . . AND·
THE MIND FOUNDATIONS GIVEN US BY THE LOGOI) FLAMES AND ANGELOI.
YET NOW AS ACTIVE 'EGos') WE ENTER AND HAVE THE POWER TO TAKE
OVER AND- MAKE ADJUSTMENTS IN OUR MIND AREA." .-

"THANK GOODNESS WE CAN!" SAID EARTH ROSE. WITH A KNOWING


SMILE) HENRY CONTINUED:

"WE ARE STILL YOUNGSTERS IN COSMIC TIME. WE HAVE BARELY STARTED


OUR SELF WORK. OUR GREATEST POSSIBILITY LIES BEFORE US) SO LET
US NOW WELD OUR GOLDEN CHAINS OF THOUGHTS AND IDEAS WISELY.
WE ARE OF THE MENTAL CHAIN OF THE ASTRAL OR WHITE BROTHERHOOD
AND IN A CONSCIOUSNESS CONNECTION WITH THEIR . EVOLVED
. . .
MINDS.
TRULY) WE ARE THE FORTUNATE ONES AS THEIR TEACHINGS CAN LEAD
US FOR A HIGHER AND HIGHER CONSCIOUSNESS ACHIEVEMENT. BLESS
YOU!"

WE HAD REALLY ENJOYED THE LESSON) ALTHOUGH WE WOULD NEED TO


APPLY UNDERSTANDING TO ITS REVELATIONS.

As THE OTHERS WERE ENJOYING THEIR SOULMATES AND MARK AND CYRUS
TALKED) HOWARD AND I STROLLED BY THE POND: WE H~~ MUC~ TO
EXCHANGE WITH ONE ANOTHER.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 294 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY PAGE 9

BEFORE WE LEFT) HE SAID NEHRA WAS TO COME DOWN FROM THE SUN
REALMS FOR OUR NEXT SESSION TO TELL US OF THE FUTURE INCARNA-
TIONS OF EARTH AND OURSELVES.

As WE LAZILY RETURNED) HAPPY FROM OUR CONTACTS) I TOLD THE


OTHERS. WE HAD IT TO LOOK FORWARD TO WHEN WE ENTERED THE
DENSENESS OF MATTER.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 295 of 382
(

THIS IS GOD'S DAY) A GOOD DAY. I PRONOUNCE THIS


DAY AND ALL ITS ACTIVITIES GOOD. My OWN RIGHT
AND PERFECT WORK AWAITS ME THIS DAY.

WITH PRAISE AND THANKSGIVING) I SET THE RICHES


( OF GOD BEFORE ME THIS DAY TO GUIDE) GOVERN) PRO-
TECT AND PROSPER ME. ALL THINGS NEEDFUL ARE NOW
PROVIDED. My RICH GOOD BECOMES VISIBLE THIS DAY!

THIS IS THE TIME OF SATISFYING COMPLETION. I


LOOSE AND LET GO THIS DAY. DIVINE INTELLIGENCE
ESTABLISHES ONLY GOOD FROM IT. ALL ELSE FADES
AWAY.
AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 296 of 382
(

GASTL~ AND BEAGH.

(
'<.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 297 of 382
(
"

\ \ I

) \
\ \ I

\ I

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 298 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE VIOLET &YELLOW LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY-ONE

"SUN BEINGS ARE OF THE MANSTREAM"

"THROUGH FAITH WE UNDERSTAND THAT THE WORLDS WERE FRAMED BY


THE WORD OF GOD~ SO THAT THINGS WHICH ARE SEEN WERE NOT
MADE OF THINGS WHICH DO APPEAR."
HEBREWS 11:3

WE WERE HAPPY AS WE APPROACHED THE CASTLE. ITS WALLS AND


BUTTRESSES HAD AN ETHEREAL LOOK IN THE BEAUTIFUL ASTRAL
ATMOSPHERE. THE PLAINTIVE SOUND OF A MOURNING DOVE ACCOMPAN~
lED OUR ARRIVAL.

DR. KEELER WAS WAITING BESIDE THE SMALL WOODEN DOOR AND
ELEANOR AND MARSHA AROSE FROM THE STONE BENCH TO EMBRACE
US. THE MUSIC OF BACH WAS BEING PLAYED AND ITS STRAINS FLOATED
TO US AS DR. KEELER OPENED THE QUAINT NAIL STUDDED DOOR. As
WE FOLLOWED MARSHA AND ELEANOR INSIDE~ ITS TONES MOUNTED AND
SWELLED INTO LOVELINESS~ THEN SOFTENED TO A SWEET SOUND OF
LONELINESS.

WALKING THROUGH THE STONE TUNNEL ENTRANCE~ WE CAME OUT INTO


A WIDE SPACIOUSNESS. HERE BRIGHT PAINTINGS LINED THE STONE
WALLS AND THE POLISHED FLOOR REFLECTED JARDINIERES OF COLOR-
FUL HOTHOUSE BLOOMS. PASSING THROUGH ITS LENGTH AND TURNING
A CORNE ~ WE CAME UPON A HUGE OAK DOOR STUDDED IN METAL DESIGN.

DR. KEELER PLACED HIS FINGER BEFORE HIS LIPS TO INDICATE SIL-
ENCE. THE DOOR SWUNG QUIETLY OPEN INTO DARKNESS~ REVEALING
ONLY A SINGLE LIGHTED AREA. THIS CAME FROM AN ENORMOUS MAN-
SIZED CANDLE~ ITS FLAME SURROUNDED BY A CLEAR CRYSTAL SCREEN.
As ITS RAYS SHONE THROUGH THE CRYSTAL~ ITS TONES BROKE UP
INTO IRIS~ BLUE AND GOLD. THESE PEACOCK COLORS REACHED OUT
INTO THE SHADOWS IN BEAUTY.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 299 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 2

THE MEDITATING FIGURE OF NEHRA SAT BENEATH THE CANDLE'S


FLAME~ ENTHRONED IN ITS DIFFUSED LIGHT. ALL AROUND HIM
WAS DARKNESS.

AWAITING THE ADJUSTMENT TO THIS DARKNESS~ WE LOOKED WORSHIP-


FULLY UPON THIS BELOVED SUN REALM MASTER. THEN WE SAW THE
SHADOWS OF THIS GREAT HALL WERE FILLED WITH MEDITATING FORMS.

As THOUGH AWARE OF OUR PRESENCE AND LOVE~ NEHRA'S HALO EX-


PANDED OUTWARD FROM HIS BENT HEAD. AND AN INTENSITY OF
DIVINE EMOTION SEEMED TO EMANATE FROM HIM TO OUR FORMS.

PRESENTLY~ THE DELICATE PING OF A CYMBOL BROKE THE HUSHED


SPELL AND ALL OVER THE HALL FORMS SOFTLY MOVED TO AWAKENED
AWARENESS. BLUE LIGHTS LIKE LOTUS PETALS CAME ON ALL AROUND
THE WALLS. WE SAW THE PLACE WAS SHOULDER TO SHOULDER WITH
PEOPLE.

A SAFFRON ROBED FIGURE~ HOLDING A SMALL BURNING 'BUTTER LAMP'~


NOW ESCORTED US TO SEATS NEAR NEHRA. ANOTHER MONK WAS LIGHT-
ING A TALL SEVEN BRANCHED CANDELABRUM. AN ILLUSTRATED IMAGE
WITH DIVIDED HORIZONTAL LINES AND CIRCLES LIKE BEADS ILLUMINA-
TED ON NEHRA'S LEFT. (SEE ILLUSTRAION l~ THIS LESSON)
BENEATH IT APPEARED IN WHITE FIREY LETTERS) "THE CHAIN OF
THE EARTH WORLDS." NEHRA POINTED HIS RIGHT ARM UPWARD AND
SPOKE:

"BEHOLD ABOVE ME~ WHERE THE PERPETUAL FIRE BURNETH. IT IS


THE FLAME WHICH NOW ALSO PERMEATES THY SPIRIT AND ANIMATES
THE BODY FORMS. IT IS THE FLAME WHICH COMETH DOWN FROM THE
'FIRST ONE' GOD. THE 'HOLY FLAME' BURNING BRIGHTLY WITHIN
THE SOULS OF THOSE NOW STRIVING TO ENTER THE INITIATIONS OF
THE ANCIENT MYSTERIES." NEHRA PAUSED AS THE GREAT CANDLE
FLAME LEAPED INTO FIERY SPLENDOR AND LIT UP ALL OUR UPTURNED
FACES.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 300 of 382
THE CHAI N OF
THE

N.
PURE
SPIRIT

w. E~ DIVINE
SPIRIT

17w<C(Hwll<ZZUlulnIl1lJ1W1WJllllIll1tlIlWI1ll11l"iltItOllUlliul/lllQJOIIQlIIIlU1II1II0ImllIlJUlIlUnWIUlIUWllUcUtt!lZOu/lOltllWllmIlIlW

ASTRAL

s.

MATTER

ILLUSTRATION #1~ LESSON 21

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 301 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 3

"THUS SHALL IT BEJ MY CHILDREN J THAT THROUGH PLANET NEPTUNE


AND HIS 'SACRED ONES'J YE NOW AWAKE AND WORK IN THE PREPARA-
TION OF YOUR MIND SOIL."

WE WERE TO REMEMBER THESE WORDS AS WE LATER APPLIED OUR


INTELLECTUAL CAPACITIES TO THE LESSONS.

"LET US SPEAK OF THE THREE FUTURE EARTH ROUNDS TO COME.


NOTICE HOW THESE NO LONGER TAKE PLACE IN MATTER." WE STUDIED
THE BRIGHT IMAGE.

"A HIGHER ENTRY OF EARTH AND THE MANSTREAM IN THE NEXT ROUND
DOES NOT SIGNIFY A HIGHER UNIVERSE LOCATION. IT DOES MEAN
ALL WHICH IS THERE AND ALL WHICH TRANSPIRES WILL BE OF SUPER-
IOR ESSENCE J QUALITY AND FORM MAKEUP.

"IT IS OUR DUTY NOW TO PREPARE FOR ENTRY INTO THIS FUTURE
RARIFIED ATMOSPHERE."

ONCE AGAIN THE CANDLE FLAME ROSE HIGH AND BRIGHT J ITS BEAMS
PLAYING UPON NEHRA'S HALO.

"MATTER IS WHERE PREPARATION BEGINS FOR IT IS WHEN EXISTING


IN MATTER THAT EACH OF US RECEIVES THE LOAN OF THEIR PARTI-
CULAR STAR AND CONSTELLATION OVERSEERS. THESE HIGH ENERGIES
ARE ONLY LENT TO EACH OF US FOR OUR EARTH LIFETIMES AND THEY
RETURN TO THEIR LORDS AND SOURCE WHEN OUR EARTH LIFE IS ENDED.
THESE ARE GIVEN US BY THE LORDS OF KARMA AND THE LORDS OF
WISDOM AND MIND AND WHEN WE FINALLY LEARN CONSCIOUSLY HOW
TO USE THESE FORCES J THEY BECOME MIGHTY COLLABORATORS AND
HARMONIZE INTO EACH MAN'S DAILY AFFAIRS. THIS FOURTH ROUND
YOU ARE CYCLING HOLDS GREAT IMPORTANCE TO YOU J AND SHOULD BE
REGARDED WITH HIGH ATTENTION. UPON ITS MANY AND VARIED
CYCLING EXPERIENCES AND THEIR OUTCOME RESTS YOUR WHOLE FUTURE."

WE VOWED TO REMEMBER THIS AND INCLUDE THESE INFORMATIONS IN


OUR EXERTIONS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 302 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 4
"You HAVE REALIZED YOUR SOUL MIND CONTENTS HOLDS WITHIN ITS
AREA ALL YOU HAVE COLLECTED DOWN THE AGES. THAT SOUL IS THE
'CASE' OR IMAGE OF YOUR ASTRAL-SELF. SOUL IS ALSO THE MEDIA-
TOR BETWEEN SPIRIT AND THE CONSCIOUS-SELF OF MATTER. THUS~
SOUL HOLDS A VERY IMPORTANT POSITION IN REGARDS TO THE FUTURE
OUTCOME OF THE 'SELF'.

YOUR TEMPORARY SMALL CONSCIOUS POINT IS WHERE LIES THE SEAT


OF YOUR MATTER MIND SECTIONS AND ASPECTS OF REASONING. THE
REASONING POWERS OF THIS SUBJECTIVE SECTION ARE STILL COMING
INTO THEIR WHOLENESS AND FULLNESS. THE REASONING RESULTS HELD
BY THE CONSCIOUS-POINT REFLECT FROM THE MATTER IMAGE INTO
SOUL. THAT IS WHY SOUL HOLDS BOTH TRUTH AND ERROR. IN THIS
FOURTH ROUND~ WE ARE ENDEAVORING TO PERFECT REASON so THAT
OUR IDEAS WILL ELIMINATE ERROR AND EMBRACE TRUTH. THIS IS
THE PURPOSE BEHIND ROUND FOUR.

"IT WILL BE DIFFERENT NEXT ROUND FIVE. WE WILL BE WORKING


FROM THE MIND CONTENT ALREADY LAID DOWN IN THE SOUL'S MIND
FILES. ASTRAL EXPERIENCES COME ONLY FROM THAT WHICH LIES IN
THE SOUL MIND."

THIS GAVE US THOUGHT FOR COULD WE NOT BE HELD FROM MUCH WE


COULD HAVE KNOWN AND THROUGH OUR OWN NEGLECT?

"ALL SOUL-FORMS AND ASTRAL MIND DATA GOVERN THE ENTITIES


LIVING EXPERIENCES WHICH THEY WILL KNOW WHEN IN THE ASTRAL
REGIONS.

"IN SPITE OF THE SOUL AND ITS MIND SECTION BEING A COMPOSITE
OF IMPLANTED IDEAS FROM MATTER EXPERIENCES~ IT HAS THE CAPA-
CITY TO COPE AND DEAL WITH ALL IT RECEIVES AND ACCEPTS.
SPIRIT~ ON THE OTHER HAND~ HOLDS ONLY TRUE AND REALIZED DATA.
SPIRIT DOES NOT COPE~ IT ONLY HOLDS AND GUARDS WITHIN ITS HIGH
INTUITIVE PORTION OF MIND. YET AS OUR OWN INTUITIVE CONNEC-
TIONS OPEN FROM OUR MATTER PRACTICE OF ACCUMULATING KNOWLEDGE
AND EXPANDING OUR OVERALL CONSCIOUSNESS~ THIS OPENS US TO

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 303 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 5

RECEIVE FROM SPIRIT INTUITIVE TRUTHS LODGED THERE FOR OUR


USE.

"SOUL IS OUR BALANCER AND HARMONIZER. SOUL HAS THE DUTY


OF BRINGING OUR WHOLE MIND DATA INTO A CONSTRUCTIVE FRUITION.
THESE IDEAS I BRING TO YOU FROM THE HOLY SUN REALMS THAT YOU
MAY LEARN DIVINE TRUTH.

"THERE IS A WONDERFUL SUN BEING WHO DESIRES TO HAVE CONTACT


WITH ALL THE SOULS PRESENT. HE WAS ONE OF THE OLDER PEOPLE
OF HUMANITY. ONE OF THE VERY FIRST SAVIORS TO COME TO EARTH
FROM TAURUS. HE IT WAS WHO ESTABLISHED THE VERY FIRST TEMPLE
ON EARTH AND TAUGHT MANKIND HOW TO DEDICATE THEMSELVES TO GOD
THE ABSOLUTE."
.
As NEHRA SPOKE) A BLINDING WHITE BEAM SHONE OVER ALL OUR
HEADS AND WE QUICKLY KNELT. VIOLET WAS OVERCOME BY THIS
GREAT ONE'S SURROUNDING LIGHT AND AS HIS FACE MANIFESTED IN
ITS CIRCLE OF RAYS) WE WERE SHAKEN BY HIS POWERS. HIS GAZE
WAS ONE OF GENTLE ECSTASY. HEARTS WERE TOUCHED WITH SUCH
DEEP JOY AND CLEANSING THAT TEARS FLOWED FREELY EVERYWHERE.
HIS VOICE WAS A SOFT CARESS OF HOLY LOVE.

"DEAR ONES: I BOW IN GRATEFULNESS AT YOUR RECEIVING ME INTO


YOUR HEARTS ONCE AGAIN. WHAT JOY TO SEE THE PROGRESS YOU HAVE
MADE. I COME TO WELCOME YOU TO THE REGIONS OF ASCENSION AND
TO LEND YOU AID AS YOUR SOULS SHALL MOVE IN FUTURE INTO THE
FLAME REGIONS. THOU ART MY TRUE ONES) THOSE FAITHFUL TO THE
WHITE BROTHERHOOD.

"I COME TO SHOW YOU YOUR PRESENT NEEDS THAT YOU MAY FULFILL
THEM BEFORE THE FINAL NIGHT ARRIVES AND EARTH LEAVES MATTER.

"YE WHO WOULD ATTAIN TO HIGHEST GODHOOD WILL HAVE ABSORBED


CERTAIN POWERS INTO 'SELF'. THESE POWERS COME THROUGH A

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 304 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 6

SECRET COSMIC AGENT WHO BEAMS ITS ILLUMINATING POWERS THROUGH


YOUR SOLAR SUN I SOL. FROM SOL YOUR INTELLECT ABSORBS THESE
MIND ENERGIES. As THIS INVISIBLE SPIRITUAL MIND LIGHT REACHES
YOU I ITS POWERS CONNECT BOTH YOUR OUTER PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES
OF SELF AND YOUR INNER SOUL AND SPIRIT OUTLINES TOGETHER AS
ONE. THIS SACRED UNIVERSAL ACTION OCCURS ONLY IN THOSE AWAKE
AND SEEKING PERFECTION OF SELF THROUGH THE ASPECTS OF 'WILL'
AND PERSONAL EFFORT.

"IN THE HIDDEN ANCIENT TEXTS OF THE MAGIAN ORDER I IT IS WRITTEN


AND RECORDED THAT 'THROUGH THE RADIATIONS OF OUR SEVEN UNIVERSE
FORMS I WILL COME FORTH THE SEVEN LIGHTS AND SEVEN DEGREES OF
TRUTH." You ARE NOW ONLY SPARKS; YET THE DAY SHALL COME WHEN
YOU BECOME 'FLAMES'. As EACH JEWEL SEED'SHEDS THE NEED FOR
THE LOWER BODY FORMS I THEY SHALL MERGE INTO THE GREAT BREATH.

"WE LEAVE NOTHING BEHIND IN OUR 'EVER-BECOMING.' IN TURN I


OUR MANSTREAM SHALL BECOME LORDS OF LIFE AND WISDOM AND TEACHERS
OF LIFE. BELIEVE I MY PRECIOUS ONES I IN THE SOUL OF THINGS I
NOT IN ITS OUTER SHELLS. KNOW THAT YOU AND ALL IN UNIVERSE
ARE GUIDED FROM WITHIN OUTWARDS.

"THIS INNER GUIDANCE POURS THROUGH THE OPEN CHANNELS OF YOUR


MIND FROM AN ALMOST ENDLESS HIERARCHY OF SOUL AND SPIRIT BEINGS I
WHO EACH HAVE A SEPARATE MISSION TO PERFORM. EAT OF THEIR
SUPERIOR FRUITS; THE FIELDS OF THEIR MINDS ARE WHITE AND READY
FOR HARVEST. OPEN YOUR SOUL'S HIGHER CONSCIOUSNESS TO HARKEN
INTO THE GOD MIND AND ITS INTUITIVE OMNISCIENCE."

HIS WORDS WERE FILLING AN INNER NEED FOR EVERYONE PRESENT.

"MEDITATE UPON THE 'TREE OF WISDOM' AND STUDY. ASSIMILATE


ONE BY ONE/THEIR KEYS WITHIN OUR LESSONS. BECOME AGAIN A HIGH
PRIEST AND HEALER BY FIRST HEALING THYSELF, RISE ABOVE THE
PRESENT SOUL-KILLING MATERIALISM OF EARTH. THROW OFF ITS

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 305 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 7
UNCHARITABLE WAYS. II ADITII SON OF GIANTS I WOULD HAVE YOU
RECEIVE THE POWER OF GOD. THOSE WHO POSSESS THE MIXTURE OF
RACES REPRESENT THE WORLD'S SALVATION.

"I AM HE WHO REIGNS OVER THE AVATAR NARA-SINKA (MAN-LION)


WHO SHALL BE THE FATHER OF THE NEXT DESCENDING GREAT ONE;
THE LORD MAITREYA. MAITREYA I WHO COMES SHALL BE LIKE THE
LIGHTENING WHICH FALLETH FROM HEAVEN I AND HIS PRESENCE SHALL
QUICKEN ALL INTELLIGENCE AND THE CONSTELLATION DRAGONIS SHALL
OVERSHADOW HIM AND THE WISE ADEPTS SHALL RECOGNIZE HIS HOLY
WISDOMS. AND ONCE AGAIN A STAR SHALL COME FORTH IN THE
HEAVENS TO HERALD HIS ARRIVAL AND A REIGN OF GRACE SHALL
COVER MATTER AND EARTH.

"MANY NAMES HATH GOD GIVEN THESE GREAT LORDSI NAMES OF SECRET
-
MEANING AND MYSTERY. You WHO HAVE EARS I HEAR AND MEASURE MY
MEANINGS.

"HE SHALL BE BORN WITH THE RINGS OF SATURN BINDING HIS LOINS.
AND THE GLORY OF THE UNIVERSAL SUN SHALL BLESS HIS HEAD. AND
HIS THRONE SHALL BE THE WHOLE COSMOS I FOR HE SHALL BRING TO
EARTH OUR HIGHEST ONEI "CHRIST" WHO SHALL IN HIS GLORY AGAIN
BLESS AND SANCTIFY EARTH."

By THIS TIMEI THE GREAT CANDLE FLAME REACHED OUTWARD OVER US


ALL AND WE SHIVERED IN AWE AT THE INNER MEANING OF AnITI'S
REVELATIONS. TRULY I HE WAS ONE OF OUR TERRESTRIAL TITANS I
HOLDING IN HIS HANDS THE MYSTERIES OF ALL AGES.

IT TOOK TIME FOR OUR LARGE GROUP OF SOULS TO COME OUT OF THE
GRIP OF ADITI'S POWER AND RETURN TO ONENESS IN OUR SOULS. To
HELP THIS STATE MANIFEST I CHANTERS COMMENCED TO SING TONES OF
SOOTHING RATES. WHEN ALL PRESENT WERE STILL AND CALM I NEHRA
SPOKE:

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 306 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-ONE PAGE 8

"THOU SHALT NEVER SPEAK OF THESE GREAT ONES NOR THEIR MESSAGES
OUTSIDEJ OR TO THOSE OF LITTLE UNDERSTANDING. WITHIN THYSELVES
TALK FREELY J FOR THOU ART OF THE WISE AND CAN UNDERSTAND THESE
FRAGMENTS OF WISDOM. KEEP THY SILENCE HONORED J RAISE NOT THY
HAND AGAINST THE SACRED TRUTHS OF GOD."

SLOWLY J BOTH AnITI AND NEHRA FADED FROM OUR SIGHT AS GLORIOUS
ORGAN MUSIC FILLED THE HALL. THE CANDLE FLAME SUBSIDED J BRING-
ING THE BLUE WALL LIGHTS INTO PLAY. WE SILENTLY EMERGED IN
SLOW FILE FROM THE GREAT HALLJ EACH ONE SUBMERGED WITHIN AND
HOLDING TO THE WONDERFUL EXPERIENCE WE HAD BEEN PRIVILEGED TO
BE A PART.

LATERJ AS WE DRIFTED DOWNWARD INTO MATTER'S WAITING ARMS J


VIOLET WAS HEARD TO SAY; "1 CAN HARDLY BELIEVE WE WERE THERE."

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 307 of 382
(

I AM THE RICH CHILD OF A LOVING FATHER, ALL THAT


THE FATHER HAS IS MINE TO SHARE AND TO EXPERIENCE,

"
DIVINE INTELLIGENCE IS NOW SHOWING ME HOW TO CLAIM
MY OWN GOD-GIVEN WEALTHJ HEALTHJ AND HAPPINESS,
DIVINE INTELLIGENCE IS EVEN NOW OPENING THE WAY
C FOR MY IMMEDIATE BLESSINGS,

I HAVE FAITH THAT ALL THAT IS MINE BY DIVINE RIGHT


NOW COMES TO ME IN RICH ABUNDANCE, My RICH BLESS-
INGS DO NOT INTERFERE WITH ANY ONE ELSE'S GOOD J
SINCE GOD'S RICH SUBSTANCE IS UNLIMITED AND EVERY-
WHERE FOR ALL TO USE,
AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 308 of 382
MOTHEP\ BEAR AND TWINS.
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 309 of 382
(

LI LY LOOKED /-\ T TH E TEMP LE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 310 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-TWO BLUE &YELLOW LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY-TWO
"THE SECRET TEMPLE"

"BLESSED IS HE THAT READETH~ AND THEY THAT HEAR THE WORDS OF


THIS PROPHECY AND KEEP THOSE THINGS WHICH ARE WRITTEN THEREIN:
FOR THE TIME IS AT HAND."
REVELATION 1:3

A FLEET OF SWIFTLY SAILING CLOUDS BROKE UP THE ASTRAL SUN


PATTERNS AND SPLOTCHED HERE AND THERE ON THE MOUNTAIN SIDES
BELOW. THE WIND CROONED THROUGH THE TREE BRANCHES. BELOW
OUR FLOATING FIGURES~ THE TALL PINES SENT UP FRAGRANCE. WON-
DER LAY ALL ABOUT US.

THEN INTO VIEW CAME A MOTHER BEAR AND TWIN CUBS SCAVENGING
NEAR A FALLEN LOG BELOW. THE SUN IS LIGHTING UP HER YELLOW
EYES AS SHE WATCHES US. QUIETLY SHE STEPS BEFORE THE PLAYING
BABIES AND STANDS GUARD. SHE IS BEAUTIFUL AND THIS IS A PER-
FECT SETTING FOR HER. As WE PASS OVER~ SHE RELAXES AND WE
FEEL SHE MUST BE NEWLY ARRIVED AND STILL FEARFUL OF HUMANS.

WAY AHEAD WE CAN SEE WHITEBEARDS~ MASTER AND THE THREE MAGI;
BALTHAZAR~ KASPER AND MELCHOIR AWAITING US. FROM THEM WE
LEARN WE ARE TO TAKE A SPECIAL TRIP INTO YET HIGHER ASTRAL
LEVELS. WE ARE TO VISIT A VERY SACRED AND SECRET PLACE. WE
FEEL THRILLED AND FOLLOW DIRECTIONS.

SUDDENLY OUR SIGHT WAS TAKEN AWAY AND EACH WAS CLAIMED BY
ONE OF OUR ASTRAL PARTY. COMFORTABLE ARMS CAME ABOUT ME AND
A VOICE SPOKE CLOSE:

"ROSE~ I AM THE WHITEBEARD RABBAH ELEAZOR." My HEART JUMPED


IN JOY FOR THIS MEANT WE MUST POSSESS SUFFICIENT SOUL REALIZED
FACTS TO MERIT HIS ACQUAINTANCE. ALOUD~ SO ALL COULD HEAR HE
SAID:

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 311 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-TWO PAGE 2

"THIS PLACE WE TAKE YOU TO IS KNOWN ONLY TO THE FEW AS THEY


ATTAIN PERMITTANCE. UNTIL NOW IN COSMIC TIME IT HAS BEEN
KEPT A HOLY SECRET~ AND A WELL GUARDED ONE. ONLY A CERTAIN
STATE OF EVOLVED MANKIND CAN TOLERATE ITS MARVELOUS ENERGY
RATES. You SHALL ONLY VIEW IT FROM AFAR~ BUT BE WITNESSES
TO ITS SACRED IMAGE. THE LIGHT OF ITS GLORY SHALL SHINE
UPON YOU."

GENTLY WE WERE SET UPON OUR FEET AND OUR SIGHT WAS GIVEN BACK.
WE DISCOVERED WE WERE WITHIN A SMALL COZY ROOM COMPLETELY
WALLED IN HEAVY RED VELVET DRAPES. COLORFUL CUSHIONS LITTERED
THE CARPETED FLOOR. BRANCHED CANDLE SCONES MADE IT LIGHT~
THEIR SILVER SHINING.

ELEAZOR SPOKE:

"GOD'S GLORY LIES EVERYWHERE. IT SHINES IN EVERY ILLUMINED


SOUL. LOOK INTO ITS REFLECTED MIRROR FACE AND SEE WITHIN
YOURSELF COUNTLESS NEW PSYCHIC TRANSFORMATIONS. COME FROM
DARKNESS INTO GOD'S MAGNIFICIENT LIGHT." HE WALKED OVER TO
THE SIDE TO EXIT AND SAID: "MEDITATE FOR A SHORT WHILE."
THEN HE PASSED THROUGH THE CURTAIN.

WE OBEYED~ RECEIVING WONDERFUL RESULTS QUICKLY. THEN LILY~


BEING CLOSEST~ TIMIDLY PUSHED THE CURTAIN ASIDE AND GASPED.
QUICKLY WE JOINED HER TO LOOK OUT UPON A DIVINE SIGHT. THE
WHITE MARBLE TEMPLE GLOWED. ITS MIGHTY STEPS GLEAMED AND
BESIDE THEM ON ITS OWN PEDESTAL THE PERPETUAL FIRE BURNED.
IT WAS TOWERING SO HIGH AND LARGE WE COULD SEE ONLY ITS FRONT
ENTRANCE PART THROUGH THE CURTAIN'S OPENING. THE PERSONS
GOING INTO ITS DOORS AND COMING OUT LOOKED LIKE TINY ANTS.
WE WERE BATHED IN ITS EMANATING FORCES OF LOVE AND GLORY.
CLOSELY HUDDLED TOGETHER~ WE FOUR FEASTED OUR EYES AND MINDS~
ABSORBING THE BEAUTY OF ITS CONTOURS AND GIGANTIC COLUMNS.
THE MARBLE BLOCKS OF ITS WALLS WERE EVEN LARGER THAN THE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 312 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-TWO PAGE 3

GREAT PYRAMID OF EARTH. WE SOON NOTICED THE DIFFERENCE IN


THE FIGURES COMING OUT OF THE TEMPLE DOOR. THESE SOULS
SEEMED TO SHINE IN RENEWED GLORY. EVEN HERE IN OUR HIGH
ROOM~ WE~ TOO~ COULD FEEL AN INNER SPIRITUAL RENEWAL.

ELEAZOR SOFTLY RETURNED AND SMILING~ HE VERY GENTLY SWUNG


SHUT THE CURTAINS. RAISING EACH OF US IN TURN~ HE TOUCHED
THE TOP OF OUR HEADS WITH HIS RIGHT HAND~ SAYING EACH TIME~
"THE TEMPLE HAS BLESSED YOU."

WE WERE IN A STATE OF BLISS.

INDICATING THE CUSHIONS AND THAT WE SHOULD BE SEATED AGAIN~


HE INFORMED US: "WE SHALL HAVE OUR LESSON HERE AND BASK IN
THESE HOLY VIBRATIONS."

OUR MINDS SEEMED PARTICULARLY ALERT. EVERYTHING SEEMED SO


CLEAR AND BRIGHT AND ELEAZOR'S LOTUS SEATED FIGURE SEEMED
TO BE MADE OF LIGHT.

"GOD~OUR FATHER~ GAVE TO EACH OF US A PRICELESS GIFT; OUR


'EGO'. THIS STATE WHICH WE EARNED THE RIGHT TO POSSESS HOLDS
WITHIN ITS BOUNDARIES THREE BASIC QUALITIES.

I. INTELLIGENCE 2. CONSCIOUSNESS 3. WILL

"THESE THREE REST IN MIND AND MAKE UP ITS CONSTRUCTIVE POLE.


MIND'S NEGATIVE POLE COMPRISES:

I. THOUGHT 2. PERCEPTION 3. ENVISIONMENT

"THESE SIX ELEMENTS OF THE SELF ARE WHAT EACH OF US RELY


UPON IN OUR PRESENT TASK OF BECOMING WHAT OUR JEWEL ORIGINALLY
HOLDS.

"THE CONSTRUCTIVE THREE IS OUR PERMANENT SELF-MOVING EVIDENCE


OF SOUL.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 313 of 382
SERIES T~w
LESSON TWENTy-TWO PAGE 4

"THE THREE LOWER NEGATIVE ASPECTS ARE EVIDENCE IN OUR VARIOUS


AND MANY CHANGING CONSCIOUS-POINTS. THE" ACTION AND REACTIONS
THAT TAKE PLACE BETWEEN THESE TWO POLES CAUSES US TO ANIMATE.
As EACH NOW UNFOLDS THEIR PERSONAL HIGHEST SELF PRINCIPLES)
EACH MOVES INTO DIVINITY AND PERFECTION;

"THE INTELLIGENCE EACH PERSON HAS MANAGED TO EXPAND IN THEIR


SOUL-MIND WILL NOW BE WHAT WILL BE GOVERNING EACH SOUL'S
MATTER-THOUGHTS. THUS) IT IS THIS CONSCIOUSNESS AND ITS CON-
TENTS WHICH NOW GOVERNS YOUR PRESENT MATTER ABILITY FOR PER-
CEIVING.

"THE SOUL POWER OF 'WILL' WILL BE EITHER URGING YOU ON TO


GREATER MATTER ENVISAGING OR CAUSING YOU TO BE INERT AND UN-
OBSERVING AND UNCARING FOR PROGRESS.

"EVEN THE BEASTS OF THE FIELDS) MAMMALS AND FISH OF THE SEA;
FLOWERS) PLANTS AND TREES POSSESS THESE SIX BASIC QUALITIES
BUT NOT DEVELOPED TO THE SAME POINT THAT IS MANKINDS.

"OUR MANSTREAM OF LIFE IS NOW AT A READY POINT TO REALIZE


THEIR GOD QUALITIES AND OPEN THESE FURTHER FOR PERSONAL OPERA-
TION AND USE."

HE STOPPED) LOOKING INWARD A MOMENT. "SOUL) MY CHILDREN) IS


NOT YET A PERFECTED VEHICLE SUCH AS YOUR SPIRIT FORM. SOUL
STILL HAS MANY IRRATIONAL SECTIONS AWAITING YOUR SELF-ATTENTION.
THE SOUL FORM AND ITS MIND SECTIONS HOLD A VERY IMPORTANT
ROLE IN OUR TRAVEL BACK TO GOD. ITS EXISTENCE IS TO AMELIOR-
ATE. SOUL IS OUR CLEARING HOUSE WHERE WE STORE OUR EARNED
INFORMATIONS. WITHIN SOUL IS DEPOSITED THE RESULTS OF ALL
PRIMARY SUBSTANCE. IT HOLDS IDEAS WHICH ARE A MIXTURE OF
CORRECT AND INCORRECT DATA IN NATURE. INCORRECT) BECAUSE WE
ARE STILL IN THE ACTION OF LEARNING AND ASSIMILATING AND
EXPANDING OUR INTELLIGENCE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 314 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-TWO PAGE 5
HOUR DIVINE DUTY HAS EVER BEEN TO GAIN WISDOM AND MAINTAIN
H
ITS TRUISMS THROUGH COMPLETE PERSONAL COMPREHENSIONS.

AGAIN HE DREW BACK INTO HIS THOUGHTS AS WE CONSIDERED HIS


WORDS. SMILING~ HE CONTINUED:

HKNOW YE NOW THAT EVERY STAR OF THE HEAVENS~ EVERY PLANET


AND EVERY ATOM OF THE UNIVERSE HAS A SQUL-PART-OF- ITS OWN.
THUS~ THROUGH MIND~ 'ALL HAVE THE POSSIBILITY TO BECOME IMPREG-
NATED WITH THE DIVINE INFLUX OF GOD'S WISDOMS.

HALL LIFE HAVE BEEN ASSIGNED THEIR PLACES ACCORDING TO EACH


ONES ABILITY TO HAVE AN INTELLIGENT RELATIONSHIP TO ALL OTHER
CREATED THINGS. SO THE LAW IS: BEFORE THE MANSTREAM CAN
~EACH SPIRITUAL PERFECTION~ EACH ENTITY MUST GAIN A PERCEP-
TION THAT WE ARE SOUL. REALIZE SOUL PERFECTION MUST COME
BEFORE WE CAN FILL THE CONTOURS OF THE SPIRIT FORM. SPIRIT
ONLY CAN ACCEPT A TRUE THOUGHT OR IDEA. DWELLING IN DIVINE
AND PURE SPIRIT REGION~ OUR SPIRIT FORM CANNOT HOLD ERROR~
ONLY TRUTH. WE ARE NOW ENDEAVORING TO REALIZE AND UNDERSTAND
WHAT IS 'TRUTH.'

HTHE TIME HAS BEEN REACHED WHEN MANKIND CAN NO LONGER AFFORD
TO ALLOW HIS LOWER ETHERIC AND PHYSICAL PART TO BE THE PLAY-
GROUND FOR UNKNOWN URGES AND BLIND FORCES. H

WE SAT HARDLY DARING TO MOVE~ AWAITING FOR HIS NEXT WORDS.

HEVERYONE WITHIN OUR LIFE-STREAM HOLDS IN THEIR MIND PORTION


THE NECESSARY TORCH~ WHOSE LIGHT CAN LEAD EACH TO THE SOLUTION
OF THE GREAT UNKNOWN MYSTERIES. WITH OUR HEARTS CLEAN~ OUR
EYES CLOSED AND OUR BODY HEADS AVERTED~ WE CAN GO WITHIN AND
GRASP THIS TORCH AND ALLOW IT TO ILLUMINATE OUR PATTERN.

HWE HAVE THE POWER TO DO THIS ALREADY WITHIN OURSELVES THROUGH


'WILL'. OUR 'WILL~' WHEN USED CONSTRUCTIVELY~ IS GOD'S PROMISE
TO US OF DIVINE POTENCY OF CONSCIOUSNESS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 315 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-TWO PAGE 6

"THE ~1ASTERS AND HIGHER ONES ARE ABLE TO TRACE THEIR BASIC
QUALITIES OF INTELLIGENCE J WILL AND CONSCIOUSNESS TO THEIR
NEGATIVE PARTNERS J RIGHT BACK TO THE VERY THRONE OF OUR
FATHERJ GOD."

"WE TRY} ELEAZORJ BUT SOMETIMES IT IS DIFFICULT TO SHUT OUT


OUR WORLDLY CONCERNS AND ELI MI NATE THE BODY TENS I ONS/' I
WHISPERED SOFTLY.

"I KNOW J LITTLE ONE} BUT PERSIST AND IT WILL BECOME A STATE
OF NATURALNESS IN TIME." HE SAID REASSURINGLY. WE FOUR SIGHED.

"IT WAS THE ANCIENT MAGI WHO NAMED THE INNER LIGHTS SEEN IN
MEDITATION. THEY CALLED THEM THE 'ASTRAL LIGHT.' THEY DID
SO BECAUSE THESE INNER LIGHTS RESEMBLED THE LIGHTS OF THE
MATTER REALM'S STARS. THE MAGI MEMBERS LOOKED UPON THESE
'INNER' LIGHTS AS CONDENSED PORTIONS OF THE STARS AND INSTINC-
TIVELY THEY WERE RIGHT."

WE FELT AN INNER THRILL AT HEARING THIS.

"THE MAGNETIC AND SPIRITUAL EMANATIONS BETWEEN YOUR BIRTH


STARS AND THEIR CONSTELLATIONS ARE OF AN INTERCOMMUNICATING
NATURE. THE LOGOI STAR FORMS AND THEIR INNER 'BEINGS' ATTRACT
FROM THEMSELVES TO EACH PERSON. AND EACH PERSON} IN TURN}
ATTRACTS TO THEM FROM THEIR OWN INNER DEGREE OF DEVELOPED
MAGNETISMS.

"KNOW YE THAT EVERYTHING PERTAINING TO THE SPIRIT REGIONS


AND FLAME REGIONS AND EVEN THE ASTRAL PLANES} COMES TO THOSE
IN MATTER THROUGH THE 'LIGHT' ENERGIES FROM THE LOGOI STARS."

CERTAIN RHYTHMS WERE PULSATING WITHIN US AS HE SPOKE J CAUSING


US TO SHIVER IN WONDER.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 316 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-TWO PAGE 7
"EVEN AS HEAT EMITS FROM FIRE AND PASSES THROUGH THE IRON OF
A STOVE~ SO DO THE STAR ENERGIES AND ALL THEIR PROPERTIES
PASS INTO SOUL AND THROUGH SOUL DOWN INTO THOSE OF OPEN MIND.
LIKE THE SPRING RAIN FRESHENS THE SOIL AND GIVES FRUITION
WHEREVER IT FALLS~ SO WILL EACH PERSON'S BIRTH STARS TOUCH
THE SEEDS OF OUR EGo."

WE ACCEPTED THIS MYSTIC PICTURE. YET TIMIDLY~ I VENTURED:


"HOLY ONE} DOES THIS MEAN THE STARS ENERGY RAIN WILL NOT MAKE
FERTILE THE SOIL IN ANY MIND CLOGGED WITH ERROR CONCEPTS AND
LOWER DESIRE URGES?"

HIS CANDID MURMER WAS; "IT MEANS JUST THAT} ROSE." THERE IT
WAS FOR US TO LOOK AT SO I ASKED HIM TO SPELL IT OUT FOR OUR
MINDS.

"EVERYTHING IS DOUBLE OF NATURE IN UNIVERSE," WAS HIS PATIENT


BEGINNING. "WHEN THIS DUEL OR DOUBLE SEPARATES} WE HAVE POSI-
TIVE AND NEGATIVE POLARITIES. THIS ALSO OCCURS IN REGIONS OF
THE PERSONAL SELF. IN MATTER AREA} IN SOUL-AsTRAL AND IN
SPIRIT LEVELS. As THESE POLES GAIN IN CONTENT OR REMAIN
SCARCE OF TRUE CONTENT; ONE OR THE OTHER ~POLE' WILL BE OUT
OF EQUALIBRIUM. SAY} IF OUR SOUL CONTAINS MORE QUALITY CON-
TENTS THAN OUR MATTER CONSCIOUS POINT} THE LOWER MIND POINT
WILL NOT BE OPEN TO RECEIVE} BUT CLOSED IN A TIGHT FIXED
STATE AND TENSE. PRACTICE OF RELAXATION AND MEDITATION CAN}
IF DONE REGULARLY} CAUSE AN OPENING OF MIND TO OCCUR. THIS
OPENING CAN THEN RECEIVE THE 'LIGHT'.

"THANK YOU}" WE MURMERED.

"You ARE NOW IN THE PROCESS OF LEARNING THE SECRETS OF HOW


TO POLARIZE YOUR ACTIONS AND THOUGHTS. THIS EFFORT AND ITS
ACTION ENDOWS YOU WITH CERTAIN MYSTICAL SPIRIT FLUIDS OR
CURRENTS. ALTHOUGH THESE CANNOT BE SEEN IN MATTER} THEIR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 317 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-TWO PAGE 8

PRESENCE WILL CAUSE A RIGHT CHANGE IN YOUR CONSCIOUS EGO


POINT. You WILL NOTE THIS OCCURRING BECAUSE YOUR PRESENT
LIFE AND ITS MATTER CIRCUMSTANCES WILL BE SHOWING A GENERAL
IMPROVEMENT."

AT THIS PRECISE MOMENTJ THE HEAD OF LORD" KRISHNA APPEARED


OVER ELEAZOR. WE GASPED AND GRABBED ONE ANOTHER AS THE
CURRENT FORCES FROM THIS GREAT BEING'S SMILE TOUCHED OUR
WIDE OPEN MINDS. ELEAZOR HAD US ,ARISE AND PRONAM TO THIS
HOLY VISION WHO RETURNED 'THE HONOR TO US. SEATED AGAIN ON
OUR CUSHIONS J ELEAZOR CONTINUED AS WE GAZED ON KRISHNA'S
LOVING FACE.

"IT WAS OUR LORD KRISHNA WHO GAVE OUR SOLAR SYSTEM THE NAME
OF "AKASA" FOR THE STAR'S LIGHT. IT MEANS 'FROM THE SKY.'
THE HINDUS AND TIBETAN LAMAS STILL REGARD IT AS 'LIFE ENERGY.'
THIS IS CORRECT FOR ITS SOURCE COMES FROM GOD WHO IS THE
RESERVOIR OF ALL 'LIFE' IN UNIVERSE."

ITS SOURCE WAS CERTAINLY PLAYING UPON) AROUND AND WITHIN


OUR SOUL-FoRMS.

"THIS LIGHT AS IT DIVIDES AND ENTERS ALL) IS A 'DIRECTING


FORCE.' THEREFOREJ AS EACH IN MEDITATION WITNESSES SUCH
SPARKS OF LIGHT OR OVERALL LIGHT) PLEASE KNOW IT IS BEING
GIVEN YOU TO BE USED. ITS VISITING POWERS WITHIN YOUR MEDI-
TATIONS ARE THERE TO EFFECT SOME CHANGE OR HEALING."

"SIR) THIS AKASA POWER: DOES IT EMBUE US WITH THE SPIRIT


OF THE MATTER DEITY; SAY KRISHNA OR CHRIST) AS WE PRAY TO
THEM?" CYRUS ASKED.

"YES) CYRUS) THAT ALSO IS ONE OF ITS ACTIONS." THE LOVELY


IMAGE SLOWLY FADED AND VANISHED.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 318 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-TWO PAGE 9

"LET US CLOSE THIS VISIT NOW. You WILL NEED TO RETURN TO


YOUR NORMAL MATTER STATE. You WILL NEVER AGAIN LOSE THESE
TEMPLE VIBRATIONS) BUT YOU ARE NOT YET READY TO SUSTAIN A
STEADY) PERSISTANT RAIN OF THEIR ENERGIES."

AT THIS POINT) THE THREE MAGI AND THE OTHER MASTERS CAME
THROUGH THE CURTAIN AND TOOK US INTO THEIR ARMS. SIGHT
VANISHED AND WE RESTED IN A COCOON OF DIVINE LOVE WITH OUR
MASTERS.

GURU WHISPERED TO ME) "NEXT SESSION YOU WILL RECEIVE MORE


ABOUT THE MAGI AND HOW EACH INITIATE TAKES ON THE AKASA POWERS.
I PLACE MY LOVE IN YOUR HEART CENTER) ROSE) SO THAT FROM YOUR
HEART IT MAY TRAVEL TO ALL THE MAGI STUDENT SEEKERS AND YOUR
FLOWER ROSE IMAGE BLESS THEM WITH ITS SIGHT AND FRAGRANCE.
LOVE IS A CHAIN) DEAR ONE) IT FLOWS FROM HEART TO HEART."

WITH THAT) HE KISSED MY CHEEK AND RELEASED ME AND WE WERE


BACK IN OUR MATTER ATMOSPHERE.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 319 of 382
."~·V
v'

I REST IN THE FIRM CONVICTION THAT I CAN


ACCOMPLISH WORTHWHILE THINGS. My ATTITUDE
NOW IS ONE OF INTENSE DESIRE TO LEARN. GOD
SUPPLIED ME WITH GREAT POTENTIALITY WHICH I
DIRECT IN AN AFFIRMATIVE RIGHT MANNER TO
ACCOMPLISH MY LEARNING PROGRAM.

As I THINK IN THE ONE GREAT GOD MIND) ALL


INFORMATION IS NOW AVAILABLE TO ME AND ALL
THE TALENT NECESSARY IS NOW MINE.

I GO FORTH IN COMPLETE CONFIDENCE TO SUCCESS


KNOWING WHAT I CAN CONCEIVE) I CAN ACHIEVE
WITH THE HELP OF GOD.
So LET IT BE!

"-:-===-=.:;;:::::::::::::;=

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 320 of 382
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 321 of 382
,,/"'v
/~
/
/

(
!

c i
UR
,1
i

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 322 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-THREE BLUE &YELLOW LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY-THREE

"THE STARS CAN SHOW US THE WAY"

"THERE IS ONE GLORY OF THE SUN J AND ANOTHER GLORY OF THE


MOON J AND ANOTHER GLORY OF THE STARS: FOR ONE STAR
DIFFERETH FROM ANOTHER STAR IN GLORY."
1 CORINTHIANS 15:41
MOONLIGHT SILVERED THE FIELDS AND DISTANT CASTLE ROOF. THE
ASTRAL STARS OVERHEAD SEEMED NEARER AND BRIGHTER THAN THE
GLEAM OF THE RIVER AS IT MURMERED THROUGH THE MEADOWS. THE
SONOROUS BONG OF THE CASTLE GONG STOLE ACROSS TO US. OVER
.THE WATER IN THE WEST} CLOUDS WERE PILING UP TILL THEY RESEM-
BLED THE IMAGE OF OUR CRENELATED CASTLE. As WE MOVED TOWARD
OUR DESTINATION} THE MOON'S RAYS SILENTLY CLIMBED TO THE
JAGGED HEIGHTS OF THE MOUNTAIN TOPS AND GLISTENED ON ITS
ICY SNOW LIKE DIAMONDS. ALL WAS LIKE A FAIRYLAND RESTING
BEYOND THE UTMOST BOUNDARY OF ALL HUMAN THOUGHT. THESE CLOUDS
CERTAINLY WERE LOOMING ABOVE THE BOUNDARIES OF OUR HUMAN
THOUGHT} LIKE WHITE GALLEONS SAILING THE ANCIENT SEAS. THEY
WERE AS SPARKLING JEWEL MINDS THAT TRAVEL DAILY DISTANCES TO
FAR OFF STARS. AN ORPHANED RAY OF STAR LIGHT SPREAD A PATH-
WAY BELOW} AS A LOTUS SYMBOL GREETED OUR APPROACH. WHEN IT
CLEARED} WE SAW A STRANGE SIGHT.

A TALL ELEPHANT WITH A WAVING FIGURE ON ITS BACK AND THE


THREE MAGI FOLLOWING} LEADING A CA.MEU THEY WERE APPROACH-
ING US AND THERE WAS HAOLE SHOUTING GREETINGS. "I'VE JUST
ARRIVED!" HIS EYES WERE SPARKLING WITH JOY AND HAPPINESS.
"Go IN QUICKLY} WE SHALL SOON MEET AGAIN."

WE HASTENED THROUGH THE THICK WALL PORTAL AND PAST THE FOUNTAIN
AND ITS PATTER OF DROPS OF WATER AND DREW IN THE FRAGRANCE OF

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 323 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 2

THE WARM MOIST NIGHT. THE SILVER EMERALD OF THE LAWN AND
MOON COVERED GARDENS WERE ALL AROUND US. MASSES OF YELLOW
ROSES REFLECTED THE MOON'S BEAMS. THEN CLOSE BY THE CASTLE'S
SIDE DOOR~ BLUE IRIS NODDED AND OVER ITS BED? THE GRACEFUL
MIMOSA TREE RAINED ITS GOLDEN BLOSSOM DROPS EVERYWHERE, ITS
PERFUME TOUCHING US.

IN HAPPY ANTICIPATION~ WE HURRIED THROUGH THE STONE HALLS


AND UP THE STAIRWAY~ PASSING A SUIT OF ARMOR GUARDING THE
LANDING. THEN ON DOWN THE UPPER HALLWAY WITH ITS LOW TEAK-
WOOD STANDS AND CABINETS OF BLACK LACQUER~ THEIR TRIMMINGS
OF SILVER GLEAMING AND THEIR DECOUPAGE FEATHERY WITH AFRICAN
DAISIES OF YELLOW.

OUR FEET SPED OVER ORIENTAL RUGS UNTIL AT LAST WE REACHED


THE LIBRARY DOOR. THIS WAS A ROOM LILY AND I KNEW WELL AND
CAME TO OFTEN FOR OUR TRAINING. IT IS A QUIET ROOM WHERE
LAMPS GLEAM ON POLISHED OAK AND A BLAZING LOG FIRE CASTS ITS
WARM GLOW OVER YOU UPON ENTRANCE. THOUSANDS OF BOOKS LEND
THEIR BINDING COLORS TO ITS DECOR.

I SAT IN A CHAIR NEXT TO EARTH ROSE~ WHO WAS SEATED AT OUR


DESK. WHITE LILACS STOOD BESIDE AN ANCIENT PIECE OF MING
PORCELAIN. PINK TULIPS GRACED LILY'S DESK AND VIOLET FREESIAS
WERE ON THE LONG TABLE WHERE WHITEBEARDS AND MASTERS SAT.
HAPPILY WE SMILED AROUND. ST. FRANCIS WAS BECKONING TO CYRUS
WHO WENT OVER AND SAT WITH HIM.

ROSE CONFIDED TRUSTFULLY~ "HAOLE'S HOME AGAIN." BEFORE I


COULD ANSWER~ ELEAZOR ENTERED AND AFTER GREETINGS BEGAN
DISCOURSING TO OUR LARGE GROUP.

"OUR BEGINNINGS AFTER THE WHITE GIANTS CAME TO EARTH WERE AS


FIRE WORSHIPPERS. THEY TAUGHT US THE 'LIFE-FORCE OF GOD
DWELT WITHIN THE UNIVERSAL RAYS OF FIRE AND LIGHT. THEREFORE~

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 324 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 3

ITS ESSENCE WAS IN FLAME AND WITHIN THE HEART OF OUR SOLAR
SUN AND THIS IS TRUE~ FOR WITHOUT SOL NO LIFE COULD EXIST
ON EARTH NOR ANYTHING GROW. THE TAUREANS TAUGHT THAT THIS
DIVINE ESSENCE~ 'LIFE-FORCE' IS PRESENT IN EVERY ATOM OF
THIS -UNIVERSE AND~ THEREFORE~ ALSO DWELLS IN OUR EARTH
BODY FORMS. AND THUS OUR LEARNING COMMENCED. WE ARE FAR
PAST OUR BEGINNINGS NOW~ YET STILL IN THE PROCESS OF DIS-
COVERING NEW IDEAS. WE NEED TO SEE AND CONTEMPLATE AT A
NEW ANGLE TODAY. LET US WITHPLOTINUS EXPLORE A VERY WISE
STATEMENT: "THE EYE WOULD NEVER SEE THE SUN~ IF IT WERE
NOT OF THE NATURE OF THE SUN." IT IS UNDERSTANDI~G OF SUCH
AS THIS WHICH GIVES US SPIRITUAL INSIGHT.

"WE ARE OF THE NATURE OF THE SUN AND STARS~ THE PLANETS
AND ALL OTHER 'LIFE.' WE ALL OWN BODY FORMS OF MATTER AND
'CELESTIAL MATERIALS AND SPIRIT RAYS. AND 'LIFE-FORCE' IS
WHAT CONNECTS US FIRMLY ONE TO ANOTHER IN A VAST AND LACY
WEB.

"LIFE-FORCE ITSELF IS LUMINOUS~ IMMORTAL AND STAR-LIKE IN


APPEARANCE."

"AH!" BREATHED LILY SOFTLY. "THEN ALL UNIVERSE FORMS


POSSESS AKASA. WE ARE ALL MADE UP OF THIS CELESTIAL FIRE."

WE WERE FILLED WITH WONDER.

"OUR CHILDREN ARE BEGINNING TO UNDERSTAND." ELEAZOR MURMERED


CANDIDLY. THE MASTERS NODDED.

"LITTLE ONES~ WITHIN THE AKASA RESTS A MENTAL IMPULSE ALSO


AND AS MORE AND MORE LIGHT ENTERS MIND~ IT AWAKENS THE
QUALITY 'WILL'. IT IS THEN YOU STRIVE FOR HIGHER KNOWLEDGE."

As WE HEARD THESE WORDS~ A STRANGE FEELING PERVADED OUR SOULS


AS THOUGH THE SPIRIT WITHIN US HAD MOVED. ELEAZOR CALLED OUR
ATTENTION BACK.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 325 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 4
"IT WAS THIS AKASA~ THIS INVISIBLE POWER OF 'LIFE & LIGHT'~
THAT BLINDED AHER (ST. PAUL) AND OPENED HIS MIND TO THE
KNOWLEDGE OF CHRIST'S WORDS. HIS FRIEND AKIBA (TIMOTHY)
FANNED THAT FLAME BY HIS DEVOTION TO AHER AND FROM HIS DESIRE
TO HAVE PAUL TEACH HIM TRUTH. SO IT WAS THAT TWO OF GOD'S
CHILDREN BECAME INITIATED INTO THE MYSTERIES."

"THEN OUR ACCUMULATED WISDOM IS THE ONLY ROCK WE HAVE TO


CLING TO WHEN ALL IS SAID AND DONE?" I ASKED~ MY VOICE
TRAILING OFF LAMELY.

"WE ALSO HAVE ONE ANOTHER" WAS HIS SOFT ANSWER. "THERE ARE
STILL~ HOWEVER~ FAR TOO FEW REAL VOTARIES OF THE OLD TAURIAN
AND MAGI WISDOMS. FAR TOO MANY CHILDREN OF EARTH REMAIN CON-
TENT TO JUST DABBLE AROUND THE EDGES OF WISDOM AND PLAY WITHIN
THE LOWER ASTRAL CONTACTS.

"THEN ALSO" HE SAID SIGHING; "SO MUCH HAS BEEN DEBASED BY


PRETENDERS. IT HAS DEGRADED THE SPACE GIANT'S TEACHINGS.
TODAY MANY ARE USING THE COSMIC LAWS FOR WRONG DOING.

"THE MAGI CONTENTS TAUGHT TO REVERE THE LAWS AND KEEP HONOR-
ABLE THE WISDOMS AND REALITY OF GOD."

A MOMENT OF STILLNESS FILLED THE ROOM. OUTSIDE WAS A NIGHT


OF MOON AND STARS. THEN ELEAZOR SMILED.

"THE MAGI INITIATES WERE EVER GREAT MEN AND WOMEN. SO MANY
WERE GREAT PROPHETS LATER IN EARTH TIME. ALSO SEERS AND
CHANNELS WHO FINALLY CAME TO POSSESS DIRECT INTERIOR COMMUNI-
CATIONS WITH GOD~ LOGOI AND FLAME BEINGS. THE TAURIANS GAVE
US EVERY INSTRUCTION THEY KNEW OF UNIVERSAL AFFAIRS FOR THEY
WERE KNOWLEDGABLE OF THE WAYS OF EARTH'S INCARNATING AND
KNEW OF HER DAYS AND NIGHTS AND OF THE UNTOLD NUMBER OF HER
TIME PERIODS OR KALPAS. THEY REVEALED THESE TIME PERIODS
. .
\~ULD TOTAL FOUR BILLION~ THREE HUNDRED MILLION AND TWENTY
THOUSAND YEARS = #9 ... WE MARVELED AT THIS.·AND THAT IT TOTALLED
#9.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 326 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 5

"AT THE BEGINNING AND END OF EVERY KALPA" NIGHT BORDERS AND
EARTH SLEEPS AND RENEWS HERSELF."

CYRUS' FACE LIT UP AND HIS VOICE RANG OUT; "OH" HOLY ONE"
THE KALPA TOTALS A #9. AND NINE LIES WITHIN THE SECRET
COMPUTATIONS WHICH WE ARE NOW STUDYING IN THE NINTH PATHWAY.
ALSO IN THE BIOGRAPHIC CHARTS" THE MAG"! GAVE ME WISDOM TO
UNFOLD" #9 DENOTES THE END OF A TREND. THIS PROVES THE
COSMIC MATHEMATICS AND EQUATIONS REST WITHIN NINES."

THE ~~STERS AND ELEAZOR WERE DELIGHTED IN CYRUS AND ELEAZOR


HASTENED TO ASSURE HIM.

"YES" CYRUS" IT IS SO. ONE DAY ANCIENT RECORDS SHALL COME


FORTH ON EARTH AND THESE IMPERISHABLE FIGURES OF UNIVERSAL
HARMONY BE TRACED. As YET MUCH REMAINS OF THIS AND OTHER
HIDDEN WISDOM WHICH IS UNCOMPREHENSIBLE TO HUMAN MATTER
SENSES."

VIOLET HAD BEEN DOING SOME QUIET THINKING AND NOW ASKED A
QUESTION.

"ARE WE DIFFERENT MATHEMATICAL EQUATIONS EACH TIME WE INCAR-


NATE INTO MATTER?"

"YES" THE WHOLE EGO PART OF SELF IS AWARE IT COULD NOT BE


WITHOUT A SUPREME MIND OVER ITS PORTION AND GOVERNING ITS
FUNCTIONS" VIOLET CHILD. THE WHOLE EGO IS INTUITIONAL.
EVEN YOUR TINY CONSCIOUS-POINT IS TO SOME DEGREE. EACH TIME
YOU DIP INTO MATTER" YOU HAVE A NEW AND DIFFERENT NUMBER
EQUATION. THE LARGER EGO IN OUR SPIRIT-FORM KNOWS GOD EXISTS.
THUS" IT WAS THAT WHEN AHER WAS TOUCHED BY THE AKASA" IT
OPENED ALL HIS EGO CONNECTIONS IN ALL HIS FORMS AND HE KNEW.
HIS INNER EYES SAW AND HE KNEW!"

ELEAZOR NOW POINTED OUT THE WINDOW TO THE BRIGHT STARS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 327 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 6

"WE ARE BORN EACH INCARNATION UNDER THE INFLUENCES OF CERTAIN


STARS. THE STAR OR PLANETARY BEING WHO RULES AND ABIDES IN
THIS COSMIC FORM IS CAPABLE BECAUSE OF THEIR SUPERIOR EVOLU-
TION AND MIND DEVELOPMENT. THEREFORE~ THEY CAN INFLUENCE
EARTH AND MANKIND AND ALL LIFE UPON HER. THEY INFLUENCE
THROUGH THE INVISIBLE AKASA RAYS WHICH HAVE AN AFFINITY WITH
MANKIND'S ETHERIC BODY FORM. You WILL LEARN IN THE NEAR
FUTURE ABOUT KARMA AND HOW THE STAR'S RAYS WORK IN YOUR
AFFAIRS.

"HE WHO CAN RELEASE THE PHYSICAL FIVE SENSES IN RELAXATION


WILL BECOME ABLE IN MEDITATION OR SELF MYSTIC POWER TO TUNE
INTO THE AKASA RAyS AND TRAVEL UPON THEM.

"REMEMBER~YOU ARE IN REALITY MANIFESTING IN THREE UNIVERSE


REGIONS SIMULTANIOUSLY~ EVEN WHEN YOU ARE IN MATTER. ALL
YOU NEED TO DO IS TUNE OUT OF ONE REGION AND INTO THE OTHER.
THIS YOU WILL BE ABLE TO DO ONCE YOU GET THE BLOCKS REMOVED
AND THE CONNECTION AREAS CLEARED."

I SPOKE UP; "EACH NEW REBIRTH INTO MATTER~


WE BRING A PART
OF OUR OWN ESSENCE INTO MATTER TO WORK UPON. Is IT ONLY
THESE PARTS THAT THE STAR TEACHERS HELP US TO CORRECT?"

"No~ THEY HELP IN ALL THE CONSCIOUS-POINT.

"THE GREAT SAGE) SANKARACHARYA) EXHORTED MANKIND; 'OH~ WISE


MAN~ REMOVE THE CONCEPTION THAT NOT-SPIRIT IS SPIRIT.'
PLEASE LEARN YOU ARE MUCH MORE THAN THAT TINY CONSCIOUS-MIND.
STOP BEING JUST FINITE IN YOUR IDEAS AND BECOME WHAT YOU ARE;
INFINITE MIND."

ELEAZOR JOINED THE MASTERS AT THE TABLE JUST AS DR. KEELER


CAME BURSTING INTO THE LIBRARY WITH HAOLE. CLOSE UP WE
HARDLY KNEW HAOLE FOR NOW HE WAS A GROWN MAN. HIS EYES
SENT LOVE TO EVERYONE THERE AND AS HE TOUCHED HIS CHELA)
LILY) TEARS OF JOY BRIGHTENED HER BEAUTIFUL EYES.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 328 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 7

"I BRING YOU BLESSINGS FROM THE SUN-REALMS AND MORE KNOW-
LEDGE OF THE AKASA RAYS. THIS POWER AND LIGHT EMANATES
FROM THE SEVEN SONS OF FOHAT (SEE ILLUSTRATION 2~ LESSON 3).
THUS IT RESTS IN SEVEN CHIEF GROUPS OF WAVE LENGTHS. IT
SEPARATES AS IT DESCENDS INTO THREE SUB-DIVISIONS; I. MENTAL
2. SPIRITUAL 3. PHYSICAL. #1 SUB-DIVISION RESTS ABOVE
ASTRAL AND IS CALLED THE 'BREATH JEWEL OF WISDOM.' #2 SUB-
DIVISION IS THE 'BREATH JEWEL OF SPIRIT' AND #3 ENTERS EACH
PLANET OF MATTER AND POLARIZES A BASE MAGNETIC FORCE TO ALL
STARS AND FROM PLANET TO PLANET.

"WE AS GOD'S RECENT CHILDREN WERE PASSED THROUGH ONE OF


'FOHAT'S' SEVEN SONS AND DOWN INTO ONE OF THE THREE SEPHERO~
THAl TRIAD (SEE ILLUSTRATION 2~ LESSON 3). FROM THERE WE
WERE ENERGIZED INTO THE AKASA FORCES FOR COUNTLESS STAR AND
PLANETARY COMBINATIONS. THIS WAS SO THE LORDS OF KARMA COULD
COMPUTE THE NEEDED AND VARIED DESTINY PATTERNS FOR OUR GROWTH
AND UNFOLDMENT.

"LIKEWISE ALL THE TWELVE SIGNS OF THE ZODIAC AND THEIR COUNT-
LESS LOGOI STARS HAVE SPECIALLY CREATED LIGHT RADIANTS~ AND
EACH CAN STAND TO EACH OTHER AND TO US~ IN TWELVE DIFFERENT
ASPECTS. THEIR COMBINATIONS ARE ALMOST INFINITE. THIS WOULD
HAVE TO BE AS OUR MANSTREAM IS MADE UP OF COUNTLESS UNIQUE
INDIVIDUALS."

SUDDENLY I CAME TO REMEMBER AND SPOKE: "HAOLE~ WE WERE TOLD


THERE ARE SEVEN SOUL GROUPS. Now YOU SPEAK OF SEVEN RAYS~
ARE THE SOUL GROUPS CONNECTED TO THE AKASA RAYS?"

"YES~ SOUL GROUPS ARE 'SEVEN' IN NUMBER AND EACH WITHIN THE
INFLUENCE OF ONE OF THE SEVEN COLORS AND AKASA RAYS. OURS
IS THE VIOLET RAy AND #7. THESE SEVEN RAYS ARE ALSO CONNECTED
WITH SEVEN SOLAR PLANETS; MERCURY~ VENUS~ EARTH~ MARS~ JUPITER~
SATURN AND NEPTUNE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 329 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 8

"THERE ARE ALSO NOW SEVEN EVOLUTIONARY CLASSES OF MANKIND


EXPERIENCING ON EARTH. ALL THESE SEVEN DEGREES OF PROGRESS-
ION HAVE COMMUNION ONE WITH ANOTHER. You ARE KNIT TOGETHER;
YET THE HIGHER AND STRONGER SOULS WILL SEEK FOR A NEEDED
INNER ASSOCIATION. THIS IS OF A SPIRITUAL MIND COMMUNION.
THIS MAGNETIC PULL WILL BRING THE ASTRAL BROTHERHOOD TOGETHER.
CERTAIN LOGO TEACHERS AND FLAME BUILDERS HAVE LEFT THEIR RAY
FORCES IN YOUR PATTERNS AND IT IS THESE WHICH DRAW YOU TO
THE MAGI AND CHRIST AND HIS SEVEN LORDS."

COLOR BLOSSOMED AROUND HAOLE. IITHESE RAYS HAVE STRENGTHS


FROM MOON ENERGIES TO THE HIGHEST SUN FORCES. OUR SOUL GROUP
RAY IS THE VIOLET.

"THERE IS A MYSTERIOUS SYMPATHY BETWEEN OUR SOULS AND THE


CONSTELLATIONS AND THEIR BEINGS AND ITS ESSENCE FLOWS WITHIN
THESE SEVEN RAYS.

"FOHAT IS THE DIVINE MASTER OF THE AKASA FORCE. FOHAT'S


ABODE IS THE UNKNOWN CENTRAL SUN OF THE UNIVERSE AROUND
WHICH WHEEL ALL SOLAR SYSTEMS AND GALAXIES. FOHAT IS GODJ /

OUR FATHER'S OVERSEER; HE WHO GOVERNS ALL.

"FAR OUTSIDE THE BOUNDARIES OF OUR SOLAR SYSTEM RESTS HIS


HIDING PLACE WITHIN THE DEEP WATERS OF SPACE AND NO MAN HAS
SEEN HIS FACE. NOR SHALL ANY OF OUR LIFESTREAM LOOK UPON
HIM UNTIL WE HAVE PASSED THROUGH THE SEVEN HALLS OF WISDOM
AND BEEN AGAIN ADMITTED BACK INTO OUR JEWELS.

"WE ARE GROWING UP WITH EARTH. THE FIRST MEN TO INHABIT


EARTH WERE A DARK RACE J IN THE FIRST HISTORY ON EARTH.
THEY WERE CALLED BY THE TAURIAN VISITORS 'ADAMI.' THUS J
ADAMI WAS A COLLECTIVE NAMEJ NOT ONE MAN'S NAME. THE
TAURIANS REMAINED PURE IN THEIR STRAIN FOR A LONG WHILEJ
AS THEY CAME AND WENT FROM EARTH AWAITING THE 'SEVEN TRIBES'
GROWTH UNDER THEIR TUTELAGE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 330 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 9

"EARTH WAS THEN A LAND OF WATER ABOVE WHICH..


~
ROSE. ..
SEVEN
-.. '. .

MOUNTAINS. ONE MOUNTAIN IN PARTICULAR ROSE ABOVE.. ALL. ... . .

OTHERS AND OVER IT THE GREAT POLE STAR WATCHED. .. HERE THE .. .

TAURIANS FIRST LANDED IN THE ICY SNOW AND BECAUSE .. ...


OF THEIR
.

SIZE AND WHITE FLESH J THE NATIVES NAMED THEM GODS. ., . THIS . . . .' .

MOUNTAIN STILL SOARS OVER EARTH WITHIN THE HIMALAYA RANGE


AND THEREIN DWELL EARTH'S HOLY ONES TODAY.

"THE SECOND PEOPLES WERE FOUND BY THE SPACE GIANTS UPON A


MOUNTAIN OVER THE WATERS IN THE LOCATION YOU NOW KNOW AS
SIBERIA. THE NEXT IN A LAND PART WHICH KNEW ~() WINTER ANI?
BLOOMED ABUNDANTLY. THIS EXISTED NEAR TO CEYLON AND SPREAD
AS FAR AS SUMATRA ALSO INCLUDING PARTS OF PRESENT AFRICA J .
AND HERE THE MAJORITY OF EARTH'S FIRST RACE OF MEN DWELT.
- ..

"A MERE HANDFUL OF PEOPLE WERE DISCOVERED NEARLY PERISHED


WHERE LATER ATLANTIS WAS TO RISE.

"THEN UPON MOUNT SHASTA ANOTHER TRIBE WAS CARED FOR AND
TAUGHT. LIKE THE FIRST} THE TAURIANS FOUND THESE ALSO
RESPONDED SO THAT AGES LATER THE GREAT MAGI TEMPLE WAS
BUILT UPON ITS HILLSIDE. ITS ASTRAL IMAGE STILL REMAINS
FOR THOSE WHO CAN SEE ITS OUTLINES.

"THE SIXTH TRIBE WAS UPON A HIGH PLATEAU AREA OF WHAT IS


NOW SOUTH AMERICA.

"THE SEVENTH MOUNTAIN TOP IS NOW ONLY AN ISLAND CALLED


EASTER} BUT HOLDS MANY ORIGINAL RELICS WHICH SURVIVED EVEN
AS ITS MOUNTAIN COLLAPSED AND SUNK SLOWLY INTO THE OCEAN'S
WATERS.

"THE EASTER TRIBE HUDDLED UPON A MOUNTAIN IN THE GENERAL


AREA OF AUSTRALIA. THESE PEOPLE WERE FISHERMEN AND KNEW
THE WATERS WELL.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 331 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-THREE PAGE 10

"WHEN SEISMIC OCCURANCES THREATENED THEIR MOUNTAIN HOME~


THEY SCATTERED OVER THE WATERS. EVEN TODAY A REMANENT
LIVE IN AUSTRALIA~ NEW ZEALAND AND PARTS OF THE PHILIPPINES.

"INTO EACH OF THE EARTH'S ORIGINAL SEVEN TRIBES OF PEOPLES


FLOWED THE SEVEN RAYS OF THE AKASA LIGHT.

"As DARK EARTH MAN GREW IN INTELLIGENCE~ THE TAURIAN SPACE


PEOPLE INTER-MARRIED INTO THEIR TRIBES AND THUS SCATTERED
THEIR MORE HIGHLY EVOLVED SEED AROUND OVER EARTH.

"BECAUSE THE TAURIANS HAD SHARED THEIR SECRET SCIENCES AND


HOLY WISDOMS WITH EARTH'S PEOPLE~ THESE ENTITIES DID NOT
SURRENDER TO THE UPHEAVALS WITHIN THE MILLENIUMS OF MATTER
TIME. RATHER THEY GREW AND THRIVED. EVEN AS THE CLIMATIC
CHANGES CAME ABOUT OVER EARTH~ THE EARLY MEN CONTINUED TO
STRIVE EVER UPWARD. THE WISDOMS THEY HELD FROM THE TAUREANS
GAVE THEM THE STRENGTH TO SEEK THE ETERNAL LIGHT."

HAOLE

A PARTY WAS NOW HELD FOR HAOLE AND WE AGAIN MET MANY FRIENDS
WE HAD MADE IN THE ASTRAL. IT WAS A JOYOUS TIME AND WE WERE
LOATH TO LEAVE IT FOR RETURN TO MATTER.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 332 of 382
'4;~: .'
.,
. -.~~~~
- .
l'
.--

"'"
'"'' .,

THERE IS A DIVINE SOLUTION TO EVERY SITUATION. t ..


[

THE DIVINE SOLUTION IS THE SUBLIME SOLUTION. f


I GIVE THANKS THAT THE DIVINE SOLUTION QUICKLY
APPEARS NOW! GOD IS GUIDING MEJ GOD IS SHOWING
ME THE WAY.
c IT IS MY DIVINE DESTINY TO SUCCEED J AND IT IS
GOD'S BUSINESS TO HELP ME. I EXPECT AND CLAIM
HIS DIVINE HELP Now!
r
(..

I DESIRE THE HIGHEST AND BEST IN LIFEJ AND I


NOW DRAW THE HIGHEST AND BEST TO ME.

AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 333 of 382
(

c:

~1 OTHE P. RABBI T AND TWl NS.


(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 334 of 382
(

c.

THE'r' WERE DRJNKll'JG FROM THE


SACRED SPRING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 335 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FOUR GREEN &ROSE LIGHTS

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY-FOUR

"THE SEVEN MYSTIC RAYS"

"A WISE MAN SHALL HEAR AND WILL INCREASE LEARNING: AND A
MAN OF UNDERSTANDING SHALL ATTAIN UNTO WISE COUNSELS."
PROVERBS 1:5

THE FIRST RAYS OF THE DAWNING ASTRAL SUN SHOWN THINLY IN THE
EAST AND AS ITS RAYS PENETRATED THROUGH THE LACY PINE NEEDLES"
A DAWN CHORUS BEGAN. A CLEAR VOICE CALLED" ECHOING THROUGH
THE TREES AND CLOUDS OF STARTLED BIRDS ROSE AHEAD OF US"
CIRCLING IN EXCITEMENT.

WE CAME UPON TWO FIGURES BEFORE A SMALL BUBBLING SPRING"


DRINKING OF ITS WATERS. THE SUN ROSE SLOWLY" BATHING US ALL
IN ITS FLAMING LIGHT. WILD FLOWERS WERE WAVING LIKE LITTLE
BRAVE BANNERS AS THE FRESH MORNING BREEZE PLAYED AMIDST THE
TALL WILD GRASSES. CLOVER SPREAD ITS SWEET SCENT EVERYWHERE.
ALL WAS RICH IN SUMMER WARMTH. TURNING" WE SAW A MOTHER
JACKRABBIT WITH TWO FROLICKING HALF-GROWN BABIES. I FELT
A TAP ON MY SHOULDER. IT WAS ONE OF THE SPRING DRINKERS"
AND HE GESTURED FOR US TO DRINK ALSO. WITH HAPPY SMILING
FACES" THEY WATCHED US AND ENJOYED OUR PLEASURE AS THE WATERS
INVIGORATED AND REFRESHED US.

A CALL WAS HEARD AGAIN WHICH OUR TWO FRIENDS LUSTILY ANSWERED
AND WE COULD SEE ROBIN HASTENING TOWARD US. AFTER SPEAKING
TO ROBIN IN AN UNKNOWN TONGUE" THEY DEPARTED AND EAGERLY ROBIN
CAME TO US.'

"SO YOU HAVE DRANK OF THE SACRED WATERS WHICH REDEEM" WAS HIS
HAPPY REMARK. "My FRIENDS TRAVEL FAR FOR ITS BENEFITS" COMING
FROM A LOWER LEVEL TO PARTAKE OF ITS QUALITIES." HE KNELT

© REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 336 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FOUR PAGE 2
AND DRANK. How CHARMING AND GUILELESS ARE HIS CLEAR EYES)
I THOUGHT.

DRINKING IN THE RICH SUNLIGHT) ROBIN LED US OVER CARPETS


OF GRASS AND INTO A LUSH WOODED AREA. "THIS IS OUR LARCH
WOODS") HE SAID. THE GREAT POINTED TREES MADE SHADOWS
BEFORE US) THEIR NEEDLES CARPETING THE GROUND AND SO WE
WALKED TO OUR RENDEZVOUS.

THEN BEFORE US WAS A SOLID WALL OF ROCK WITH ONLY A NARROW


CLEFT THROUGH WHICH WE SQUEEZED AFTER ROBIN. IT WAS WARM
AND MILD AND SPRINGLIKE AS WE ENTERED A DELL-LIKE PLACE
SURROUNDED IN ROCK FORMATIONS) AND THERE AZARIAH BEDAN AWAITED
US. (SEE LESSON 10) SERIES 1)
-
WHAT AN UNEXPECTED PLACE TO FIND) I THOUGHT. BUTTERFLIES
HOVERED AND BIRDS SANG AND A TINY BROOK LAUGHED GAYLY AS
SILENT FIGURES SLIPPED THROUGH THE NARROW ROCK PASSAGE AND
JOINED US. WE DIDN'T KNOW IT THEN) BUT ALL HAD STOPPED TO
DRINK AT THE SACRED- SPRINGS AS WE HAD.

AZARIAH BEDAN CALLED US ALL TO ATTENTION AND BEGAN HIS


LECTURE.

"My CHILDREN) YOU HAVE PARTAKEN OF THE SEVEN MYSTIC RAYS IN


THE WATERS OF THE SACRED SPRING)AND ARE FORTIFIED TO ASSIMI-
LATE NEW AND UNKNOWN FACTS." EVERYONE SETTLED NOW TO GIVE
UNDIVIDED ATTENTION TO HIS WORDS.

"WE WOULD HAVE YOU KNOW OF THE SOUL AND SPIRIT CAUSES WHICH
LIE OUTSIDE THE REGIONS OF MATTER AND OF THEIR INFLUENCES ON
YOUR LIVES NOW) WHILE YOU ARE DWELLING IN MATTER.

"THE SEVEN MYSTIC RAYS REST BEYOND YOUR PHYSICAL SENSES


WHERE YOU CANNOT OBSERVE THEM. YET) LIKE GRAVITY) THEIR

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 337 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FOUR PAGE 3

ENERGY FORCES INFLUENCE EARTH'S PEOPLES. You KNOW GRAVITY


ACTION WORKS FOR YOU AS YOU USE ITS LAW OF ATTRACTION AND
REPULSION. REALIZE NOW WE WILL BE CONTEMPLATING ELEMENTS
UTTERLY DEVOID OF VIEWABLE PROPERTIES BY YOUR PHYSICAL EYES.

"THESE MYSTIC SEVEN RAYS, KNOWN AS THE AKASA RAyS, ARE ATOMIC
IN THEIR MECHANICS. You KNOW THAT EARTHLINGS HAVE NEVER SEEN
AN ATOM; YET MANKIND HAS COMPOSED A SYMBOL FOR SUCH AND FOR
OTHER INVISIBLE ELEMENTS SUCH AS THE MATTER CHEMICAL SYMBOLS.
THESE TRANSCENDENTAL SUBSTANCES EXIST EVERYWHERE IN THE
UNIVERSE COSMOS AND ARE THE CAUSES BEHIND MUCH PHENOMENA
THROUGH THEIR LAWS OF COHESION AND REPULSION. THEY ARE OF
ACTUAL COSMIC SUBSTANCE AND WITHIN THEIR SCALE OF VARIED
DEGREE, THEY ACTIVATE A MYRIAD OF ENERGY WAVES.

"MATTER PHYSICS HAVE APPROXIMATED THE 'EFFECTS' BEHIND SUCH


PHENOMENA BUT WE MUST SEEK NOW FOR THE ULTIMATE CAUSES. THESE
DWELL ONLY IN REGIONS ABOVE MATTER.

"THE SEVEN MYSTIC RAYS ARE ALSO WITHIN THE SUN SOL'S ENERGY
FORCES. AND AS THESE RAYS POUR OVER AND INTO MANKIND, EACH
HAS A DISTINCT APPLICATION. EACH MAGNETIZES TO ITS OWN PLACE
WITHIN OUR MANSTREAM CONSCIOUSNESS.

"THESE ENERGIES DO NOT TRAVEL UPON THE VOICE OR SPOKEN WORD


SOUNDS, BUT DO TRAVEL THROUGH MUSICAL SOUNDS" AND COLORS. As
THESE SOUNDS AND COLORS CORRELATE THEIR TWIN VIBRATIONS, AN
INVISIBLE BUT RADIANT SUBSTANCE COMES FORTH AND MANIFESTS
UPON AND WITHIN THE MATTER REGIONS.

"IT WILL BE OUR 'SENTIENT' SOUL PART WHICH FEELS THESE INVISI-
BLE RAYS. OUR INTELLECTUAL SOUL MIND AREA SEES THEM AS LIGHT
AND COLOR. THESE AKASA RAYS SERVE THE DEITY OF MIND.

"THESE MYSTIC RAYS ARE ALSO THAT WHICH RAISES A PERSON INTO
"THEIR HIGHER STATE OF BEING.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 338 of 382
SERIES Two ..
LESSON TWENTY-FOUR PAGE 4

"WE WOULD HAVE YOU KNOW THESE SEVEN AKASA WAVE-LENGTHS HOLD
WITHIN THEIR CENTER CONSTITUTION THE BASIS OF ALL MATTER
PARTICLES AND ELEMENTS.

"THE COMBINED CORRELATIONS OF THESE RAYS PRODUCE MANY DIFFER-


ENT MATTER ELEMENTS AND CHEMICALS. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
THE RAYS AND THEIR WAVE-LENGTHS~ LIES IN THE RAPIDITY OF
MOVEMENT. THIS UNIQUE ACTION WITHIN THEM CREATES EXCITATION
OF ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR MOTION AND IS WHAT CREATES MATTER'S
FLUIDS~ GASES AND SOLIDS. THE ANCIENTS HAD A GREATER KNOWLEDGE
OF PHYSICS THAN PRESENT DAY MAN.

"HAVING RECEIVED THEIR TEACHINGS FROM THE TAUREANS~ THE ANCIENTS


ALSO LEARNED THE 'EFFECTS' STEMMED FROM HIGHER COSMIC CAUSES.
THEY KNEW FORCE ITSELF IS BUT THE PASSAGE OF ONE STATE OF
RHYTHM OR MOTION INTO ANOTHER STATE OF RHYTHM AND MOTION.
THEY KNEW THAT THESE SEVEN MYSTIC RAY FORCES HELD WITHIN
THEM THE POWER TO TRANSFORM.

"ALL LIES WITHIN THE SAME. STATE OF TENUITY AS DOES COSMIC LAW.
AND THERE ARE STILL MANY COSMIC STATES STILL UNDREAMT OF BY
LITTLE EARTH BEINGS AND THEIR PHYSICISTS~ CHEMISTS AND
ASTRONOMERS."

WE COULD WELL BELIEVE AZARIAH BEDAN'S STATEMENT.

"WHAT YOU SEE AND KNOW IN MATTER IS BUT THE EFFECTS GENERATED
AND SUBSERVIENT TO THE HIGHER COSMIC POWERS AND LAWS."

I TOOK MY COURAGE BY THE HAND AND ASKED~


"How CAN WE CONTROL
THE RAYS FLOWING INTO OURSELVES?" "THROUGH OUR CONSCIOUSNESS
QUALITIES AND MIND ASPECTS. THEY RELATE TO THE STATES OF CON-
SCIOUSNESS AND MIND. THE HIGHER YOUR MIND AND CONSCIOUSNESS
HAVE BEEN DEVELOPED~ THE GREATER WILL BE THE CORRESPONDING
RELATIONSHIP AND THE GREATER ITS PHENOMENA OF MANIFESTATION.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 339 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-FOUR PAGE 5

"THE AKASA RAyS' POTENCIES CONTACT WITH ALL TERRESTRIAL


DIFFERENTIATED MATTER AND THIS INCLUDES THE MANSTREAM INCAR-
NATING THERE. THIS OCCURS THROUGH EACH ENTITY'S PSYCHIC FACUL-
TIES. THEREFORE~ YOU HAVE ESP MANIFESTING. ALSO~ POLTERGEIST
ACTIVITIES AND APPORTATION."

HE LOOKED AROUND TO SEE IF WE WERE GETTING HIS MEANINGS AND


SATISFIED~ CONTINUED:

"LIGHT AND FIRE AND OTHER FORCE RAYS ARE NOT JUST MYSTIC SYM-
BOLS~ CHILDREN. THESE OF THE SEVEN RAyS HOLD CONCEALED FACTORS;
JUST AS DOES THE ACTUAL PERFORMANCE OF INITIATION RITUALS AND
THE SOUND COMBINATIONS OF CHANTS AND THE DRINKING OF COLOR PEN-
ETRATED WATERS.

"THE FLIPPANT PERSONS OF EARTH KNOW NAUGHT OF THE UNSEEN FOR-


CES OR HIDDEN WISDOMS~ SO THEY CLING TO THEIR LIMITED AGNOS-
TICISMS."

"AZARIAH" SPOKE VIOLETJ "ARE THESE SEVEN RAYS GRADUATED IN


VOLUME OR WHAT?"

"No~ VIOLET~ EACH RAY HOLDS ITS OWN STRENGTH AND PURPOSE.
WHILE THEY ARE NUMBERED ONE TO SEVEN~ ALL ARE EQUAL AND INDIVI-
DUAL IN THEIR PURPOSE. LET ME NAME THEM FOR YOU FROM THEIR
PSYCHIC MOON POWER POLE TO THEIR SUN LIFE-GIVING FORCE POLE.

1. SUSHUMNA STRONGEST PSYCHIC CURRENT


2. HARIKESA MIDDLE PSYCHIC CURRENT
3. VISWAKARMAN CENTER MOON PSYCHIC CURRENT
4. VISWATRYARCHAS CENTER SUN LIFE CURRENT
5. SANNADDHA- MIDDLE SUN LIFE CURRENT
6. SARVAVASU HIGH SUN LIFE CURRENT
7. SWARAJ SUN &MOON CURRENTS IN EQUALITY

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 340 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-FOUR PAGE 6

"THE ANCIENTS NAMED THESE RAYS AND OFTEN SPENT HOURS MEDITA-
TING UNDER THEIR COLOR POWERS WHICH ARE: RED~ ORANGE~ YELLOW~
GREEN~ BLUE INDIGO AND VIOLET WHICH SHOW IN THE DROPLETS OF
YOUR RAINBOW AS SOL SENDS HIS BEAMS TO EARTH."

VIOLET THANKED HIM.

"INTELLIGENCE LIES IN EACH OF THE AKASA RAYS AND ALL WITHIN


UNIVERSE~ INCLUDING THESE MYSTIC RAYS~FOLLOW LAW.

"THERE IS NO MIRACULOUS CREATION OR SUDDEN METAMORPHOSIS OF


BEING~ ALL FOLLOW RULES.

"EVERYTHING MUST START AT A POINT AND PROCEED ACCORDING TO


LAW IN ORDER TO ATTAIN. ATTAINMENT CANNOT BE GRANTED FROM
AN EXTERNAL ACT FROM ANOTHER PERSONj SUCH WOULD GO AGAINST
ALL THE LAWS OF UNIVERSAL GROWTH AND EXPANSION.

"INTELLIGENCE GROWS FROM WITHIN~ OUTWARD. THE LIFE-ENTITY


ITSELF MUST FIRST START THE ACTION WITHIN SELF~ THEN AND ONLY
THEN~ CAN THESE GREAT MYSTIC RAYS DO THEIR WORK OF AIDING.

"LITTLE ONES~ REMEMBER ALWAYS YOU WERE CREATED IN THE LIKE-


NESS OF GOD~ OUR FATHER. THEREFORE~ YOU POSSESS A MIND WHICH
ALREADY HAS ITS OWN POWER TO SPIRITUALLY CREATE."

AZARIAH NOW WENT AMONG US AND TOOK OUR HANDS AND SPOKE TO
EACH. WE MOVED AROUND UNTIL EIDAR CAME THROUGH THE ROCK
PASSAGE INTO THE DELL. (SEE LESSON g~ SERIES 2) HE CAME
STRAIGHT OVER TO ME~ SAYING: "How WE MISS YOU~ MESHA ROSE~
AND LOOK TO THE DAY OF YOUR RETURN TO US."

THIS TAUREAN WAS TO ROUND OUT OUR MEETING AND HE BEGAN AS


SOON AS ALL WERE SETTLED AGAIN.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 341 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-FOUR PAGE 7
"COMING EVENTS"

"AT THE INAUGURATION OF THE COMING THOUSAND GOLDEN YEARS OF


PEACE" A GREAT CATASTROPHE SHALL CLEANSE EARTH OF MANY OF
THE NEGATIONS AND EVILS WHICH HAVE BUILT UP THROUGH MANKIND'S
IGNORANT ACTIONS AND WRONG ATTITUDES OF THINKING. IT SHALL
OBLITERATE ON EARTH ALL TRACES OF THE MANSTREAM'S INEPTNESS
AND MANY OF EARTH'S PEOPLE. CONTINENTS SHALL RISE AND OTHERS
SHALL FALL. MINERAL SOURCES SHALL ELEVATE FROM EARTH'S SUB-
TERRANEAN DEPTHS. LEFT STANDING SHALL BE ONLY THE ENERGY
CONDUCTORS OF THE ANCIENT TAURIANSj THE PYRAMIDS AND A FEW
SCATTERED SACRED SPOTS OF HARMONIOUS MIND ENERGIES. A REMNANT
OF PEOPLE SHALL SURVIVE AND THESE WILL BE THE NEXUS OF THE
FUTURE RACE.

"To SURVIVE" YOUTH WILL NOT BE A PRE-REQUISITE" BUT PURITY


OF WISDOM AND MIND. FOR THESE SHALL BE THEY WHO WILL FOUND A
NEW STRAIN AND SEED ON EARTH. IT WILL BE THOSE WHO HAVE KEPT
THE TRUST AND ASSIMILATED MIND KNOWLEDGES WHICH WILL REINFORCE
ALL COSMIC PRINCIPLES AND LAWS.

"As THESE EARTHLINGS RE-PEOPLE AND BUILD THE WORLD" THEY SHALL
BE PARTNERED WITH 'LONELY ONES'" OR AS YOU CALL THEM 'WALK-INS'"
I'
WHO SHALL AID" TEACH AND GOVERN WHERE NEEDED.

"THERE WILL BE NO NATIONAL} RACIAL OR SECTARIAN GROUPS. THE


NEW REHABILITATING WILL BE A COOPERATIVE TASK. AND IT WILL
BE UNFOLDING FROM INTUITIVE MIND IDEAS. IT WILL HOLD AT FIRST
A RATHER DESPERATE POWER FOR ALL WILL RECOGNIZE THAT UNLESS
COSMIC LAW IS OBEYED} THE PLANET AND MAN COULD BECOME EXTINCT.

"THE LAND MASSES OF EARTH WILL BE DIFFERENT FROM WHAT YOU NOW
KNOW AND THIS WILL BE A PLUS FACTOR FOR IT WILL RAISE ALL THE
WATER TABLES AND PURIFY THE PUTRIDNESS FROM EARTH'S WATERS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 342 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTY-FOUR PAGE 8

"IN ALL THIS TURBULENCE~ THE TRUTHS OF THE ANCIENT MAGI ORDER
SHALL SURVIVE AND BE A BASIS FOR EARTH'S RECONSTRUCTION."

WE WERE SITTING SPEECHLESS.

"THROUGH THE 'BORN ONES' WHO SURVIVED AND THOSE LET DOWN TO
EARTH INTO BORROWED BODY FORMS~ THE NEW GOLDEN AGE SHALL COME
INTO BEING.

"IT IS THE WHITE BROTHERHOOD WHO SUPERVISES SUCH EVENTS AND


THEY WOULD HAVE YOU KNOW THE EARTH AND ALL UPON HER CRUSTS~
STAND NOW UPON THE THRESHOLD OF ONE OF THE MOST TRANSCENDING
EVENTS OF THIS FOURTH ROUND OF EARTH.

"A TIME APPROACHES WHEN THE WHEAT MUST BE SEPARATED FROM THE
CHAFF. ~HEN THIS MOMENT TAKES PLACE~ THERE WILL BE AN OCCUR-
ANCE WHICH SEVERS THE PAST INVOLUTION PERIOD FROM THE FUTURE
EVOLUTIONARY ASCENDANCE. As THIS POINT IN MATTER TIME ARRIVES~
MOMENTOUS PORTENTS HERALD ITS APPROACH.

"BECOME AS QUALIFIED AS POSSIBLE FOR THOSE UNEQUAL TO MEASURE


TO A CONSCIOUS AND SPIRITUAL MATURITY SHALL BE SET ASIDE ON
LESSOR BYWAYS.

"IN THE NEW GOLDEN AGE~ A THIRD GENERATION OF MEN SHALL COME
FORTH AND KNOW A SUDDEN ACCELERATION OF MIND ADVANCEMENT.
THEREFORE~ OUR ADVICE TO YOU IS TO LEARN NOW ALL YOU CAN SO
YOUR FUTURE WILL BE A PREPARED ONE WHEREVER YOU FIND YOURSELF
IN UNIVERSE.

"THERE IS NOW BEING PERMITTED~ A JOINING OF SOUL GROUP GOVER-


NORS. THESE MASTER SPOKESMEN ARE DRAWING THEIR SEVERAL SOUL
GROUP WORKS TOGETHER AS THE TIME DRAWS NEAR FOR CHRIST'S RETURN
TO EARTH. THUS~ EARTH CENTERS AND RETREATS ARE KNOWING NEW

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 343 of 382
SERIES Two _ ..

LESSON TWENTY-FOUR PAGE 9

ACTION J AND THEIR SPIRITUAL SERVICES AND HEALING PROJECTIONS


MUST GO DEEP INTO THE UNIVERSAL CONSCIOUSNESS
.
EVERYWHERE
.. ..

- - .
'

LET THE SANCTUARIES OF THE MAGI DRAW THE MYSTIC SEVEN RAYS
INTO YOUR CONSCIOUSNESS AND MIND.

"You MET KUT HUMI VISITING OUR SOUL GROUP IN THIS WORK WHEN - • '0' •• __ ._

YOU WERE IN THE MUSIC ROOM OF THE CASTLE IN LESSON 17J SERIES
2.
- . ---
"ALL SOUL GROUPS HAVE A RAY AND COLOR. AND MASTERS WHO .
OVERSEE
. . -. . - .

THEIR SANCTUARY CEREMONIES J BUT LITTLE MAN HIMSELF MUST WEAVE


HIS OWN BACKGROUND COLORS INTO THESE SEVEN RAYS.

"THE TIME IS NOW. WEAVE THEM WELL FROM OUR REVEALED KNOWLEDGE.
BLESS YOU ALL!"

EIDAR
THE MASTERS LEFT US IN THE DELL SO OUR GROUP COULD DISCUSS
. .. .. . . . .. . ... ,-

ALL WE HAD HEARD. I WAS HAPPY TO SEE THE HIGH MINDEDNESS


PRESENT AND ALL ATTITUDES AIMED NOT ON FEAR AND HORROR J BUT
ON INTENT TO PREPARE EACH SELF TO MEET THE FUTURE WITH VALOR
AND PREPAREDNESS.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 344 of 382
(

.. "","

THIS IS A TIME OF DIVINE FULFILLMENT. MIRACLES


NOW FOLLOW MIRACLES AND WONDERS NEVER CEASE TO
MANIFEST AS THE DIVINE PLAN OF MY LIFE.

THE DIVINE PLAN OF MY LIFE NOW UNFOLDS J STEP BY


STEP. I HAPPILY RECOGNIZE EACH PHASE OF ITJ
ACCEPT IT IN MY PRESENT AND FUTURE J AND LET IT
SHOW ME HOW TO MAKE THE MOST OF MY LIFE.

I AM STRONG IN THE LORD AND IN THE POWER OF HIS


MIGHT. ALL POWER HAS BEEN GIVEN ME FOR SUPREME
GOOD IN MINDJ BODY AND AFFAIRS. I CLAIM AND
EXPERIENCE IT NOW.
AND So IT Is!

(
",'. '.'
"~ . "


. ; .....
"'-""':"_~';~"''''''' . . . r; ...............: - : _."--', •• ~ .... .:o ..... ~

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 345 of 382
(

/
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 346 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 347 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE ORANGE &YELLOW LIGHT~

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY-FIVE

"RELATIONS OF THE STAR SIGNS TO MAN"

"COMMIT THY WORKS UNTO THE LORD AND THY THOUGHTS SHALL BE
ESTABLISHED."
PROVERBS 16:3

THROUGH THE FAMILIAR MIST J AN OPALESCENT GLIMMER WAS BREAK-


ING AND WE COULD SEE THE CASTLE
.-.
TOWERSJ THEIR
. .
CRENELLATIONS
LOOMING LIKE SHADOWY CROWNS. THE EMERGING ASTRAL SUN GAVE
OUR FACES A LUMINOUS QUALITY.

THE MEADOW BEHIND THE VILLAGE WAS A GOSSAMER LACE OF WHITE


DAISIES AND BACKED BY THE BIG BEECH TREE WHICH WAS AFIRE IN
GLOWING REDS AND YELLOWS. THE SEA SMELL WAS STRONG ON THE
BREEZE AS WE FOLLOWED THE ESTUARY DOWN TO THE BEACH.

WE SAW EIDAR SITTING ON A ROCK NEAR THE VILLAGE QUAY. SOFT


CLOUDS WERE TOSSED LIKE FEATHERS ALONG THE SKYWAY. WITHOUT
A SOUND J WE JOINED HIM. I SAT HUNCHED WITH FINGERS CLASPED
OVER MY KNEES AND MY MIND ABSORBING THE VOICES OF FISHERMEN
CLOSE BY. THEY WERE HAULING AT THEIR NETS AND JOSHING ONE
ANOTHER. WHAT A COLORFUL LANDJ THIS ASTRAL. I JUMPED AS
TWO GULLS SCREAMED OVERHEAD AND UNFOLDED MYSELF FROM THE
ROCK.

LILY EXCLAIMED: "OHJ I LOVE COMING OVER HERE."

A GOLDEN EAGLE SOARED PROUDLY OVER THE SANDY BEACH AND


AGGRESSIVELY SURVEYED THE SHORE. VIOLET'S EYES CLOSELY
WATCHED ITS PROGRESS. CYRUS SIGHED IN CONTENTMENT. THEN
EIDAR CAME OUT OF HIS MEDITATION AND STRETCHED.

co REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 348 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 2

As THOUGH ON CUE J THE CASTLE GROUP CAME DOWN THE LAST OF THE
CLIFF STAIRS J AND WE ALL HAPPILY JOINED IN GREETING ONE
ANOTHER. SHALEM WAS AMONG THEMJ SAYING: "IT'S GOOD TO BE
TOGETHER AGAIN. WE DO LOOK FORWARD TO YOUR VISITS."

As WE SETTLED ON THE SUNNY SAND IN A CIRCLE J EIDAR SAID SHELEM'S


TALK WAS TO BE ON SOUL GROUPS AND THE WHITE BROTHERHOOD.

THE SUN TURNED SHALEM'S WAVEY HAIR TO GOLD AS HIS WORDS BEGAN:

"THERE IS A MUCH HIGHER LEVEL IN OUR MINDS THAN THIS INTELLEC-


TUAL PORTION OF HIGH ASTRAL. IT RESTS IN THE FLAME REGIONS IN
OUR SPIRIT FORM. AND ITS CONTENTS MUST J IN THE FUTURE J MERGE
INTO A SPIRIT MANNER OF THINKING.

"No VALtiEs WILL BE LOST FROM MIND AS WE EVOLVE AND BECOME PART
OF THIS HIGHER REGION OF UNIVERSE. QUITE THE OPPOSITE J FOR BY
THEN WE WILL BE FAR GREATER BEINGS THAN WE EVER IMAGINED. THE
PRESENT PATH WE ARE NOW FOLLOWING HAS BEEN TRAVELED BEFORE BY
OUR ELDER SIBLINGS OF GOD; THE ANGELSJ FLAME BEINGS AND LOGOI.
IT'S A WELL WORN PATH J AND WELL PLANNED BY GODJ OUR FATHER.
UNIVERSE IS NOT A ONE TIMEJ SPONTANEOUS CREATION BY OUR PARENT
GOD.

"THE MASTERS TEACH THAT THERE HAVE BEEN MANY OTHER UNIVERSE
CREATIONS BEFORE THIS ONE WHICH WE ARE NOW TRAVELING. IT IS
ALSO TOLD THAT THERE SHALL BE MANY MORE TO COME AFTER THIS
ONE RECEDES BACK INTO GOD THE ABSOLUTE.

"THIS MAY AT FIRST SEEM A STRANGE IDEA TO YOU. WE OF OUR LIFE-


STREAM WHO ARE JUST REACHING HIGHER AWARENESS STILL HAVE A VERY
HUMAN TENDENCY TOWARD MISINTERPRETING THE HIGHER EVIDENCES
BECAUSE WE HAVE BEEN IN THE HABIT OF JUDGING EVERYTHING FROM
OUR OLD PRECONCEIVED MIND THEORIES. WE LEARNED CERTAIN IDEAS
WHICH WE TEND TO HANG ONTO BECAUSE WE HAVE ENTERTAINED THEM
FOR YEARS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 349 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 3

"UNLESS WE CAN MOVE BEYOND OUR OLD OBSOLETE


. . ..
MIND FACTS
...
AND .

EMBRACE NEW AS THEY ARE GIVEN AND EXPLAINED


. J . WE WILL REMAIN

STANDING STILL AT THAT OLD POINT AND MOVE ONLY VERY SLOWLY
AND SLUGGISHLY TOWARD EVENTUAL IMPROVEMENT.

"You SEE J IT IS FROM OUR LEARNING CONTENTS THAT. . WE . .MAGNETIZE


TO ANY SOUL GROUP. THERE ARE SEVEN DIFFERENT DEGREES OF
SOUL GROUPS AND AN INDIVIDUAL HAS THE PRIVILEGE OF WORKING
UP THROUGH ALL SEVEN UNTIL THEY HAVE SUCCEEDED ON REACHING
THE TWO TOP-MOST GROUPS.

"ALL SEVEN GROUPS ARE ACTIVE ON EARTH . TODAY AND .. HOLDING SOULS
.

JOINED TOGETHER IN A MUTUAL FAMILY RELATIONSHIP.

"OUR PARTICULAR SOUL GROUP IS THE VERY HIGHEST ONE OF ASTRAL •.


DUR MEMBERS ARE OF THOSE CHILDREN OF MATTER WHO HAVE WORKED
THEIR WAY UP TO BE STUDYING UPON THE EIGHTH AND NINTH PATHWAYS.

"NUMBER EIGHT PATHWAY HAS A BASIC BLUE


..
RAY THROUGH
. .. ..WHICH
.
ITS
MEMBERS BECOME HEALERS AND TEACHERS. OUR NUMBER NINE PATHWAY
USES THE AKASA VIOLET RAy.

"THE HIGHER EARTH·ENTITIES SUCCEED IN RAISING AND EXPANDING


THEIR MIND CONSCIOUSNESS J THE MORE RAPID WILL BE THEIR PER-
SONAL RHYTHM RATES. You CAN TEST THIS FOR YOURSELF. THE
TAURIAN WALK-INS ARE OLDER IN COSMIC TIME AND IN MENTAL AND
SPIRITUAL UNFOLDMENT SO THEIR TAURIAN HUMANITY OF OUR MANSTREAM
NOW NORMALLY EXIST WITHIN A MORE RAPID ENERGY PATTERN. THIS
YOU CAN TEST IN MESHA ROSE WHOSE PULSE RATE IS FAR FASTER
THAN IS THE NORMAL EARTH PERSON. EARTH WALK-INS WILL NOT
HAVE A FASTER PULSE.

"GOD THE ABSOLUTE WATCHES CAREFULLY OVER THESE SEVEN SOUL


GROUPS J FOR THEIR OVERALL ENERGY DESIGN MUST BE KEPT WITHIN
THAT WHICH HE SET DOWN ORIGINALLY. THE HIGHER EACH ENTITY
ADVANCES UPWARD J THE GREATER BECOMES HIS FREEDOM OF SELF AND
CHOICE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 350 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 4

"THE SOUL-AsTRAL AREA CAN BE YERY FRUSTRATING TO THE UNEVOLVED


SOUL; WHEREAS THE HIGH ATTAINERS CAN KNOW A GLORIOUS J HAPPYJ
PEACEFUL STAY.

"WHILE THE ASTRAL AREA YOU MAY FIND YOURSELF IN AFTER TRANSI-
TION WILL RESEMBLE MATTER'S PHYSICAL AREAS J REALIZE AS YOU
BECOME ACCLIMATED THAT NEW IMPROVEMENTS WILL FORM AROUND YOU.

"ALSOJ THE MEMORY SCHOOLS YOU WILL BE ASSIGNED TO ATTEND WILL


VARY ACCORDING TO THE PATHWAYS YOU HAVE MANAGED TO MERIT AN
ENTRANCE. YOUR PSYCHOLOGICAL STATE INDICATES YOUR SCHOOL.
You NEED NOT FEAR ENTERING AND STAYING ON ANY EARTH PATHWAY
IN WHICH YOU ARE NOT READY TO EXPLORE. IF YOU DO ENTER ONE
INCOMPATIBLE TO YOUR MIND DEVELOPMENT J YOU WON'T REMAIN WITH
IT. SOMETHING WITHIN IT WILL CAUSE YOU TO REJECT ITS CONTENTS.

"THE FAIRLY WELL-BALANCED PERSON J UPON DISCOVERING THE WISDOM


CONTENTS AND HEALING SURROUNDINGS J WILL TAKE TO THEIR RIGHT
PATHWAY WITH NO CONFLICT OF MIND. OTHERS WILL FLIT HERE AND
THEREJ NEVER STAYING LONG ON THE HIGHER GROUPS.

"EVERY INDIVIDUAL MUST HAVE WORKED UP THROUGH ALL THE NINE


PATHWAYS AND THROUGH THE SEVEN SOUL GROUPS BEFORE LEAVING
THE MATTER WHEEL OF INCARNATIONS.

"WHY? BECAUSE BOTH EARTH AND MANKIND MUST TRAVEL THROUGH THE
SEVEN UNIVERSE REGIONS EVENTUALLY. WE HAVE ALREADY INVOLUTED
DOWN INTO THREE AND ONE-HALF ROUNDS. WE ARE NOW RECEIVING
THROUGH OUR LITTLEST EGO J OUR MIND FOUNDATIONS. WE ALREADY
HAVE OUR VEHICLE-FORM FOUNDATIONS WHICH WERE LAID DOWN BY GOD'S
ELDER CHILDREN FOR US AS THE HIGHER ONES BROUGHT US TO THE
EGO STATE OF ROUND FOUR. THEY WILL CONTINUE TO HELP US J BUT
OUR RECORD OF ACHIEVEMENT NOW LIES SQUARELY ON OUR OWN ABILITIES.

"THERE WILL BE TWELVE TRANSFORMATIONS WHICH EARTH MUST PASS


THROUGH AS SHE GROWS AND DEVELOPS DURING THIS ROUND FOUR.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 351 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 5

IN EACH TRANSFORMATION J MANY GEOLOGICAL EVENTS WILL OCCUR.


THESE CYCLES OF EARTH CHANGES HAVE CERTAIN LOGO INSTRUCTORS
OVER THEIR 'TIME-PERIODS.' EARLY HUMANITY KNEW THISJHAVING
BEEN TAUGHT BY THE TAURIAN SPACE PEOPLE. THEN THE CONSTELLA-
TIONS WERE POINTED OUT AND DRAWN INTO MANY PICTORIAL IMAGES.

"TODAY J THE CELESTIAL BELT HAS SOME. OF THE SAME IMAGES FIRST
SHOWN TO MANKIND BY THE TAURIANS IN YOUR PRESENT ZODIACAL
DEPICTIONS OF THIS EARTH TIME.

"EIDARIS HERE TO TAKE YOU FURTHER INTO THIS SUBJECT AS HE WAS


ONE OF EARTHMAN'S FIRST TAURIAN TEACHERS.

"THE STARS CAN REVEAL MUCH TO US. THANK YOU FOR LETTING ME
TALK WITH YOU. BLESSINGS TO ALL!
SHALEM

EIDAR SMILED AT US AND SAID HIS TALK WAS ENTITLED:

'HIDDEN INTERPRETATIONS OF THE ZQDIAC'

"WHEN THE MANSTREAM WAS IN ITS FIRST EGO YOUTH IN ROUND FOUR J
ONLY TEN CONSTELLATIONS WERE ACTIVE OVER THEIR LIFE-STREAM AND
EARTH. THE OTHER TWO J LIBRA AND SCORPIO J WERE NOT THEN NEEDED.
THESE LATTER TWO GOVERN 'GOOD AND EVIL.' THE ASPECTS OF GOOD
AND EVIL WERE NOT TO BE UNDERSTOOD BY YOUR FIRST EGO DIPS INTO
MATTER AS YOU WERE LIVING FROM 'INSTINCT'~ NOT FROM INTELLIGENCE
AT THAT TIME.

"SO IT WAS THAT ARIES J TAURUS J GEMINIJ CANCER J LEOJ VIRGO J


SAGITTARIUS J CAPRICORNJ AQUARIUS AND PISCES WERE THE TEN
CONSTELLATIONS GOVERNING AND SENDING ENERGIES TO EARTH AND
THE LIFE-FORMS UPON HER.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 352 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 6

IIAFTER THE TAURIAN SPACE PEOPLE LANDED ON YOUR PLANET) ONLY A


FEW OF YOUR MANSTREAM QUALIFIED TO KNOW OF THE MYSTICAL MEAN-
INGS ATTACHED TO THE CONSTELLATIONS LIBRA AND SCORPIO. AMONG
THESE EARTHLINGS WERE JESUS) CHRIST'S SOUL-MATE) AND THE SEVEN
LORDS AND SOME WHO ARE NOW YOUR HIGH AVATARS.

IIEVEN THE ZODIAC INSIGNIA-EMBLEMS SO COMMON TODAY ON EARTH


WERE SECRET TO THE FEW AND REMAINED SO FOR A LONG PERIOD OF
MATTER TIME. THEY WERE KNOWN ONLY WITHIN THE MAGI TEMPLES
WHICH THE TAURIANS HAD SET UP FOR THEMSELVES AND THE FEW
ELIGIBLE AMONG MEN OF EARTH.

liAs EARTHLINGS DEVELOPED UNDER TAURIAN TEACHINGS) LIBRA AND


SCORPIO WERE CONNECTED WITH CERTAIN OF THE CONSTELLATION TEN.
As EVIL ENTERED MANKIND THROUGH PERSONAL IGNORANCE .OF GOD'S LAWS)
THE BEINGS OF SCORPIO CONNECTED WITH VIRGO FORCES TO ENDEAVOR
TO ENLIGHTEN EARTHLINGS OF THEIR WRONG ACTIONS. As MANKIND
HEEDED NAUGHT) THE POWERS OF LIBRA) THE BALANCING SCALE) WAS
BROUGHT FORTH WITH ITS loGO BEINGS AND PUT IN SCORPIO'S PLACE
AND SCORPIO WAS INTERPOLATED INTO THE ZODIAC BELT. Now ARIES)
CANCER) LIBRA AND CAPRICORN SENT FORTH TO EARTH AND MANKIND
STRONG POWERS IN ANGLES OF FIERY) AIRY) EARTHY AND WATERY
FORCES.

IIIN MUCH LATER AGES OF EARTH) EZEKIEL WAS TO SEE A SYMBOL


DEPICTING THIS NEED AND THE CONSTELLATIONS WHICH HAVE CHARGE
OF EARTH AND MAN AS THEY INCARNATE AND TRAVEL UNIVERSE TOGETHER.

IITHIS SYMBOL IS SECRET AND SACRED TO THE MAGIAN ORDER) AND


WILL BE UNDERSTOOD BY ONLY THOSE INITIATED INTO ITS DEGREES.

"THESE LOGOI CONSTELLATIONS AND THEIR LORDS ALSO GOVERN THE


TRANSFORMATIONS OF EARTH AND THE MANSTREAM WHEN EXPERIENCING
IN AN INCARNATING ROUND.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 353 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 7
"EARTH HAS)AT THIS POINT IN HER MATTER TIME) GON"E THROUGH SEVEN
TRANSFORMATIONS. THE EIGHTH IS DUE SHORTLY. AFTER THE EIGHTH
OCCURS) THERE WILL BE BORN INTO MATTER A DISTINCTLY DIFFERENT
DEGREE OF SOULS. ALL WILL BE OF A HIGH EVOLVEMENT.

"IN EVERY ROUND) EARTH KNOWS FOUR QUARTER AGES. EACH AGE HOUR
EARTH KNOWS WILL BE TYPIFYING A NEW AND HIGHER "GROWTH AND
EVOLVEMENT FOR THE HUMANITY WHO HAVE KEPT UP AND THESE WILL
COME FORTH AGAIN AS GREATER BEINGS. ALWAYS AT THE BEGINNINGS
OF A NEW QUARTER) WILL COME FORTH THE GREAT LORDS OF EARTH AND
THEIR AVATAR SERVANTS.

"UPON LANDING ON EARTH) THE TAURIANS GUIDED ITS PEOPLES' 'EGO i


BEGINNINGS) AND CAUSED ALL SICKNESS AND SUFFERING TO BECOME
UNKNOWN AND EXTENDED THE EARTH LIFE AGE-SPAN. FORTUNATELY)
IN OUR HIGHER WISDOM) WE WERE ABLE TO SAVE MANY OF EARTH'S
PEOPLE AS THEY WILLINGLY ACCEPTED OUR FIRM DIRECTIONS.

"AT THAT FIRST VISIT) WE REMAINED ON EARTH FOR NINE HUNDRED


AND NINETY-NINE YEARS) COMING AND GOING TO OUR OTHER BASES.

"As EARTH MEN RESPONDED DURING THIS PERIOD OF TIME) WE MINGLED


IN MARRIAGE WITH THEM TO STRENGTHEN THE EARTH SEED. BECAUSE
OF OUR TAURIAN HEALTH) VITALITY AND GREATER SIZE OF FORM) EARTH-
LINGS LIKENED US TO THEIR BULL CATTLE) WHICH THEY ADMIRED FOR
THEIR ENDURANCE. HENCE) THEY NAMED US THE BULLS OF TAURUS.

"LATER IN EARTH YEARS) AND BELIEVING EARTH'S PEOPLE CAPABLE OF


NOW HANDLING THEMSELVES) THE REST OF OUR GOVERNING GROUP LEFT
THE PLANET. BUT CERTAIN OF THE MANSTREAM SEPARATED AWAY FROM
THE GOOD PRIESTS OF THE MAGI TEMPLES AND FELL BACK INTO PRIMI-
TIVE WAYS AND COMMITTED EVILS. As MORE AND MORE RETROGRADED)
THE LIFE-SPAN AGAIN SHORTENED AND ONLY OUR RETURN RESTORED
ORDER TO THE WORLD.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 354 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 8

"As THIS PRESENT HQUR OF EARTH'S TIME IS WHERE ALL ARE TO


ACCOMPLISH THEIR BASIC MIND DEVELOPMENTS AND
. - .COMPREHENSIONS
. .
J
WE MAY HAVE TO AGAIN RETURN FROM SPACE J UNLESS MANY MORE
PEOPLE AWAKE.

"IN GOD'S PLAN J NO INCARNATING CHILD OF GOD IN THE MANSTREAM


CAN SKIP THESE 'HOURS' NOR THE EXPERIENCES THEY....
HOLD.
...
NOR CAN '

ANY LEAVE THE WHEEL OF KARMA PREMATURELY


. . J . UNLESS
_...
THEY
. .
ARE BE-
YOND ACHIEVING. THEN . THESE SHALL BE SWITCHED
..
BY THE GREAT ONES
TO A LOWER UNIVERSE PLACE OF EXISTENCE.

"ALL OF US ARE DESTINED TO SUBSIST IN CERTAIN


. .PERIODS
. - .......
OF. . MATTER
TIME. ALL OF US WERE ONCE ONLY PURE SPIRITUAL ENTITIES. YET
TO BECOME GODS J WE WERE SENT BY OUR FATHER INTO UNIVERSE TO
LEARNJ UNDERSTAND J EXPERIENCE AND GROW. THIS WAS NQI A fALL.
IT WAS GOD'S PLAN! As WE EXPERIENCE OF GOOD AND EVIL J WE LEARN
THEREOF.

"EVENTUALLY J THE MAGIAN ORDER J GIVEN EARTH MEN BY THE TAURIAN


SPACE TEACHERS J BECAME KNOWN AS "THE WHITE BROTHERHOOD." ITS
MALE AND FEMALE MEMBERS WORE ONLY WHITE ROBES AND HOODS TO
SIGNIFY THEY HAD EMBRACED TRUTH AND REALITY AND PRACTICED THE
COSMIC LAWS.

"ON EARTH MANY CONFUSE THE DIFFERENT ASTRAL BROTHERHOODS AND


THEIR SEVEN LOWER PATHWAYS AS THE GENUINE 'WHITE BROTHERHOOD.'

"THE REAL 'WHITE BROTHERHOOD' EMBRACES THOSE MEMBERS OF THE


EIGHTH AND NINTH PATHWAY INITIATES ONLY.

"MANY PEOPLE ON EARTH STILL HOLD EXTRAORDINARY IDEAS ABOUT GODJ


COSMIC LAws AND THE ASTRAL AND SPIRIT REGIONSj IDEAS WHICH LIE
OUTSIDE OF COSMIC LAW. GOD IS A GOD OF LAw AND EVEN HE CANNOT
BYPASS OR GO OUTSIDE THE BOUNDARIES OF LAw's RULE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 355 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-FIVE PAGE 9

"THEREFORE) WE MUST fARN OUR MERITS FOR ADVANCEMENT. No OTHER


PERSON) EVEN CHRIST) CAN TAKE OUR PLACE IN THIS ACTION OR DO
THE JOB FOR US.

"IF GRAVITY AND ELECTRICITY HAVE TO OBEY LAW) SO DO ALL OF


MANKIND. BELOW) ABOVE) OUTWARD) UPWARD) DOWNWARD) SEEN AND
UNSEEN) THE FORCES OF LAW MUST WORK. AND LAw ABIDES ON EVERY
STRATUM OF THE UNIVERSE.

"No LONGER IS IT ENOUGH FOR OUR MANSTREAM JUST TO KNOW LAW


EXISTS. WE NOW MUST KNOW HOW TO COOPERATE WITHIN ITS ACTION.

"GOD BEING INSEPARABLE FROM HIS WORKS AND WE BEING INSEPARABLE


FROM GOD) LET US STOP SEEKING CHANGE FROM EXTERNAL SOURCES AND
REALIZE CHANGE AND BETTERMENT IS OUR ~ RESPONSIBILITY.

"SURELY BY NOW) EARTHLINGS SHOULD BE REACHING A STATE WHERE


EACH CAN GOVERN HIMSELF WITHOUT CALLING ON OTHERS OF THE COSMIC
LIFE-STREAM TO CONSTANTLY BE OVER US.

"You WHO ARE THE 'WAY SHOWERS' CAN POINT THE WAY TO THOSE
READY. BLESS YOU!

EIDAR (EEE-I-DAR)

As WE DRIFTED BACK TO MATTER) WE WERE HEARTENED IN KNOWING


THERE ARE MANY ALERT SOULS EVEN NOW SEEKING AND ENDEAVORING
TO TAKE SELF-RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEMSELVES AND EVEN EAGER IN
THE TASK. ALTHOUGH MATTER TIME MIGHT BE LIMITED) THESE GOD
CHILDREN WERE PREPARING TO BE READY.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 356 of 382
,
( "

_1_
. '- . -. ~

~:;~. - " ~

l-
"

TODAY I REJOICE IN THE FULLNESS OF GOD. I LIVE


IN THE UNLIMITED AND FULFILLING POWER OF THE
CHRIST-CONSCIOUSNESS WITHIN ME. I AM CONSCIOUS
,i
.~
j OF THE RESTORING POWER OF THE GOD WITHINJ LIFT-
ING MYSELF IN GOD'S LOVE TO WHERE I CAN SEE WHO
I REALLY AM.

TODAY I INVITE DIVINE WISDOM TO LIVE WITH ME.


I AM GRATEFUL FOR MY DAILY BREAD AND ALSO FOR
PERFECT PHYSICAL HEALTH AND PHILOSOPHY J FOR
MY BEAUTY OF SOUL. I AM WHOLE IN GODJ INTEGRATED
,
IN AND SUSTAINED BY THE DIVINE SPIRIT. . ~

THANK You FATHER!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 357 of 382
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 358 of 382
(

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 359 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX ROSE &BLUE LIGHTS
THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI

ROSE LESSON TWENTY-SIX

"THE FUTURE"

"WHERE THERE IS NO VISION THE PEOPLE PERISH: BUT HE THAT


KEEPETH THE LAW J HAPPY IS HE."
PROVERBS 29:18
THE ANCIENT STONE CASTLE GLOWED AND LITTLE CLUSTERS OF
LICHENS MADE EMERALD PATCHES. JUST THENJ MAcNEIL TOUCHED
MY HAND WITH HIS SOFT VELVET MUZZLE J AND GIVING A GLAD CRY
I STROKED HIS BEAUTIFUL HEAD.

MAcNEIL LED US INSIDE THE QUADRANGLE AND TO A FAR BUILDING.


ENTERING J WE WALKED DOWN A SHADOWY HALL AND INTO A LOVELY
ROOM OF ROSE AND GOLD.

SEATED ON A CREAM BROCADE SOFA WITH LAMP LIGHT UPON HER


RED BROWN HAIRJ ELEANOR AWAITED US. SHE WORE A PEONY PINK
DRESS WITH RUBIES AS HER JEWELRY. SAFFRON LAY ON HER LAP
IN A STATE OF DREAMY BLISS. LAZILY J THE FILMY SKIRT OF HER
DRESS MOVED AS SHE LEANED OVER TO GREET US.

LILY SAT DOWN WITH MAcNEIL AT HER FEET. THE DOG WATCHED
VIOLET AND ME EXPLORE. CYRUS PATTED HIS GLOSSY COAT J THEN
MOVED OVER TO TALK TO ELEANOR.

A BOWL OF FRESH STRAWBERRIES SENT OUT A TANTALIZING SCENT AS


WE PASSED A MAHOGANY TABLE. OUR FRIENDS CAME THEN IN GROUPS
AND SINGLES AND A HOLIDAY FEELING PERVADED THE ROOM. I SLID
OFF MY SLIPPERS AND TUCKED MY FEET UNDER ME ON ANOTHER SOFT
SOFA. HOWIE CAME AND SAT DOWN BY MY SIDE. SOFT MUSIC CHIMED
IN MY HEAD LIKE SINGING SPIRITS. I WAS SO HAPPY.

A TALL IMPOSING GENTLEMAN NOW ENTERED AND WAS GREETED WITH


MUCH ENTHUSIASM BY THE CASTLE FOLK.

~ REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 360 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 2

"IT'S JOCELYN J MESHA ROSE. You REMEMBER HIM!" IT TOOK ME


A MOMENT TO RECALL BUT J YES J I REMEMBERED JOCELYN; A FELLOW
'LONELY ONE'J WHOM I'D PARTNERED SOME MISSIONS WITH ON FAR
PLANETS. A WONDERFUL SOUL WHO HAD LED MY FALTERING STEPS
AND HEARTENED MY WANING SPIRITS ON MANY A PAST MISSION. WE
EMBRACED WARMLY J AND HE INFORMED ME HE HAD JUST RETURNED TO
THE CASTLE. How I ENVIED HIM.

"I'M WORKING UNDER EIDAR-NOW J " WAS HIS COMMENT AS THAT MASTER
ENTERED.

"WELLJ JOCELYNJ" SAID EIDAR "WHAT WOULD BE YOUR FIRST ADMONI-


TIONS TO MANKIND RIGHT NOW?"

WITHOUT HESITATION J JOCELYN ANSWERED: "I'D TELL THEM THEY


MAY BUILD THEIR FOUNDATIONS OF MIND AND ATTITUDE AS THEY CHOOSE J
EVEN FORGET ALL ABOUT TAKING RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEMSELVES I
BUT IF THEY DID THE WHOLE SUPERSTRUCTURE WILL FALL ABOUT THEM
IN THE END. THE ROCK WE REST UPON IS MIND AND WE RISE AND
FALL ACCORDING TO OUR WORK WITHIN MIND."

"AND HOW RIGHT YOU WOULD BEl DEAR BOY /' SAID EIDAR AS HE
GLANCED OVER OUR NUMBER OF EARTHLINGS AND ASTRAL FRIENDS.

"CHILDREN I IN OUR EARTH BEGINNINGS IN ROUND FOUR I WE DID


NOT POSSESS THE AWARENESS OF MENTAL CONSCIOUSNESS THAT WE
NOW OWN. THE MAJORITY ON EARTH TODAY HAVE ONLY BEGUN TO USE
THEIR INNATE ABILITIES FOR UNDERSTANDING. SOMETIMES THIS
CAUSES AN INDIVIDUAL TO FALL INTO A STATE OF HIGH EGO CONCEIT.
THIS CONCEIT BLINDS THEM TO THE NEED FOR ANY FURTHER MIND
DEVELOPING. As THEY TENACIOUSLY HANG ON TO THEIR OLD OPINIONS
AND BELIEFS J THEY CLAIM THEY ALREADY KNOW ALL THAT'S NECESSARY.
THIS HAS BECOME A'RATHER GENERAL ATTITUDE.

"THESE SOULS KNOW NOTHING OF THE GREAT COSMIC LAW OF CONTINU-


ITY I SO IN THEIR CONCEIT' THEY LAUGH AND DERIDE ANY NEW OR
DIFFERING IDEA ON ANY AND EVERY SUBJECT THEY MEET.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 361 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 3 .

"UNFORTUNATELY J UP UNTIL THE VERY END OF EARTH'S FOURTH


ROUND J THESE LIMITED SOULS WILL BE PRESENT AND ENDEAVORING
TO DISCOURAGE THE OPEN MINDS FROM MOVING INTO DEEP COMPRE-
HENSIONS.

"ON THE RIGHT SIDE ARE THE SEEKERS INTO WHOM THE AKASA RAyS
ARE FINDING THEIR WAY. THE AKASA INFLUENCES ARE COUPLED
WITH THE TWELVE ZODIAC FORCES. TOGETHER) THEY WORK TO OPEN
MiND CONNECTIONS.

"THE FORCES OF ARCTURUS J ORION AND THE PLEIADES ARE NOW


CALLING FORTH 'SOUND' UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE BEINGS OF
THE CONSTELLATION SCORPIO.

"IN EARLY DAYS AND NOW J WE TEACH HUMANITY TO REVERE THESE


ROSTS OF HEAVEN.

"THE HISTORY OF THE ZODIAC REACHES INTO IMMENSE ANTIQUITY


ON EARTH AND HAD ITS ORIGINS IN THE MAGI TEMPLES. THE OLD
TESTAMENT IS FULL OF ALLUSIONS TO CERTAIN SIGNS AND STARS AS
ARE ALL OTHER AGE OLD RELIGIOUS WORKS.

"THE NUMBER TWELVE IS A SACRED VIBRATION AND INVARIABLY ITS


ENERGIES COME OUT OF THE TWELVE CONSTELLATIONS AND THEIR
BEINGS. CHRIST CHOSE TWELVE APOSTLES TO SERVE UNDER HIMJ
KNOWING THAT EACH APOSTLE WAS A GOD CHILD UNDER THE SUPER-
VISORY CARE OF ONE OF THE ZODIACAL SIGNS.

"IN AN ANCIENT INSTRUMENT WE BROUGHT TO EARTH CALLED URIM


AND THUMIN J RESTED TWELVE SACRED JEWELS. THESE JEWELS
ATTRACTED CERTAIN STAR FORCES.

"XENOPHON NARRATES IN AN OLD'SCRIPT OF KING CYRUS OF PERSIAi


THAT AT THE MOMENT OF HIS DEATH HE GAVE ARDENT THANKS TO HEAVEN
FOR THE MAGI INSTRUCTION GIVEN HIM THROUGH THE PROPHET DANIEL
WHO IS A MAGIAN PRIEST OF THE WHITE BROTHERHOOD."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 362 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 4
WE ALL LOOKED AT'CYRUS AND SAW HIS SOUL RECALLING THIS MEMORY.

"KARMA ALSO TIES INTO THE STAR AND PLANET INFLUENCESJ~ CON-
TINUED EIDAR. "CHRIST RESTS UNDER THE GREAT HIDDEN CENTRAL
SUN INFLUENCES OF FOHAT. HIS SEVEN LORDS REST UNDER THE FORCES
. , ,

FROM THE SEVEN SONS OF FOHAT. THESE EIGHT HIGHEST ..STARS ..IN "

UNIVERSE GAVE THEM THEIR GLORIOUS INITIATION INTO THE HIGHEST


.
, " '

STATES THAT MANKIND CAN ACHIEVE AT IHl£ ~ OF OUR DEVELOPMENT.,

THERE WERE MURMERS AT THIS POINT FROM OUR LISTENING GROUP.


EIDAR SMILED UPON US.
, ,

"IT IS TIME NOW TO KNOW OF THE STAR OF THE MAGI. ALL THE REAL
INITIATED MEMBERS REST UNDER THIS STAR WHICH IS ALSO THE STAR
OF THE "WHITE BROTHERHOOD."

"Now HEAR THIS---AT THE MOMENT OF EARTH AND HUMANITY'S BIRTH


INTO ROUND FOUR IN MATTER; ALL THE OLDER PLANETS IN OUR SOLAR
SYSTEM WERE IN CONJUNCTION OF THE SIGN OF PISCES. AND IN THIS
CONSTELLATION PISCES LIES THE HIDDEN STAR OF THE MAGI. ITS
SIZE COULD ABSORB SEVENTY ORDINARY PLANET GLOBES AND ITS FORCES
MOVE THE WHOLE SOLAR SYSTEM AND THIS STAR'S DESTINY FORCES
ARE NOW OVER EVERY INDIVIDUAL INITIATED IN THE MAGIAN ORDER."

HOWIE AND I SQUEEZED EACH OTHERS HANDS AND SMILED AT ALL THE
OTHERS WHO HAD HAD THE INITIAL INITIATIONS.

"THIS SECRET MAGI STAR SHALL SHINE AGAIN OVER EARTH AND ITS
BEAMS SHALL FALL UPON THE SPOT WHERE LIES THE PHYSICAL REMAINS
OF KASPER J MELCHOIR AND BALTHAZAR. THESE LIE WITHIN THE FAMOUS
CATHEDRAL OF COLOGNE J GERMANY) TODAY. ITS APPEARANCE WILL HERALD
AN IMPORTANT EARTH EVENT.

"THEN WHEN THE RARE CONJUNCTION OF SATURNJ JUPITER AND MARS


OCCURS J IT WILL HAVE A SECRET SIGNIFICANCE FOR ALL MAGI MYSTICS
RESIDING ON EARTH."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 363 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 5

WE SHIVERED WITH THRILLSJ NOT EXACTLY UNDERSTANDING BUT


ANTICIPATING ANYWAY.

EIDAR LOOKED AROUND AND MURMERED. "You SHOULD KNOW OF MY


·HUMAN PEOPLE. WE ARE OLDER IN UNIVERSE TIME THAN THE HUMANS
OF EARTH.

"THE CONSTELLATION TAURUS BRED A SPECIAL STRAIN OF HUMANITY


. ON ITS INHABITED MATTER PLANETS. WE ARE KNOWN AS THE 'FIRST
ONES' OR THE 'PROPHETIC ONES', OUR FIRST INCARNATED PEOPLES
WERE THE PATRISTIC FATHERS AND MOTHERS OF THE SERPENT WISDOMS.
WE WERE DESTINED TO SPREAD THESE WISDOMS AND OUR SEED INTO
OTHER PLANETS OF UNIVERSE. WE WERE THE 'INTERPRETERS' OF GOD'S
DIVINE TRUTHS. THERE ARE OTHERS IN SPACE NOW J BUT WE WERE THE
FIRST TRAVELERS.

"EARTH MEN NAMED OUR HOME REGIONS THE 'GREAT CITIES OF GOD
WI SDOM' .

"IT WAS WE WHO INTRODUCED EARTH TO THE SYMBOLS OF THE SERPENT


OF WISDOM. MAN GAVE US THE SYMBOL OF "BULL" WHICH DENOTED TO
THEM OUR TERRESTRIAL STRENGTH AND ENERGY WHICH GENERATED OVER
THEIR OWN. THE SYMBOLS CAME FORTH AS REMINDERS TO ANCIENT
MANKIND WHO READ BY PICTORIAL MEANS AT THAT FIRST AGE. LATERJ
MAN MADE THEM SACRED.

"WE TAUGHT MAN THAT VIRGO ··AND ·DRAGONISJ THE G·ELESTIAL SERPENT J
TOGETHER HERALDS THE REBIRTH ON EARTH OF A WORLD SAVIOR.

"THE MAGI DANIELJ IN EARTH'S LATER TIME AGE J RENEWED AND


TAUGHT KING CYRUS AND HIS PEOPLE OF THE FOUR BEAUTIFUL STARS
WHO ACT AS GUARDIAN OVER THE FOUR CORNERS OF THE EARTH. ONE
IS "THE EYE OF THE BULL" IN TAURUS. THE "HEART OF THE SCORPIAN"
IN SCORPIO; THE "HEART OF THE LION" IN LEO AND THE "SOUTHERN
FISH" IN PISCES. ALL PERSONS WHO FIND ANY ONE OF THESE IN

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 364 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 6

THEIR HOROSCOPES WILL BE AT A SOLSTITIAL * POINT OF TIME IN


THEIR EXISTENCE; ESPECIALLY IF BORN WHEN A KALI-YUG EPOCH
STARTS." (* WHEN SUN FORCES ARE WEAKEST IN YOUR PATTERN.)

HOWIE INTERRUPTED EIDAR. "ROSE WANTS TO KNOW IF SOUL IS ALSO


INFLUENCED BY ASTRAL ZODIACAL INFLUENCES?"

"YES~SOUL IS CONNECTED UNDER THE SAME REFLECTED ZODIACAL SIGNS~


ROSE. THERE IS A RHYTHM SYMPATHY BETWEEN SOUL AND ALL OF THE
TWELVE COLOR CONSTELLATIONS OF THE ASTRAL REGIONS.

"ALL SEEKERS AND INITIATES KNEW THIS TRUTH IN THEIR LEMURIAN


AND ATLANTEAN INCARNATIONS. You ALSO UNDERSTOOD THAT THE
INDIVIDUAL REGIONS AND THEIR STARS AND PLANETS DO NOT SWING
TO THE SAME LOWER MATTER RHYTHMS AND THEIR LAWS.

"EVERY STAR OF THE LOGOI AND FLAME REGIONS HAS ITS OWN LEVEL
RHYTHMS. TIMOTHEOUS MENTIONED THIS IN LESSON 3 OF THIS SERIES.
REVIEW ITS CONTENTS."

VIOLET SAID SHE WAS PUZZLED ABOUT LOGOI AND FLAME BEINGS~
AND ANGELS BIRTH TIMES INTO UNIVERSE.

"WERE THEY ALREADY HERE WHEN WE WERE BORN NEW INTO UNIVERSE?"
VIOLET ASKED.

"No~ WE ALL CAME IN UPON THE GOD BREATH IN A FILE. BUT THE
LOGOI OF PURE SPIRIT REGIONS WAS BORN FOUR UNIVERSE AGES AGO~
BEFORE THIS PRESENT ONE AND THEY HAVE BEEN BACK INTO SPACE
EXPERIENCING THREE TIMES IN OTHER UNIVERSES~ SINCE THEIR FIRST
BIRTH TIME.

"THE FLAMES HAVE HAD THREE UNIVERSE EXPERIENCES. THE ANGELOI


HAVE HAD ONLY TWO AND WE HUMANS ARE IN OUR ~ FIRST UNIVERSE
EXPERIENCE AS EGO CHILDREN OF GOD THE ABSOLUTE."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 365 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 7
"WILL WE BE AS GREAT UNIVERSE GODS IN SOME FUTURE UNIVERSE AS
THE LOGOI ARE NOW?" INQUIRED LILY.

"YES~ LILY~ IF YOU KEEP UP YOUR PROGRESSION IN THE FUTURE AS


YOU HAVE IN THE PAST~ YOU STAND TO BECOME A CAPABLE FUTURE
GOD OVER MUCH LOWER UNIVERSE REGION LIFE~ WHEN THESE COME
FORTH IN FUTURE UNIVERSES OF GOD."

WE WERE ALL RATHER STUNNED AT THIS POSSIBILITY.

"THESE STAR LOGOI ARE CHILDREN OF GOD AS ARE WE. THEY~ TOO~
HAVE BEEN SUBORDINATE TO FATHER-MoTHER GOD AND THE LAWS. WE
ALL RISE FROM WITHIN THE ONE ETERNAL ABSOLUTE UNITY. THERE-
FORE~ ALL LIFE WITHIN UNIVERSE HAS COME FROM OUT OF THE
ABSOLUTE ETERNAL INTO THE COSMOS AND TIME."

"EIDAR~ I AM CONCERNED." SAID CYRUS. "I HAVE BEEN GIVEN THE


KEYS TO RE-ESTABLISH THE MAGI ORDER ON EARTH IN ITS 'OUTER
COURT' DEGREES. SUPPOSE IN ALL GOOD FAITH~ WE TOOK IN A MEMBER
WHO WAS MISREPRESENTING HIMSELF. WHO WOULD BE WRONG HERE?"

"THE MEMBER WOULD REAP THE KARMA~ FOR YOUR ORDERS ARE TO IM-
PRESS UPON EACH CANDIDATE THE SERIOUSNESS AND FAR REACHING
EFFECTS SUCH INITIATIONS WILL HAVE IN THE WHOLE SELF-PATTERN."

RELIEF SHOWED ON CYRUS' FACE.

"IN THE YEAR 3350 B.C.~ THE ALPHA DRACONIS STAR WAS EARTH'S
POLE STAR. EIGHTY-SEVEN THOUSAND YEARS BEFORE THAT DATE~ IT
WAS ALSO EARTH'S POLE STAR. AT EACH OF THESE TIMES~ CERTAIN
OF YOU WERE ON EARTH AND WERE INITIATES OF THE MAGI TEMPLES.
IT WAS THEN THAT CERTAIN SOULS RECEIVED THE PROMISE OF BEING
AMONG THOSE OF THIS PRESENT DAY TO CARRY ON THIS MAGI WORK."

THIS PROMISE SHOWED EXACTLY WHAT IS TRANSPIRING TODAY IN THE


PRESENT TRIANGLE AND SQUARE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 366 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 8

"IN A REMOTE TEMPLE OF INDIA AND A NORTHERN EGYPTIAN TEMPLE


ARE DEPICTED IN PAINTED DESCRIPTION THIS MESSAGE. IN BOTH
TEMPLES} IT SHOWS THE LION'S (LEO) TAIL STANDING UPON THE
HYDRA--HIS TAIL ALMOST STRAIGHT ~ AT AN ANGLE OF 45 DEGREES.
Now THIS POSITION AGREES WITH THE CONSTELLATION POSITIONS OF
3350 B.C. AND OF THE YEAR EIGHTY-SEVEN~THOUSAND BEFORE.

"AFTER THESE EARTH SHIFTS} THE DESIGNS SHOW THAT THE LION
(LEO) HAS HIS TAIL UP OVER HIS BACK AND ENDING AT THE SERPENT
DRAGONIS HEAD. THUS} IT IS INDICATING THAT ALL THE CONSTELLA-
TIONS THEN APPEARED TO EARTH MAN AS INVERTED TO THEIR FORMER
HEAVENLY POSITIONS.

"AFTER THE NEXT EARTH SHIFT} MANY RECORDS WILL BE RE-DISCOVERED


WHICH ARE NOW HIDDEN IN EARTH.

"IN THE EGYPTIAN TEMPLE} THERE IS DEPICTED ANOTHER ZODIACAL


REVELATION. THIS IS LEO JOINED TO VIRGO AND LIBRA. HERE THE
LION'S TAIL IS STILL OVER HIS BACK AND AT THE HYDRA'S HEAD SO
IT IS BEFORE THE EARTH SHIFT. IT READS OF THE MAGI REVELATIONS
COMING TO EARTH FROM THE SERPENT THROUGH A LEO (LION OF GOD)
WHO CONNECTS TO A VIRGO AND LIBRA (CYRUS & LILY) AND FORMS A
CHAIN. THEN TWO OTHER VIRGOS JOIN IN TO BRING IT ALL TO
FRUITION. A SECRET LIES HERE FOR ONLY INITIATED EYES TO READ.

"MANY IDEOGRAPHIC PAINTED PICTURES AND CARVED MESSAGES ARE IN


SIGHT ALL OVER EARTHj YET REMAIN SAFELY FROM PROFANE USAGE.

"CERTAIN REVELATIONS OF THESE SHALL COME FORTH IN THE RITES


OF THE MAGI TEMPLE DEGREES.

"AFTER THE SHIFT OF EARTH IN THE GOLDEN AGE WHEN FIRST MAITREYA
AND THEN CHRIST SHALL LEAD THE PEOPLE} MANY MORE SHALL REVEAL
IN THE TEMPLES."

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 367 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SIX PAGE 9

"Is IT TOO LATE FOR PRAYERS TO AVERT THIS EARTH SHIFT AND ITS
RESULTS?" WE INQUIRED.

"My CHILDREN~ ALTHOUGH ITS COMING HAS BEEN CAUSED BY MANKINDJ


IT IS NQI ~ SUBJECT TO HIS PUNY CONTROL. IT IS NOW SUBJECT
TO THE ASTRONOMICAL POWERS THAT MAN FOOLISHLY SET IN MOTION BY
HIS WRONG ATTITUDES OF MIND.

"As EACH OF YOU BECOMES REGENERATED IN CONSCIOUSNESS AND RE-


ALIGNED IN YOUR MIND POINTS J YOU WILL BE CONFIRMING TO THE
LAWS AND THE COSMIC ACTUALITIES AND THUS BE PLACING YOURSELVES
IN A VIBRATORY POSITION TO BE AMONG THOSE WHO WILL BE IN A
COMPARATIVELY SAFE POSITION IF YOU ARE STILL ON EARTH WHEN
THE SHIFT OCCURS.

"You WHO ARE ENDEAVORING WILL HAVE LITTLE TO WORRY YOU. You
ARE UNDER .Q.UR CARE."

ELEANOR SERVED A SORT OF PUNCH AND LITTLE CAKES NOW AS WE


EARTHLINGS AND OUR ASTRAL FRIENDS DISCUSSED EIDAR'S TALKJ
PRO AND CON.

IJ FOR ONE J WOULD WELCOME COMING OVER HERE WHEN MY TIME CAME.
MANY OTHERS OF MATTER AGREED.

SAILING HOMEWARD J WE KNEW THE DAYS AHEAD WOULD BE BUSY ONES


AND HAPPY ONES FOR OUR LABORS WOULD NOT BE IN VAIN.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 368 of 382
I
~i('
./

I DRAW MY INNER STRENGTH FROM GOD'S ETERNAL


PRESENCE. I MAINTAIN PEACE J HARMONY AND
SERENITY THROUGH THE CONSCIOUSNESS OF THE
GOD WITHIN. I AM ALWAYS CALM AND COLLECTED
AS I SERVE WHERE I CAN IN JOYFULNESS J
c. PATIENCE AND UNDERSTANDING.

I CONSCIOUSLY AFFIRM THAT LOVE AS LAW IS


THE GOVERNING PRINCIPLE OF MY LIFE. CONSCIOUS
OF THIS LAW J I ELIMINATE ALL ANXIETY J FEAR AND
DISTRUST. I LOOK THROUGH THE EYES OF LOVE TO
UNDERSTAND THE GOOD IN ALL HUMAN AFFAIRS.

AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 369 of 382
(

LA RC t-{ TRE E5.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 370 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 371 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN VIOLET &YELLOW LIGHl

THE SOUL GROUP OF THE MAGI


ROSE LESSON TWENTY-SEVEN

"THE PATH UPWARD"


. . ' .
"THERE WERE GIANTS IN THE EARTH .IN THOSE DAYS;
..
AND ALSO AFTER
.-
THAT WHEN THE SONS OF GOD CAME DOWN UNTO THE DAUGHTERS OF
MEN~ AND THEY BARE CHILDREN TO THEM~ THE SAME BECAME MIGHTY
MEN WHICH WERE OF OLD~ MEN OF RENOWN."
GENESIS 6:4

WE WERE SEATED UPON A HIGH KNOLL


. .
OVERLOOKING THE PASTURE " .'

LANDS. AT TIMES THE COWS WOULD LIFT LAZY HEADS AT OUR PRE-
SENCE~ THEN CONTINUE CONTENTEDLY TO FEED ON THE RICH GRASS.

-THE DAY WAS SOFT AND VIOLET PUSHED BACK THE BLOWING STRANDS
OF HAIR FROM HER FACE AND SMILED ACROSS AT THE THREE OF US.
IT WAS PLEASANT WAITING IN THE BRIGHT SUNSHINE FOR WE WERE
IN A ROUNDED WINDBREAK OF LARCH TREES AND AWAY FROM THE FULL
BRISKNESS OF THE CLEAR WIND COMING IN OVER THE DISTANT SEA.
LARKS WERE SINGING AND TINY ANIMAL LIFE WAS BUSY WITH THEIR
MYSTERIOUS AFFAIRS.

As SHEM APPROACHED~ TINY BUTTERFLIES HOVERED AROUND HIM. HE


TOLD US WE WERE TO MEET EVERYONE AT THE ABBY.

IT SEEMED MUCH LARGER AS WE APPROACHED THIS TIME. THE TWO


COLUMNED CARVED DOOR WITH ITS ELABORATE CARVINGS WAS OPEN
WAITING OUR ARRIVAL~ BUT SHEM PULLED THE CORD TO THE LARGE
BELL HANGING AT ITS SIDE. MELLOW TONES RANG OUT LOUD AND
CLEAR. WHILE WAITING~ WE EXAMINED THE FIGURES CARVED OVER
THE LINTEL. THEY WERE THE TWELVE ApOSTLES OF CHRIST.

ROWAN TREES MURMURED SOFTLY AS THE BREEZE PASSED THROUGH


THEIR LEAVES. TINY B~ES KISSED THE SPLENDOR OF THE FLOWERS
BLOOMING EVERYWHERE.

© REV. DR. DOROTHEA M. RAMSEY 1980

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 372 of 382
SERIES Two PAGE 2
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN

A SILENT ROBED FIGURE CAME QUICKLY DOWN THE LONG HALL AND
BROKE INTO DELIGHTED SMILES UPON SEEING CYRUS. WHEN THESE
TWO COSMIC FRIENDS HAD GREETED ONE ANOTHER J WE WERE WELCOMED.
THEN HE LED US TO A GREAT ASSEMBLY ROOM AT THE FAR END OF
THE ABBY BUILDING.

THE HALL WAS FULL OF PEOPLE J AND THE HUM OF MANY HAPPY VOICES
REVERBERATED FROM ITS SPACIOUS VAULTED CEILING. WE FOUND
SEATS NEXT TO ASTRAL FRIENDS WHO TOLD US THERE WAS TO BE A
CELEBRATION AFTER THE LECTURE LESSON TO END THE SECOND SERIES.

HERE AND THEREJ LILY CAUGHT SIGHT OF PERSONS FROM HER CLASS
AND I SAW FACES WHO HAD MET WITH ME IN MY CLASSES YEARS AGO
IN THE LIBRARY.

MASTER OMAR ASKED EVERYONE TO BE SEATED J THEN GURU LED US ALL


IN PRAYER. THE THREE MAGI THEN STARTED A CHANT WHICH WE ALL
JOINED. As IT DIED AWAY J ALL EYES WERE LED TO LOOK THROUGH THE
WIDE SIDE DOOR OF THE ASSEMBLY HALL INTO THE INNER COURTYARD.
THERE STOOD AN ANCIENT LOOKING MAN WITH A TALL STAFF IN HIS
HANDJ SINGING PRAISES TO OUR LORD CHRIST. ILAN KNELT AT HIS
FEET TO PERFORM THE CEREMONY OF WASHING THE 'HOLY ONE'S" FEET.
SILENTLY J ALL THE CONGREGATION WATCHED THIS LOVING SERVICE.
THEN OUR MASTERS AND THE THREE MAGI PRONAMED BEFORE THIS ANCIENT
ONE AND ESCORTED HIM UP TO THE FRONT PLATFORM.

SOLEMNLY J OMAR LED HIM BEFORE US. "BEHOLD J BEFORE YOU J


ZOROASTER J HE WHO INCARNATED EVER UNDER THIS SAME NAME; WHO
WAS THE FIRST MAN OF THE MAGI ORDER WHO LED ALL EARTHMEN TO
RIGHTEOUSNESS AND CAME BACK AGAIN AND AGAIN TO EARTH TO DO
LIKEWISE. ON HIS LAST LIFE ON EARTHJ HE FOUNDED THE "FIRE
TEMPLE OF AZAREKSH" AND SPENT THAT LIFETIME WRITING WORKS
UPON THE ANCIENT ORIGINAL MAGIAN TRUTHS. ARISE AND BOW DOWN
BEFORE THIS MAN LORD."

GLADLY ALL DID SOJ MANY WITH TEARS STREAMING DOWN THEIR FACES
AS WERE MINE.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 373 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 3

IN ONE OF THE SWEETEST VOICES I'VE EVER HEARD~ HE BADE US;


"ARISE DEAR CHILDREN."

As HE WAITED UNTIL WE ALL SETTLED~ I LOOKED UPON


..
HIS
_.
JOYOUS
.'

HUMBLENESS. HIS BARE FEET WERE IN SANDALS~


.
HIS ROBE
. ..
LONG AND
.

PLAIN~ HIS WHITE HAIR RICH AND FLOWING NATURALLY. HERE WERE
" " "

NO PRETENSIONS~ YET EVERY SOUL COULD FEEL AND RECOGNIZE HIS


GREATNESS.

"I HAVE BEEN ASKED TO GIVE YOU YOUR LAST LECTURE. I~ TOO J
AM ONE OF THE MAGI WHITE BROTHERHOOD AND HAVE GIVEN MANY
AGES TO ITS TRUTHS.

"DEAR CHILDREN J THERE IS A PATH UPWARD AND YOU CAN TRAVEL ITS
ROCKY ROAD FOR IT REMAINS OPEN TO THE WISE AND BRAVE. YET
ALL WHO WALK ITS TRAIL MUST RISE ABOVE THEIR OWN COMPLEXITIES
AND ERASE IGNORANCE.

"EACH MUST LEARN HOW TO FREE THEMSELVES FROM SUCCUMBING TO


PAIN AND SORROW AND IN ITS PLACE EMBRACE A HIGH J PURE EXPAN-
SION OF MIND." WHY DO I SAY THIS? BECAUSE
.
THIS. . .HIDDEN PATH . '

TAKES CONTROLLED INDEPENDENCE OF MIND AND A BROAD VERSATILITY


FOR THINKING OF IDEAS.

"THE PREJUDICIAL WILLIiQI FIND THEMSELVES "~PON THIS PATH UP-


WARDS. IT IS NOT A PATH FOR THE FEET OF THE COMMONPLACE MAN.
IT IS ONLY FOR THOSE ABLE TO RECOGNIZE MIND AS THE SUPREME
FACTOR OVER ALL SELF. THE SMALL MINDS AND THEIR TINY FLAMES
OF EGOTISM ARE BLIND TO TRUTH TODAY J FOR THE WINDS OF THEIR
FOOLISH DESIRES FAN ITS EGO FLAMES.

"UNLESS EGO CAN GROW BEYOND THESE PETTY PERSONAL FEELINGS


...
OF "

FALSE SUPERIORITY OF SELF-OPINIONS J MANKIND'S EYES WILL NOT


SEE TRUTH AS GOD DESIRES.

"THE PLAN OF REINCARNATION WAS GOD'S WISDOM FOR US. IT ENABLES

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 374 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 4
US TO EFFECT CHANGES AS WE GROW AND LEARN. WERE IT NOT FOR
THESE REPEATED OPPORTUNITIES~ WE WOULD REMAIN FOREVER UNKNOW-
ING~ INCOMPLETE AND CHOATIC.

"GOD PLACED US IN THE UNIVERSE SO ~ COULD FILL IN THE ORIGINAL


FRAME HE CREATED FOR US. THEN HE GAVE US A SPARK FROM HIS OWN
GREAT MIND~ THAT WE MIGHT ACCOMPLISH THE .TASK SET FOR US.

"OUR PURPOSE IS TO DEVELOP OUR MIND-SPARKS AND SHED LIGHT


UPON OUR UNDERSTANDINGS THAT OUR CREATIVE CONSCIOUSNESS MAY
EXPAND IN INTELLIGENCE. IT IS THROUGH MIND'S INTELLIGENCE
THAT WE UNITE THE PARTS OF OUR WHOLE SELF TOGETHER. AND UNITE
THESE AS ~~ WE MUST DO BEFORE WE CAN PASS ONWARD INTO OUR
FINAL PROMISED STATE OF GODHOOD.

"WE AR~ AT A DIFFICULT AREA OF OUR DEVELOPING RIGHT NOW. WE


ARE NOT QUITE EXPERT IN HANDLING THIS NEW EGO. WE ARE GROP-
ING YET FOR THE REAL MEANING OF OUR EARTHLY EXPERIENCES.

"ANOTHER FACTOR DISTURBS OUR MIND'S PROGRESS AND THAT IS OUR


MISUNDERSTANDINGS OF·KARMA~ THE LAw OF RETRIBUTION. So OFTEN
THESE SEEM UNFAIR~ YET THIS IS NOT THE CASE.

"THIS LAw OF KARMA AWAITS EVERY ENTITY AT THE THRESHOLD OF EACH


NEW INCARNATION INTO MATTER. ALL DO NOT COME INTO EARTH LIFE
EAGER TO TRY AGAIN. BUT MANY DO AND THESE USUALLY REACH A NEW
GOAL.

"THERE ARE NO DISCREPANCIES IN THE CHAIN OF OUR REINCARNATING;


ONLY GRADUATING EGO STATES OF INCOMPLETENESS. THEREFORE~
WHERE INCORRECT MISCONCEPTIONS ARE ALLOWED TO REMAIN AND STAND
IN THE MIND FILES~ A LATER INCARNATION ATTEMPT MUST BE MADE
TO CORRECT THESE.

"THE FORCES WITHIN GOD'S PLAN ARE OF AN INTENT FOR NEVER LEAV-
ING A SELF-WORK HALF DONE OR UNFINISHED. IF AN EGO IS NOT
RESOLVING SUFFICIENTLY OF ITS KARMIC EVENTS~ THESE WILL BECOME

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 375 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 5

VERY ACTIVE~ ENDEAVORING TO IMPRESS A NEED FOR YOUR ATTENTION.


BECAUSE OF PRESENT UNKNOWINGNESS~ MANY ARE BAFFLED OVER THEIR
PROBLEMS. THEY WORRY BUT DO LITTLE TO SOLVE THEM.

"MIND MUST UNFOLD AND FILL WITH EFFICIENT DATA. As THIS


OCCURS~ ALL OUR FORMS WILL GAIN IN HARMONIOUS BALANCE. SPIRIT
MIND MUST RECEIVE REALIZED TRUTHS FOR US TO USE AS INTUITIVE
IDEAS WHILE ON EARTH.

"I AM RECEIVING A QUESTION!" HE PAUSED: "No~ OUR MATTER DIPS


ARE NOT PRE-COUNTED. THEY COME ABOUT FROM OUR INDIVIDUAL
NECESSITIES AND NEEDS AND CONTINUE UNTIL WE ACCOMPLISH." HE
STOPPED AND LISTENED AGAIN.

"ANOTHER QUESTION REACHES MY MIND. WE DO HAVE BENEFICIENT


~ROTECTION FROM HIGHER DIVINITIES. THEY MONITOR OUR EARTH
PROGRESS OR ITS LACK.

"EARTH IS NOT THE LOWEST EVOLVEMENT OUR MANSTREAM CAN COME


INTO FOR EXPERIENCE. THERE ARE LOWER ATMOSPHERIC AND ENERGY
PLANETS. I'M SURE NONE OF YOU WOULD CHOOSE THEM FOR YOURSELVES~
HOWEVER.

"THERE WILL BE THOSE ON EARTH WHO WILL BE SWITCHED OVER TO


THESE LOWER VIBRATIONS~ FOR MANY ARE REFUSING TO GIVE UP THEIR
OLD WAYS AND OPINIONS. THE PRESENT POVERTY OF THEIR CLOSED
MINDS IS MAKING THEM UNFIT TO CONTINUE WITH EARTH AS SHE
MOVES INTO THE NEW AND HIGHER SPACE ENERGIES." ONCE AGAIN
HE PAUSED.

"I AM RECEIVING A QUESTION REGARDING OUR MANY PERSONALITIES.


No! WE DO NOT KEEP THE SAME EXACT PERSONALITY EVERY TIME WE
I~CARNATE~ WE DO HAVE 'LITTLEST EGO' ACCOMPANY OUR DIPS.
OUR PERSONALITIES DIFFER AND AS WE PROGRESS~ HOPEFULLY IT
IMPROVES. YET LET ME ADD MORE. THIS PERSONALITY IS NQI YOU.
UPON REACHING THESE ASTRAL REALMS AND WORKING ON YOUR EARTH

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 376 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 6

DATA~ IT FADES VERY GRADUALLY. You WILL HARDLY NOTICE THIS


BECAUSE YOU WILL BE MOVING INTO YOUR REAL SOUL PATTERN OF
SELF. DAILY~ YOU WILL REALIZE THE EARTH APPETITES~ FEELINGS~
TASTES AND AVERSIONS WERE OF THE BODY FORM~ NOT OF YOUR SOUL.

"THESE DESIRES WHICH REST IN SO MANY OF EARTH'S PEOPLE~ ON WHICH


THEY SET SUCH STORE~ HAVE ONLY A RELATIVE EXISTENCE IN THAT
ONE INCARNATION. NEXT TIME YOU PROBABLY WILL HAVE VERY DIFFER-
ENT APPETITES.,

"HUNGER AND THIRST ARE A RESPONSE STIMULI OF THE PHYSICAL FORM.


NONE OF THESE ARE INHERENT ELEMENTS OF SOUL. THEIR DESIRES
DO CARRY OVER~ BUT IF MIND CAN REDIRECT ITS THINKING~ THEY
SOON DISAPPEAR." HE SHUT HIS EYES.

"I AM RECEIVING A QUESTION ABOUT OUR SPIRIT FORM. THE SPIRIT


FORM AND ITS PROGRESS DEPEND ON SOUL AND PHYSICAL'S ABILITY
TO PROGRESS. IF EARTH'S LITTLEST EGO GAINS WORKABLE IDEAS
FOR SOUL~ SO THAT SOUL CAN CONNECT FACTS INTO CLEAR AND HAR-
MONIOUS MEANINGS~ THEN SPIRIT WILL RECEIVE THE CONCLUDED
CORRECT IDEAS AND THUS ADD TO ITS FUNDS. WHEN FEW OR NO
REALITIES OR TRUTHS ARE GATHERED~ SPIRIT DOES NOT PROGRESS
OR GROW. BECAUSE SPIRIT FOLLOWS A PARALLEL WITH THAT OF OUR
PHYSICAL EGO PROGRESS." HE WAITED A MOMENT.

"SOMEONE IS SENDING A THOUGHT ASKING ABOUT KARMA. THE LAw


OF RETRIBUTION IS KARMA. THIS LAW IS ETERNAL
. . AND IMMUTABLE
IN UNIVERSE. WHILE IT ACTS AS A PERSONAL LAW IN OUR AFFAIRS~
IT IS ALSO A COSMIC PRESENT LAW GOVERNING ALL THE LIFE-FORMS'
PATTERNS.

"To HANDLE KARMA~ WE NEED KNOWLEDGE OF HOW TO DIRECT IT INTO


CONSTRUCTIVE CREATIONS. WE ARE ALREADY A GOD PATTERN TO
WHICH WE NOW SELF-PRODUCE AND SELF-RENOVATE. GOD SAW TO
THAT FOR US. WE DO THESE ACTIONS IN MATTER AND DURING (KALPAS)
TIME~ CYCLES OR INCARNATIONS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 377 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 7

"IN EVERY INCARNATION~ THER~ IS ALWAYS .A~ERSO~~L.~~~~E~SION


OF EVENTS. THESE ARE FOR MAN TO CORRELATE THEIR ACTIONS AND
TO MATURE WITHIN THEIR EXPERIENCES.
• • • " 0' •• ' • • •

"THE LORDS OF KARMA CHOSE THESE EVENTS


..
AND YOUR
. . ... .. . NEW
.. -
'PERSONALITY(
_. - - .
ITS FACETS CONNECT THESE EVENT. FRAGMENTS
..
WHICH
.... -... .
.
YOU
~
ARE CALLED
UPON TO WORK THROUGH AND RESOLVE AND HARMONIZE.
. .' . -' ,- ..
"CERTAIN
. .
LOGOI~ FLAME LORDS AND ANGELOI ARE ASSIGNED
.,
. "
TO OVER-
...... - . . . . ,

SHADOW THE EARTH INCARNATES. THESE LORDS WILL POSSESS NECESS-


ARY AIDS YOU NEED FOR THAT PURPOSE .
. . - .... ,_ . . . -' . , ..

"THE CLOSER YOUR UNION WITH THESE HIGHER ONES~ THE MORE
SUCCESSFUL WI~L BE YOUR EARTH ~IFE; You ARE.~ ~F~~~ ~~ENT~
WHEN IN MATTER~
.
YET YOU CANNOT AVOID NOR. ESCAPE YOUR
.. _ . . . . _ ...
KARMIC
. '

DESTINY OUTLINE. You CAN MOVE IT AROUND FOR IMPROVEMENT AND


BETTERMENT~ HOWEVER~ BY YOUR PERSONAL CHOICES.

"WHILE THE STAR FORCES ARE ENDEAVORING TO H~~P.~~~ .. THEY.~AN­


NOT PREVENT US- FROM DECIDING UPON A WRONG .DECISION.
. .. . . ONLY
CORRECT MIND IDEAS CAN DECIDE IN A TRUE MANNER.
.. _ .. WHATEVER
OUR CHOICE~ THE STAR FORCES REINFORCE IT AND BRING IT FORTH.
. . .

"EVERYTHING IN UNIVERSE MOVES IN A CYCLE ACTION. EARTH REVOL-


VES AROUND . THE SUN AND COMPLETES A CIRCLE. AT THE.. .SAME TIME~
EARTH REVOLVES ON HER AXIS EVERY TWENTY-FOUR _..
HOURS.
.
HERE WE
........ .

SEE A LARGER ORBIT AND A MINOR CYCLING. THEN DURING THESE


REVOLUTIONS~ WE ARE BUSY EXPANDING AND SPIRALING OUR INTELLECTS

FOR GREATER CONSCIOUSNESS~ WHILE WE ARE ON OUR ~YC~E .~OURNEY


THROUGH ALL THREE UNIVERSE REGIONS. . ,.-IN GOD'S PLAN~ THE CYCL-
............... ...,.... - ..

INGS SHOULD BE A TENDENCY FOR.A HIGHER ANn WIDER SWING EACH


TIME; IF WE ARE TO OBEY THE COSMIC LAW.

"TRULY~ WE ARE OUR OWN SAVIORS OR OUR OWN DESTROYERS.


. . . .
THE
GREAT HIERARCHIES WHO HAVE GUIDED US SO FAR.. CAN
..... ONLY. . PRESENT
TRUTH FOR OUR PERUSAL. ONLY WE CAN FULLY ~OURSELVES TO
RECEIVE THESE TRUTHS.

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 378 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 8

"IN OUR ANCIENT FIRST DAYS" OUR CYCLES,M~ANT,~ORE,,"fH!,~ A


SUCCESSION OF EARTH EVENTS AND PERIODICAL SPACE ... TRAVEL
.. .. ...
CHANGES.
. .

MAN THEN WAS CLOSE TO THE TAURIANS AND ACCEPTED THEIR TAUGHT
EXPER I ENCES WH I CH. HELPED SOUL AND Sp I RIT TO, GROW' .' THEY KNEW
- ........ ,,',',.

THAT ASTROLOGICAL MOTIONS CARRY ON INTO ASTRAL .. REGIONS. THEY


_.,

NEVER DOUBTED THE LAw OF KARMIC CONTINUITY. .... ..,THEY.. KNEW . ITS
RULES THROUGH THEIR MIND'S UNDERSTANDINGS" AND KNEW
-. . . . . .
HOW IMPORT-
' .'

ANT MIND IS TO THE WHOLE SELF AS A DIVINE REGULATOR.


. . ..
"THE HEAVENS PROPHESY AND REVEAL. THE STAR ..FORCES
. ..
LEAD.
....
MANY ,.'

MILLION RECORDS ON EARTH REVEAL THAT CONJUNCTIONS


. . _.'
OF CERTAIN
... . '"

CONSTELLATIONS PRODUCE IMPORTANT EVENTS ON EARTH'S SURFACE.


SO WHY DOUBT THEY CAN INFLUENCE MANKIND?

"IT WAS AFTER A SIMPLE ACQUAINTANCE WITH THE. . CORRECT_. MATHEMATI-


~. .. ... . ...

CAL COMPUTATIONS THAT THE TAURIANS HAD TAUGHT- OUR MAGI ..... MEMBERS;
.'

THAT THE THREE" KASPER" MELCHOIR AND BALTHAZAR FORETOLD OF .


JESUS BIRTH ON EARTH.

"ALL THE PRESENT DAY EARTH OCCULT MYSTERIES ARE. BUT INFLUENCES
. "

FROM THE ZODIAC CONSTELLATIONS AND THEIR STARS.


,-
YOUR MODERN ,

ASTROLOGY IS A FAR CRY FROM THAT THE TAURIANS TAUGHT


. _.'
US. IT
DOES PARALLEL SOME" BUT MISLEADS AS IT USES THE PLANET EARTH
AS THE CENTER OF ITS WHEEL. THIS SOLAR SUN IS OUR CENTER FOR
HE IS OUR LOGO HEAD. THEREFORE" YOUR MASTERS AND WE OF THE
WHITE BROTHERHOOD ALSO COMPUTE THE STAR MESSAGES FROM THE SOL
CENTER."

GURU AROSE AND WHISPERED SOMETHING TO ZOROASTER.


, ,

"You KNOW AN EARTH CHANGE LIES IN THE FUTURE; You MAY NOT BE
AWARE THAT UPON EARTH RESTS A SACRED SECTION OF IMPERISHABLE
LAND WHICH IS NEVER AFFECTED BY THESE CATASTROPHIC EVENTS.
IT IS A SMALL PLATE OF LAND WHICH WAS THE CRADLE OF THE VERY
FIRST MAN-LIFE AND WILL BE THE LAST RESTING PLACE OF --THE FINAL
DIVINE MEN" THE AVATARS AT PLANET'S CLOSE. I'M FORBIDDEN TO

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 379 of 382
SERIES Two
LESSON TWENTy-SEVEN PAGE 9

SAY MUCH ABOUT THIS SACRED LAND. IT IS A CHOSEN SPOT) A


MYSTERIOUS SANCTUARY SELDOM VISITED BY THE MAJORITY OF
EARTH PEOPLES OR OF INTEREST TO MOST. HERE TIME SLUMBERS
SLOWLY AND NEITHER SUN NOR SHADOW EFFECT ITS SPARSE INHABI-
TANTS FOR THEY LIVE WITHIN THE HIGH REACHES OF THEIR MINDS.
YET NOT ONE SINGLE THING OCCURS OVER EARTH THAT IS NOT KNOWN
TO THEM.

"I TOOK MY ORIGINAL RECORDS OF THE ANCIENT MAGI HISTORY AND


ITS SACRED WORKS TO THEM BEFORE MY LAST DEATH ON EARTH.
THEREFORE) WHEN THE LIBRARY OF ALEXANDRIA WAS DESTROYED) ONLY
COPIES WERE BURNED. THE ORIGINAL WAS SAVED. KNOW THAT FIRE
WAS THE AKASA RAYS WE FIRST WORSHIPPED AND THE BELOVED 'PRIESTS
OF LIGHT' STILL PROTECT ALL TRUTH TODAY. TRUTH SHALL LIVE ON
UNTIL THE END DAY OF EARTH IN ROUND FOUR.

"FEAR NOT) a MAN. I) ZOROASTER) SPEAK YE TRUTH."

THERE WAS REVERANT SILENCE AS HE JOINED THOSE ON THE PLATFORM.


OMAR BID US ARISE AND GO TO THE REFECTORY WHERE REFRESHMENTS
WOULD BE SERVED. WE MADE OUR SLOW WAY) STOPPING TO TALK AND
EXCHANGE GREETINGS.

THE TABLES IN THE LARGE REFECTORY WERE BEAUTIFUL WITH COLOR-


FUL PILES OF FRUITS. BOWLS OF JUICES AND MANY LITTLE HONEY
CAKES TOPPED IN GLAZED NUTS.

WE COULD ENJOY THIS SERIES END PARTY KNOWING IT WAS NOT THE
END OF OUR RETURNING HERE. LATER) WAFTING OUR WAY HOMEWARD
TO EARTH) WE BASKED IN THE KNOWLEDGE WE HAD CARRIED OUT OUR
TASK.

ROSE

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 380 of 382
.. ,....
·-;~E~· ~~.'
..
::f~/··:;,~·> ,
I OPEN MY HEART AND MI ND TO GOD'S PRESENCE. I
~11i1r:] SEE BEAUTY AND TRUTH IN ALL CREATION. I FOLLOW
.~Ji;~f,·:"~ IN THE FOOTSTEPS OF THE SOUL GROUP MASTERS WHO
HAVE LED THE WAY TO THE ANCIENT WISDOMS. I AM
CONSCIOUS OF GOD'S GUIDANCE THIS DAY J AND I
LISTEN ATTENTIVELY TO EVERY INDICATION OF HIS . ~

.~

WORD FOR ME.


I
r
>:<.:
".. " ,-
,'~
.2'·1 I ACCEPT THE ETERNAL GIFTS OF GOD AND EXALT IN
:J:t
!;'": ."
'*
,~~ HIS ABUNDANCE. WHATEVER LIFE BRINGS MEJ IN
.' ... '''.I
1 THANKFULNESS I HUMBLY ACCEPT THESE GIFTS OF
LIVINGj TO LOVE J TO HOPE J TO LIVE HAPPILY IN
{,
.
PERFECT PEACE AND HARMONY •
AND So IT Is!

Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 381 of 382
Soul Group of the Magi Series Two, 27 Lessons, Copyright © 1980 Rev Dr. D M Ramsey Page 382 of 382

You might also like